Update Czech translation from Tx

author: Yuri Chornoivan <yurchor@ukr.net> 2015-02-08 13:40:34 +0200
committer: Yuri Chornoivan <yurchor@ukr.net> 2015-02-08 13:40:34 +0200
commit: a85470f894217d2a0ef0db0a614929668967519f (patch)
tree: 31b6fc06e3bd1d2e0c5a549402385901abf4c8b6 /docs
parent: 1f84f711a4cd47bd378f824770477825975f5fbc (diff)
download: tools-a85470f894217d2a0ef0db0a614929668967519f.tar
tools-a85470f894217d2a0ef0db0a614929668967519f.tar.gz
tools-a85470f894217d2a0ef0db0a614929668967519f.tar.bz2
tools-a85470f894217d2a0ef0db0a614929668967519f.tar.xz
tools-a85470f894217d2a0ef0db0a614929668967519f.zip
110 files changed, 20190 insertions, 731 deletions
diff --git a/docs/installer/cs.po b/docs/installer/cs.po
index 1bf02cd7..8b8d0582 100644
--- a/docs/installer/cs.po
+++ b/docs/installer/cs.po
@@ -1,24 +1,24 @@
 # SOME DESCRIPTIVE TITLE
 # Copyright (C) YEAR Mageia
 # This file is distributed under the same license as the Mageia Installer Help package.
-#
+# 
 # Translators:
 # Jiří Vírava <appukonrad@gmail.com>, 2013-2014
 # Jiří Vírava <appukonrad@gmail.com>, 2013
 # VlciStopa <vlcistopa.l@seznam.cz>, 2014
+# VlciStopa <vlcistopa.l@seznam.cz>, 2014
 msgid ""
 msgstr ""
 "Project-Id-Version: Mageia\n"
 "Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: doc-discuss@ml.mageia.org\n"
-"POT-Creation-Date: 2015-01-05 13:46+0200\n"
-"PO-Revision-Date: 2014-08-22 06:30+0000\n"
-"Last-Translator: Jiří Vírava <appukonrad@gmail.com>\n"
-"Language-Team: Czech (http://www.transifex.com/projects/p/mageia/language/"
-"cs/)\n"
-"Language: cs\n"
+"POT-Creation-Date: 2015-01-28 18:19+0200\n"
+"PO-Revision-Date: 2015-02-07 20:11+0000\n"
+"Last-Translator: Yuri Chornoivan <yurchor@ukr.net>\n"
+"Language-Team: Czech (http://www.transifex.com/projects/p/mageia/language/cs/)\n"
 "MIME-Version: 1.0\n"
 "Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n"
 "Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n"
+"Language: cs\n"
 "Plural-Forms: nplurals=3; plural=(n==1) ? 0 : (n>=2 && n<=4) ? 1 : 2;\n"
 
 #. type: Content of: <section><info><title>
@@ -29,11 +29,9 @@ msgstr "Licence a Poznámky k vydání"
 #. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject>
 #: en/acceptLicense.xml:36
 msgid ""
-"<imageobject> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"dx2-license.png\" format="
-"\"PNG\" revision=\"1\" xml:id=\"acceptLicense-im1\"/> </imageobject>"
-msgstr ""
-"<imageobject> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"dx2-license.png\" format="
-"\"PNG\" revision=\"1\" xml:id=\"acceptLicense-im1\"/> </imageobject>"
+"<imageobject> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"dx2-license.png\" "
+"format=\"PNG\" revision=\"1\" xml:id=\"acceptLicense-im1\"/> </imageobject>"
+msgstr "<imageobject> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"dx2-license.png\" format=\"PNG\" revision=\"1\" xml:id=\"acceptLicense-im1\"/> </imageobject>"
 
 #. type: Content of: <section><section><info><title>
 #: en/acceptLicense.xml:45
@@ -43,40 +41,31 @@ msgstr "Licenční ujednání"
 #. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
 #: en/acceptLicense.xml:48
 msgid ""
-"Before installing <application>Mageia</application>, please read the license "
-"terms and conditions carefully."
-msgstr ""
-"Před instalací <application>Magei</application>, si pečlivě přečtěte "
-"licenční podmínky a ustanovení."
+"Before installing <application>Mageia</application>, please read the license"
+" terms and conditions carefully."
+msgstr "Před instalací <application>Magei</application>, si pečlivě přečtěte licenční podmínky a ustanovení."
 
 #. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
 #: en/acceptLicense.xml:51
 msgid ""
-"These terms and conditions apply to the entire <application>Mageia</"
-"application> distribution and must be accepted before you can continue."
-msgstr ""
-"Tyto podmínky a ujednání se vztahují na celou distribuci "
-"<application>Mageia</application>, dříve než budete moci pokračovat, musí "
-"být přijaty."
+"These terms and conditions apply to the entire "
+"<application>Mageia</application> distribution and must be accepted before "
+"you can continue."
+msgstr "Tyto podmínky a ujednání se vztahují na celou distribuci <application>Mageia</application>, dříve než budete moci pokračovat, musí být přijaty."
 
 #. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
 #: en/acceptLicense.xml:55
 msgid ""
 "To accept, simply select <guilabel>Accept</guilabel> and then click on "
 "<guibutton>Next</guibutton>."
-msgstr ""
-"Chcete-li je přijmout, jednoduše vyberte <guilabel>Přijmout</guilabel> a "
-"poté klikněte na <guibutton>Další</guibutton>."
+msgstr "Chcete-li je přijmout, jednoduše vyberte <guilabel>Přijmout</guilabel> a poté klikněte na <guibutton>Další</guibutton>."
 
 #. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
 #: en/acceptLicense.xml:58
 msgid ""
-"If you decide not to accept these conditions, then we thank you for looking. "
-"Clicking <guibutton>Quit</guibutton> will reboot your computer."
-msgstr ""
-"Pokud se rozhodnete nepřijmout tyto podmínky, pak vám děkujeme za "
-"nahlédnutí. Kliknutím na <guibutton>Ukončit</guibutton> se restartuje "
-"počítač."
+"If you decide not to accept these conditions, then we thank you for looking."
+" Clicking <guibutton>Quit</guibutton> will reboot your computer."
+msgstr "Pokud se rozhodnete nepřijmout tyto podmínky, pak vám děkujeme za nahlédnutí. Kliknutím na <guibutton>Ukončit</guibutton> se restartuje počítač."
 
 #. type: Content of: <section><section><info><title>
 #: en/acceptLicense.xml:68
@@ -88,9 +77,7 @@ msgstr "Poznámky k vydání"
 msgid ""
 "To see what's new in this release of <application>Mageia</application>, "
 "click on the <guibutton>Release Notes</guibutton> button."
-msgstr ""
-"Chcete-li zjistit, co je nového v této verzi <application>Mageia</"
-"application>, klikněte na tlačítko <guibutton>Poznámky k vydání </guibutton>."
+msgstr "Chcete-li zjistit, co je nového v této verzi <application>Mageia</application>, klikněte na tlačítko <guibutton>Poznámky k vydání </guibutton>."
 
 #. type: Attribute 'xml:lang' of: <section>
 #: en/add_supplemental_media.xml:2 en/DrakX-cover.xml:2 en/DrakX.xml:1
@@ -103,32 +90,27 @@ msgstr "cs"
 msgid "Media Selection (Configure Supplemental Installation Media)"
 msgstr "Výběr zdroje (Nastavení doplňkových instalačních zdojů)"
 
-#.  papoteur 2013-04-13  - created 
-#.  marja 2013-04-16 added screenshot and expanded title (because is was the same as for media_selection 
-#.  marja 2013-04-16 s/a optical/an optcal/ s/support/disc/ s/or or/or/ s/at/during/ as suggested by Tristan Campbell 
+#.  papoteur 2013-04-13  - created
+#.  marja 2013-04-16 added screenshot and expanded title (because is was the
+#. same as for media_selection
+#.  marja 2013-04-16 s/a optical/an optcal/ s/support/disc/ s/or or/or/
+#. s/at/during/ as suggested by Tristan Campbell
 #. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject>
 #: en/add_supplemental_media.xml:18
 msgid ""
-"<imageobject> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"dx2-"
-"add_supplemental_media.png\" format=\"PNG\" revision=\"1\" xml:id=\"dx2-"
-"add_supplemental_media-im1\"/> </imageobject>"
-msgstr ""
-"<imageobject> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"dx2-"
-"add_supplemental_media.png\" format=\"PNG\" revision=\"1\" xml:id=\"dx2-"
-"add_supplemental_media-im1\"/> </imageobject>"
+"<imageobject> <imagedata align=\"center\" "
+"fileref=\"dx2-add_supplemental_media.png\" format=\"PNG\" revision=\"1\" "
+"xml:id=\"dx2-add_supplemental_media-im1\"/> </imageobject>"
+msgstr "<imageobject> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"dx2-add_supplemental_media.png\" format=\"PNG\" revision=\"1\" xml:id=\"dx2-add_supplemental_media-im1\"/> </imageobject>"
 
 #. type: Content of: <section><para>
 #: en/add_supplemental_media.xml:24
 msgid ""
 "This screen gives you the list of already recognized repositories. You can "
-"add other sources for packages, like an optical disc or a remote source. The "
-"source selection determines which packages will be available for selection "
+"add other sources for packages, like an optical disc or a remote source. The"
+" source selection determines which packages will be available for selection "
 "during the next steps."
-msgstr ""
-"Tato obrazovka vám dává seznam již rozeznaných úložišť. Můžete přidat další "
-"zdroje balíčků, jako je optický disk nebo vzdálené zdroje. Výběr zdroje "
-"určuje, ten který bude dostupný v průběhu následujících kroků pro výběr "
-"balíčků."
+msgstr "Tato obrazovka vám dává seznam již rozeznaných úložišť. Můžete přidat další zdroje balíčků, jako je optický disk nebo vzdálené zdroje. Výběr zdroje určuje, ten který bude dostupný v průběhu následujících kroků pro výběr balíčků."
 
 #. type: Content of: <section><para>
 #: en/add_supplemental_media.xml:29
@@ -148,40 +130,38 @@ msgid ""
 "Mageia, like the Nonfree , the Tainted repositories and the Updates. With "
 "the URL, you can designate a specific repository or your own NFS "
 "installation."
-msgstr ""
-"Výbrat zrcadlo nebo zadat adresu URL (první vstup). Výběrem některého ze "
-"zrcadel, budete mít přístup k nabídkám všech úložišť spravovaných Mageia, "
-"jako je Nonfree, Tainted a také k aktualizacím. Pomocí URL, můžete určit "
-"konkrétní úložiště nebo vlastní instalaci NFS."
+msgstr "Výbrat zrcadlo nebo zadat adresu URL (první vstup). Výběrem některého ze zrcadel, budete mít přístup k nabídkám všech úložišť spravovaných Mageia, jako je Nonfree, Tainted a také k aktualizacím. Pomocí URL, můžete určit konkrétní úložiště nebo vlastní instalaci NFS."
 
 #. type: Content of: <section><info><title>
 #: en/addUser.xml:4
 msgid "User and Superuser Management"
 msgstr "Správa uživatele  a supruživatele"
 
-#.  Started by marja,using Led43's text, on 2012 03 27 
-#.  NEEDS TO BE REVIEWED! 
-#.  SimonNZG 2012-04-03 has taken a look but needs to come back 
-#.  removed para xml:id's, finished the page using Led43's text in the wiki, but
-#.        changed his text about the Advanced User Managment screen (the only thing 
-#.        about guest account there, is the box you can tick or untick to enable or 
-#.        disable it, the rest is about the normal user you're adding in the previous
+#.  Started by marja,using Led43's text, on 2012 03 27
+#.  NEEDS TO BE REVIEWED!
+#.  SimonNZG 2012-04-03 has taken a look but needs to come back
+#.  removed para xml:id's, finished the page using Led43's text in the wiki,
+#. but
+#.        changed his text about the Advanced User Managment screen (the only
+#. thing
+#.        about guest account there, is the box you can tick or untick to
+#. enable or
+#.        disable it, the rest is about the normal user you're adding in the
+#. previous
 #.        screen), marja, 20120409
-#.  barjac 2012-04-13 moved explanation of xguest lower down. I don't understand
-#.        "rbash" in the xguest warning - is that correct? 
-#.  JohnR 2012-04-19 Language proofreading  
-#.  marja 2012-04-24 Added screenshot 
-#.  marja 2013-04-26 added new note 
+#.  barjac 2012-04-13 moved explanation of xguest lower down. I don't
+#. understand
+#.        "rbash" in the xguest warning - is that correct?
+#.  JohnR 2012-04-19 Language proofreading
+#.  marja 2012-04-24 Added screenshot
+#.  marja 2013-04-26 added new note
 #. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject>
 #: en/addUser.xml:27
 msgid ""
 "<imageobject> <imagedata revision=\"1\" fileref=\"dx2-setRootPassword.png\" "
 "format=\"PNG\" align=\"center\" xml:id=\"setRootPassword-im1\"></imagedata> "
 "</imageobject>"
-msgstr ""
-"<imageobject> <imagedata revision=\"1\" fileref=\"dx2-setRootPassword.png\" "
-"format=\"PNG\" align=\"center\" xml:id=\"setRootPassword-im1\"></imagedata> "
-"</imageobject>"
+msgstr "<imageobject> <imagedata revision=\"1\" fileref=\"dx2-setRootPassword.png\" format=\"PNG\" align=\"center\" xml:id=\"setRootPassword-im1\"></imagedata> </imageobject>"
 
 #. type: Content of: <section><section><info><title>
 #: en/addUser.xml:34
@@ -193,8 +173,8 @@ msgstr "Nastavení hesla správce (uživetele root):"
 msgid ""
 "It is advisable for all <application>Mageia</application> installations to "
 "set a superuser or administrator's password, usually called the "
-"<emphasis>root password</emphasis> in Linux. As you type a password into the "
-"top box the colour of its shield will change from red to yellow to green "
+"<emphasis>root password</emphasis> in Linux. As you type a password into the"
+" top box the colour of its shield will change from red to yellow to green "
 "depending on the strength of the password. A green shield shows you are "
 "using a strong password. You need to repeat the same password in the box "
 "just below the first password box, this checks that you have not mistyped "
@@ -206,9 +186,7 @@ msgstr ""
 msgid ""
 "All passwords are case sensitive, it is best to use a mixture of letters "
 "(upper and lower case), numbers and other characters in a password."
-msgstr ""
-"Všechna hesla jsou závislá na velikosti písmen; nejlepší je použít kombinaci "
-"písmen (velkých a malých), čísel a ostatních znaků."
+msgstr "Všechna hesla jsou závislá na velikosti písmen; nejlepší je použít kombinaci písmen (velkých a malých), čísel a ostatních znaků."
 
 #. type: Content of: <section><section><info><title>
 #: en/addUser.xml:56
@@ -235,21 +213,15 @@ msgstr ""
 msgid ""
 "<guilabel>Real Name</guilabel>: Insert the users real name into this text "
 "box."
-msgstr ""
-"<guilabel>Skutečné jméno</guilabel>: Vložte uživatelům do tohoto textového "
-"pole skutečné jméno."
+msgstr "<guilabel>Skutečné jméno</guilabel>: Vložte uživatelům do tohoto textového pole skutečné jméno."
 
 #. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
 #: en/addUser.xml:75
 msgid ""
 "<guilabel>Login Name</guilabel>: Here you enter the user login name or let "
-"drakx use a version of the users real name. <emphasis>The login name is case "
-"sensitive.</emphasis>"
-msgstr ""
-"<guilabel>Přihlašovací jméno</guilabel>: Zde můžete zadat uživatelské "
-"přihlašovací jméno, nebo nechat instalační program pokusit se použít "
-"skutečné jméno uživatelů. <emphasis>Přihlašovací jméno je citlivé na "
-"velikost písmen.</emphasis>"
+"drakx use a version of the users real name. <emphasis>The login name is case"
+" sensitive.</emphasis>"
+msgstr "<guilabel>Přihlašovací jméno</guilabel>: Zde můžete zadat uživatelské přihlašovací jméno, nebo nechat instalační program pokusit se použít skutečné jméno uživatelů. <emphasis>Přihlašovací jméno je citlivé na velikost písmen.</emphasis>"
 
 #. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
 #: en/addUser.xml:81
@@ -257,30 +229,22 @@ msgid ""
 "<guilabel>Password</guilabel>: In this text box you should type in the user "
 "password. There is a shield at the end of the text box that indicates the "
 "strength of the password. (See also <xref linkend=\"givePassword\"></xref>)"
-msgstr ""
-"<guilabel>Heslo</guilabel>: V tomto textovém poli je třeba zadat uživatelské "
-"heslo. K dispozici je nápověda na konci textového pole, které udává sílu "
-"hesla. (viz také <xref linkend=\"givePassword\"></xref>)"
+msgstr "<guilabel>Heslo</guilabel>: V tomto textovém poli je třeba zadat uživatelské heslo. K dispozici je nápověda na konci textového pole, které udává sílu hesla. (viz také <xref linkend=\"givePassword\"></xref>)"
 
 #. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
 #: en/addUser.xml:87
 msgid ""
 "<guilabel>Password (again)</guilabel>: Retype the user password into this "
-"text box and drakx will check you have the same password in each of the user "
-"password text boxes."
-msgstr ""
-"<guilabel>Heslo (znovu)</guilabel>: Znovu zadejte do tohoto textového pole "
-"heslo uživatele a drakx zkontroluje, zda máte stejné heslo v každém z "
-"textových polí pro uživatelské heslo."
+"text box and drakx will check you have the same password in each of the user"
+" password text boxes."
+msgstr "<guilabel>Heslo (znovu)</guilabel>: Znovu zadejte do tohoto textového pole heslo uživatele a drakx zkontroluje, zda máte stejné heslo v každém z textových polí pro uživatelské heslo."
 
 #. type: Content of: <section><section><note><para>
 #: en/addUser.xml:94
 msgid ""
 "Any user you add while installing Mageia, will have a world readable (but "
 "write protected) home directory."
-msgstr ""
-"Každý uživatel, kterého přidáte během instalace Mageia bude mít pro svět "
-"čitelný (ale chráněný proti zápisu) domovský adresář."
+msgstr "Každý uživatel, kterého přidáte během instalace Mageia bude mít pro svět čitelný (ale chráněný proti zápisu) domovský adresář."
 
 #. type: Content of: <section><section><note><para>
 #: en/addUser.xml:97
@@ -295,9 +259,7 @@ msgstr ""
 msgid ""
 "If you don't want a world readable home directory for anyone, it is advised "
 "to only add a temporary user now and to add the real one(s) after reboot."
-msgstr ""
-"Pokud nechcete čitelný domovský adresář pro každého, je doporučeno přidat "
-"nyní pouze dočasné uživatele a přidat ty pravé až po restartu."
+msgstr "Pokud nechcete čitelný domovský adresář pro každého, je doporučeno přidat nyní pouze dočasné uživatele a přidat ty pravé až po restartu."
 
 #. type: Content of: <section><section><note><para>
 #: en/addUser.xml:105
@@ -361,8 +323,8 @@ msgstr ""
 #: en/addUser.xml:150
 msgid ""
 "<guilabel>Group ID</guilabel>: This lets you set the group ID.  Also a "
-"number, usually the same one as for the user. Leave it blank unless you know "
-"what you are doing."
+"number, usually the same one as for the user. Leave it blank unless you know"
+" what you are doing."
 msgstr ""
 
 #. type: Content of: <section><info><title>
@@ -370,27 +332,27 @@ msgstr ""
 msgid "Choose the mount points"
 msgstr "Zvolte si přípojné body"
 
-#.  Made by marja on 2012 03 28 
-#.  NEEDS TO BE REVIEWED! 
-#.  SimonNZG 2012-04-03 has taken a look but needs to come back 
-#.  removed para xml:id's, marja, 20120409 
-#.  barjac 14/04/2012 Minor edit to improve grammar and replaced "at least ONE"
-#.        with "a", as I can't imagine having more than one root partition ;) 
-#.  Lebarhon : I put [] where it seems having mistakes 
-#.  Marja: you're right, in English English it is "its type", however, the Americans
-#.        write "it's type". And you're right about the redundant part, too, I removed it
-#.  And JohnR says the Americans are WRONG! :-)) 
-#.  2012-04-19  Language proofreading done 
+#.  Made by marja on 2012 03 28
+#.  NEEDS TO BE REVIEWED!
+#.  SimonNZG 2012-04-03 has taken a look but needs to come back
+#.  removed para xml:id's, marja, 20120409
+#.  barjac 14/04/2012 Minor edit to improve grammar and replaced "at least
+#. ONE"
+#.        with "a", as I can't imagine having more than one root partition ;)
+#.  Lebarhon : I put [] where it seems having mistakes
+#.  Marja: you're right, in English English it is "its type", however, the
+#. Americans
+#.        write "it's type". And you're right about the redundant part, too, I
+#. removed it
+#.  And JohnR says the Americans are WRONG! :-))
+#.  2012-04-19  Language proofreading done
 #. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject>
 #: en/ask_mntpoint_s.xml:27
 msgid ""
-"<imageobject> <imagedata revision=\"1\" fileref=\"dx2-chooseMountpoints.png"
-"\" align=\"center\" format=\"PNG\" xml:id=\"chooseMountPoints-im1\"></"
-"imagedata> </imageobject>"
-msgstr ""
-"<imageobject> <imagedata revision=\"1\" fileref=\"dx2-chooseMountpoints.png"
-"\" align=\"center\" format=\"PNG\" xml:id=\"chooseMountPoints-im1\"></"
-"imagedata> </imageobject>"
+"<imageobject> <imagedata revision=\"1\" "
+"fileref=\"dx2-chooseMountpoints.png\" align=\"center\" format=\"PNG\" xml:id"
+"=\"chooseMountPoints-im1\"></imagedata> </imageobject>"
+msgstr "<imageobject> <imagedata revision=\"1\" fileref=\"dx2-chooseMountpoints.png\" align=\"center\" format=\"PNG\" xml:id=\"chooseMountPoints-im1\"></imagedata> </imageobject>"
 
 #. type: Content of: <section><para>
 #: en/ask_mntpoint_s.xml:33
@@ -398,47 +360,38 @@ msgid ""
 "Here you see the Linux partitions that have been found on your computer. If "
 "you don't agree with the <application>DrakX</application> suggestions, you "
 "can change the mount points."
-msgstr ""
-"Zde vidíte Linuxové oddíly, které byly nalezeny na vašem počítači. Pokud "
-"nesouhlasíte s návrhem <application>DrakX</application>, můžete přípojné "
-"body změnit."
+msgstr "Zde vidíte Linuxové oddíly, které byly nalezeny na vašem počítači. Pokud nesouhlasíte s návrhem <application>DrakX</application>, můžete přípojné body změnit."
 
 #. type: Content of: <section><note><para>
 #: en/ask_mntpoint_s.xml:38
 msgid ""
 "If you change anything, make sure you still have a <literal>/</literal> "
 "(root) partition."
-msgstr ""
-"Máte-li cokoliv ke změně, ujistěte se, že máte stále <literal>/</literal> "
-"kořenový oddíl (root)."
+msgstr "Máte-li cokoliv ke změně, ujistěte se, že máte stále <literal>/</literal> kořenový oddíl (root)."
 
 #. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
 #: en/ask_mntpoint_s.xml:44
 msgid ""
-"Every partition is shown as follows: \"Device\" (\"Capacity\", \"Mount point"
-"\", \"Type\")."
-msgstr ""
-"Každý oddíl je zobrazen takto: \"Zařízení\" (\"Kapacita\", \"Přípojný bod\", "
-"\"Typ\")."
+"Every partition is shown as follows: \"Device\" (\"Capacity\", \"Mount "
+"point\", \"Type\")."
+msgstr "Každý oddíl je zobrazen takto: \"Zařízení\" (\"Kapacita\", \"Přípojný bod\", \"Typ\")."
 
 #. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
 #: en/ask_mntpoint_s.xml:49
 msgid ""
 "\"Device\", is made up of: \"hard drive\", [\"hard drive number\"(letter)], "
 "\"partition number\" (for example, \"sda5\")."
-msgstr ""
-"\"Zařízení\", se skládá z \"pevného disku\", [\"číslo disku\" (písmeno)], "
-"\"číslo oddílu\" (například \"sda5\")."
+msgstr "\"Zařízení\", se skládá z \"pevného disku\", [\"číslo disku\" (písmeno)], \"číslo oddílu\" (například \"sda5\")."
 
 #. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
 #: en/ask_mntpoint_s.xml:55
 msgid ""
-"If you have many partitions, you can choose many different mount points from "
-"the drop down menu, such as <literal>/</literal>, <literal>/home</literal> "
+"If you have many partitions, you can choose many different mount points from"
+" the drop down menu, such as <literal>/</literal>, <literal>/home</literal> "
 "and <literal>/var</literal>. You can even make your own mount points, for "
 "instance <literal>/video</literal> for a partition where you want to store "
-"your films, or <literal>/cauldron-home</literal> for the <literal>/home</"
-"literal> partition of a cauldron install."
+"your films, or <literal>/cauldron-home</literal> for the "
+"<literal>/home</literal> partition of a cauldron install."
 msgstr ""
 
 #. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
@@ -459,9 +412,9 @@ msgstr ""
 #. type: Content of: <section><para>
 #: en/ask_mntpoint_s.xml:77
 msgid ""
-"If you are sure the mount points are correct, click on <guibutton>Next</"
-"guibutton>, and choose whether you only want to format the partition(s) "
-"DrakX suggests, or more."
+"If you are sure the mount points are correct, click on "
+"<guibutton>Next</guibutton>, and choose whether you only want to format the "
+"partition(s) DrakX suggests, or more."
 msgstr ""
 
 #. type: Content of: <section><info><title>
@@ -472,11 +425,9 @@ msgstr "Výběr pracovního prostředí"
 #. type: Content of: <section><para>
 #: en/chooseDesktop.xml:11
 msgid ""
-"Depending on your selection here, you may be offered further screens to fine "
-"tune your choice."
-msgstr ""
-"V závislosti na vašem výběru zde, vám můžou být nabídnuty další obrazovky "
-"pro jemné doladění vaší volby."
+"Depending on your selection here, you may be offered further screens to fine"
+" tune your choice."
+msgstr "V závislosti na vašem výběru zde, vám můžou být nabídnuty další obrazovky pro jemné doladění vaší volby."
 
 #. type: Content of: <section><para>
 #: en/chooseDesktop.xml:13
@@ -491,9 +442,7 @@ msgstr ""
 msgid ""
 "<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"dx2-chooseDesktop.png\" align=\"center\" "
 "format=\"PNG\" ></imagedata> </imageobject>"
-msgstr ""
-"<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"dx2-chooseDesktop.png\" align=\"center\" "
-"format=\"PNG\" ></imagedata> </imageobject>"
+msgstr "<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"dx2-chooseDesktop.png\" align=\"center\" format=\"PNG\" ></imagedata> </imageobject>"
 
 #. type: Content of: <section><para>
 #: en/chooseDesktop.xml:26
@@ -512,15 +461,14 @@ msgstr ""
 msgid "Package Group Selection"
 msgstr "Výběr skupiny balíčků"
 
-#. 2012-12-26 marja - exported this section from choosePackages.xml to start a new page
+#. 2012-12-26 marja - exported this section from choosePackages.xml to start a
+#. new page
 #. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject>
 #: en/choosePackageGroups.xml:10
 msgid ""
-"<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"dx2-choosePackageGroups.png\" align="
-"\"center\" format=\"PNG\" ></imagedata> </imageobject>"
-msgstr ""
-"<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"dx2-choosePackageGroups.png\" align="
-"\"center\" format=\"PNG\" ></imagedata> </imageobject>"
+"<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"dx2-choosePackageGroups.png\" "
+"align=\"center\" format=\"PNG\" ></imagedata> </imageobject>"
+msgstr "<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"dx2-choosePackageGroups.png\" align=\"center\" format=\"PNG\" ></imagedata> </imageobject>"
 
 #. type: Content of: <section><para>
 #: en/choosePackageGroups.xml:16
@@ -551,15 +499,13 @@ msgstr "Grafické prostředí."
 msgid ""
 "Individual Package Selection: You can use this option to manually add or "
 "remove packages."
-msgstr ""
-"Individuální výběr balíčků: Tuto možnost můžete použít pro ruční přidání "
-"nebo odebrání balíčků."
+msgstr "Individuální výběr balíčků: Tuto možnost můžete použít pro ruční přidání nebo odebrání balíčků."
 
 #. type: Content of: <section><para>
 #: en/choosePackageGroups.xml:39
 msgid ""
-"Read <xref linkend=\"minimal-install\"></xref> for instructions on how to do "
-"a minimal install."
+"Read <xref linkend=\"minimal-install\"></xref> for instructions on how to do"
+" a minimal install."
 msgstr ""
 
 #. type: Content of: <section><info><title>
@@ -567,32 +513,30 @@ msgstr ""
 msgid "Choose Individual Packages"
 msgstr "Výběr jednotlivých balíčků"
 
-#. 2012-12-26 marja - exported this section from choosePackages.xml to start a new page
+#. 2012-12-26 marja - exported this section from choosePackages.xml to start a
+#. new page
 #. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject>
 #: en/choosePackagesTree.xml:11
 msgid ""
-"<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"dx2-choosePackagesTree.png\" align="
-"\"center\" format=\"PNG\" ></imagedata> </imageobject>"
-msgstr ""
-"<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"dx2-choosePackagesTree.png\" align="
-"\"center\" format=\"PNG\" ></imagedata> </imageobject>"
+"<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"dx2-choosePackagesTree.png\" "
+"align=\"center\" format=\"PNG\" ></imagedata> </imageobject>"
+msgstr "<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"dx2-choosePackagesTree.png\" align=\"center\" format=\"PNG\" ></imagedata> </imageobject>"
 
 #. type: Content of: <section><para>
 #: en/choosePackagesTree.xml:17
 msgid ""
-"Here you can add or remove any extra packages to customise your installation."
-msgstr ""
-"Zde můžete přidávat nebo odebírat všechny doplňkové balíčky pro přizpůsobení "
-"instalace."
+"Here you can add or remove any extra packages to customise your "
+"installation."
+msgstr "Zde můžete přidávat nebo odebírat všechny doplňkové balíčky pro přizpůsobení instalace."
 
 #. type: Content of: <section><para>
 #: en/choosePackagesTree.xml:20
 msgid ""
-"After having made your choice, you can click on the <guibutton>floppy icon</"
-"guibutton> at the bottom of the page to save your choice of packages (saving "
-"to a USB key works, too). You can then use this file to install the same "
-"packages on another system, by pressing the same button during install and "
-"choosing to load it."
+"After having made your choice, you can click on the <guibutton>floppy "
+"icon</guibutton> at the bottom of the page to save your choice of packages "
+"(saving to a USB key works, too). You can then use this file to install the "
+"same packages on another system, by pressing the same button during install "
+"and choosing to load it."
 msgstr ""
 
 #. type: Content of: <section><info><title>
@@ -600,30 +544,28 @@ msgstr ""
 msgid "Configure your Services"
 msgstr "Nastavení služeb"
 
-#.  2012-12-25 marja - moved this section out of misc-params.xml 
-#.  2013-05-05 marja - added screenshot 
+#.  2012-12-25 marja - moved this section out of misc-params.xml
+#.  2013-05-05 marja - added screenshot
 #. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject>
 #: en/configureServices.xml:21
 msgid ""
-"<imageobject> <imagedata revision=\"1\" fileref=\"dx2-configureServices.png"
-"\" align=\"center\" format=\"PNG\" xml:id=\"configureServices-im1\"></"
-"imagedata> </imageobject>"
-msgstr ""
-"<imageobject> <imagedata revision=\"1\" fileref=\"dx2-configureServices.png"
-"\" align=\"center\" format=\"PNG\" xml:id=\"configureServices-im1\"></"
-"imagedata> </imageobject>"
+"<imageobject> <imagedata revision=\"1\" "
+"fileref=\"dx2-configureServices.png\" align=\"center\" format=\"PNG\" xml:id"
+"=\"configureServices-im1\"></imagedata> </imageobject>"
+msgstr "<imageobject> <imagedata revision=\"1\" fileref=\"dx2-configureServices.png\" align=\"center\" format=\"PNG\" xml:id=\"configureServices-im1\"></imagedata> </imageobject>"
 
 #. type: Content of: <section><para>
 #: en/configureServices.xml:27
 msgid ""
-"Here you can set which services should (not) start when you boot your system."
+"Here you can set which services should (not) start when you boot your "
+"system."
 msgstr "Zde si můžete nastavit, jaké služby (ne)spuštět při zavádění systému."
 
 #. type: Content of: <section><para>
 #: en/configureServices.xml:30
 msgid ""
-"There are four groups, click on the triangle before a group to expand it and "
-"see all services in it."
+"There are four groups, click on the triangle before a group to expand it and"
+" see all services in it."
 msgstr ""
 
 #. type: Content of: <section><para>
@@ -648,45 +590,36 @@ msgstr ""
 msgid "Configure your Timezone"
 msgstr "Nastavení časového pásma"
 
-#.  2012-12-25 marja - moved this part out of misc-params.xml 
-#.  2013-05-05 marja - added screenshot 
+#.  2012-12-25 marja - moved this part out of misc-params.xml
+#.  2013-05-05 marja - added screenshot
 #. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject>
 #: en/configureTimezoneUTC.xml:20
 msgid ""
-"<imageobject> <imagedata revision=\"1\" fileref=\"dx2-configureTimezoneUTC."
-"png\" align=\"center\" format=\"PNG\" xml:id=\"configureTimezoneUTC-im1\"></"
-"imagedata> </imageobject>"
-msgstr ""
-"<imageobject> <imagedata revision=\"1\" fileref=\"dx2-configureTimezoneUTC."
-"png\" align=\"center\" format=\"PNG\" xml:id=\"configureTimezoneUTC-im1\"></"
-"imagedata> </imageobject>"
+"<imageobject> <imagedata revision=\"1\" "
+"fileref=\"dx2-configureTimezoneUTC.png\" align=\"center\" format=\"PNG\" "
+"xml:id=\"configureTimezoneUTC-im1\"></imagedata> </imageobject>"
+msgstr "<imageobject> <imagedata revision=\"1\" fileref=\"dx2-configureTimezoneUTC.png\" align=\"center\" format=\"PNG\" xml:id=\"configureTimezoneUTC-im1\"></imagedata> </imageobject>"
 
 #. type: Content of: <section><para>
 #: en/configureTimezoneUTC.xml:26
 msgid ""
-"Choose your time zone by choosing your country or a city close to you in the "
-"same time zone."
-msgstr ""
-"Vyberte si časové pásmo výběrem vaší zememě nebo nejbližší město ve stejném "
-"časovém pásmu."
+"Choose your time zone by choosing your country or a city close to you in the"
+" same time zone."
+msgstr "Vyberte si časové pásmo výběrem vaší zememě nebo nejbližší město ve stejném časovém pásmu."
 
 #. type: Content of: <section><para>
 #: en/configureTimezoneUTC.xml:30
 msgid ""
-"In next screen you can choose to set your hardware clock to local time or to "
-"GMT, also known as UTC."
-msgstr ""
-"V dalším okně si můžete vybrat nastavení hardwarových hodin na místní čas a "
-"GMT, také známý jako UTC."
+"In next screen you can choose to set your hardware clock to local time or to"
+" GMT, also known as UTC."
+msgstr "V dalším okně si můžete vybrat nastavení hardwarových hodin na místní čas a GMT, také známý jako UTC."
 
 #. type: Content of: <section><note><para>
 #: en/configureTimezoneUTC.xml:35
 msgid ""
 "If you have more than one operating system on your computer, make sure they "
 "are all set to local time, or all to UTC/GMT."
-msgstr ""
-"Pokud máte na vašem počítači více než jeden operační systém, ujistěte se, že "
-"jsou všechny nastaveny na místní čas, nebo všichny na UTC/GMT."
+msgstr "Pokud máte na vašem počítači více než jeden operační systém, ujistěte se, že jsou všechny nastaveny na místní čas, nebo všichny na UTC/GMT."
 
 #. type: Content of: <section><info><title>
 #: en/configureX_card_list.xml:11
@@ -696,31 +629,24 @@ msgstr "Výběr X Serveru (Konfigurace vaší grafické karty)"
 #. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject>
 #: en/configureX_card_list.xml:16
 msgid ""
-"<imageobject> <imagedata revision=\"1\" align=\"center\" xml:id="
-"\"configureX_card_list-im1\" fileref=\"dx2-configureX_card_list.png\" format="
-"\"PNG\"/> </imageobject>"
-msgstr ""
-"<imageobject> <imagedata revision=\"1\" align=\"center\" xml:id="
-"\"configureX_card_list-im1\" fileref=\"dx2-configureX_card_list.png\" format="
-"\"PNG\"/> </imageobject>"
+"<imageobject> <imagedata revision=\"1\" align=\"center\" xml:id"
+"=\"configureX_card_list-im1\" fileref=\"dx2-configureX_card_list.png\" "
+"format=\"PNG\"/> </imageobject>"
+msgstr "<imageobject> <imagedata revision=\"1\" align=\"center\" xml:id=\"configureX_card_list-im1\" fileref=\"dx2-configureX_card_list.png\" format=\"PNG\"/> </imageobject>"
 
 #. type: Content of: <section><para>
 #: en/configureX_card_list.xml:21
 msgid ""
 "DrakX has a very comprehensive database of video cards and will usually "
 "correctly identify your video device."
-msgstr ""
-"DrakX má velmi rozsáhlou databázi grafických karet a obvykle video zařízení "
-"identifikuje správně."
+msgstr "DrakX má velmi rozsáhlou databázi grafických karet a obvykle video zařízení identifikuje správně."
 
 #. type: Content of: <section><para>
 #: en/configureX_card_list.xml:24
 msgid ""
 "If the installer has not correctly detected your graphic card and you know "
 "which one you have, you can select it from the tree by:"
-msgstr ""
-"Pokud není vaše grafická karta rozpoznána instalačním programem správně a "
-"víte, jakou kartu máte, můžete ji vybrat ze stromu:"
+msgstr "Pokud není vaše grafická karta rozpoznána instalačním programem správně a víte, jakou kartu máte, můžete ji vybrat ze stromu:"
 
 #. type: Content of: <section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
 #: en/configureX_card_list.xml:27 en/configureX_monitor.xml:69
@@ -743,10 +669,7 @@ msgid ""
 "If you cannot find your card in the vendor lists (because it's not yet in "
 "the database or it's an older card) you may find a suitable driver in the "
 "Xorg category"
-msgstr ""
-"Pokud nemůžete najít svou kartu v seznamech dodavatelů (protože ještě není v "
-"databázi, nebo je to starší karta) můžete najít vhodný ovladač v kategorii "
-"Xorg"
+msgstr "Pokud nemůžete najít svou kartu v seznamech dodavatelů (protože ještě není v databázi, nebo je to starší karta) můžete najít vhodný ovladač v kategorii Xorg"
 
 #. type: Content of: <section><para>
 #: en/configureX_card_list.xml:43
@@ -754,19 +677,14 @@ msgid ""
 "The Xorg listing provides more than 40 generic and open source video card "
 "drivers. If you still can't find a named driver for your card there is the "
 "option of using the vesa driver which provides basic capabilities."
-msgstr ""
-"Seznam Xorg poskytuje více než 40 obecných a open source ovladačů grafických "
-"karet. Pokud stále nemůžete najít název ovladače pro kartu, existuje možnost "
-"použití VESA ovladač, který poskytuje základní možnosti."
+msgstr "Seznam Xorg poskytuje více než 40 obecných a open source ovladačů grafických karet. Pokud stále nemůžete najít název ovladače pro kartu, existuje možnost použití VESA ovladač, který poskytuje základní možnosti."
 
 #. type: Content of: <section><para>
 #: en/configureX_card_list.xml:48
 msgid ""
 "Be aware that if you select an incompatible driver you may only have access "
 "to the Commandline Interface."
-msgstr ""
-"Uvědomte si, že pokud vyberete nekompatibilní ovladač, můžete mít přístup "
-"pouze k rozhhraní příkazové řádky."
+msgstr "Uvědomte si, že pokud vyberete nekompatibilní ovladač, můžete mít přístup pouze k rozhhraní příkazové řádky."
 
 #. type: Content of: <section><para>
 #: en/configureX_card_list.xml:51
@@ -774,36 +692,30 @@ msgid ""
 "Some video card manufacturers provide proprietary drivers for Linux which "
 "may only be available in the Nonfree repository and in some cases only from "
 "the card manufacturers' websites."
-msgstr ""
-"Někteří výrobci grafických karet poskytují proprietární ovladače pro Linux, "
-"které mohou být k dispozici v nonfree úložišti a v některých případech jen "
-"pouze z webových stránek výrobce karety."
+msgstr "Někteří výrobci grafických karet poskytují proprietární ovladače pro Linux, které mohou být k dispozici v nonfree úložišti a v některých případech jen pouze z webových stránek výrobce karety."
 
 #. type: Content of: <section><para>
 #: en/configureX_card_list.xml:55
 msgid ""
 "The Nonfree repository needs to be explicitly enabled to access them.  If "
 "you didn't select it previously, you should do this after your first reboot."
-msgstr ""
-"Přístup k Nonfree úložišti musí být výslovně povolen. Pokud tomu tak není, "
-"nejdříve jej povolte, toto byste měli udělat po prvním restartu."
+msgstr "Přístup k Nonfree úložišti musí být výslovně povolen. Pokud tomu tak není, nejdříve jej povolte, toto byste měli udělat po prvním restartu."
 
 #. type: Content of: <section><info><title>
 #: en/configureX_chooser.xml:4
 msgid "Graphic Card and Monitor Configuration"
 msgstr "Nastavení grafické karty a monitoru"
 
-#.  Marja 2012-08-10, copied setupX.xml to this file and replaced all "setupX" in the code by "configureX_chooser", because this is the correct filename for this page
+#.  Marja 2012-08-10, copied setupX.xml to this file and replaced all "setupX"
+#. in the code by "configureX_chooser", because this is the correct filename
+#. for this page
 #. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject>
 #: en/configureX_chooser.xml:11
 msgid ""
-"<imageobject> <imagedata revision=\"1\" fileref=\"dx2-configureX_chooser.png"
-"\" align=\"center\" format=\"PNG\" xml:id=\"configureX_chooser-im1\"> </"
-"imagedata> </imageobject>"
-msgstr ""
-"<imageobject> <imagedata revision=\"1\" fileref=\"dx2-configureX_chooser.png"
-"\" align=\"center\" format=\"PNG\" xml:id=\"configureX_chooser-im1\"> </"
-"imagedata> </imageobject>"
+"<imageobject> <imagedata revision=\"1\" "
+"fileref=\"dx2-configureX_chooser.png\" align=\"center\" format=\"PNG\" "
+"xml:id=\"configureX_chooser-im1\"> </imagedata> </imageobject>"
+msgstr "<imageobject> <imagedata revision=\"1\" fileref=\"dx2-configureX_chooser.png\" align=\"center\" format=\"PNG\" xml:id=\"configureX_chooser-im1\"> </imagedata> </imageobject>"
 
 #. type: Content of: <section><para>
 #: en/configureX_chooser.xml:18
@@ -812,11 +724,11 @@ msgid ""
 "you chose for this install of <application>Mageia</application>, they are "
 "all based on a graphical user interface system called <acronym>X Window "
 "System</acronym>, or simply <acronym>X</acronym>. So in order for "
-"<acronym>KDE</acronym>, <acronym>Gnome</acronym>, <acronym>LXDE</acronym> or "
-"any other graphical environment to work well, the following <acronym>X</"
-"acronym> settings need to be correct. Choose the correct settings if you can "
-"see that <application>DrakX</application> didn't make a choice, or if you "
-"think the choice is incorrect."
+"<acronym>KDE</acronym>, <acronym>Gnome</acronym>, <acronym>LXDE</acronym> or"
+" any other graphical environment to work well, the following "
+"<acronym>X</acronym> settings need to be correct. Choose the correct "
+"settings if you can see that <application>DrakX</application> didn't make a "
+"choice, or if you think the choice is incorrect."
 msgstr ""
 
 #. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
@@ -846,9 +758,7 @@ msgstr "Nesprávná obnovovací frekvence může poškodit váš monitor"
 msgid ""
 "<emphasis><guibutton>Resolution</guibutton></emphasis>: Set the desired "
 "resolution and color depth of your monitor here."
-msgstr ""
-"<emphasis><guibutton>Rozlišení</guibutton></emphasis>: Zde nastavte "
-"požadované rozlišení a barevnou hloubku monitoru."
+msgstr "<emphasis><guibutton>Rozlišení</guibutton></emphasis>: Zde nastavte požadované rozlišení a barevnou hloubku monitoru."
 
 #. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
 #: en/configureX_chooser.xml:56
@@ -856,11 +766,11 @@ msgid ""
 "<emphasis><guibutton>Test</guibutton></emphasis>: The test button does not "
 "always appear during install. If the button is there, you can control your "
 "settings by pressing it. If you see a question asking you whether your "
-"settings are correct, you can answer \"yes\", and the settings will be kept. "
-"If you don't see anything, you'll return to the configuration screen and be "
-"able to reconfigure everything until the test is good. <emphasis>Make sure "
-"your settings are on the safe side if the test button isn't available</"
-"emphasis>"
+"settings are correct, you can answer \"yes\", and the settings will be kept."
+" If you don't see anything, you'll return to the configuration screen and be"
+" able to reconfigure everything until the test is good. <emphasis>Make sure "
+"your settings are on the safe side if the test button isn't "
+"available</emphasis>"
 msgstr ""
 
 #. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
@@ -868,9 +778,7 @@ msgstr ""
 msgid ""
 "<emphasis><guibutton>Options</guibutton></emphasis>: Here you can choose to "
 "enable or disable various options."
-msgstr ""
-"<emphasis><guibutton>Možnosti</guibutton></emphasis>: Zde si můžete vybrat "
-"zda povolit nebo zakázat různé další možnosti."
+msgstr "<emphasis><guibutton>Možnosti</guibutton></emphasis>: Zde si můžete vybrat zda povolit nebo zakázat různé další možnosti."
 
 #. type: Content of: <section><info><title>
 #: en/configureX_monitor.xml:18
@@ -896,13 +804,10 @@ msgstr ""
 #. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject>
 #: en/configureX_monitor.xml:34
 msgid ""
-"<imageobject> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"dx2-configureX_monitor."
-"png\" format=\"PNG\" revision=\"1\" xml:id=\"configureX_monitor-im1\"/> </"
-"imageobject>"
-msgstr ""
-"<imageobject> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"dx2-configureX_monitor."
-"png\" format=\"PNG\" revision=\"1\" xml:id=\"configureX_monitor-im1\"/> </"
-"imageobject>"
+"<imageobject> <imagedata align=\"center\" "
+"fileref=\"dx2-configureX_monitor.png\" format=\"PNG\" revision=\"1\" xml:id"
+"=\"configureX_monitor-im1\"/> </imageobject>"
+msgstr "<imageobject> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"dx2-configureX_monitor.png\" format=\"PNG\" revision=\"1\" xml:id=\"configureX_monitor-im1\"/> </imageobject>"
 
 #. type: Content of: <section><para>
 #: en/configureX_monitor.xml:42
@@ -913,9 +818,9 @@ msgstr "<emphasis>Vlastní</emphasis>"
 #: en/configureX_monitor.xml:44
 msgid ""
 "This option allows you to set two critical parameters, the vertical refresh "
-"rate and the horizontal sync rate. Vertical refresh determines how often the "
-"screen is refreshed and horizontal sync is the rate at which scan lines are "
-"displayed."
+"rate and the horizontal sync rate. Vertical refresh determines how often the"
+" screen is refreshed and horizontal sync is the rate at which scan lines are"
+" displayed."
 msgstr ""
 
 #. type: Content of: <section><para>
@@ -937,8 +842,7 @@ msgstr "<emphasis>Plug 'n Play</emphasis>"
 msgid ""
 "This is the default option and tries to determine the monitor type from the "
 "monitor database."
-msgstr ""
-"Toto je výchozí volba a snaží se určit typ monitoru z databáze monitorů."
+msgstr "Toto je výchozí volba a snaží se určit typ monitoru z databáze monitorů."
 
 #. type: Content of: <section><para>
 #: en/configureX_monitor.xml:63
@@ -971,10 +875,10 @@ msgstr ""
 #: en/configureX_monitor.xml:84
 msgid ""
 "selecting this group displays nearly 30 display configurations such as "
-"1024x768 @ 60Hz and includes Flat panel displays as used in laptops. This is "
-"often a good monitor selection group if you need to use the Vesa card driver "
-"when your video hardware cannot be determined automatically. Once again it "
-"may be wise to be conservative in your selections."
+"1024x768 @ 60Hz and includes Flat panel displays as used in laptops. This is"
+" often a good monitor selection group if you need to use the Vesa card "
+"driver when your video hardware cannot be determined automatically. Once "
+"again it may be wise to be conservative in your selections."
 msgstr ""
 
 #. type: Content of: <section><info><title>
@@ -985,41 +889,39 @@ msgstr "Vlastní rozdělení disku pomocí DiskDrake"
 #. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject>
 #: en/diskdrake.xml:26
 msgid ""
-"<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"dx2-diskdrake.png\" align=\"center\"></"
-"imagedata> </imageobject>"
-msgstr ""
-"<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"dx2-diskdrake.png\" align=\"center\"></"
-"imagedata> </imageobject>"
+"<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"dx2-diskdrake.png\" "
+"align=\"center\"></imagedata> </imageobject>"
+msgstr "<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"dx2-diskdrake.png\" align=\"center\"></imagedata> </imageobject>"
 
 #. type: Content of: <section><warning><para>
 #: en/diskdrake.xml:33
 msgid ""
 "If you wish to use encryption on your <literal>/</literal> partition you "
-"must ensure that you have a separate <literal>/boot</literal> partition. The "
-"encryption option for the <literal>/boot</literal> partition must NOT be "
+"must ensure that you have a separate <literal>/boot</literal> partition. The"
+" encryption option for the <literal>/boot</literal> partition must NOT be "
 "set, otherwise your system will be unbootable."
 msgstr ""
 
 #. type: Content of: <section><para>
 #: en/diskdrake.xml:39
 msgid ""
-"Adjust the layout of your disk(s) here. You can remove or create partitions, "
-"change the filesystem of a partition or change its size and even view what "
+"Adjust the layout of your disk(s) here. You can remove or create partitions,"
+" change the filesystem of a partition or change its size and even view what "
 "is in them before you start."
 msgstr ""
 
 #. type: Content of: <section><para>
 #: en/diskdrake.xml:42
 msgid ""
-"There is a tab for every detected hard disk or other storage device, like an "
-"USB key. For example sda, sdb and sdc if there are three of them."
+"There is a tab for every detected hard disk or other storage device, like an"
+" USB key. For example sda, sdb and sdc if there are three of them."
 msgstr ""
 
 #. type: Content of: <section><para>
 #: en/diskdrake.xml:45
 msgid ""
-"Push <guibutton>Clear all</guibutton> to wipe all partitions on the selected "
-"storage device"
+"Push <guibutton>Clear all</guibutton> to wipe all partitions on the selected"
+" storage device"
 msgstr ""
 
 #. type: Content of: <section><para>
@@ -1062,11 +964,9 @@ msgstr ""
 #. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject>
 #: en/doPartitionDisks.xml:38
 msgid ""
-"<imageobject> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"dx2-doPartitionDisks.png"
-"\" /> </imageobject>"
-msgstr ""
-"<imageobject> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"dx2-doPartitionDisks.png"
-"\" /> </imageobject>"
+"<imageobject> <imagedata align=\"center\" "
+"fileref=\"dx2-doPartitionDisks.png\" /> </imageobject>"
+msgstr "<imageobject> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"dx2-doPartitionDisks.png\" /> </imageobject>"
 
 #. type: Content of: <section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
 #: en/doPartitionDisks.xml:45
@@ -1088,8 +988,8 @@ msgstr ""
 #. type: Content of: <section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
 #: en/doPartitionDisks.xml:56
 msgid ""
-"If you have unused space on your hard drive then this option will use it for "
-"your new Mageia installation."
+"If you have unused space on your hard drive then this option will use it for"
+" your new Mageia installation."
 msgstr ""
 
 #. type: Content of: <section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
@@ -1100,8 +1000,8 @@ msgstr ""
 #. type: Content of: <section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
 #: en/doPartitionDisks.xml:65
 msgid ""
-"If you have unused space on an existing Windows partition, the installer may "
-"offer to use it."
+"If you have unused space on an existing Windows partition, the installer may"
+" offer to use it."
 msgstr ""
 
 #. type: Content of: <section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
@@ -1154,8 +1054,8 @@ msgstr "Vlastní"
 #. type: Content of: <section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
 #: en/doPartitionDisks.xml:102
 msgid ""
-"This gives you complete control over the placing of the installation on your "
-"hard drive(s)."
+"This gives you complete control over the placing of the installation on your"
+" hard drive(s)."
 msgstr ""
 
 #. type: Content of: <section><warning><para>
@@ -1165,8 +1065,8 @@ msgid ""
 "previous standard of 512 byte logical sectors. Due to lack of available "
 "hardware, the partitioning tool used in the installer has not been tested "
 "with such a drive. Also some ssd drives now use an erase block size over 1 "
-"MB. We suggest to pre-partition the drive, using an alternative partitioning "
-"tool like gparted, if you own such a device, and to use the following "
+"MB. We suggest to pre-partition the drive, using an alternative partitioning"
+" tool like gparted, if you own such a device, and to use the following "
 "settings:"
 msgstr ""
 
@@ -1201,7 +1101,8 @@ msgstr "<publisher> <publishername>Mageia.org</publishername> </publisher>"
 msgid "February 2014"
 msgstr "Únor 2014"
 
-#. type: Content of: <book><info><cover><info><revhistory><revision><revremark>
+#. type: Content of:
+#. <book><info><cover><info><revhistory><revision><revremark>
 #: en/DrakX-cover.xml:11 en/DrakX-cover.xml:29
 msgid "Mageia 4"
 msgstr "Mageia 4"
@@ -1224,8 +1125,8 @@ msgstr "<note>"
 #. type: Content of: <article><info><cover><para><note><para>
 #: en/DrakX-cover.xml:43 en/DrakX.xml:7
 msgid ""
-"No one will see all the installer screens that you see in this manual. Which "
-"screens you will see, depends on your hardware and the choices you make "
+"No one will see all the installer screens that you see in this manual. Which"
+" screens you will see, depends on your hardware and the choices you make "
 "while installing."
 msgstr ""
 
@@ -1238,24 +1139,24 @@ msgstr "</note>"
 #: en/DrakX-cover.xml:48 en/DrakX.xml:12
 msgid ""
 "The texts and screenshots in this manual are available under the CC BY-SA "
-"3.0 license <link ns6:href=\"http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-sa/3.0/"
-"\">http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-sa/3.0/</link>."
+"3.0 license <link ns6:href=\"http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-"
+"sa/3.0/\">http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-sa/3.0/</link>."
 msgstr ""
 
 #. type: Content of: <article><info><cover><para>
 #: en/DrakX-cover.xml:52 en/DrakX.xml:16
 msgid ""
-"This manual was produced with the help of the <link ns6:href=\"http://www."
-"calenco.com\">Calenco CMS</link> developed by <link ns6:href=\"http://www."
-"neodoc.biz\">NeoDoc</link>."
+"This manual was produced with the help of the <link "
+"ns6:href=\"http://www.calenco.com\">Calenco CMS</link> developed by <link "
+"ns6:href=\"http://www.neodoc.biz\">NeoDoc</link>."
 msgstr ""
 
 #. type: Content of: <article><info><cover><para>
 #: en/DrakX-cover.xml:54 en/DrakX.xml:18
 msgid ""
-"It was written by volunteers in their free time. Please contact <link ns6:"
-"href=\"https://wiki.mageia.org/en/Documentation_team\">Documentation Team</"
-"link>, if you would like to help improve this manual."
+"It was written by volunteers in their free time. Please contact <link "
+"ns6:href=\"https://wiki.mageia.org/en/Documentation_team\">Documentation "
+"Team</link>, if you would like to help improve this manual."
 msgstr ""
 
 #. type: Content of: <section><info><title>
@@ -1263,34 +1164,31 @@ msgstr ""
 msgid "Congratulations"
 msgstr "Gratulujeme"
 
-#.  Started by marja on 2012 03 29 
-#.  NEEDS TO BE WRITTEN AND THEN REVIEWED! 
-#.  marja - 2012-04-24 added screenshot and text 
+#.  Started by marja on 2012 03 29
+#.  NEEDS TO BE WRITTEN AND THEN REVIEWED!
+#.  marja - 2012-04-24 added screenshot and text
 #.  same day, added "s" to "sytems"
 #. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject>
 #: en/exitInstall.xml:14
 msgid ""
 "<imageobject> <imagedata revision=\"1\" fileref=\"dx2-exitInstall.png\" "
-"format=\"PNG\" align=\"center\" xml:id=\"exitInstall-im1\"> </imagedata> </"
-"imageobject>"
-msgstr ""
-"<imageobject> <imagedata revision=\"1\" fileref=\"dx2-exitInstall.png\" "
-"format=\"PNG\" align=\"center\" xml:id=\"exitInstall-im1\"> </imagedata> </"
-"imageobject>"
+"format=\"PNG\" align=\"center\" xml:id=\"exitInstall-im1\"> </imagedata> "
+"</imageobject>"
+msgstr "<imageobject> <imagedata revision=\"1\" fileref=\"dx2-exitInstall.png\" format=\"PNG\" align=\"center\" xml:id=\"exitInstall-im1\"> </imagedata> </imageobject>"
 
 #. type: Content of: <section><para>
 #: en/exitInstall.xml:21
 msgid ""
-"You have finished installing and configuring <application>Mageia</"
-"application> and it is now safe to remove the installation medium and reboot "
-"your computer."
+"You have finished installing and configuring "
+"<application>Mageia</application> and it is now safe to remove the "
+"installation medium and reboot your computer."
 msgstr ""
 
 #. type: Content of: <section><para>
 #: en/exitInstall.xml:25
 msgid ""
-"After reboot, in the bootloader screen, you can choose between the operating "
-"systems on your computer (if you have more than one)."
+"After reboot, in the bootloader screen, you can choose between the operating"
+" systems on your computer (if you have more than one)."
 msgstr ""
 
 #. type: Content of: <section><para>
@@ -1317,20 +1215,17 @@ msgstr ""
 msgid "Formatting"
 msgstr ""
 
-#.  Made by marja on 2012 03 29 
-#.  NEEDS TO BE REVIEWED! 
-#.  marja 2012-04-24 added screenshot 
-#.  marja 2012-04-24 added emphasis tags in formatPartitions-pa1 
+#.  Made by marja on 2012 03 29
+#.  NEEDS TO BE REVIEWED!
+#.  marja 2012-04-24 added screenshot
+#.  marja 2012-04-24 added emphasis tags in formatPartitions-pa1
 #. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject>
 #: en/formatPartitions.xml:18
 msgid ""
-"<imageobject> <imagedata revision=\"1\" fileref=\"dx2-formatPartitions.png\" "
-"format=\"PNG\" align=\"center\" xml:id=\"formatPartitions-im1\"> </"
-"imagedata> </imageobject>"
-msgstr ""
-"<imageobject> <imagedata revision=\"1\" fileref=\"dx2-formatPartitions.png\" "
-"format=\"PNG\" align=\"center\" xml:id=\"formatPartitions-im1\"> </"
-"imagedata> </imageobject>"
+"<imageobject> <imagedata revision=\"1\" fileref=\"dx2-formatPartitions.png\""
+" format=\"PNG\" align=\"center\" xml:id=\"formatPartitions-im1\"> "
+"</imagedata> </imageobject>"
+msgstr "<imageobject> <imagedata revision=\"1\" fileref=\"dx2-formatPartitions.png\" format=\"PNG\" align=\"center\" xml:id=\"formatPartitions-im1\"> </imagedata> </imageobject>"
 
 #. type: Content of: <section><para>
 #: en/formatPartitions.xml:25
@@ -1363,8 +1258,8 @@ msgstr ""
 #. type: Content of: <section><para>
 #: en/formatPartitions.xml:44
 msgid ""
-"When you are confident about the selection, click on <guibutton>Next</"
-"guibutton> to continue."
+"When you are confident about the selection, click on "
+"<guibutton>Next</guibutton> to continue."
 msgstr ""
 
 #. type: Content of: <section><info><title>
@@ -1378,10 +1273,7 @@ msgid ""
 "Whether you are new to GNU-Linux or an experienced user, the Mageia "
 "Installer is designed to help make your installation or upgrade as easy as "
 "possible."
-msgstr ""
-"Ať už jste v GNU-Linux začátečník nebo zkušený uživatel, Mageia Instalátor "
-"je navržen tak, aby instalace nebo aktualizace byla tak jednoduchá, jak jen "
-"je to možné."
+msgstr "Ať už jste v GNU-Linux začátečník nebo zkušený uživatel, Mageia Instalátor je navržen tak, aby instalace nebo aktualizace byla tak jednoduchá, jak jen je to možné."
 
 #. type: Content of: <section><para>
 #: en/installer.xml:28
@@ -1408,11 +1300,10 @@ msgstr "Zde je výchozí uvítací obrazovka při použití Mageia DVD:"
 #. type: Content of: <section><figure><mediaobject>
 #: en/installer.xml:40
 msgid ""
-"<imageobject> <imagedata xml:id=\"BId-drakx-intro-im1\" revision=\"1\" align="
-"\"center\" format=\"PNG\" fileref=\"../dx-welcome.png\"/> </imageobject>"
-msgstr ""
-"<imageobject> <imagedata xml:id=\"BId-drakx-intro-im1\" revision=\"1\" align="
-"\"center\" format=\"PNG\" fileref=\"../dx-welcome.png\"/> </imageobject>"
+"<imageobject> <imagedata xml:id=\"BId-drakx-intro-im1\" revision=\"1\" "
+"align=\"center\" format=\"PNG\" fileref=\"../dx-welcome.png\"/> "
+"</imageobject>"
+msgstr "<imageobject> <imagedata xml:id=\"BId-drakx-intro-im1\" revision=\"1\" align=\"center\" format=\"PNG\" fileref=\"../dx-welcome.png\"/> </imageobject>"
 
 #. type: Content of: <section><figure>
 #: en/installer.xml:39
@@ -1434,10 +1325,8 @@ msgstr ""
 
 #. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><mediaobject>
 #: en/installer.xml:57
-msgid ""
-"<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"dx-welcome-lang.png\"/> </imageobject>"
-msgstr ""
-"<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"dx-welcome-lang.png\"/> </imageobject>"
+msgid "<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"dx-welcome-lang.png\"/> </imageobject>"
+msgstr "<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"dx-welcome-lang.png\"/> </imageobject>"
 
 #. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
 #: en/installer.xml:62
@@ -1448,16 +1337,15 @@ msgstr ""
 #: en/installer.xml:65
 msgid ""
 "Here is for example, the French welcome screen when using a Live DVD/CD. "
-"Note that the Live DVD/CD menu does not propose: <guilabel>Rescue System</"
-"guilabel>, <guilabel>Memory test</guilabel> and <guilabel>Hardware Detection "
-"Tool</guilabel>."
+"Note that the Live DVD/CD menu does not propose: <guilabel>Rescue "
+"System</guilabel>, <guilabel>Memory test</guilabel> and <guilabel>Hardware "
+"Detection Tool</guilabel>."
 msgstr ""
 
 #. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><mediaobject>
 #: en/installer.xml:73
 msgid "<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"dx-welcome4fr.png\"/> </imageobject>"
-msgstr ""
-"<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"dx-welcome4fr.png\"/> </imageobject>"
+msgstr "<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"dx-welcome4fr.png\"/> </imageobject>"
 
 #. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
 #: en/installer.xml:82
@@ -1466,10 +1354,8 @@ msgstr ""
 
 #. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><mediaobject>
 #: en/installer.xml:85
-msgid ""
-"<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"dx-welcome5def.png\"/> </imageobject>"
-msgstr ""
-"<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"dx-welcome5def.png\"/> </imageobject>"
+msgid "<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"dx-welcome5def.png\"/> </imageobject>"
+msgstr "<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"dx-welcome5def.png\"/> </imageobject>"
 
 #. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
 #: en/installer.xml:92
@@ -1527,10 +1413,8 @@ msgstr ""
 
 #. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><mediaobject>
 #: en/installer.xml:123
-msgid ""
-"<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"dx-welcome6opt.png\"/> </imageobject>"
-msgstr ""
-"<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"dx-welcome6opt.png\"/> </imageobject>"
+msgid "<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"dx-welcome6opt.png\"/> </imageobject>"
+msgstr "<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"dx-welcome6opt.png\"/> </imageobject>"
 
 #. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
 #: en/installer.xml:130
@@ -1547,10 +1431,8 @@ msgstr ""
 
 #. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><mediaobject>
 #: en/installer.xml:139
-msgid ""
-"<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"dx-welcomeHelp1.png\"/> </imageobject>"
-msgstr ""
-"<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"dx-welcomeHelp1.png\"/> </imageobject>"
+msgid "<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"dx-welcomeHelp1.png\"/> </imageobject>"
+msgstr "<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"dx-welcomeHelp1.png\"/> </imageobject>"
 
 #. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
 #: en/installer.xml:146
@@ -1563,10 +1445,8 @@ msgstr ""
 
 #. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><mediaobject>
 #: en/installer.xml:152
-msgid ""
-"<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"dx-welcomeHelp2.png\"/> </imageobject>"
-msgstr ""
-"<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"dx-welcomeHelp2.png\"/> </imageobject>"
+msgid "<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"dx-welcomeHelp2.png\"/> </imageobject>"
+msgstr "<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"dx-welcomeHelp2.png\"/> </imageobject>"
 
 #. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><note><para>
 #: en/installer.xml:160
@@ -1585,8 +1465,9 @@ msgstr ""
 msgid ""
 "It does not allow to change the language, the available options are "
 "described in the screen. For more information about using a Wired Network-"
-"based Installation CD, see <link ns2:href=\"https://wiki.mageia.org/en/Boot."
-"iso_install\">the Mageia Wiki</link>"
+"based Installation CD, see <link "
+"ns2:href=\"https://wiki.mageia.org/en/Boot.iso_install\">the Mageia "
+"Wiki</link>"
 msgstr ""
 
 #. type: Content of: <section><warning><para>
@@ -1597,11 +1478,9 @@ msgstr ""
 #. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject>
 #: en/installer.xml:179
 msgid ""
-"<imageobject> <imagedata revision=\"1\" xml:id=\"installer-im2\" align="
-"\"center\" format=\"PNG\" fileref=\"../dx-help.png\"/> </imageobject>"
-msgstr ""
-"<imageobject> <imagedata revision=\"1\" xml:id=\"installer-im2\" align="
-"\"center\" format=\"PNG\" fileref=\"../dx-help.png\"/> </imageobject>"
+"<imageobject> <imagedata revision=\"1\" xml:id=\"installer-im2\" "
+"align=\"center\" format=\"PNG\" fileref=\"../dx-help.png\"/> </imageobject>"
+msgstr "<imageobject> <imagedata revision=\"1\" xml:id=\"installer-im2\" align=\"center\" format=\"PNG\" fileref=\"../dx-help.png\"/> </imageobject>"
 
 #. type: Content of: <section><section><info><title>
 #: en/installer.xml:186
@@ -1611,15 +1490,16 @@ msgstr "Instalační kroky"
 #. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
 #: en/installer.xml:189
 msgid ""
-"The install process is divided into a number of steps, which can be followed "
-"on the side panel of the screen."
+"The install process is divided into a number of steps, which can be followed"
+" on the side panel of the screen."
 msgstr ""
 
 #. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
 #: en/installer.xml:192
 msgid ""
-"Each step has one or more screens which may also have <guibutton>Advanced</"
-"guibutton> buttons with extra, less commonly required, options."
+"Each step has one or more screens which may also have "
+"<guibutton>Advanced</guibutton> buttons with extra, less commonly required, "
+"options."
 msgstr ""
 
 #. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
@@ -1637,8 +1517,8 @@ msgid ""
 "partition has been formatted or updates have started to be installed, your "
 "computer is no longer in the same state and rebooting it could very well "
 "leave you with an unusable system. If in spite of this you are very sure "
-"rebooting is what you want, go to a text terminal by pressing the three keys "
-"<guibutton>Alt Ctrl F2</guibutton> at the same time. After that, press "
+"rebooting is what you want, go to a text terminal by pressing the three keys"
+" <guibutton>Alt Ctrl F2</guibutton> at the same time. After that, press "
 "<guibutton>Alt Ctrl Delete</guibutton> simultaneously to reboot."
 msgstr ""
 
@@ -1652,7 +1532,8 @@ msgstr "Problémy při instalaci a možné řešení"
 msgid "No Graphical Interface"
 msgstr ""
 
-#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#. type: Content of:
+#. <section><section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
 #: en/installer.xml:226
 msgid ""
 "After the initial screen you did not reach the language selection screen. "
@@ -1660,14 +1541,15 @@ msgid ""
 "resolution by typing <code>vgalo</code> at the prompt."
 msgstr ""
 
-#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#. type: Content of:
+#. <section><section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
 #: en/installer.xml:233
 msgid ""
 "If the hardware is very old, a graphical installation may not be possible. "
 "In this case it is worth trying a text mode installation. To use this hit "
 "ESC at the first welcome screen and confirm with ENTER. You will be "
-"presented with a black screen with the word \"boot:\". Type \"text\" and hit "
-"ENTER. Now continue with the installation in text mode."
+"presented with a black screen with the word \"boot:\". Type \"text\" and hit"
+" ENTER. Now continue with the installation in text mode."
 msgstr ""
 
 #. type: Content of: <section><section><section><section><info><title>
@@ -1695,8 +1577,8 @@ msgstr "problém paměti RAM"
 msgid ""
 "These will rarely be needed, but in some cases the hardware may report the "
 "available RAM incorrectly. To specify this manually, you can use the "
-"<code>mem=xxxM</code> parameter, where xxx is the correct amount of RAM. e."
-"g. <code>mem=256M</code> would specify 256MB of RAM."
+"<code>mem=xxxM</code> parameter, where xxx is the correct amount of RAM. "
+"e.g. <code>mem=256M</code> would specify 256MB of RAM."
 msgstr ""
 
 #. type: Content of: <section><section><section><section><info><title>
@@ -1710,8 +1592,9 @@ msgid ""
 "If you converted your hard disk from \"basic\" format to \"dynamic\" format "
 "on Microsoft Windows, you must know that it is impossible to install Mageia "
 "on this disc. To go back to a basic disk, see the Microsoft documentation: "
-"<link ns2:href=\"http://msdn.microsoft.com/en-us/library/cc776315.aspx"
-"\">http://msdn.microsoft.com/en-us/library/cc776315.aspx</link>."
+"<link ns2:href=\"http://msdn.microsoft.com/en-"
+"us/library/cc776315.aspx\">http://msdn.microsoft.com/en-"
+"us/library/cc776315.aspx</link>."
 msgstr ""
 
 #. type: Content of: <section><info><title>
@@ -1719,20 +1602,22 @@ msgstr ""
 msgid "Updates"
 msgstr "Aktualizace"
 
-#.  Made by marja on 2012 03 30 
-#.  NEEDS TO BE REVIEWED! 
-#.  marja 20120418 removed xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns42="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg"" from section tag, trying to restore correct html filename
-#.  marja, 2012-04-24 added screenshot 
+#.  Made by marja on 2012 03 30
+#.  NEEDS TO BE REVIEWED!
+#.  marja 20120418 removed xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook"
+#. xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml"
+#. xmlns:ns42="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML"
+#. xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink"
+#. xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg"" from section tag, trying to restore
+#. correct html filename
+#.  marja, 2012-04-24 added screenshot
 #. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject>
 #: en/installUpdates.xml:13
 msgid ""
 "<imageobject> <imagedata revision=\"1\" fileref=\"dx2-installUpdates.png\" "
-"format=\"PNG\" align=\"center\" xml:id=\"installUpdates-im1\"></imagedata> </"
-"imageobject>"
-msgstr ""
-"<imageobject> <imagedata revision=\"1\" fileref=\"dx2-installUpdates.png\" "
-"format=\"PNG\" align=\"center\" xml:id=\"installUpdates-im1\"></imagedata> </"
-"imageobject>"
+"format=\"PNG\" align=\"center\" xml:id=\"installUpdates-im1\"></imagedata> "
+"</imageobject>"
+msgstr "<imageobject> <imagedata revision=\"1\" fileref=\"dx2-installUpdates.png\" format=\"PNG\" align=\"center\" xml:id=\"installUpdates-im1\"></imagedata> </imageobject>"
 
 #. type: Content of: <section><para>
 #: en/installUpdates.xml:19
@@ -1759,27 +1644,26 @@ msgstr ""
 msgid "Media Selection (Nonfree)"
 msgstr "Výběr zdrojů (Nonfree)"
 
-#.  papoteur 2013-04-11  - created 
-#.  marja 2013-04-16 added screenshot + made title longer (because it was the same as for add_supplemental_media)
-#.  marja 2013-04-16 s/in/during/ as suggested by Tristan Campbell 
-#. marja 2013-04-17 s/xml:id="media-selection"/xml:id="media_selection"/ (html filename was wrong)
+#.  papoteur 2013-04-11  - created
+#.  marja 2013-04-16 added screenshot + made title longer (because it was the
+#. same as for add_supplemental_media)
+#.  marja 2013-04-16 s/in/during/ as suggested by Tristan Campbell
+#. marja 2013-04-17 s/xml:id="media-selection"/xml:id="media_selection"/ (html
+#. filename was wrong)
 #. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject>
 #: en/media_selection.xml:12
 msgid ""
-"<imageobject> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"dx2-media_selection.png"
-"\" format=\"PNG\" revision=\"1\" xml:id=\"media_selection-im1\"/> </"
-"imageobject>"
-msgstr ""
-"<imageobject> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"dx2-media_selection.png"
-"\" format=\"PNG\" revision=\"1\" xml:id=\"media_selection-im1\"/> </"
-"imageobject>"
+"<imageobject> <imagedata align=\"center\" "
+"fileref=\"dx2-media_selection.png\" format=\"PNG\" revision=\"1\" xml:id"
+"=\"media_selection-im1\"/> </imageobject>"
+msgstr "<imageobject> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"dx2-media_selection.png\" format=\"PNG\" revision=\"1\" xml:id=\"media_selection-im1\"/> </imageobject>"
 
 #. type: Content of: <section><para>
 #: en/media_selection.xml:18
 msgid ""
 "Here you have the list of available repositories. Not all repositories are "
-"available, according to which media you use for installing. The repositories "
-"selection determines which packages will be available for selection during "
+"available, according to which media you use for installing. The repositories"
+" selection determines which packages will be available for selection during "
 "the next steps."
 msgstr ""
 
@@ -1794,8 +1678,8 @@ msgstr ""
 #: en/media_selection.xml:30
 msgid ""
 "The <emphasis>Nonfree</emphasis> repository includes packages that are free-"
-"of-charge, i.e. Mageia may redistribute them, but they contain closed-source "
-"software (hence the name - Nonfree). For example this repository includes "
+"of-charge, i.e. Mageia may redistribute them, but they contain closed-source"
+" software (hence the name - Nonfree). For example this repository includes "
 "nVidia and ATI graphics card proprietary drivers, firmware for various WiFi "
 "cards, etc."
 msgstr ""
@@ -1803,11 +1687,11 @@ msgstr ""
 #. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
 #: en/media_selection.xml:38
 msgid ""
-"The <emphasis>Tainted</emphasis> repository includes packages released under "
-"a free license. The main criteria for placing packages in this repository is "
-"that they may infringe patents and copyright laws in some countries, e.g. "
-"Multimedia codecs needed to play various audio/video files; packages needed "
-"to play commercial video DVD, etc."
+"The <emphasis>Tainted</emphasis> repository includes packages released under"
+" a free license. The main criteria for placing packages in this repository "
+"is that they may infringe patents and copyright laws in some countries, e.g."
+" Multimedia codecs needed to play various audio/video files; packages needed"
+" to play commercial video DVD, etc."
 msgstr ""
 
 #. type: Content of: <section><info><title>
@@ -1819,8 +1703,8 @@ msgstr "Minimální instalace"
 #: en/minimal-install.xml:9
 msgid ""
 "You can choose a Minimal Installation by de-selecting everything in the "
-"Package Group Selection screen, see <xref linkend=\"choosePackageGroups\"></"
-"xref>."
+"Package Group Selection screen, see <xref "
+"linkend=\"choosePackageGroups\"></xref>."
 msgstr ""
 
 #. type: Content of: <section><para>
@@ -1845,37 +1729,34 @@ msgid ""
 "<imageobject> <imagedata revision=\"1\" fileref=\"dx2-minimal-install.png\" "
 "align=\"center\" format=\"PNG\" xml:id=\"minimal-install-im1\"></imagedata> "
 "</imageobject>"
-msgstr ""
-"<imageobject> <imagedata revision=\"1\" fileref=\"dx2-minimal-install.png\" "
-"align=\"center\" format=\"PNG\" xml:id=\"minimal-install-im1\"></imagedata> "
-"</imageobject>"
+msgstr "<imageobject> <imagedata revision=\"1\" fileref=\"dx2-minimal-install.png\" align=\"center\" format=\"PNG\" xml:id=\"minimal-install-im1\"></imagedata> </imageobject>"
 
 #. type: Content of: <section><info><title>
 #: en/misc-params.xml:3
 msgid "Summary of miscellaneous parameters"
 msgstr "Souhrn různých parametrů"
 
-#.  Started by marja on 2012 03 31 
-#.  NEEDS TO BE WRITTEN AND REVIEWED! 
-#. marja - 2012 04 15 added some text, not much, unfortunately :( 
-#. marja 2012-04-24 added screenshots 
+#.  Started by marja on 2012 03 31
+#.  NEEDS TO BE WRITTEN AND REVIEWED!
+#. marja - 2012 04 15 added some text, not much, unfortunately :(
+#. marja 2012-04-24 added screenshots
 #. JohnR 2012-04-25 Added text as requested by Psec :-)
-#. marja 2012-04-24 added 2 links to other help pages 
-#. marja 2012-04-24 added some text in the drakxid-configureServices and 
-#.       the drakxid-miscellaneous section 
-#. marja 2012-04-24 corrected "Magaia" in the last paragraph 
-#. marja 2012-04-24 corrected para xml:id number in the last paragraph 
-#.  2012-05-01 marja - added You-Cheng Hsieh's section about IBus etc. 
-#.  2012-08-09 marja - replaced linkend="setupBootloaderBeginner" by linkend="setupBootloader" 
-#. 2012-12-25 marja - moved configureTimezoneUTC, selectCountry, configureServices and SecurityLevel out to separate files
+#. marja 2012-04-24 added 2 links to other help pages
+#. marja 2012-04-24 added some text in the drakxid-configureServices and
+#.       the drakxid-miscellaneous section
+#. marja 2012-04-24 corrected "Magaia" in the last paragraph
+#. marja 2012-04-24 corrected para xml:id number in the last paragraph
+#.  2012-05-01 marja - added You-Cheng Hsieh's section about IBus etc.
+#.  2012-08-09 marja - replaced linkend="setupBootloaderBeginner" by
+#. linkend="setupBootloader"
+#. 2012-12-25 marja - moved configureTimezoneUTC, selectCountry,
+#. configureServices and SecurityLevel out to separate files
 #. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject>
 #: en/misc-params.xml:33
 msgid ""
-"<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"dx2-summary.png\" revision=\"1\" align="
-"\"center\" format=\"PNG\" xml:id=\"summary-im1\" /> </imageobject>"
-msgstr ""
-"<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"dx2-summary.png\" revision=\"1\" align="
-"\"center\" format=\"PNG\" xml:id=\"summary-im1\" /> </imageobject>"
+"<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"dx2-summary.png\" revision=\"1\" "
+"align=\"center\" format=\"PNG\" xml:id=\"summary-im1\" /> </imageobject>"
+msgstr "<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"dx2-summary.png\" revision=\"1\" align=\"center\" format=\"PNG\" xml:id=\"summary-im1\" /> </imageobject>"
 
 #. type: Content of: <section><para>
 #: en/misc-params.xml:38
@@ -1900,8 +1781,8 @@ msgstr "<guilabel>Časové pásmo</guilabel>"
 #: en/misc-params.xml:52
 msgid ""
 "DrakX selected a time zone for you, depending on your preferred language. "
-"You can change it if needed. See also <xref linkend=\"configureTimezoneUTC\"/"
-">"
+"You can change it if needed. See also <xref "
+"linkend=\"configureTimezoneUTC\"/>"
 msgstr ""
 
 #. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
@@ -1945,8 +1826,8 @@ msgstr ""
 #. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
 #: en/misc-params.xml:83
 msgid ""
-"You can add extra users here. They will each get their own <literal>/home</"
-"literal> directories."
+"You can add extra users here. They will each get their own "
+"<literal>/home</literal> directories."
 msgstr ""
 
 #. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
@@ -2010,8 +1891,8 @@ msgstr "<guilabel>Zvuková karta</guilabel>:"
 #. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
 #: en/misc-params.xml:129
 msgid ""
-"The installer uses the default driver, if there is a default one. The option "
-"to select a different driver is only given when there is more than one "
+"The installer uses the default driver, if there is a default one. The option"
+" to select a different driver is only given when there is more than one "
 "driver for your card, but none of them is the default one."
 msgstr ""
 
@@ -2022,7 +1903,8 @@ msgstr "<guilabel>Grafické rozhraní</guilabel>:"
 
 #. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
 #: en/misc-params.xml:139
-msgid "This section allows you to configure your graphic card(s) and displays."
+msgid ""
+"This section allows you to configure your graphic card(s) and displays."
 msgstr ""
 
 #. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
@@ -2033,11 +1915,10 @@ msgstr ""
 #. type: Content of: <section><section><mediaobject>
 #: en/misc-params.xml:148
 msgid ""
-"<imageobject> <imagedata xml:id=\"summaryBottom-im1\" revision=\"1\" align="
-"\"center\" format=\"PNG\" fileref=\"dx2-summaryBottom.png\" /> </imageobject>"
-msgstr ""
-"<imageobject> <imagedata xml:id=\"summaryBottom-im1\" revision=\"1\" align="
-"\"center\" format=\"PNG\" fileref=\"dx2-summaryBottom.png\" /> </imageobject>"
+"<imageobject> <imagedata xml:id=\"summaryBottom-im1\" revision=\"1\" "
+"align=\"center\" format=\"PNG\" fileref=\"dx2-summaryBottom.png\" /> "
+"</imageobject>"
+msgstr "<imageobject> <imagedata xml:id=\"summaryBottom-im1\" revision=\"1\" align=\"center\" format=\"PNG\" fileref=\"dx2-summaryBottom.png\" /> </imageobject>"
 
 #. type: Content of: <section><section><info><title>
 #: en/misc-params.xml:156
@@ -2081,8 +1962,8 @@ msgstr ""
 #. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
 #: en/misc-params.xml:185
 msgid ""
-"You may need to consult your systems administrator to get the parameters you "
-"need to enter here"
+"You may need to consult your systems administrator to get the parameters you"
+" need to enter here"
 msgstr ""
 
 #. type: Content of: <section><section><info><title>
@@ -2098,8 +1979,8 @@ msgstr ""
 #. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
 #: en/misc-params.xml:202
 msgid ""
-"Here you set the Security level for your computer, in most cases the default "
-"setting (Standard) is adequate for general use."
+"Here you set the Security level for your computer, in most cases the default"
+" setting (Standard) is adequate for general use."
 msgstr ""
 
 #. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
@@ -2141,9 +2022,10 @@ msgstr ""
 #. type: Content of: <section><para>
 #: en/resizeFATChoose.xml:20
 msgid ""
-"You have more than one <application>Windows<superscript>®</superscript></"
-"application> partition.  Choose which one should be made smaller to make "
-"space for installing <application>Mageia</application>."
+"You have more than one "
+"<application>Windows<superscript>®</superscript></application> partition.  "
+"Choose which one should be made smaller to make space for installing "
+"<application>Mageia</application>."
 msgstr ""
 
 #. type: Content of: <section><info><title>
@@ -2151,18 +2033,15 @@ msgstr ""
 msgid "Security Level"
 msgstr "Úroveň zabezpečení"
 
-#.  2012-12-25 marja - moved this part out of misc-params.xml" 
-#.  2013-05-05 marja - added screenshot 
+#.  2012-12-25 marja - moved this part out of misc-params.xml"
+#.  2013-05-05 marja - added screenshot
 #. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject>
 #: en/securityLevel.xml:19
 msgid ""
 "<imageobject> <imagedata revision=\"1\" fileref=\"dx2-securityLevel.png\" "
-"align=\"center\" format=\"PNG\" xml:id=\"securityLevel-im1\"></imagedata> </"
-"imageobject>"
-msgstr ""
-"<imageobject> <imagedata revision=\"1\" fileref=\"dx2-securityLevel.png\" "
-"align=\"center\" format=\"PNG\" xml:id=\"securityLevel-im1\"></imagedata> </"
-"imageobject>"
+"align=\"center\" format=\"PNG\" xml:id=\"securityLevel-im1\"></imagedata> "
+"</imageobject>"
+msgstr "<imageobject> <imagedata revision=\"1\" fileref=\"dx2-securityLevel.png\" align=\"center\" format=\"PNG\" xml:id=\"securityLevel-im1\"></imagedata> </imageobject>"
 
 #. type: Content of: <section><para>
 #: en/securityLevel.xml:24
@@ -2208,8 +2087,8 @@ msgstr ""
 #. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para>
 #: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:17
 msgid ""
-"You can find them <link ns4:href=\"http://www.mageia.org/en/downloads/"
-"\">here</link>."
+"You can find them <link "
+"ns4:href=\"http://www.mageia.org/en/downloads/\">here</link>."
 msgstr ""
 
 #. type: Content of: <section><section><section><title>
@@ -2223,12 +2102,14 @@ msgstr ""
 msgid "Common features"
 msgstr ""
 
-#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#. type: Content of:
+#. <section><section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
 #: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:28
 msgid "These ISOs use the traditional installer called drakx."
 msgstr ""
 
-#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#. type: Content of:
+#. <section><section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
 #: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:32
 msgid ""
 "They are able to make a clean install or an update from previous releases."
@@ -2239,24 +2120,28 @@ msgstr ""
 msgid "DVD"
 msgstr "DVD"
 
-#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#. type: Content of:
+#. <section><section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
 #: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:43
 msgid "Different media for architecture 32 or 64 bits."
 msgstr ""
 
-#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#. type: Content of:
+#. <section><section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
 #: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:47
 msgid ""
 "Some tools are available in the Welcome screen: Rescue System, Memory Test, "
 "Hardware Detection Tool."
 msgstr ""
 
-#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#. type: Content of:
+#. <section><section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
 #: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:52
 msgid "Each DVD contains many available desktop environments and languages."
 msgstr ""
 
-#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#. type: Content of:
+#. <section><section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
 #: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:57
 msgid ""
 "You'll be given the choice during the installation to add non free software."
@@ -2267,26 +2152,30 @@ msgstr ""
 msgid "DVD dual arch"
 msgstr ""
 
-#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#. type: Content of:
+#. <section><section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
 #: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:68
 msgid ""
 "Both architectures are present on the same medium, the choice is made "
 "automatically according to the detected CPU."
 msgstr ""
 
-#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#. type: Content of:
+#. <section><section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
 #: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:73
 msgid "Uses Xfce desktop only."
 msgstr ""
 
-#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#. type: Content of:
+#. <section><section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
 #: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:77
 msgid ""
 "Not all languages are available. (be, bg, ca, de, en, es, fr, it, mk, pl, "
 "pt, ru, sv, uk) TO BE CHECKED!"
 msgstr ""
 
-#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#. type: Content of:
+#. <section><section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
 #: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:82
 msgid "It contains non free software."
 msgstr ""
@@ -2296,33 +2185,38 @@ msgstr ""
 msgid "Live media"
 msgstr ""
 
-#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#. type: Content of:
+#. <section><section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
 #: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:96
 msgid ""
 "Can be used to preview the distribution without installing it on a HDD, and "
 "optionally install Mageia on to your HDD."
 msgstr ""
 
-#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#. type: Content of:
+#. <section><section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
 #: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:102
 msgid "Each ISO contains only one desktop environment (KDE or GNOME)."
 msgstr ""
 
-#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#. type: Content of:
+#. <section><section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
 #: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:107 en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:171
 #: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:189 en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:218
 msgid "Different media for 32 or 64 bit architectures."
 msgstr ""
 
-#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#. type: Content of:
+#. <section><section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
 #: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:111
 msgid ""
 "<emphasis role=\"bold\">Live ISOs can only be used to create clean "
-"installations, they cannot be used to upgrade from previous releases.</"
-"emphasis>"
+"installations, they cannot be used to upgrade from previous "
+"releases.</emphasis>"
 msgstr ""
 
-#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#. type: Content of:
+#. <section><section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
 #: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:117
 msgid "They contain non free software."
 msgstr ""
@@ -2332,18 +2226,21 @@ msgstr ""
 msgid "Live CD KDE"
 msgstr ""
 
-#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#. type: Content of:
+#. <section><section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
 #: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:127 en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:163
 msgid "KDE desktop environment only."
 msgstr ""
 
-#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#. type: Content of:
+#. <section><section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
 #: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:131 en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:149
 #: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:222
 msgid "English language only."
 msgstr ""
 
-#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#. type: Content of:
+#. <section><section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
 #: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:135 en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:153
 msgid "32 bit only."
 msgstr ""
@@ -2353,7 +2250,8 @@ msgstr ""
 msgid "Live CD GNOME"
 msgstr ""
 
-#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#. type: Content of:
+#. <section><section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
 #: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:145 en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:181
 msgid "GNOME desktop environment only."
 msgstr ""
@@ -2363,7 +2261,8 @@ msgstr ""
 msgid "Live DVD KDE"
 msgstr ""
 
-#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#. type: Content of:
+#. <section><section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
 #: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:167 en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:185
 msgid "All languages are present."
 msgstr ""
@@ -2378,16 +2277,19 @@ msgstr ""
 msgid "Boot-only CD media"
 msgstr ""
 
-#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#. type: Content of:
+#. <section><section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
 #: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:203
 msgid ""
-"Each one is a small image that contains no more than that which is needed to "
-"start the drakx installer and find drakx-installer-stage2 and other packages "
-"that are needed to continue and complete the install. These packages may be "
-"on the PC hard disk, on a local drive, on a local network or on the Internet."
+"Each one is a small image that contains no more than that which is needed to"
+" start the drakx installer and find drakx-installer-stage2 and other "
+"packages that are needed to continue and complete the install. These "
+"packages may be on the PC hard disk, on a local drive, on a local network or"
+" on the Internet."
 msgstr ""
 
-#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#. type: Content of:
+#. <section><section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
 #: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:212
 msgid ""
 "These media are very light (less than 100 MB) and are convenient when "
@@ -2400,7 +2302,8 @@ msgstr ""
 msgid "boot.iso"
 msgstr ""
 
-#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#. type: Content of:
+#. <section><section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
 #: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:232
 msgid ""
 "Contains only free software, for those people who refuse to use non-free "
@@ -2412,7 +2315,8 @@ msgstr ""
 msgid "boot-nonfree.iso"
 msgstr ""
 
-#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#. type: Content of:
+#. <section><section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
 #: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:243
 msgid ""
 "Contains non-free software (mostly drivers, codecs...) for people who need "
@@ -2432,25 +2336,25 @@ msgstr ""
 #. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para>
 #: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:257
 msgid ""
-"Once you have chosen your ISO file, you can download it using either http or "
-"BitTorrent. In both cases, a window gives you some information, such as the "
-"mirror in use and the possibility to change if the bandwidth is to low. If "
+"Once you have chosen your ISO file, you can download it using either http or"
+" BitTorrent. In both cases, a window gives you some information, such as the"
+" mirror in use and the possibility to change if the bandwidth is to low. If "
 "http is chosen, you may also see something like"
 msgstr ""
 
 #. type: Content of: <section><section><section><mediaobject>
 #: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:264
 msgid ""
-"<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"Checking.png\" contentwidth=\"650\"/> </"
-"imageobject>"
+"<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"Checking.png\" contentwidth=\"650\"/> "
+"</imageobject>"
 msgstr ""
 
 #. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para>
 #: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:269
 msgid ""
 "md5sum and sha1sum are tools to check the ISO integrity. Use only one of "
-"them. Both hexadecimal numbers have been calculated by an algorithm from the "
-"file to be downloaded. When you ask these algorithms to recalculate this "
+"them. Both hexadecimal numbers have been calculated by an algorithm from the"
+" file to be downloaded. When you ask these algorithms to recalculate this "
 "number from your downloaded file, either you have the same number and your "
 "downloaded file is correct, or the number is different and you have a "
 "failure. A failure infers that you should retry the download.Then this "
@@ -2480,29 +2384,29 @@ msgstr ""
 #. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para>
 #: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:291
 msgid ""
-"- To use md5sum, type: [sam@localhost]$ <userinput>md5sum path/to/the/image/"
-"file.iso</userinput>."
+"- To use md5sum, type: [sam@localhost]$ <userinput>md5sum "
+"path/to/the/image/file.iso</userinput>."
 msgstr ""
 
 #. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para>
 #: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:294
 msgid ""
-"- To use sha1sum, type: [sam@localhost]$ <userinput>sha1sum path/to/the/"
-"image/file.iso</userinput>."
+"- To use sha1sum, type: [sam@localhost]$ <userinput>sha1sum "
+"path/to/the/image/file.iso</userinput>."
 msgstr ""
 
 #. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para>
 #: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:297
 msgid ""
-"and compare the obtained number on your computer (you may have to wait for a "
-"while) with the number given by Mageia. Example:"
+"and compare the obtained number on your computer (you may have to wait for a"
+" while) with the number given by Mageia. Example:"
 msgstr ""
 
 #. type: Content of: <section><section><section><mediaobject>
 #: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:301
 msgid ""
-"<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"Md5sum.png\" contentwidth=\"650\"/> </"
-"imageobject>"
+"<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"Md5sum.png\" contentwidth=\"650\"/> "
+"</imageobject>"
 msgstr ""
 
 #. type: Content of: <section><section><title>
@@ -2527,8 +2431,9 @@ msgstr ""
 msgid ""
 "Use whatever burner you wish but ensure the burning device is set correctly "
 "to <emphasis role=\"bold\">burn an image</emphasis>, burn data or files is "
-"not correct.  There is more information in <link ns4:href=\"https://wiki."
-"mageia.org/en/Writing_CD_and_DVD_images\">the Mageia wiki</link>."
+"not correct.  There is more information in <link "
+"ns4:href=\"https://wiki.mageia.org/en/Writing_CD_and_DVD_images\">the Mageia"
+" wiki</link>."
 msgstr ""
 
 #. type: Content of: <section><section><section><title>
@@ -2564,8 +2469,8 @@ msgstr ""
 #. type: Content of: <section><section><section><section><para>
 #: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:342
 msgid ""
-"You can use a graphical tool like <link ns4:href=\"https://wiki.mageia.org/"
-"en/IsoDumper_Writing_ISO_images_on_USB_sticks\">IsoDumper</link>"
+"You can use a graphical tool like <link "
+"ns4:href=\"https://wiki.mageia.org/en/IsoDumper_Writing_ISO_images_on_USB_sticks\">IsoDumper</link>"
 msgstr ""
 
 #. type: Content of: <section><section><section><section><para>
@@ -2573,76 +2478,88 @@ msgstr ""
 msgid "You can also use the dd tool in a console:"
 msgstr ""
 
-#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><section><orderedlist><listitem><para>
+#. type: Content of:
+#. <section><section><section><section><orderedlist><listitem><para>
 #: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:348
 msgid "Open a console"
 msgstr ""
 
-#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><section><orderedlist><listitem><para>
+#. type: Content of:
+#. <section><section><section><section><orderedlist><listitem><para>
 #: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:352
 msgid ""
 "Become root with the command <userinput>su -</userinput> (don't forget the "
 "final '-' )"
 msgstr ""
 
-#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><section><orderedlist><listitem><mediaobject>
+#. type: Content of:
+#. <section><section><section><section><orderedlist><listitem><mediaobject>
 #: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:355
 msgid ""
-"<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"Root.png\" contentwidth=\"650\"/> </"
-"imageobject>"
+"<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"Root.png\" contentwidth=\"650\"/> "
+"</imageobject>"
 msgstr ""
 
-#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><section><orderedlist><listitem><para>
+#. type: Content of:
+#. <section><section><section><section><orderedlist><listitem><para>
 #: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:362
 msgid ""
 "Plug your USB stick (do not mount it, this also means do not open any "
 "application or file manager that could access or read it)"
 msgstr ""
 
-#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><section><orderedlist><listitem><para>
+#. type: Content of:
+#. <section><section><section><section><orderedlist><listitem><para>
 #: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:367
 msgid "Enter the command <userinput>fdisk -l</userinput>"
 msgstr ""
 
-#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><section><orderedlist><listitem><mediaobject>
+#. type: Content of:
+#. <section><section><section><section><orderedlist><listitem><mediaobject>
 #: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:370
 msgid ""
-"<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"Fdisk.png\" contentwidth=\"650\"/> </"
-"imageobject>"
+"<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"Fdisk.png\" contentwidth=\"650\"/> "
+"</imageobject>"
 msgstr ""
 
-#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><section><orderedlist><listitem><para>
+#. type: Content of:
+#. <section><section><section><section><orderedlist><listitem><para>
 #: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:377
 msgid ""
 "Find the device name for your USB stick (by its size), for example /dev/sdb "
 "in the screenshot above, it is a 8Go USB stick."
 msgstr ""
 
-#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><section><orderedlist><listitem><para>
+#. type: Content of:
+#. <section><section><section><section><orderedlist><listitem><para>
 #: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:383
 msgid ""
 "Enter the command: # <userinput>dd if=path/to/the/ISO/file of=/dev/sdX "
 "bs=1M</userinput>"
 msgstr ""
 
-#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><section><orderedlist><listitem><para>
+#. type: Content of:
+#. <section><section><section><section><orderedlist><listitem><para>
 #: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:386
 msgid "Where X=your device name eg: /dev/sdc"
 msgstr ""
 
-#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><section><orderedlist><listitem><para>
+#. type: Content of:
+#. <section><section><section><section><orderedlist><listitem><para>
 #: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:387
 msgid ""
-"Example: # <userinput>dd if=/home/user/Downloads/Mageia-4-x86_64-DVD.iso of=/"
-"dev/sdb bs=1M</userinput>"
+"Example: # <userinput>dd if=/home/user/Downloads/Mageia-4-x86_64-DVD.iso "
+"of=/dev/sdb bs=1M</userinput>"
 msgstr ""
 
-#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><section><orderedlist><listitem><para>
+#. type: Content of:
+#. <section><section><section><section><orderedlist><listitem><para>
 #: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:392
 msgid "Enter the command: # <userinput>sync</userinput>"
 msgstr ""
 
-#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><section><orderedlist><listitem><para>
+#. type: Content of:
+#. <section><section><section><section><orderedlist><listitem><para>
 #: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:396
 msgid "Unplug your USB stick, it is done"
 msgstr ""
@@ -2677,15 +2594,16 @@ msgstr ""
 #. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
 #: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:418
 msgid ""
-"This step is detailed in <link ns4:href=\"http://www.mageia.org/en/doc/"
-"\">the Mageia documentation</link>."
+"This step is detailed in <link "
+"ns4:href=\"http://www.mageia.org/en/doc/\">the Mageia documentation</link>."
 msgstr ""
 
 #. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
 #: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:420
 msgid ""
-"More information is available in <link ns4:href=\"https://wiki.mageia.org/en/"
-"Category:Documentation\">the Mageia wiki</link>."
+"More information is available in <link "
+"ns4:href=\"https://wiki.mageia.org/en/Category:Documentation\">the Mageia "
+"wiki</link>."
 msgstr ""
 
 #. type: Content of: <section><info><title>
@@ -2693,18 +2611,15 @@ msgstr ""
 msgid "Select your Country / Region"
 msgstr ""
 
-#.  2012-12-25 marja - moved this section out of misc-params 
-#.  2013-05-05 marja - added screenshot 
+#.  2012-12-25 marja - moved this section out of misc-params
+#.  2013-05-05 marja - added screenshot
 #. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject>
 #: en/selectCountry.xml:21
 msgid ""
 "<imageobject> <imagedata revision=\"1\" fileref=\"dx2-selectCountry.png\" "
-"align=\"center\" format=\"PNG\" xml:id=\"selectCountry-im1\"></imagedata> </"
-"imageobject>"
-msgstr ""
-"<imageobject> <imagedata revision=\"1\" fileref=\"dx2-selectCountry.png\" "
-"align=\"center\" format=\"PNG\" xml:id=\"selectCountry-im1\"></imagedata> </"
-"imageobject>"
+"align=\"center\" format=\"PNG\" xml:id=\"selectCountry-im1\"></imagedata> "
+"</imageobject>"
+msgstr "<imageobject> <imagedata revision=\"1\" fileref=\"dx2-selectCountry.png\" align=\"center\" format=\"PNG\" xml:id=\"selectCountry-im1\"></imagedata> </imageobject>"
 
 #. type: Content of: <section><para>
 #: en/selectCountry.xml:27
@@ -2717,8 +2632,8 @@ msgstr ""
 #. type: Content of: <section><para>
 #: en/selectCountry.xml:32
 msgid ""
-"If your country isn't in the list, click the <guilabel>Other Countries</"
-"guilabel> button and choose your country / region there."
+"If your country isn't in the list, click the <guilabel>Other "
+"Countries</guilabel> button and choose your country / region there."
 msgstr ""
 
 #. type: Content of: <section><note><para>
@@ -2739,13 +2654,13 @@ msgstr "Vstupní metoda"
 #: en/selectCountry.xml:49
 msgid ""
 "In the <guilabel>Other Countries</guilabel> screen you can also select an "
-"input method (at the bottom of the list). Input methods allow users to input "
-"multilingual characters (Chinese, Japanese, Korean, etc). IBus is the "
+"input method (at the bottom of the list). Input methods allow users to input"
+" multilingual characters (Chinese, Japanese, Korean, etc). IBus is the "
 "default input method in Mageia DVDs, Africa/India and Asia/no-India Live-"
-"CDs. For Asian and African locales, IBus will be set as default input method "
-"so users should not need to configure it manually. Other input methods(SCIM, "
-"GCIN, HIME, etc) also provide similar functions and can be installed if you "
-"added HTTP/FTP media before package selection."
+"CDs. For Asian and African locales, IBus will be set as default input method"
+" so users should not need to configure it manually. Other input "
+"methods(SCIM, GCIN, HIME, etc) also provide similar functions and can be "
+"installed if you added HTTP/FTP media before package selection."
 msgstr ""
 
 #. type: Content of: <section><section><note><para>
@@ -2764,11 +2679,9 @@ msgstr "Instalace nebo Aktualizace"
 #. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject>
 #: en/selectInstallClass.xml:25
 msgid ""
-"<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"dx2-selectInstallClass.png\" align="
-"\"center\" format=\"PNG\"></imagedata> </imageobject>"
-msgstr ""
-"<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"dx2-selectInstallClass.png\" align="
-"\"center\" format=\"PNG\"></imagedata> </imageobject>"
+"<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"dx2-selectInstallClass.png\" "
+"align=\"center\" format=\"PNG\"></imagedata> </imageobject>"
+msgstr "<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"dx2-selectInstallClass.png\" align=\"center\" format=\"PNG\"></imagedata> </imageobject>"
 
 #. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
 #: en/selectInstallClass.xml:32
@@ -2800,30 +2713,30 @@ msgid ""
 "Only upgrading from a previous Mageia version that was <emphasis>still "
 "supported</emphasis> when this installer's version was released, has been "
 "thoroughly tested. If you want to upgrade a Mageia version that had already "
-"reached its End\tOf Life when this one was released, then it is better to do "
-"a clean install while preserving your <literal>/home</literal> partition."
+"reached its End\tOf Life when this one was released, then it is better to do"
+" a clean install while preserving your <literal>/home</literal> partition."
 msgstr ""
 
 #. type: Content of: <section><note><para>
 #: en/selectInstallClass.xml:56
 msgid ""
 "If during install you decide to stop the installation, it is possible to "
-"reboot, but please think twice before you do this. Once a partition has been "
-"formatted or updates have started to be installed, your computer isn't in "
+"reboot, but please think twice before you do this. Once a partition has been"
+" formatted or updates have started to be installed, your computer isn't in "
 "the same state anymore and rebooting it could very well leave you with an "
-"unusable system. If in spite of that you are very sure rebooting is what you "
-"want, go to a text terminal by pressing the three keys <guilabel>Alt Ctrl "
-"F2</guilabel> at the same time. After that, press <guilabel>Alt Ctrl Delete</"
-"guilabel> simultaneously to reboot."
+"unusable system. If in spite of that you are very sure rebooting is what you"
+" want, go to a text terminal by pressing the three keys <guilabel>Alt Ctrl "
+"F2</guilabel> at the same time. After that, press <guilabel>Alt Ctrl "
+"Delete</guilabel> simultaneously to reboot."
 msgstr ""
 
 #. type: Content of: <section><tip><para>
 #: en/selectInstallClass.xml:67
 msgid ""
-"If you have discovered that you forgot to select an additional language, you "
-"can return from the \"Install or Upgrade\" screen to the language choice "
-"screen by pressing <guilabel>Alt Ctrl Home</guilabel>. Do <emphasis>not</"
-"emphasis> do this later in the install."
+"If you have discovered that you forgot to select an additional language, you"
+" can return from the \"Install or Upgrade\" screen to the language choice "
+"screen by pressing <guilabel>Alt Ctrl Home</guilabel>. Do "
+"<emphasis>not</emphasis> do this later in the install."
 msgstr ""
 
 #. type: Content of: <section><info><title>
@@ -2836,46 +2749,40 @@ msgstr "Klávesnice"
 msgid ""
 "DrakX selects an appropriate keyboard for your language. If no suitable "
 "keyboard is found it will default to a US keyboard layout."
-msgstr ""
-"DrakX vybere vhodnou klávesnici pro váš jazyk. Pokud není nalezena žádná "
-"vhodná klávesnice, bude jako výchozí použito rozložení klávesnice US."
+msgstr "DrakX vybere vhodnou klávesnici pro váš jazyk. Pokud není nalezena žádná vhodná klávesnice, bude jako výchozí použito rozložení klávesnice US."
 
 #. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject>
 #: en/selectKeyboard.xml:22
 msgid ""
-"<imageobject> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"dx2-selectKeyboard.png"
-"\" /> </imageobject>"
-msgstr ""
-"<imageobject> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"dx2-selectKeyboard.png"
-"\" /> </imageobject>"
+"<imageobject> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"dx2-selectKeyboard.png\""
+" /> </imageobject>"
+msgstr "<imageobject> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"dx2-selectKeyboard.png\" /> </imageobject>"
 
 #. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
 #: en/selectKeyboard.xml:30
 msgid ""
 "Make sure that the selection is correct or choose another keyboard layout. "
-"If you don't know which layout your keyboard has, look in the specifications "
-"that came with your system, or ask the computer vendor. There may even be a "
-"label on the keyboard that identifies the layout. You can also look here: "
-"<link xlink:href=\"http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Keyboard_layout\">en."
-"wikipedia.org/wiki/Keyboard_layout</link>"
+"If you don't know which layout your keyboard has, look in the specifications"
+" that came with your system, or ask the computer vendor. There may even be a"
+" label on the keyboard that identifies the layout. You can also look here: "
+"<link "
+"xlink:href=\"http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Keyboard_layout\">en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Keyboard_layout</link>"
 msgstr ""
 
 #. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
 #: en/selectKeyboard.xml:40
 msgid ""
-"If your keyboard isn't in the list shown, click on <guibutton>More</"
-"guibutton> to get a full list, and select your keyboard there."
-msgstr ""
-"Pokud vaše klávesnice není v zobrazeném seznamu, klepněte na "
-"<guibutton>Více</guibutton> pro získání úplného seznamu a vyberte klávesnici "
-"tam."
+"If your keyboard isn't in the list shown, click on "
+"<guibutton>More</guibutton> to get a full list, and select your keyboard "
+"there."
+msgstr "Pokud vaše klávesnice není v zobrazeném seznamu, klepněte na <guibutton>Více</guibutton> pro získání úplného seznamu a vyberte klávesnici tam."
 
 #. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para><warning><para>
 #: en/selectKeyboard.xml:45
 msgid ""
 "After choosing a keyboard from the <guibutton>More</guibutton> dialog, "
-"you'll return to the first keyboard choice dialog and it will seem as though "
-"a keyboard from that screen was chosen. You can safely ignore this anomaly "
+"you'll return to the first keyboard choice dialog and it will seem as though"
+" a keyboard from that screen was chosen. You can safely ignore this anomaly "
 "and continue the installation: Your keyboard is the one you chose from the "
 "full list."
 msgstr ""
@@ -2906,24 +2813,22 @@ msgstr ""
 msgid ""
 "If it is likely that you will require several languages installed on your "
 "system, for yourself or other users, then you should use the "
-"<guibutton>Multiple languages</guibutton> button to add them now. It will be "
-"difficult to add extra language support after installation."
+"<guibutton>Multiple languages</guibutton> button to add them now. It will be"
+" difficult to add extra language support after installation."
 msgstr ""
 
 #. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject>
 #: en/selectLanguage.xml:36
 msgid ""
-"<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"dx2-selectLanguage.png\" align=\"center\" "
-"format=\"PNG\" > </imagedata> </imageobject>"
-msgstr ""
-"<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"dx2-selectLanguage.png\" align=\"center\" "
-"format=\"PNG\" > </imagedata> </imageobject>"
+"<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"dx2-selectLanguage.png\" align=\"center\""
+" format=\"PNG\" > </imagedata> </imageobject>"
+msgstr "<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"dx2-selectLanguage.png\" align=\"center\" format=\"PNG\" > </imagedata> </imageobject>"
 
 #. type: Content of: <section><warning><para>
 #: en/selectLanguage.xml:44
 msgid ""
-"Even if you choose more than one language, you must first choose one of them "
-"as your preferred language in the first language screen. It will also be "
+"Even if you choose more than one language, you must first choose one of them"
+" as your preferred language in the first language screen. It will also be "
 "marked as chosen in the multiple languages screen ."
 msgstr ""
 
@@ -2954,33 +2859,30 @@ msgstr ""
 msgid "Select mouse"
 msgstr "Výběr myši"
 
-#.  Made by marja on 2012 04 11 
-#.  NEEDS TO BE REVIEWED! 
-#.  adding some "real" text now that we know the page shows up in the right place
-#.  marja 2012-04-24 adding screenshot 
+#.  Made by marja on 2012 04 11
+#.  NEEDS TO BE REVIEWED!
+#.  adding some "real" text now that we know the page shows up in the right
+#. place
+#.  marja 2012-04-24 adding screenshot
 #. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject>
 #: en/selectMouse.xml:16
 msgid ""
 "<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"dx2-selectMouse.png\" align=\"center\" "
 "format=\"PNG\" > </imagedata> </imageobject>"
-msgstr ""
-"<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"dx2-selectMouse.png\" align=\"center\" "
-"format=\"PNG\" > </imagedata> </imageobject>"
+msgstr "<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"dx2-selectMouse.png\" align=\"center\" format=\"PNG\" > </imagedata> </imageobject>"
 
 #. type: Content of: <section><para>
 #: en/selectMouse.xml:23
 msgid ""
 "If you are not happy with how your mouse responds, you can select a "
 "different one here."
-msgstr ""
-"Pokud nejste spokojeni s tím, jak vaše myš reaguje, můžete zde vybrat jiný "
-"typ."
+msgstr "Pokud nejste spokojeni s tím, jak vaše myš reaguje, můžete zde vybrat jiný typ."
 
 #. type: Content of: <section><para>
 #: en/selectMouse.xml:25
 msgid ""
-"Usually, <guilabel>Universal</guilabel> - <guilabel>Any PS/2 and USB mice</"
-"guilabel> is a good choice."
+"Usually, <guilabel>Universal</guilabel> - <guilabel>Any PS/2 and USB "
+"mice</guilabel> is a good choice."
 msgstr ""
 
 #. type: Content of: <section><para>
@@ -2997,15 +2899,11 @@ msgstr "Přidaní nebo změna položky v nabídce zavaděče"
 
 #. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject>
 #: en/setupBootloaderAddEntry.xml:8
-#, fuzzy
 msgid ""
-"<imageobject> <imagedata revision=\"1\" fileref=\"dx2-"
-"bootloaderConfiguration.png\" align=\"center\" format=\"PNG\" xml:id="
-"\"bootloaderConfiguration-im1\"/> </imageobject>"
+"<imageobject> <imagedata revision=\"1\" "
+"fileref=\"dx2-bootloaderConfiguration.png\" align=\"center\" format=\"PNG\" "
+"xml:id=\"bootloaderConfiguration-im1\"/> </imageobject>"
 msgstr ""
-"<imageobject> <imagedata revision=\"1\" fileref=\"dx2-"
-"bootloaderConfiguration.png\" format=\"PNG\" align=\"center\" xml:id="
-"\"bootloaderConfiguration-im1\"></imagedata> </imageobject>"
 
 #. type: Content of: <section><para>
 #: en/setupBootloaderAddEntry.xml:13
@@ -3020,20 +2918,17 @@ msgstr ""
 msgid ""
 "If you have chosen <code>Grub 2</code> as your bootloader, you cannot use "
 "this tool to edit entries at this step, press 'Next'. You need to manually "
-"edit <code>/boot/grub2/custom.cfg</code> or use <code>grub-customizer</code> "
-"instead."
+"edit <code>/boot/grub2/custom.cfg</code> or use <code>grub-customizer</code>"
+" instead."
 msgstr ""
 
 #. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject>
 #: en/setupBootloaderAddEntry.xml:25
-#, fuzzy
 msgid ""
 "<imageobject> <imagedata revision=\"1\" xml:id=\"setupBootloaderAddEntry-"
-"im1\" align=\"center\" format=\"PNG\" fileref=\"dx2-setupBootloaderAddEntry."
-"png\"/> </imageobject>"
+"im1\" align=\"center\" format=\"PNG\" "
+"fileref=\"dx2-setupBootloaderAddEntry.png\"/> </imageobject>"
 msgstr ""
-"<imageobject> <imagedata revision=\"1\" xml:id=\"installer-im2\" align="
-"\"center\" format=\"PNG\" fileref=\"../dx-help.png\"/> </imageobject>"
 
 #. type: Content of: <section><para>
 #: en/setupBootloaderAddEntry.xml:30
@@ -3067,31 +2962,31 @@ msgstr ""
 msgid "Bootloader main options"
 msgstr "Základní nastavení zaváděcího programu"
 
-#.  2012-08-12 Copied this page, setupBootloader.xml,  from setupBootloaderBeginner.xml and REMOVED the string "Beginner" everywhere, except in this sentence.  
-#.  2013-3-30 Removed refernce to bootloader expert page and suggest using grub2 where other grub2 systems exist
+#.  2012-08-12 Copied this page, setupBootloader.xml,  from
+#. setupBootloaderBeginner.xml and REMOVED the string "Beginner" everywhere,
+#. except in this sentence.
+#.  2013-3-30 Removed refernce to bootloader expert page and suggest using
+#. grub2 where other grub2 systems exist
 #. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject>
 #: en/setupBootloader.xml:11
 msgid ""
-"<imageobject> <imagedata revision=\"1\" align=\"center\" fileref=\"dx2-"
-"setupBootloader.png\" xml:id=\"setupBootloader-im1\" format=\"PNG\" /> </"
-"imageobject>"
-msgstr ""
-"<imageobject> <imagedata revision=\"1\" align=\"center\" fileref=\"dx2-"
-"setupBootloader.png\" xml:id=\"setupBootloader-im1\" format=\"PNG\" /> </"
-"imageobject>"
+"<imageobject> <imagedata revision=\"1\" align=\"center\" "
+"fileref=\"dx2-setupBootloader.png\" xml:id=\"setupBootloader-im1\" "
+"format=\"PNG\" /> </imageobject>"
+msgstr "<imageobject> <imagedata revision=\"1\" align=\"center\" fileref=\"dx2-setupBootloader.png\" xml:id=\"setupBootloader-im1\" format=\"PNG\" /> </imageobject>"
 
 #. type: Content of: <section><para>
 #: en/setupBootloader.xml:16
 msgid ""
-"If you prefer different bootloader settings to those chosen automatically by "
-"the installer, you can change them here."
+"If you prefer different bootloader settings to those chosen automatically by"
+" the installer, you can change them here."
 msgstr ""
 
 #. type: Content of: <section><para>
 #: en/setupBootloader.xml:20
 msgid ""
-"You may already have another operating system on your machine, in which case "
-"you need to decide whether to add Mageia to your existing bootloader, or "
+"You may already have another operating system on your machine, in which case"
+" you need to decide whether to add Mageia to your existing bootloader, or "
 "allow Mageia to create a new one."
 msgstr ""
 
@@ -3145,16 +3040,16 @@ msgstr ""
 #: en/setupBootloader.xml:60
 msgid ""
 "If you decide to use an existing bootloader then you will need to remember "
-"to STOP at the summary page during the installation and click the Bootloader "
-"<guibutton>Configure</guibutton> button, which will allow you to change the "
-"bootloader install location."
+"to STOP at the summary page during the installation and click the Bootloader"
+" <guibutton>Configure</guibutton> button, which will allow you to change the"
+" bootloader install location."
 msgstr ""
 
 #. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
 #: en/setupBootloader.xml:66
 msgid ""
-"Do not select a device e.g.\"sda\", or you will overwrite your existing MBR. "
-"You must select the root partition that you chose during the partitioning "
+"Do not select a device e.g.\"sda\", or you will overwrite your existing MBR."
+" You must select the root partition that you chose during the partitioning "
 "phase earlier, e.g.  sda7."
 msgstr ""
 
@@ -3167,8 +3062,8 @@ msgstr ""
 #: en/setupBootloader.xml:75
 msgid ""
 "Go to tty2 with Ctrl+Alt+F2 and type <literal>df</literal> to check where "
-"your <literal>/</literal> (root) partition is. Ctrl+Alt+F7 takes you back to "
-"the installer screen."
+"your <literal>/</literal> (root) partition is. Ctrl+Alt+F7 takes you back to"
+" the installer screen."
 msgstr ""
 
 #. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
@@ -3176,8 +3071,8 @@ msgstr ""
 msgid ""
 "The exact procedure for adding your Mageia system to an existing bootloader "
 "is beyond the scope of this help, however in most cases it will involve "
-"running the relevant bootloader installation program which should detect and "
-"add it automatically. See the documentation for the operating system in "
+"running the relevant bootloader installation program which should detect and"
+" add it automatically. See the documentation for the operating system in "
 "question."
 msgstr ""
 
@@ -3190,9 +3085,9 @@ msgstr ""
 #: en/setupBootloader.xml:95
 msgid ""
 "If you have very limited disk space for the <literal>/</literal> partition "
-"that contains <literal>/tmp</literal>, click on <guibutton>Advanced</"
-"guibutton> and check the box for <guilabel>Clean /tmp at each boot</"
-"guilabel>. This helps to maintain some free space."
+"that contains <literal>/tmp</literal>, click on "
+"<guibutton>Advanced</guibutton> and check the box for <guilabel>Clean /tmp "
+"at each boot</guilabel>. This helps to maintain some free space."
 msgstr ""
 
 #. type: Content of: <section><info><title>
@@ -3200,41 +3095,38 @@ msgstr ""
 msgid "Setup SCSI"
 msgstr "Nastavení SCSI"
 
-#.  Made by marja on 2012 04 02 
-#.  NEEDS TO BE REVIEWED! 
-#.  JohnR - edited 2012-03-03 
-#.  SimonNZG has reviewed 2012-04-03 (changed editted to edited in JohnR's comment ;-) 
-#.  barjac has re-reviewed and made some minor tweaks. Revisions incremented. 
-#.  marja 2012-04-24 added screenshot 
-#.  marja 2012-04-25 replacing John's version 1.6 because that one was based on the
-#.        Mdv doc instead of on our setupSCSI file 
+#.  Made by marja on 2012 04 02
+#.  NEEDS TO BE REVIEWED!
+#.  JohnR - edited 2012-03-03
+#.  SimonNZG has reviewed 2012-04-03 (changed editted to edited in JohnR's
+#. comment ;-)
+#.  barjac has re-reviewed and made some minor tweaks. Revisions incremented.
+#.  marja 2012-04-24 added screenshot
+#.  marja 2012-04-25 replacing John's version 1.6 because that one was based
+#. on the
+#.        Mdv doc instead of on our setupSCSI file
 #. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject>
 #: en/setupSCSI.xml:26
 msgid ""
-"<imageobject> <imagedata revision=\"1\" fileref=\"dx2-setupSCSI.png\" format="
-"\"PNG\" align=\"center\" xml:id=\"setupSCSI-im1\"></imagedata> </imageobject>"
-msgstr ""
-"<imageobject> <imagedata revision=\"1\" fileref=\"dx2-setupSCSI.png\" format="
-"\"PNG\" align=\"center\" xml:id=\"setupSCSI-im1\"></imagedata> </imageobject>"
+"<imageobject> <imagedata revision=\"1\" fileref=\"dx2-setupSCSI.png\" "
+"format=\"PNG\" align=\"center\" xml:id=\"setupSCSI-im1\"></imagedata> "
+"</imageobject>"
+msgstr "<imageobject> <imagedata revision=\"1\" fileref=\"dx2-setupSCSI.png\" format=\"PNG\" align=\"center\" xml:id=\"setupSCSI-im1\"></imagedata> </imageobject>"
 
 #. type: Content of: <section><para>
 #: en/setupSCSI.xml:32
 msgid ""
-"DrakX usually detects hard disks correctly. With some older SCSI controllers "
-"it may be unable to determine the correct drivers to use and subsequently "
+"DrakX usually detects hard disks correctly. With some older SCSI controllers"
+" it may be unable to determine the correct drivers to use and subsequently "
 "fail to recognise the drive."
-msgstr ""
-"DrakX obvykle zjistí pevné disky správně. U některých starších řadičů SCSI "
-"může být schopen určit a použít správné ovladače, ale následně nedokáže "
-"rozpoznat disk."
+msgstr "DrakX obvykle zjistí pevné disky správně. U některých starších řadičů SCSI může být schopen určit a použít správné ovladače, ale následně nedokáže rozpoznat disk."
 
 #. type: Content of: <section><para>
 #: en/setupSCSI.xml:36
 msgid ""
 "If this happens, you will need to manually tell Drakx which SCSI drive(s) "
 "you have."
-msgstr ""
-"Pokud k tomuto dojde, budete muset ručně říci Drakx, jaký disk(y) SCSI máte."
+msgstr "Pokud k tomuto dojde, budete muset ručně říci Drakx, jaký disk(y) SCSI máte."
 
 #. type: Content of: <section><para>
 #: en/setupSCSI.xml:39
@@ -3246,15 +3138,13 @@ msgstr "DrakX by pak měl být schopen správně nakonfigurovat disk(y)."
 msgid "Sound Configuration"
 msgstr "Nastavení zvuku"
 
-#.  Started by marja on 2013-12-07 
+#.  Started by marja on 2013-12-07
 #. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject>
 #: en/soundConfig.xml:17
 msgid ""
 "<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"dx2-soundConfig.png\" revision=\"1\" "
 "format=\"PNG\" xml:id=\"soundConfig-im1\" /> </imageobject>"
-msgstr ""
-"<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"dx2-soundConfig.png\" revision=\"1\" "
-"format=\"PNG\" xml:id=\"soundConfig-im1\" /> </imageobject>"
+msgstr "<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"dx2-soundConfig.png\" revision=\"1\" format=\"PNG\" xml:id=\"soundConfig-im1\" /> </imageobject>"
 
 #. type: Content of: <section><para>
 #: en/soundConfig.xml:23
@@ -3278,8 +3168,9 @@ msgstr ""
 #: en/soundConfig.xml:33
 msgid ""
 "Then, in the draksound or \"Sound Configuration\" tool screen, click on "
-"<guibutton>Advanced</guibutton> and then on <guibutton>Troubleshooting</"
-"guibutton> to find very useful advice about how to solve the problem."
+"<guibutton>Advanced</guibutton> and then on "
+"<guibutton>Troubleshooting</guibutton> to find very useful advice about how "
+"to solve the problem."
 msgstr ""
 
 #. type: Content of: <section><section><info><title>
@@ -3307,20 +3198,19 @@ msgstr ""
 msgid "Confirm hard disk to be formatted"
 msgstr ""
 
-#.  Made by marja on 2012 04 03 
-#.  test comment - johnr 
+#.  Made by marja on 2012 04 03
+#.  test comment - johnr
 #.  2012-04-24 marja - replaced "if you are not sure you selected the correct
-#.     hard disk." with "if you are not sure about your choice", because I'm sure I
-#.     saw this help screen when I had only one HD 
-#.  2013-05-05 marja added screenshot 
+#.     hard disk." with "if you are not sure about your choice", because I'm
+#. sure I
+#.     saw this help screen when I had only one HD
+#.  2013-05-05 marja added screenshot
 #. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject>
 #: en/takeOverHdConfirm.xml:19
 msgid ""
-"<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"dx2-takeOverHdConfirm.png\" format=\"PNG"
-"\" align=\"center\" ></imagedata> </imageobject>"
-msgstr ""
-"<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"dx2-takeOverHdConfirm.png\" format=\"PNG"
-"\" align=\"center\" ></imagedata> </imageobject>"
+"<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"dx2-takeOverHdConfirm.png\" "
+"format=\"PNG\" align=\"center\" ></imagedata> </imageobject>"
+msgstr "<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"dx2-takeOverHdConfirm.png\" format=\"PNG\" align=\"center\" ></imagedata> </imageobject>"
 
 #. type: Content of: <section><para>
 #: en/takeOverHdConfirm.xml:24
@@ -3332,8 +3222,8 @@ msgstr ""
 #. type: Content of: <section><para>
 #: en/takeOverHdConfirm.xml:27
 msgid ""
-"Click on <guibutton>Next</guibutton> if you are sure and want to erase every "
-"partition, every operating system and all data on that hard disk."
+"Click on <guibutton>Next</guibutton> if you are sure and want to erase every"
+" partition, every operating system and all data on that hard disk."
 msgstr ""
 
 #. type: Content of: <section><info><title>
@@ -3358,20 +3248,20 @@ msgstr ""
 #: en/uninstall-Mageia.xml:16
 msgid ""
 "After your data backup, reboot your installation Mageia DVD and select "
-"Rescue system, then, Restore Windows boot loader. At the next boot, you will "
-"only have Windows with no option to choose your operating system."
+"Rescue system, then, Restore Windows boot loader. At the next boot, you will"
+" only have Windows with no option to choose your operating system."
 msgstr ""
 
 #. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
 #: en/uninstall-Mageia.xml:20
 msgid ""
 "To recover the space used by Mageia partitions on Windows, click on "
-"<code>Start -> Control Panel -> Administrative Tools -> Computer Management -"
-"> Storage -> Disk Management</code> to access to the partition management. "
+"<code>Start -> Control Panel -> Administrative Tools -> Computer Management "
+"-> Storage -> Disk Management</code> to access to the partition management. "
 "You will recognize the Mageia partition because they are labeled "
 "<guilabel>Unknown</guilabel>, and also by their size and place in the disk. "
-"Right click on each of these partitions and select <guibutton>Delete</"
-"guibutton>. The space will be freed."
+"Right click on each of these partitions and select "
+"<guibutton>Delete</guibutton>. The space will be freed."
 msgstr ""
 
 #. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
@@ -3387,15 +3277,6 @@ msgid ""
 "If you have Vista or 7, you have one more possibility, you can extend the "
 "existing partition that is at the left of the freed space.  There are other "
 "partitioning tools that can be used, such as gparted, available for both "
-"windows and linux. As always, when changing partitions, be very careful, and "
-"make sure all important things have been backed up."
-msgstr ""
-
-#~ msgid ""
-#~ "<imageobject> <imagedata revision=\"1\" fileref=\"dx2-"
-#~ "setupBootloaderAddEntry.png\" format=\"PNG\" align=\"center\" xml:id="
-#~ "\"setupBootloaderAddEntry-im1\"></imagedata> </imageobject>"
-#~ msgstr ""
-#~ "<imageobject> <imagedata revision=\"1\" fileref=\"dx2-"
-#~ "setupBootloaderAddEntry.png\" format=\"PNG\" align=\"center\" xml:id="
-#~ "\"setupBootloaderAddEntry-im1\"></imagedata> </imageobject>"
+"windows and linux. As always, when changing partitions, be very careful, and"
+" make sure all important things have been backed up."
+msgstr ""
diff --git a/docs/installer/cs/installer.xml b/docs/installer/cs/installer.xml
index 3b665d39..d14ca08a 100644
--- a/docs/installer/cs/installer.xml
+++ b/docs/installer/cs/installer.xml
@@ -186,7 +186,6 @@ rebooting is what you want, go to a text terminal by pressing the three keys
     </note>
   </section>
 
-  <section xml:id="installationOptions">
     <section xml:id="installationProblems">
       <info>
         <title xml:id="installationProblems-ti1">Problémy při instalaci a možné řešení</title>
@@ -249,5 +248,5 @@ this disc. To go back to a basic disk, see the Microsoft documentation:
 ns2:href="http://msdn.microsoft.com/en-us/library/cc776315.aspx">http://msdn.microsoft.com/en-us/library/cc776315.aspx</link>.</para>
       </section>
     </section>
-  </section>
-</section>
-\ No newline at end of file
+</section>
+
diff --git a/docs/installer/sl/DrakX-cover.xml b/docs/installer/sl/DrakX-cover.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..b5e35f0a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/installer/sl/DrakX-cover.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,154 @@
+<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?>
+<!-- Converted by db4-upgrade version 1.0 -->
+<book xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:xi="http://www.w3.org/2001/XInclude" xmlns:ns6="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:lang="sl" xml:id="Quick-Startup">
+  <info>
+    <title>Namestitev s programom DrakX</title>
+   <publisher> <publishername>Mageia.org</publishername> </publisher>
+   <revhistory>
+     <revision>
+          <date>Februar 2014</date>
+        <revremark>Mageia 4</revremark>
+     </revision>
+   </revhistory>
+    <cover>
+        <para role="tagline">The Official Documentation for Mageia</para>
+      <mediaobject>
+<imageobject> <imagedata fileref="mageia-2013.png"/> </imageobject></mediaobject>
+  <info>
+    <title>Namestitev s programom DrakX</title>
+   <publisher> <publishername>Mageia.org</publishername> </publisher>
+   <revhistory>
+     <revision>
+          <date>Februar 2014</date>
+        <revremark>Mageia 4</revremark>
+     </revision>
+   </revhistory>
+   </info>
+    </cover>
+  </info>
+  <article>
+  
+
+
+
+
+
+       <!-- 2013-01-03 removed link to choosePackages.xml, because there is no link to it in installer. link to setupX has been removed for the same reason, before-->
+<!--2013-03-31 removed link to setupBootloaderBeginner.xml, because that page is no longer needed -->
+<!--2013-05-10 hid includes for resizeFATchoose.xml and takeOverHdChoose.xml, because since over a year ago, no one in docteam managed to make a screenshot of those installer screens. They seem to already have been obsoleted in Mandriva -->
+<!--2013-05-10 put ask_mntpoint_s.xml before takeOverHdConfirm.xml, to better reflect the order in which the links to them appear in doPartitionDisks.xml -->
+<!--2013-12-08 add soundConfig.xml -->
+<para><note>
+          <para>No one will see all the installer screens that you see in this manual. Which
+screens you will see, depends on your hardware and the choices you make
+while installing.</para>
+        </note></para>
+
+      <para>The texts and screenshots in this manual are available under the CC BY-SA
+3.0 license <link
+ns6:href="http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-sa/3.0/">http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-sa/3.0/</link>.</para>
+
+      <para>This manual was produced with the help of the <link
+ns6:href="http://www.calenco.com">Calenco CMS</link> developed by <link
+ns6:href="http://www.neodoc.biz">NeoDoc</link>.</para>
+
+      <para>It was written by volunteers in their free time. Please contact <link
+ns6:href="https://wiki.mageia.org/en/Documentation_team">Documentation
+Team</link>, if you would like to help improve this manual.</para>
+  
+  
+
+  <!-- <xi:include href="drakx-intro.xml"/>
+ -->
+<xi:include href="installer.xml"/>
+
+  <xi:include href="selectLanguage.xml"/>
+
+  <xi:include href="acceptLicense.xml"/>
+
+  <xi:include href="setupSCSI.xml"/>
+
+  <xi:include href="selectInstallClass.xml"/>
+
+  <xi:include href="selectKeyboard.xml"/>
+
+  <xi:include href="doPartitionDisks.xml"/>
+
+ 
+
+  <!-- <xi:include href="resizeFATChoose.xml"/>
+
+
+  <xi:include href="takeOverHdChoose.xml"/> -->
+<xi:include href="ask_mntpoint_s.xml"/>
+
+<xi:include href="takeOverHdConfirm.xml"/>
+
+  <xi:include href="diskdrake.xml"/>
+
+  <xi:include href="formatPartitions.xml"/>
+
+<xi:include href="add_supplemental_media.xml"/>
+
+<xi:include href="media_selection.xml"/>
+
+<xi:include href="chooseDesktop.xml"></xi:include>
+
+<xi:include href="choosePackageGroups.xml"></xi:include>
+
+<xi:include href="minimal-install.xml"></xi:include>
+
+<xi:include href="choosePackagesTree.xml"></xi:include>
+
+  
+
+  <!-- <xi:include href="setRootPassword.xml">
+</xi:include> -->
+<xi:include href="addUser.xml"/>
+
+  <xi:include href="configureX_chooser.xml"/>
+
+  <xi:include href="configureX_card_list.xml"/>
+
+  <xi:include href="configureX_monitor.xml"/>
+
+  <xi:include href="setupBootloader.xml"/>
+
+  <xi:include href="setupBootloaderAddEntry.xml"/>
+
+  
+
+  <!-- <xi:include href="setupYabootGeneral.xml">
+</xi:include>
+  
+  <xi:include href="setupYabootAddEntry.xml"></xi:include>
+  
+  <xi:include href="summary.xml"></xi:include> -->
+<xi:include href="misc-params.xml"/>
+
+<xi:include href="configureTimezoneUTC.xml"></xi:include>
+ 
+<xi:include href="selectCountry.xml"></xi:include>
+
+<xi:include href="configureServices.xml"></xi:include>
+
+<xi:include href="selectMouse.xml"/>
+
+<xi:include href="soundConfig.xml"/>
+
+  <xi:include href="securityLevel.xml"></xi:include>
+
+
+  
+
+  <!-- <xi:include href="configureNetwork.xml">
+</xi:include> -->
+<xi:include href="installUpdates.xml"/>
+
+  <xi:include href="exitInstall.xml"/>
+
+  
+  <!--STILL TO BE WRITTEN: <xi:include xmlns:xi="http://www.w3.org/2001/XInclude" href="uninstall-Mageia.xml"/>
+ -->
+</article>
+</book>
diff --git a/docs/installer/sl/DrakX.xml b/docs/installer/sl/DrakX.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..be2e02f5
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/installer/sl/DrakX.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,135 @@
+<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><!-- Converted by db4-upgrade version 1.0 -->
+<article xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:xi="http://www.w3.org/2001/XInclude" xmlns:ns6="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:lang="sl" xml:id="Quick-Startup">
+  <!-- 2013-01-03 removed link to choosePackages.xml, because there is no link to it in installer. link to setupX has been removed for the same reason, before-->
+<!--2013-03-31 removed link to setupBootloaderBeginner.xml, because that page is no longer needed -->
+<!--2013-05-10 hid includes for resizeFATchoose.xml and takeOverHdChoose.xml, because since over a year ago, no one in docteam managed to make a screenshot of those installer screens. They seem to already have been obsoleted in Mandriva -->
+<!--2013-05-10 put ask_mntpoint_s.xml before takeOverHdConfirm.xml, to better reflect the order in which the links to them appear in doPartitionDisks.xml -->
+<!--2013-12-08 add soundConfig.xml -->
+<!--2014-05-07 add selectAndUseISOs2.xml Papoteur-->
+<!-- <xi:include href="drakx-intro.xml"/>
+ -->
+<info>
+    <title>Namestitev s programom DrakX</title>
+
+    <cover>
+      <para><note>
+          <para>No one will see all the installer screens that you see in this manual. Which
+screens you will see, depends on your hardware and the choices you make
+while installing.</para>
+        </note></para>
+
+      <para xml:id="CC_BY-SA">The texts and screenshots in this manual are available under the CC BY-SA
+3.0 license <link
+ns6:href="http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-sa/3.0/">http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-sa/3.0/</link>.</para>
+
+      <para>This manual was produced with the help of the <link
+ns6:href="http://www.calenco.com">Calenco CMS</link> developed by <link
+ns6:href="http://www.neodoc.biz">NeoDoc</link>.</para>
+
+      <para>It was written by volunteers in their free time. Please contact <link
+ns6:href="https://wiki.mageia.org/en/Documentation_team">Documentation
+Team</link>, if you would like to help improve this manual.</para>
+    </cover>
+  </info>
+
+  
+
+
+
+
+
+
+  
+  
+
+  <xi:include href="SelectAndUseISOs2.xml"/>
+
+  <xi:include href="installer.xml"/>
+
+  <xi:include href="selectLanguage.xml"/>
+
+  <xi:include href="acceptLicense.xml"/>
+
+  <xi:include href="setupSCSI.xml"/>
+
+  <xi:include href="selectInstallClass.xml"/>
+
+  <xi:include href="selectKeyboard.xml"/>
+
+  <xi:include href="doPartitionDisks.xml"/>
+
+ 
+
+  <!-- <xi:include href="resizeFATChoose.xml"/>
+
+
+  <xi:include href="takeOverHdChoose.xml"/> -->
+<xi:include href="ask_mntpoint_s.xml"/>
+
+<xi:include href="takeOverHdConfirm.xml"/>
+
+  <xi:include href="diskdrake.xml"/>
+
+  <xi:include href="formatPartitions.xml"/>
+
+<xi:include href="add_supplemental_media.xml"/>
+
+<xi:include href="media_selection.xml"/>
+
+<xi:include href="chooseDesktop.xml"></xi:include>
+
+<xi:include href="choosePackageGroups.xml"></xi:include>
+
+<xi:include href="minimal-install.xml"></xi:include>
+
+<xi:include href="choosePackagesTree.xml"></xi:include>
+
+  
+
+  <!-- <xi:include href="setRootPassword.xml">
+</xi:include> -->
+<xi:include href="addUser.xml"/>
+
+  <xi:include href="configureX_chooser.xml"/>
+
+  <xi:include href="configureX_card_list.xml"/>
+
+  <xi:include href="configureX_monitor.xml"/>
+
+  <xi:include href="setupBootloader.xml"/>
+
+  <xi:include href="setupBootloaderAddEntry.xml"/>
+
+  
+
+  <!-- <xi:include href="setupYabootGeneral.xml">
+</xi:include>
+  
+  <xi:include href="setupYabootAddEntry.xml"></xi:include>
+  
+  <xi:include href="summary.xml"></xi:include> -->
+<xi:include href="misc-params.xml"/>
+
+<xi:include href="configureTimezoneUTC.xml"></xi:include>
+ 
+<xi:include href="selectCountry.xml"></xi:include>
+
+<xi:include href="configureServices.xml"></xi:include>
+
+<xi:include href="selectMouse.xml"/>
+
+<xi:include href="soundConfig.xml"/>
+
+  <xi:include href="securityLevel.xml"></xi:include>
+
+
+  
+
+  <!-- <xi:include href="configureNetwork.xml">
+</xi:include> -->
+<xi:include href="installUpdates.xml"/>
+
+  <xi:include href="exitInstall.xml"/>
+
+  <xi:include xmlns:xi="http://www.w3.org/2001/XInclude" href="uninstall-Mageia.xml"/>
+</article>
diff --git a/docs/installer/sl/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml b/docs/installer/sl/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..031eebf4
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/installer/sl/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,415 @@
+<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns42="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xml:id="Select-and-use-ISOs" version="5.0" xml:lang="sl">
+
+  <info>
+    <!-- Made by Lebarhon 2014 03 26 -->
+<title xml:id="Select-and-use-ISOs-ti1">Select and use ISOs</title>
+  </info>
+
+  <section>
+    <title>Media</title>
+
+    <section>
+      <title>Definition</title>
+
+      <para>Here, a medium (plural: media) is an ISO image file that allows you to
+install and/or update Mageia and by extension any physical support the ISO
+file is copied to.</para>
+
+      <para>You can find them <link
+ns4:href="http://www.mageia.org/en/downloads/">here</link>.</para>
+    </section>
+
+    <section>
+      <title>Classical installation media</title>
+
+      <section>
+        <title>Common features</title>
+
+        <itemizedlist>
+          <listitem>
+            <para>These ISOs use the traditional installer called drakx.</para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>They are able to make a clean install or an update from previous releases.</para>
+          </listitem>
+        </itemizedlist>
+      </section>
+
+      <section>
+        <title>DVD</title>
+
+        <itemizedlist>
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Different media for architecture 32 or 64 bits.</para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Some tools are available in the Welcome screen: Rescue System, Memory Test,
+Hardware Detection Tool.</para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Each DVD contains many available desktop environments and languages.</para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>You'll be given the choice during the installation to add non free software.</para>
+          </listitem>
+        </itemizedlist>
+      </section>
+
+      <section>
+        <title>DVD dual arch</title>
+
+        <itemizedlist>
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Both architectures are present on the same medium, the choice is made
+automatically according to the detected CPU.</para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Uses Xfce desktop only.</para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Not all languages are available. (be, bg, ca, de, en, es, fr, it, mk, pl,
+pt, ru, sv, uk) TO BE CHECKED!</para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>It contains non free software.</para>
+          </listitem>
+        </itemizedlist>
+      </section>
+    </section>
+
+    <section>
+      <title>Live media</title>
+
+      <section>
+        <title>Common features</title>
+
+        <itemizedlist>
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Can be used to preview the distribution without installing it on a HDD, and
+optionally install Mageia on to your HDD.
+            </para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Each ISO contains only one desktop environment (KDE or GNOME).</para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Different media for 32 or 64 bit architectures.</para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para><emphasis role="bold">Live ISOs can only be used to create clean
+installations, they cannot be used to upgrade from previous
+releases.</emphasis></para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>They contain non free software.</para>
+          </listitem>
+        </itemizedlist>
+      </section>
+
+      <section>
+        <title>Live CD KDE</title>
+
+        <itemizedlist>
+          <listitem>
+            <para>KDE desktop environment only.</para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>English language only.</para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>32 bit only.</para>
+          </listitem>
+        </itemizedlist>
+      </section>
+
+      <section>
+        <title>Live CD GNOME</title>
+
+        <itemizedlist>
+          <listitem>
+            <para>GNOME desktop environment only.</para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>English language only.</para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>32 bit only.</para>
+          </listitem>
+        </itemizedlist>
+      </section>
+
+      <section>
+        <title>Live DVD KDE</title>
+
+        <itemizedlist>
+          <listitem>
+            <para>KDE desktop environment only.</para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>All languages are present.</para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Different media for 32 or 64 bit architectures.</para>
+          </listitem>
+        </itemizedlist>
+      </section>
+
+      <section>
+        <title>Live DVD GNOME</title>
+
+        <itemizedlist>
+          <listitem>
+            <para>GNOME desktop environment only.</para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>All languages are present.</para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Different media for 32 or 64 bit architectures.</para>
+          </listitem>
+        </itemizedlist>
+      </section>
+    </section>
+
+    <section>
+      <title>Boot-only CD media</title>
+
+      <section>
+        <title>Common features</title>
+
+        <itemizedlist>
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Each one is a small image that contains no more than that which is needed to
+start the drakx installer and find drakx-installer-stage2 and other packages
+that are needed to continue and complete the install. These packages may be
+on the PC hard disk, on a local drive, on a local network or on the
+Internet.</para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>These media are very light (less than 100 MB) and are convenient when
+bandwidth is too low to download a full DVD, a PC without a DVD drive or a
+PC that can't boot from a USB stick.</para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Different media for 32 or 64 bit architectures.</para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>English language only.</para>
+          </listitem>
+        </itemizedlist>
+      </section>
+
+      <section>
+        <title>boot.iso</title>
+
+        <itemizedlist>
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Contains only free software, for those people who refuse to use non-free
+software.</para>
+          </listitem>
+        </itemizedlist>
+      </section>
+
+      <section>
+        <title>boot-nonfree.iso</title>
+
+        <itemizedlist>
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Contains non-free software (mostly drivers, codecs...) for people who need
+it.</para>
+          </listitem>
+        </itemizedlist>
+      </section>
+    </section>
+  </section>
+
+  <section>
+    <title>Downloading and Checking Media</title>
+
+    <section>
+      <title>Downloading</title>
+
+      <para>Once you have chosen your ISO file, you can download it using either http or
+BitTorrent. In both cases, a window gives you some information, such as the
+mirror in use and the possibility to change if the bandwidth is to low. If
+http is chosen, you may also see something like</para>
+
+      <mediaobject>
+<imageobject> <imagedata fileref="Checking.png" contentwidth="650"/>
+</imageobject></mediaobject>
+
+      <para>md5sum and sha1sum are tools to check the ISO integrity. Use only one of
+them. Both hexadecimal numbers have been calculated by an algorithm from the
+file to be downloaded. When you ask these algorithms to recalculate this
+number from your downloaded file, either you have the same number and your
+downloaded file is correct, or the number is different and you have a
+failure. A failure infers that you should retry the download.Then this
+window appears:</para>
+
+      <mediaobject>
+<imageobject> <imagedata fileref="Download.png"/> </imageobject></mediaobject>
+
+      <para>Check the radio button Save File.</para>
+    </section>
+
+    <section>
+      <title>Checking the downloaded media integrity</title>
+
+      <para>Open a console, no need to be root, and:</para>
+
+      <para>- To use md5sum, type: [sam@localhost]$ <userinput>md5sum
+path/to/the/image/file.iso</userinput>.</para>
+
+      <para>- To use sha1sum, type: [sam@localhost]$ <userinput>sha1sum
+path/to/the/image/file.iso</userinput>.</para>
+
+      <para>and compare the obtained number on your computer (you may have to wait for a
+while) with the number given by Mageia. Example:</para>
+
+      <mediaobject>
+<imageobject> <imagedata fileref="Md5sum.png" contentwidth="650"/>
+</imageobject></mediaobject>
+
+      <para/>
+    </section>
+  </section>
+
+  <section>
+    <title>Burn or dump the ISO</title>
+
+    <para>The checked ISO can now be burned to a CD or DVD or dumped to a USB
+stick. These operations are not a simple copy and aim to make a boot-able
+medium.</para>
+
+    <section>
+      <title>Burning the ISO to a CD/DVD</title>
+
+      <para>Use whatever burner you wish but ensure the burning device is set correctly
+to <emphasis role="bold">burn an image</emphasis>, burn data or files is not
+correct.  There is more information in <link
+ns4:href="https://wiki.mageia.org/en/Writing_CD_and_DVD_images">the Mageia
+wiki</link>.</para>
+    </section>
+
+    <section>
+      <title>Dump the ISO to a USB stick</title>
+
+      <para>All Mageia ISOs are hybrids, which means you can 'dump' them to a USB stick
+and then use it to boot and install the system.</para>
+
+      <warning>
+        <para>"dumping" an image onto a flash device destroys any previous file-system on
+the device; any other data will be lost and the partition capacity will be
+reduced to the image size.</para>
+      </warning>
+
+      <para>To recover the original capacity, you must re-format the USB stick.</para>
+
+      <section>
+        <title>Using Mageia</title>
+
+        <para>You can use a graphical tool like <link
+ns4:href="https://wiki.mageia.org/en/IsoDumper_Writing_ISO_images_on_USB_sticks">IsoDumper</link></para>
+
+        <para>You can also use the dd tool in a console:</para>
+
+        <orderedlist>
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Open a console</para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Become root with the command <userinput>su -</userinput> (don't forget the
+final '-' )</para>
+
+            <mediaobject>
+<imageobject> <imagedata fileref="Root.png" contentwidth="650"/>
+</imageobject></mediaobject>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Plug your USB stick (do not mount it, this also means do not open any
+application or file manager that could access or read it)</para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Enter the command <userinput>fdisk -l</userinput></para>
+
+            <mediaobject>
+<imageobject> <imagedata fileref="Fdisk.png" contentwidth="650"/>
+</imageobject></mediaobject>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Find the device name for your USB stick (by its size), for example /dev/sdb
+in the screenshot above, it is a 8Go USB stick.</para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Enter the command: # <userinput>dd if=path/to/the/ISO/file of=/dev/sdX
+bs=1M</userinput></para>
+
+            <para>Where X=your device name eg: /dev/sdc</para>
+            <para> Example: # <userinput>dd if=/home/user/Downloads/Mageia-4-x86_64-DVD.iso
+of=/dev/sdb bs=1M</userinput></para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Enter the command: # <userinput>sync</userinput></para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Unplug your USB stick, it is done</para>
+          </listitem>
+        </orderedlist>
+      </section>
+
+      <section>
+        <title>Using Windows</title>
+
+        <para>You could try:</para>
+
+        <para>- <link ns4:href="http://rufus.akeo.ie/?locale=en_US">Rufus</link></para>
+
+        <para>- <link ns4:href="http://sourceforge.net/projects/win32diskimager">Win32
+Disk Imager</link></para>
+
+        <para/>
+      </section>
+    </section>
+  </section>
+
+  <section>
+    <title>Mageia Installation</title>
+
+    <para>This step is detailed in <link ns4:href="http://www.mageia.org/en/doc/">the
+Mageia documentation</link>.</para>
+
+    <para>More information is available in <link
+ns4:href="https://wiki.mageia.org/en/Category:Documentation">the Mageia
+wiki</link>.</para>
+  </section>
+
+</section>
diff --git a/docs/installer/sl/acceptLicense.xml b/docs/installer/sl/acceptLicense.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..701bff13
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/installer/sl/acceptLicense.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,86 @@
+<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?>
+<section version="5.0" xml:lang="sl" xml:id="acceptLicense"
+         xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook"
+         xmlns:ns6="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink"
+         xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml"
+         xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg"
+         xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML"
+         xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook">
+  
+
+  
+
+  
+
+  
+
+  
+
+  
+
+  
+
+  
+
+  
+
+  <info>
+    <!-- Made by marja on 2012 03 27 -->
+<!-- NEEDS TO BE REVIEWED! -->
+<!-- JohnR: minor mods 2012-3-30 -->
+<!-- SimonNZG 2012-04-03 has taken a look but needs to come back -->
+<!-- JohnR: 2012-04-05 - Inserted text from barjac with some modifications:
+       http://mtf.no-ip.co.uk/doc/help/license.html  -->
+<!-- marja:2012-04-05 - having a look because this isn't a DocBook5.0 type anymore,
+       but text/xml. First changing centimetres in screenshot to pixels ( 
+       ), after that nested the two existing sections into a third one-->
+<!-- removed para id's, corrected duplicate id's for segments, marja, 20120409 -->
+<!-- barjac:2012-04-10 - edited header to correct formatting after my saves - not 
+       sure what is causing the corruption -->
+<!-- JohnR  2012-04-19 language proofreading -->
+<title xml:id="acceptLicense-ti1">Licenčna pogodba in opombe ob izdaji</title>
+  </info>
+
+  <mediaobject condition="expert">
+<imageobject> <imagedata align="center" fileref="dx2-license.png"
+format="PNG" revision="1" xml:id="acceptLicense-im1"/> </imageobject></mediaobject>
+
+  <section xml:id="license">
+    <info>
+      <title xml:id="license-ti1">Licenčna pogodba</title>
+    </info>
+
+    <para>Pred namestitvijo <application>Mageje</application> pozorno preberite
+licenčne pogoje.</para>
+
+    <para>Ti licenčni pogoji se nanašajo na celotno distribucijo
+<application>Mageia</application>. Pred nadaljevanjem jih je potrebno
+sprejeti.</para>
+
+    <para>Za sprejem preprosto označite  <guilabel>Sprejmem</guilabel> in kliknite
+gumb <guibutton>Naprej</guibutton>.</para>
+
+    <para>Zahvaljujemo se za vaš ogled tudi če se odločite, da teh pogojev ne boste
+sprejeli. S klikom na gumb <guibutton>Izhod</guibutton> se bo vaš računalnik
+ponovno zagnal.</para>
+
+    
+  <!-- if you want two sections in a file, both need to be nested in a third section -
+       marja, 20120405  -->
+</section>
+
+  <section xml:id="releaseNotes">
+    <!--
+  <para>
+Release Notes</para>
+-->
+<info>
+      <title xml:id="releaseNotes-ti1">Opombe ob izdaji</title>
+    </info>
+
+    
+
+    <para>Za ogled novosti te izdaje <application>Mageje</application> kliknite gumb
+<guibutton>Opombe ob izdaji</guibutton>.</para>
+  </section>
+</section>
diff --git a/docs/installer/sl/addUser.xml b/docs/installer/sl/addUser.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..bdbe5084
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/installer/sl/addUser.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,159 @@
+<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns42="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xml:id="addUser" version="5.0" xml:lang="sl">
+
+  <info>
+    <title xml:id="addUser-ti1">User and Superuser Management</title>
+  </info>
+
+  
+
+  
+
+  
+
+  
+
+  
+
+  
+  
+  
+  
+   <mediaobject>
+<!-- Started by marja,using Led43's text, on 2012 03 27 -->
+<!-- NEEDS TO BE REVIEWED! -->
+<!-- SimonNZG 2012-04-03 has taken a look but needs to come back -->
+<!-- removed para xml:id's, finished the page using Led43's text in the wiki, but
+       changed his text about the Advanced User Managment screen (the only thing 
+       about guest account there, is the box you can tick or untick to enable or 
+       disable it, the rest is about the normal user you're adding in the previous
+       screen), marja, 20120409-->
+<!-- barjac 2012-04-13 moved explanation of xguest lower down. I don't understand
+       "rbash" in the xguest warning - is that correct? -->
+<!-- JohnR 2012-04-19 Language proofreading  -->
+<!-- marja 2012-04-24 Added screenshot -->
+<!-- marja 2013-04-26 added new note -->
+<imageobject> <imagedata revision="1" fileref="dx2-setRootPassword.png"
+format="PNG" align="center" xml:id="setRootPassword-im1"></imagedata>
+</imageobject></mediaobject>
+
+  <section xml:id="root-password">
+    <info>
+      <title xml:id="root-password-ti2">Nastavite geslo skrbnika (uporabnika root):</title>
+    </info>
+
+    <para>It is advisable for all <application>Mageia</application> installations to
+set a superuser or administrator's password, usually called the
+<emphasis>root password</emphasis> in Linux. As you type a password into the
+top box the colour of its shield will change from red to yellow to green
+depending on the strength of the password. A green shield shows you are
+using a strong password. You need to repeat the same password in the box
+just below the first password box, this checks that you have not mistyped
+the first password by comparing them.</para>
+
+    <note xml:id="givePassword">
+      <para>All passwords are case sensitive, it is best to use a mixture of letters
+(upper and lower case), numbers and other characters in a password.</para>
+    </note>
+  </section>
+
+  <section xml:id="enterUser">
+    <info>
+      <title xml:id="enterUser-ti3">Dodajte uporabnika</title>
+    </info>
+
+    <para>Add a user here. A user has fewer rights than the superuser (root), but
+enough to surf the internet, use office applications or play games and
+anything else the average user does with his computer</para>
+
+    <itemizedlist>
+      <listitem>
+        <para><guibutton>Icon</guibutton>: if you click on this button it will change the
+users icon.</para>
+      </listitem>
+
+      <listitem>
+        <para><guilabel>Real Name</guilabel>: Insert the users real name into this text
+box.</para>
+      </listitem>
+
+      <listitem>
+        <para><guilabel>Login Name</guilabel>: Here you enter the user login name or let
+drakx use a version of the users real name. <emphasis>The login name is case
+sensitive.</emphasis></para>
+      </listitem>
+
+      <listitem>
+        <para><guilabel>Password</guilabel>: In this text box you should type in the user
+password. There is a shield at the end of the text box that indicates the
+strength of the password. (See also <xref linkend="givePassword"></xref>)</para>
+      </listitem>
+
+      <listitem>
+        <para><guilabel>Password (again)</guilabel>: Retype the user password into this
+text box and drakx will check you have the same password in each of the user
+password text boxes.</para>
+      </listitem>
+    </itemizedlist>
+
+   <note>
+      <para>Any user you add while installing Mageia, will have a world readable (but
+write protected) home directory.</para>
+
+      <para>However, while using your new install, any user you add in <emphasis>MCC -
+System - Manage users on system</emphasis> will have a home directory that
+is both read and write protected.</para>
+
+      <para>If you don't want a world readable home directory for anyone, it is advised
+to only add a temporary user now and to add the real one(s) after reboot.</para>
+
+      <para>If you prefer world readable home directories, you might want to add all
+extra needed users in the <emphasis>Configuration - Summary</emphasis> step
+during the install. Choose <emphasis>User management</emphasis>.</para>
+
+      <para>Dovoljenje dostopa lahko spremenite tudi po namestitvi</para>
+   </note>
+
+  </section>
+
+  <section xml:id="addUserAdvanced">
+    <info>
+      <title xml:id="addUserAdvanced-ti3">Advanced User Management</title>
+    </info>
+
+    <para>If the <guibutton>advanced</guibutton> button is clicked you are offered a
+screen that allows you to edit the settings for the user you are
+adding. Additionally, you can disable or enable a guest account.</para>
+
+    <warning>
+      <para>Anything a guest with a default <emphasis>rbash</emphasis> guest account
+saves to his /home directory will be erased when he logs out.  The guest
+should save his important files to a USB key.</para>
+    </warning>
+
+    <itemizedlist>
+      <listitem>
+        <para><guilabel>Enable guest account</guilabel>: Here you can enable or disable a
+guest account. The guest account allows a guest to log into and use the PC,
+but he has more restricted access than normal users.</para>
+      </listitem>
+
+      <listitem>
+        <para><guilabel>Shell</guilabel>: This drop down list allows you to change the
+shell used by the user you are adding in the previous screen, options are
+Bash, Dash and Sh</para>
+      </listitem>
+
+      <listitem>
+        <para><guilabel>User ID</guilabel>: Here you can set the user ID for the user you
+are adding in the previous screen. This is a number.  Leave it blank unless
+you know what you are doing.</para>
+      </listitem>
+
+      <listitem>
+        <para><guilabel>Group ID</guilabel>: This lets you set the group ID.  Also a
+number, usually the same one as for the user. Leave it blank unless you know
+what you are doing.</para>
+      </listitem>
+    </itemizedlist>
+  </section>
+</section>
+\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/docs/installer/sl/add_supplemental_media.xml b/docs/installer/sl/add_supplemental_media.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..0d9349aa
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/installer/sl/add_supplemental_media.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,45 @@
+<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?>
+<section version="5.0" xml:lang="sl" xml:id="add_supplemental_media"
+         xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook"
+         xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml"
+         xmlns:ns42="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML"
+         xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink"
+         xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg"
+         xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook">
+  <info>
+    <title xml:id="add_supplemental_media-ti1">Izbira virov (nastavitev dodatnih virov namestitve)</title>
+    </info>
+
+  
+  
+  
+
+<mediaobject>
+<!-- papoteur 2013-04-13  - created -->
+<!-- marja 2013-04-16 added screenshot and expanded title (because is was the same as for media_selection -->
+<!-- marja 2013-04-16 s/a optical/an optcal/ s/support/disc/ s/or or/or/ s/at/during/ as suggested by Tristan Campbell -->
+<imageobject> <imagedata align="center"
+fileref="dx2-add_supplemental_media.png" format="PNG" revision="1"
+xml:id="dx2-add_supplemental_media-im1"/> </imageobject></mediaobject>
+
+  <para>This screen gives you the list of already recognized repositories. You can
+add other sources for packages, like an optical disc or a remote source. The
+source selection determines which packages will be available for selection
+during the next steps.</para>
+
+  <para>For a network source, there are two steps to follow:</para>
+
+  <orderedlist>
+    <listitem>
+      <para>Choosing and activation of the network, if not already up. </para>
+    </listitem>
+
+    <listitem>
+      <para>Selecting a mirror or specifying a URL (very first entry). By selecting a
+mirror, you have access to the selection of all repositories managed by
+Mageia, like the Nonfree , the Tainted repositories and the Updates. With
+the URL, you can designate a specific repository or your own NFS
+installation.</para>
+    </listitem>
+  </orderedlist>
+</section>
diff --git a/docs/installer/sl/ask_mntpoint_s.xml b/docs/installer/sl/ask_mntpoint_s.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..9713d740
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/installer/sl/ask_mntpoint_s.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,85 @@
+<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?>
+<section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook"
+ xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml"
+ xmlns:ns42="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML"
+ xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink"
+ xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg"
+ xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook"
+ xml:id="ask_mntpoint_s" version="5.0" xml:lang="sl">
+
+  <info>
+    <title xml:id="ask_mntpoint_s-ti1">Izberite priklopne točke</title>
+  </info>
+
+  
+  
+  
+  
+  
+  
+  
+  
+  
+
+<mediaobject>
+<!-- Made by marja on 2012 03 28 -->
+<!-- NEEDS TO BE REVIEWED! -->
+<!-- SimonNZG 2012-04-03 has taken a look but needs to come back -->
+<!-- removed para xml:id's, marja, 20120409 -->
+<!-- barjac 14/04/2012 Minor edit to improve grammar and replaced "at least ONE"
+       with "a", as I can't imagine having more than one root partition ;) -->
+<!-- Lebarhon : I put [] where it seems having mistakes -->
+<!-- Marja: you're right, in English English it is "its type", however, the Americans
+       write "it's type". And you're right about the redundant part, too, I removed it-->
+<!-- And JohnR says the Americans are WRONG! :-)) -->
+<!-- 2012-04-19  Language proofreading done -->
+<imageobject> <imagedata revision="1" fileref="dx2-chooseMountpoints.png"
+align="center" format="PNG" xml:id="chooseMountPoints-im1"></imagedata>
+</imageobject></mediaobject>
+
+  <para>Here you see the Linux partitions that have been found on your computer. If
+you don't agree with the <application>DrakX</application> suggestions, you
+can change the mount points.</para>
+
+  <note>
+    <para>If you change anything, make sure you still have a <literal>/</literal>
+(root) partition.</para>
+  </note>
+
+  <itemizedlist>
+    <listitem>
+      <para>Every partition is shown as follows: "Device" ("Capacity", "Mount point",
+"Type").</para>
+    </listitem>
+
+    <listitem>
+      <para>"Device", is made up of: "hard drive", ["hard drive number"(letter)],
+"partition number" (for example, "sda5").</para>
+    </listitem>
+
+    
+    <listitem>
+      <para>If you have many partitions, you can choose many different mount points from
+the drop down menu, such as <literal>/</literal>, <literal>/home</literal>
+and <literal>/var</literal>. You can even make your own mount points, for
+instance <literal>/video</literal> for a partition where you want to store
+your films, or <literal>/cauldron-home</literal> for the
+<literal>/home</literal> partition of a cauldron install.</para>
+    </listitem>
+
+    <listitem>
+      <para>For partitions you don't need to have access to, you can leave the mount
+point field blank.</para>
+    </listitem>
+  </itemizedlist>
+
+  <warning>
+    <para>Choose <guibutton>Previous</guibutton> if you are not sure what to choose,
+and then tick <guilabel>Custom disk partitioning</guilabel>. In the screen
+that follows, you can click on a partition to see its type and size.</para>
+  </warning>
+
+  <para>If you are sure the mount points are correct, click on
+<guibutton>Next</guibutton>, and choose whether you only want to format the
+partition(s) DrakX suggests, or more.</para>
+</section>
diff --git a/docs/installer/sl/chooseDesktop.xml b/docs/installer/sl/chooseDesktop.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..6f1eec7e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/installer/sl/chooseDesktop.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,33 @@
+<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns42="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:lang="sl" xml:id="chooseDesktop">
+
+
+    <!--2012-12-26 marja - exported this section from choosePackages.xml to start a new page-->
+<info>
+      <title xml:id="chooseDesktop-ti1">Izbira namizja</title>
+    </info>
+
+ 
+
+
+    <para>Depending on your selection here, you may be offered further screens to fine
+tune your choice.</para>
+
+    <para>After the selection step(s), you will see a slide show during package
+installation. The slide show can be disabled by pressing the
+<guilabel>Details</guilabel> button</para>
+
+
+
+<mediaobject>
+<imageobject> <imagedata fileref="dx2-chooseDesktop.png" align="center"
+format="PNG" ></imagedata> </imageobject></mediaobject>
+
+    <para>Choose whether you prefer to use the <application>KDE</application> or
+<application>Gnome</application> desktop environment. Both come with a full
+set of useful applications and tools. Tick <guilabel>Custom</guilabel> if
+you want to use neither or both, or if you want something other than the
+default software choices for these desktop environments. The
+<application>LXDE</application> desktop is lighter than the previous two,
+sporting less eye candy and fewer packages installed by default.</para>
+  </section>
+
diff --git a/docs/installer/sl/choosePackageGroups.xml b/docs/installer/sl/choosePackageGroups.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..328f2d66
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/installer/sl/choosePackageGroups.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,40 @@
+<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns42="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:lang="sl" xml:id="choosePackageGroups">
+
+    <info>
+      <title xml:id="choosePackageGroups-ti1">Izbira skupin paketov</title>
+    </info>
+
+    
+
+<mediaobject>
+<!--2012-12-26 marja - exported this section from choosePackages.xml to start a new page-->
+<imageobject> <imagedata fileref="dx2-choosePackageGroups.png"
+align="center" format="PNG" ></imagedata> </imageobject></mediaobject>
+
+    <para>Packages have been sorted into groups, to make choosing what you need on
+your system a lot easier. The groups are fairly self explanatory, however
+more information about the content of each is available in tool-tips which
+become visible as the mouse is hovered over them.</para>
+
+    <itemizedlist>
+      <listitem>
+        <para>Delovna postaja.</para>
+      </listitem>
+
+      <listitem>
+        <para>Strežnik.</para>
+      </listitem>
+
+      <listitem>
+        <para>Grafično okolje.</para>
+      </listitem>
+
+      <listitem>
+        <para>Individual Package Selection: You can use this option to manually add or
+remove packages.</para>
+      </listitem>
+    </itemizedlist>
+    <para>Read <xref linkend="minimal-install"></xref> for instructions on how to do a
+minimal install.</para> 
+  </section>
+
diff --git a/docs/installer/sl/choosePackagesTree.xml b/docs/installer/sl/choosePackagesTree.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..9254bd18
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/installer/sl/choosePackagesTree.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,23 @@
+<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns42="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:lang="sl" xml:id="choosePackagesTree">
+
+    <info>
+      <title xml:id="choosePackagesTree-ti1">Izbira posamičnih paketov</title>
+    </info>
+
+    
+
+<mediaobject>
+<!--2012-12-26 marja - exported this section from choosePackages.xml to start a new page-->
+<imageobject> <imagedata fileref="dx2-choosePackagesTree.png" align="center"
+format="PNG" ></imagedata> </imageobject></mediaobject>
+
+    <para>Here you can add or remove any extra packages to customise your
+installation.</para>
+
+    <para>After having made your choice, you can click on the <guibutton>floppy
+icon</guibutton> at the bottom of the page to save your choice of packages
+(saving to a USB key works, too). You can then use this file to install the
+same packages on another system, by pressing the same button during install
+and choosing to load it.</para>
+  </section>
+
diff --git a/docs/installer/sl/configureServices.xml b/docs/installer/sl/configureServices.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..8f2f8b70
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/installer/sl/configureServices.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,40 @@
+<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?>
+<section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook"
+ xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML"
+ xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg"
+ xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml"
+ xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink"
+ xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook"
+ xml:id="configureServices" version="5.0" xml:lang="sl">
+
+
+    <info>
+      <title xml:id="configureServices-ti1">Nastavite vaše storitve</title>
+    </info>
+
+    
+   
+
+
+<mediaobject>
+<!-- 2012-12-25 marja - moved this section out of misc-params.xml -->
+<!-- 2013-05-05 marja - added screenshot -->
+<imageobject> <imagedata revision="1" fileref="dx2-configureServices.png"
+align="center" format="PNG" xml:id="configureServices-im1"></imagedata>
+</imageobject></mediaobject>
+
+
+    <para revision="1" xml:id="configureServices-pa1">Here you can set which services should (not) start when you boot your
+system.</para>
+
+    <para revision="1" xml:id="configureServices-pa2">There are four groups, click on the triangle before a group to expand it and
+see all services in it.</para>
+
+    <para revision="1" xml:id="configureServices-pa3">The setting DrakX chose are usually good.</para>
+
+    <para revision="1" xml:id="configureServices-pa4">If you highlight a service, some information about it is shown in the info
+box below.</para>
+
+    <para revision="1" xml:id="configureServices-pa5">Only change things when you know very well what you are doing.</para>
+  </section>
+
diff --git a/docs/installer/sl/configureTimezoneUTC.xml b/docs/installer/sl/configureTimezoneUTC.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..942544d1
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/installer/sl/configureTimezoneUTC.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,37 @@
+<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?>
+<section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook"
+ xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML"
+ xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg"
+ xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml"
+ xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink"
+ xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook"
+ xml:id="configureTimezoneUTC" version="5.0" xml:lang="sl">
+
+
+    <info>
+      <title xml:id="configureTimezoneUTC-ti6">Nastavite vaš časovni pas</title>
+    </info>
+
+    
+    
+
+<mediaobject>
+<!-- 2012-12-25 marja - moved this part out of misc-params.xml -->
+<!-- 2013-05-05 marja - added screenshot -->
+<imageobject> <imagedata revision="1" fileref="dx2-configureTimezoneUTC.png"
+align="center" format="PNG" xml:id="configureTimezoneUTC-im1"></imagedata>
+</imageobject></mediaobject>
+
+
+    <para revision="1" xml:id="configureTimezoneUTC-pa1">Choose your time zone by choosing your country or a city close to you in the
+same time zone.</para>
+
+    <para revision="1" xml:id="configureTimezoneUTC-pa2">In next screen you can choose to set your hardware clock to local time or to
+GMT, also known as UTC.</para>
+
+    <note>
+      <para revision="1" xml:id="configureTimezoneUTC-pa3">If you have more than one operating system on your computer, make sure they
+are all set to local time, or all to UTC/GMT.</para>
+    </note>
+  </section>
+
diff --git a/docs/installer/sl/configureX_card_list.xml b/docs/installer/sl/configureX_card_list.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..3633ac6b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/installer/sl/configureX_card_list.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,59 @@
+<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:lang="sl" xml:id="configureX_card_list">
+  
+
+  
+
+  
+
+  
+  
+  <info>
+    <!-- Initiated by Marja  2012-08-08 -->
+<!-- Further text JohnR  2012-08-29 -->
+<!-- tproof  -->
+<!-- lproof  -->
+<!-- Done corrections accordind to tmb remarks. Papoteur  -->
+<title xml:id="configureX_card_list-ti1">Choose an X Server (Configure your Graphic Card)</title>
+  </info>
+
+  <mediaobject>
+<imageobject> <imagedata revision="1" align="center"
+xml:id="configureX_card_list-im1" fileref="dx2-configureX_card_list.png"
+format="PNG"/> </imageobject></mediaobject>
+
+  <para>DrakX has a very comprehensive database of video cards and will usually
+correctly identify your video device.</para>
+
+  <para>If the installer has not correctly detected your graphic card and you know
+which one you have, you can select it from the tree by: <itemizedlist>
+      <listitem>
+        <para>Proizvajalec</para>
+      </listitem>
+
+      <listitem>
+        <para>ime vaše kartice</para>
+      </listitem>
+
+      <listitem>
+        <para>and the type of card</para>
+      </listitem>
+    </itemizedlist></para>
+
+  <para>If you cannot find your card in the vendor lists (because it's not yet in
+the database or it's an older card) you may find a suitable driver in the
+Xorg category</para>
+
+  <para>The Xorg listing provides more than 40 generic and open source video card
+drivers. If you still can't find a named driver for your card there is the
+option of using the vesa driver which provides basic capabilities.</para>
+
+  <para>Be aware that if you select an incompatible driver you may only have access
+to the Commandline Interface.</para>
+
+  <para>Some video card manufacturers provide proprietary drivers for Linux which
+may only be available in the Nonfree repository and in some cases only from
+the card manufacturers' websites.</para>
+
+  <para>The Nonfree repository needs to be explicitly enabled to access them.  If
+you didn't select it previously, you should do this after your first reboot.</para>
+</section>
+\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/docs/installer/sl/configureX_chooser.xml b/docs/installer/sl/configureX_chooser.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..c0df7e6d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/installer/sl/configureX_chooser.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,64 @@
+<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns42="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xml:id="configureX_chooser" version="5.0" xml:lang="sl">
+
+  <info>
+    <title xml:id="configureX_chooser-ti1">Nastavitev grafične kartice in monitorja</title>
+  </info>
+
+  
+
+  <mediaobject>
+<!-- Marja 2012-08-10, copied setupX.xml to this file and replaced all "setupX" in the code by "configureX_chooser", because this is the correct filename for this page-->
+<imageobject> <imagedata revision="1" fileref="dx2-configureX_chooser.png"
+align="center" format="PNG" xml:id="configureX_chooser-im1"> </imagedata>
+</imageobject></mediaobject>
+
+  <para revision="1" xml:id="configureX_chooser-pa1">No matter which graphical environment (also known as desktop environment)
+you chose for this install of <application>Mageia</application>, they are
+all based on a graphical user interface system called <acronym>X Window
+System</acronym>, or simply <acronym>X</acronym>. So in order for
+<acronym>KDE</acronym>, <acronym>Gnome</acronym>, <acronym>LXDE</acronym> or
+any other graphical environment to work well, the following
+<acronym>X</acronym> settings need to be correct. Choose the correct
+settings if you can see that <application>DrakX</application> didn't make a
+choice, or if you think the choice is incorrect.</para>
+
+  <itemizedlist>
+    <listitem>
+      <para revision="1" xml:id="configureX_chooser-pa2"><emphasis><guibutton>Graphic card</guibutton></emphasis>: Choose your card
+from the list if needed.</para>
+    </listitem>
+
+    <listitem>
+      <para revision="1" xml:id="configureX_chooser-pa3"><emphasis><guibutton>Monitor</guibutton></emphasis>: You can choose
+<guilabel>Plug'n Play</guilabel> when applicable, or choose your monitor
+from the <guilabel>Vendor</guilabel> or <guilabel>Generic</guilabel>
+list. Choose <guilabel>Custom</guilabel> if you prefer to manually set the
+horizontal and vertical refresh rates of your monitor.</para>
+
+      <warning>
+        <para revision="1" xml:id="configureX_chooser-pa3a">Napačna frekvenca osveževanja lahko poškoduje vaš monitor</para>
+      </warning>
+    </listitem>
+
+    <listitem>
+      <para revision="1" xml:id="configureX_chooser-pa4"><emphasis><guibutton>Resolution</guibutton></emphasis>: Set the desired
+resolution and color depth of your monitor here.</para>
+    </listitem>
+
+    <listitem>
+      <para revision="1" xml:id="configureX_chooser-pa5"><emphasis><guibutton>Test</guibutton></emphasis>: The test button does not
+always appear during install. If the button is there, you can control your
+settings by pressing it. If you see a question asking you whether your
+settings are correct, you can answer "yes", and the settings will be
+kept. If you don't see anything, you'll return to the configuration screen
+and be able to reconfigure everything until the test is good. <emphasis>Make
+sure your settings are on the safe side if the test button isn't
+available</emphasis></para>
+    </listitem>
+
+    <listitem>
+      <para revision="1" xml:id="configureX_chooser-pa6"><emphasis><guibutton>Options</guibutton></emphasis>: Here you can choose to
+enable or disable various options.</para>
+    </listitem>
+  </itemizedlist>
+</section>
diff --git a/docs/installer/sl/configureX_monitor.xml b/docs/installer/sl/configureX_monitor.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..e0f8482d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/installer/sl/configureX_monitor.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,83 @@
+<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?>
+<section version="5.0" xml:lang="sl" xml:id="configureX_monitor"
+         xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook"
+         xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml"
+         xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML"
+         xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg"
+         xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink"
+         xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook">
+  
+
+  
+
+  
+
+  
+
+  <info>
+    <!-- Initiated by Marga 2012-8-09 -->
+<!-- Further text JohnR  2012-08-30 -->
+<!-- tproof -->
+<!-- lproof -->
+<title xml:id="configureX_monitor-ti1">Izberite vaš zaslon</title>
+  </info>
+
+  <para revision="1" xml:id="configureX_monitor-pa1">DrakX has a very comprehensive database of monitors and will usually
+correctly identify yours.</para>
+
+  <warning>
+    <para revision="1" xml:id="configureX_monitor-pa1w"><emphasis>Selecting a monitor with different characteristics could damage
+your monitor or video hardware. Please don't try something without knowing
+what you are doing.</emphasis> If in doubt you should consult your monitor
+documentation</para>
+  </warning>
+
+  <mediaobject>
+<imageobject> <imagedata align="center" fileref="dx2-configureX_monitor.png"
+format="PNG" revision="1" xml:id="configureX_monitor-im1"/> </imageobject></mediaobject>
+
+  <para revision="1"
+  xml:id="configureX_monitor-pa2"><emphasis>Custom</emphasis></para>
+
+  <para revision="1" xml:id="configureX_monitor-pa3">This option allows you to set two critical parameters, the vertical refresh
+rate and the horizontal sync rate. Vertical refresh determines how often the
+screen is refreshed and horizontal sync is the rate at which scan lines are
+displayed.</para>
+
+  <para revision="1" xml:id="configureX_monitor-pa4">It is <emphasis>VERY IMPORTANT</emphasis> that you do not specify a monitor
+type with a sync range that is beyond the capabilities of your monitor: you
+may damage your monitor. If in doubt, choose a conservative setting and
+consult your monitor documentation.</para>
+
+  <para revision="1" xml:id="configureX_monitor-pa5"><emphasis>Plug 'n Play</emphasis></para>
+
+  <para revision="1" xml:id="configureX_monitor-pa6">This is the default option and tries to determine the monitor type from the
+monitor database.</para>
+
+  <para revision="1"
+  xml:id="configureX_monitor-pa7"><emphasis>Vendor</emphasis></para>
+
+  <para revision="1" xml:id="configureX_monitor-pa8">If the installer has not correctly detected your monitor and you know which
+one you have, you can select it from the tree by selecting: <itemizedlist>
+      <listitem>
+        <para>Proizvajalec</para>
+      </listitem>
+
+      <listitem>
+        <para>the monitor manufacturers name</para>
+      </listitem>
+
+      <listitem>
+        <para>the monitor description</para>
+      </listitem>
+    </itemizedlist></para>
+
+  <para revision="1"
+  xml:id="configureX_monitor-pa9"><emphasis>Generic</emphasis></para>
+
+  <para revision="1" xml:id="configureX_monitor-pa10">selecting this group displays nearly 30 display configurations such as
+1024x768 @ 60Hz and includes Flat panel displays as used in laptops. This is
+often a good monitor selection group if you need to use the Vesa card driver
+when your video hardware cannot be determined automatically. Once again it
+may be wise to be conservative in your selections.</para>
+</section>
diff --git a/docs/installer/sl/diskdrake.xml b/docs/installer/sl/diskdrake.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..cfbfbef8
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/installer/sl/diskdrake.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,61 @@
+<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:lang="sl" xml:id="diskdrake">
+  
+
+  
+
+  
+
+  
+  
+  
+	
+	
+	
+
+  <info>
+    <!-- Started by marja on 2012 03 29 -->
+<!-- NEEDS TO BE WRITTEN AND THEN REVIEWED! -->
+<!-- JohnR added note for bug 133 re encrypted partitions -->
+<!-- JohnR 2012-04-10 - tidy up module formatting -->
+<!-- Marja, 2012-04-18 changed "If you wish to use encryption on
+    any of your partitions" into "If you wish to use encryption on
+      your <literal>
+/</literal> partition" because pterjan said this is only for root 
+      Also added some text. -->
+<!--marja 20120418 moved section end tag down to where it belongs-->
+<!--marja 20120418 added para 6a-->
+<title xml:id="diskdrake-ti1">Razdeljevanje diska po meri s programom DiskDrake</title>
+  </info>
+
+  
+
+  <mediaobject>
+<imageobject> <imagedata fileref="dx2-diskdrake.png"
+align="center"></imagedata> </imageobject></mediaobject>
+
+
+<warning>
+    <para revision="3" xml:id="diskdrake-pa1">If you wish to use encryption on your <literal>/</literal> partition you
+must ensure that you have a separate <literal>/boot</literal> partition. The
+encryption option for the <literal>/boot</literal> partition must NOT be
+set, otherwise your system will be unbootable.</para>
+  </warning>
+
+  <para revision="2" xml:id="diskdrake-pa3">Adjust the layout of your disk(s) here. You can remove or create partitions,
+change the filesystem of a partition or change its size and even view what
+is in them before you start.
+ </para>
+  
+  <para revision="1" xml:id="diskdrake-pa4">There is a tab for every detected hard disk or other storage device, like an
+USB key. For example sda, sdb and sdc if there are three of them.
+  </para>
+  
+  <para revision="1" xml:id="diskdrake-pa5">Push <guibutton>Clear all</guibutton> to wipe all partitions on the selected
+storage device</para>
+  
+  <para revision="1" xml:id="diskdrake-pa6">For all other actions: click on the desired partition first. Then view it,
+or choose a filesystem and a mount point, resize it or wipe it.</para>
+  
+  <para revision="1" xml:id="diskdrake-pa6a">Continue until you adjusted everything to your wishes. </para>
+  
+  <para revision="1" xml:id="diskdrake-pa7">Click <guibutton>Done</guibutton> when you're ready.</para> </section>
+\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/docs/installer/sl/doPartitionDisks.xml b/docs/installer/sl/doPartitionDisks.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..bf32a87a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/installer/sl/doPartitionDisks.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,117 @@
+<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns6="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:lang="sl" xml:id="doPartitionDisks">
+  
+
+  
+
+  
+
+  
+
+  
+
+  
+
+  
+
+  
+
+  
+  
+  
+
+  <info>
+    <!-- Started by marja on 2012 03 29 -->
+<!-- NEEDS TO BE WRITTEN AND THEN REVIEWED! -->
+<!-- JohnR 2012-04-10 - tidy up module formatting -->
+<!-- barjac 2012-04-20 Yes I agree with Lebarhon - reference to home partition removed -->
+<!-- Simonnzg - doing anything to a Windows partition is DANGEROUS. I would prefer 
+       if this was not an option, but... -->
+<!-- marja 2012-04-24 put the para xml id's back.  -->
+<!-- marja 2012-04-29 changed text as discussed on the ml and with papoteur's approval
+ lebarhon: 2012-08-18 warning added-->
+<!-- marja 2013-04-05 changed warning to text suggested by Dave Hodgings in bug 9594 -->
+<!-- marja 2013-04-05 adjusted last line of warning as suggested by obgr_seneca -->
+<!-- lebarhon 2013-04-11 adjusted last line of warning as suggested by Dave Hodgins/Marja-->
+<title xml:id="doPartitionDisks-ti1">Razdelitev diska</title>
+  </info>
+
+  <para revision="1" xml:id="doPartitionDisks-pa1">In this screen you can see the content of your hard drive(s) and see the
+solutions the DrakX partitioning wizard found for where to install
+<application>Mageia</application>.</para>
+
+  <para revision="1" xml:id="doPartitionDisks-pa2">The options available from the list below will vary depending on your
+particular hard drive(s) layout and content.</para>
+
+  <mediaobject>
+<imageobject> <imagedata align="center" fileref="dx2-doPartitionDisks.png"
+/> </imageobject></mediaobject>
+
+  <para revision="1" xml:id="doPartitionDisks-pa3"><itemizedlist>
+      <listitem>
+        <para revision="1" xml:id="doPartitionDisks-pa4">Uporabi obstoječe razdelke</para>
+
+        <para revision="1" xml:id="doPartitionDisks-pa5">If this option is available, then existing Linux compatible partitions have
+been found and may be used for the installation.</para>
+      </listitem>
+
+      <listitem>
+        <para revision="1" xml:id="doPartitionDisks-pa6">Uporabi razpoložljivi prostor</para>
+
+        <para revision="1" xml:id="doPartitionDisks-pa7">If you have unused space on your hard drive then this option will use it for
+your new Mageia installation.</para>
+      </listitem>
+
+      <listitem>
+        <para revision="1" xml:id="doPartitionDisks-pa8">Uporabi razpoložljivi prostor v razdelku za Windows</para>
+
+        <para revision="1" xml:id="doPartitionDisks-pa9">If you have unused space on an existing Windows partition, the installer may
+offer to use it.</para>
+
+        <para xml:id="doPartitionDisks-pa10" revision="2">This can be a useful way of making room for your new Mageia installation,
+but is a risky operation so you should make sure you have backed up all
+important files!</para>
+
+        <para xml:id="doPartitionDisks-pa11" revision="3">Note that this involves shrinking the size of the Windows partition. The
+partition must be "clean", meaning that Windows must have closed down
+correctly the last time it was used. It must also have been defragmented,
+although this is not a guarantee that all files in the partition have been
+moved out of the area that is about to be used. It is highly recommended to
+back up your personal files.</para>
+      </listitem>
+    </itemizedlist> <itemizedlist>
+      <listitem>
+        <para revision="1" xml:id="doPartitionDisks-pa12">Zbriši in uporabi celoten disk.</para>
+
+        <para revision="1" xml:id="doPartitionDisks-pa13">This option will use the complete drive for Mageia.</para>
+
+        <para revision="1" xml:id="doPartitionDisks-pa14">Note! This will erase ALL data on the selected hard drive. Take care!</para>
+
+        <para revision="1" xml:id="doPartitionDisks-pa15">If you intend to use part of the disk for something else, or you already
+have data on the drive that you are not prepared to lose, then do not use
+this option.</para>
+      </listitem>
+    </itemizedlist> <itemizedlist>
+      <listitem>
+        <para revision="1" xml:id="doPartitionDisks-pa16">Po meri</para>
+
+        <para revision="1" xml:id="doPartitionDisks-pa17">This gives you complete control over the placing of the installation on your
+hard drive(s).</para>
+      </listitem>
+    </itemizedlist></para>
+
+  <warning>
+    <para>Some newer drives are now using 4096 byte logical sectors, instead of the
+previous standard of 512 byte logical sectors. Due to lack of available
+hardware, the partitioning tool used in the installer has not been tested
+with such a drive. Also some ssd drives now use an erase block size over 1
+MB. We suggest to pre-partition the drive, using an alternative partitioning
+tool like gparted, if you own such a device, and to use the following
+settings: </para>
+
+    <para>"Align to" "MiB" </para>
+
+    <para>"Free space preceding (MiB)" "2" </para>
+
+    <para>Also make sure all partitions are created with an even number of megabytes.</para>
+  </warning>
+</section>
+\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/docs/installer/sl/exitInstall.xml b/docs/installer/sl/exitInstall.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..49addb1b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/installer/sl/exitInstall.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,38 @@
+<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns42="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xml:id="exitInstall" version="5.0" xml:lang="sl">
+
+  <info>
+    <title xml:id="exitInstall-ti1">Čestitke</title>
+  </info>
+
+  
+  
+  
+  
+  
+  
+   <mediaobject>
+<!-- Started by marja on 2012 03 29 -->
+<!-- NEEDS TO BE WRITTEN AND THEN REVIEWED! -->
+<!-- marja - 2012-04-24 added screenshot and text -->
+<!-- same day, added "s" to "sytems"-->
+<imageobject> <imagedata revision="1" fileref="dx2-exitInstall.png"
+format="PNG" align="center" xml:id="exitInstall-im1"> </imagedata>
+</imageobject></mediaobject>
+
+  <para revision="2" xml:id="exitInstall-pa1">You have finished installing and configuring
+<application>Mageia</application> and it is now safe to remove the
+installation medium and reboot your computer.</para>
+
+  <para revision="2" xml:id="exitInstall-pa2">After reboot, in the bootloader screen, you can choose between the operating
+systems on your computer (if you have more than one).</para>
+
+  <para revision="1" xml:id="exitInstall-pa3">If you didn't adjust the settings for the bootloader, your Mageia install
+will be automatically selected and started. </para>
+  
+  <para revision="1" xml:id="exitInstall-pa4">Uživajte</para>
+  
+  <para revision="1" xml:id="exitInstall-pa5">Visit www.mageia.org if you have any questions or want to contribute to
+Mageia </para>
+  
+  
+</section>
+\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/docs/installer/sl/formatPartitions.xml b/docs/installer/sl/formatPartitions.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..6d507e5a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/installer/sl/formatPartitions.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,43 @@
+<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns42="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:lang="sl" xml:id="formatPartitions">
+
+  <info>
+    <title xml:id="formatPartitions-ti1">Formatiranje</title>
+  </info>
+
+  
+
+  
+  
+  
+  
+  
+  
+  
+  
+   <mediaobject>
+<!-- Made by marja on 2012 03 29 -->
+<!-- NEEDS TO BE REVIEWED! -->
+<!-- marja 2012-04-24 added screenshot -->
+<!-- marja 2012-04-24 added emphasis tags in formatPartitions-pa1 -->
+<imageobject> <imagedata revision="1" fileref="dx2-formatPartitions.png"
+format="PNG" align="center" xml:id="formatPartitions-im1"> </imagedata>
+</imageobject></mediaobject>
+
+  <para revision="2" xml:id="formatPartitions-pa1">Here you can choose which partition(s) you wish to format. Any data on
+partitions <emphasis>not</emphasis> marked for formatting will be saved.</para>
+
+  <para revision="1" xml:id="formatPartitions-pa2">Usually at least the partitions DrakX selected, need to be formatted</para>
+
+  <para revision="1" xml:id="formatPartitions-pa3">Click on <guibutton>Advanced</guibutton> to choose partitions you want to
+check for so called <emphasis>bad blocks</emphasis></para>
+
+  <tip>
+    <para revision="1" xml:id="formatPartitions-pa4">If you're not sure you have made the right choice, you can click on
+<guibutton>Previous</guibutton>, again on <guibutton>Previous</guibutton>
+and then on <guibutton>Custom</guibutton> to get back to the main screen.
+In that screen you can choose to view what is in your partitions.</para>
+  </tip>
+
+  <para revision="1" xml:id="formatPartitions-pa5">When you are confident about the selection, click on
+<guibutton>Next</guibutton> to continue.</para>
+</section>
diff --git a/docs/installer/sl/installUpdates.xml b/docs/installer/sl/installUpdates.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..0e62196c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/installer/sl/installUpdates.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,31 @@
+<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?>
+
+<section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:lang="sl" xml:id="installUpdates"><info><title xml:id="installUpdates-ti1">Posodobitve</title></info>
+
+
+
+
+ 
+ 
+ 
+
+   <mediaobject>
+<!-- Made by marja on 2012 03 30 -->
+<!-- NEEDS TO BE REVIEWED! -->
+<!-- marja 20120418 removed xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns42="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg"" from section tag, trying to restore correct html filename-->
+<!-- marja, 2012-04-24 added screenshot -->
+<imageobject> <imagedata revision="1" fileref="dx2-installUpdates.png"
+format="PNG" align="center" xml:id="installUpdates-im1"></imagedata>
+</imageobject></mediaobject> 
+
+ <para revision="1" xml:id="installUpdates-pa1">Since this version of <application>Mageia</application> was released, some
+packages will have been updated or improved.</para>
+
+  <para revision="1" xml:id="installUpdates-pa2">Choose <guilabel>yes</guilabel> if you wish to download and install them,
+select <guilabel>no</guilabel> if you don't want to do this now, or if you
+aren't connected to the Internet</para>
+
+  <para revision="1" xml:id="installUpdates-pa3">Then press <guibutton>Next</guibutton> to continue</para>
+
+</section>
+  
+\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/docs/installer/sl/installer.xml b/docs/installer/sl/installer.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..451e88e4
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/installer/sl/installer.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,253 @@
+<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xml:id="installer" version="5.0" xml:lang="sl">
+  
+
+  
+
+  
+
+  
+
+  
+
+  
+
+  <info>
+    <!-- Made by marja on 2012 03 30, using barjac's text -->
+<!-- NEEDS TO BE REVIEWED! -->
+<!--removed para id's, corrected duplicate id's for segments, marja, 20120409 -->
+<!--barjac 2012-04-11 - corrected link to Welcome screen and unmangled header - 
+      seems to be corrupted by xxe addon when saving -->
+<!-- JohnR - apparent corruption is caused by the positioning of this comment block 
+       - corrected Lebarhon : I put [] where it seems having mistakes  -->
+<!-- barjac 18/04/2012 Commented out para relating to peripherals, as it's apparently wrong -->
+<title xml:id="installer-ti1">DrakX, the Mageia Installer</title>
+  </info>
+
+  <para>Whether you are new to GNU-Linux or an experienced user, the Mageia
+Installer is designed to help make your installation or upgrade as easy as
+possible.</para>
+
+  
+
+  <!-- <para>
+If you have peripherals like printers or scanners, it is [best] to
+  connect them and make sure they are powered up during installation. These
+  will be automatically detected and configured.</para> -->
+<para>The initial menu screen has various options, however the default one will
+start the installer, which will normally be all that you will need.</para>
+
+  <figure xml:id="dx-welcome">
+    <info>
+      <title xml:id="installer-ti2">Installation Welcome Screen</title>
+    </info>
+
+    <para>Here is the default welcome screen when using a Mageia DVD:</para>
+
+<mediaobject>
+<imageobject> <imagedata xml:id="BId-drakx-intro-im1" revision="1"
+align="center" format="PNG" fileref="../dx-welcome.png"/> </imageobject></mediaobject></figure>
+
+  <para>From this first screen, it is possible to set some personal preferences:</para>
+
+  <itemizedlist>
+    <listitem>
+      <para>The language (for the installation only, may be different that the chosen
+language for the system) by pressing the key F2</para>
+
+      <para/>
+
+      <mediaobject>
+<imageobject> <imagedata fileref="dx-welcome-lang.png"/> </imageobject></mediaobject>
+
+      <para>Use the arrow keys to select the language and press the key Enter.</para>
+
+      <para>Here is for example, the French welcome screen when using a Live
+DVD/CD. Note that the Live DVD/CD menu does not propose: <guilabel>Rescue
+System</guilabel>, <guilabel>Memory test</guilabel> and <guilabel>Hardware
+Detection Tool</guilabel>.</para>
+
+      <para/>
+
+      <mediaobject>
+<imageobject> <imagedata fileref="dx-welcome4fr.png"/> </imageobject></mediaobject>
+
+      <para/>
+    </listitem>
+
+    <listitem>
+      <para>Change the screen resolution by pressing the F3 key.</para>
+
+      <mediaobject>
+<imageobject> <imagedata fileref="dx-welcome5def.png"/> </imageobject></mediaobject>
+    </listitem>
+
+    <listitem>
+      <para>Add some kernel options by pressing the F6 key.</para>
+
+      <para>If the installation fails, then it may be necessary to try again using one
+of the extra options. The menu called by F6 displays a new line called
+<guilabel>Boot options</guilabel> and propose four entries:</para>
+
+      <para>- Default, it doesn't alter anything in the default options.</para>
+
+      <para>- Safe Settings, priority is given to the safer options to the detriment of
+performances.</para>
+
+      <para>- No ACPI (Advanced Configuration and Power Interface), power management
+isn't taken into account.</para>
+
+      <para>- No Local APIC (Local Advanced Programmable Interrupt Controller), it is
+about CPU interruptions, select this option if you are asked for.</para>
+
+      <para>When you select one of these entries, it modifies the default options
+displayed in the <guilabel>Boot Options</guilabel> line.</para>
+
+      <note>
+        <para>In some Mageia releases, it may happen that the entries selected with the
+key F6 does not appear in the <guilabel>Boot Options</guilabel> line,
+however, they are really taken into account.</para>
+      </note>
+
+      <mediaobject>
+<imageobject> <imagedata fileref="dx-welcome6opt.png"/> </imageobject></mediaobject>
+    </listitem>
+
+    <listitem>
+      <para>Add more kernel options by pressing the key F1</para>
+
+      <para>Pressing F1 opens a new window with more available options. Select one with
+the arrow keys and press Enter to have more details or press the Esc key to
+go back to the welcome screen.</para>
+
+      <para/>
+
+      <mediaobject>
+<imageobject> <imagedata fileref="dx-welcomeHelp1.png"/> </imageobject></mediaobject>
+
+      <para/>
+
+      <para>The detailed view about the option splash. Press Esc or select
+<guilabel>Return to Boot Options</guilabel> to go back to the options
+list. These options can by added by hand in the <guilabel>Boot
+options</guilabel> line.</para>
+
+      <mediaobject>
+<imageobject> <imagedata fileref="dx-welcomeHelp2.png"/> </imageobject></mediaobject>
+
+      <para/>
+
+      <note>
+        <para>The help is translated in the chosen language with the F2 key.</para>
+      </note>
+    </listitem>
+  </itemizedlist>
+
+  <para>Here is the default welcome screen when using a Wired Network-based
+Installation CD (Boot.iso or Boot-Nonfree.iso images):</para>
+
+  <para>It does not allow to change the language, the available options are
+described in the screen. For more information about using a Wired
+Network-based Installation CD, see <link
+ns2:href="https://wiki.mageia.org/en/Boot.iso_install">the Mageia
+Wiki</link></para>
+
+  <warning>
+    <para>Postavitev tipkovnice je sedaj Ameriška</para>
+  </warning>
+
+  <mediaobject>
+<imageobject> <imagedata revision="1" xml:id="installer-im2" align="center"
+format="PNG" fileref="../dx-help.png"/> </imageobject></mediaobject>
+
+  <section xml:id="installationSteps">
+    <info>
+      <title xml:id="installationSteps-ti1">Namestitveni koraki</title>
+    </info>
+
+    <para>The install process is divided into a number of steps, which can be followed
+on the side panel of the screen.</para>
+
+    <para>Each step has one or more screens which may also have
+<guibutton>Advanced</guibutton> buttons with extra, less commonly required,
+options.</para>
+
+    <para>Most screens have <guibutton>Help</guibutton> buttons which give further
+explanations about the current step.</para>
+
+    <note>
+      <para>If somewhere during install you decide to stop the installation, it is
+possible to reboot, but please think twice before you do this.  Once a
+partition has been formatted or updates have started to be installed, your
+computer is no longer in the same state and rebooting it could very well
+leave you with an unusable system. If in spite of this you are very sure
+rebooting is what you want, go to a text terminal by pressing the three keys
+<guibutton>Alt Ctrl F2</guibutton> at the same time. After that, press
+<guibutton>Alt Ctrl Delete</guibutton> simultaneously to reboot.</para>
+    </note>
+  </section>
+
+  <section xml:id="installationOptions">
+    <section xml:id="installationProblems">
+      <info>
+        <title xml:id="installationProblems-ti1">Installation Problems and Possible Solutions</title>
+      </info>
+
+      <section xml:id="noX">
+        <info>
+          <title xml:id="noX-ti2">No Graphical Interface</title>
+        </info>
+
+        <itemizedlist>
+          <listitem>
+            <para>After the initial screen you did not reach the language selection
+screen. This can happen with some graphic cards and older systems. Try using
+low resolution by typing <code>vgalo</code> at the prompt.</para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para revision="2">If the hardware is very old, a graphical installation may not be
+possible. In this case it is worth trying a text mode installation. To use
+this hit ESC at the first welcome screen and confirm with ENTER. You will be
+presented with a black screen with the word "boot:". Type "text" and hit
+ENTER. Now continue with the installation in text mode.</para>
+          </listitem>
+        </itemizedlist>
+      </section>
+
+      <section xml:id="installFreezes">
+        <info>
+          <title xml:id="installFreezes-ti1">The Install Freezes</title>
+        </info>
+
+        <para>If the system appeared to freeze during the installation, this may be a
+problem with hardware detection. In this case the automatic detection of
+hardware may be bypassed and dealt with later. To try this, type
+<code>noauto</code> at the prompt. This option may also be combined with
+other options as necessary.</para>
+      </section>
+
+      <section xml:id="kernelOptions">
+        <info>
+          <title xml:id="kernelOptions-ti1">RAM problem</title>
+        </info>
+
+        <para>These will rarely be needed, but in some cases the hardware may report the
+available RAM incorrectly. To specify this manually, you can use the
+<code>mem=xxxM</code> parameter, where xxx is the correct amount of
+RAM. e.g. <code>mem=256M</code> would specify 256MB of RAM.</para>
+      </section>
+
+      <section xml:id="DynamicPartitions">
+        <info>
+          <title xml:id="DynamicPartitions-ti1">Dynamic partitions</title>
+        </info>
+
+        <para>If you converted your hard disk from "basic" format to "dynamic" format on
+Microsoft Windows, you must know that it is impossible to install Mageia on
+this disc. To go back to a basic disk, see the Microsoft documentation:
+<link
+ns2:href="http://msdn.microsoft.com/en-us/library/cc776315.aspx">http://msdn.microsoft.com/en-us/library/cc776315.aspx</link>.</para>
+      </section>
+    </section>
+  </section>
+</section>
+\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/docs/installer/sl/media_selection.xml b/docs/installer/sl/media_selection.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..823bdf70
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/installer/sl/media_selection.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,46 @@
+<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns42="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xml:id="media_selection" version="5.0" xml:lang="sl">
+  <info>
+    <title xml:id="media_selection-ti1">Media Selection (Nonfree)</title>
+  </info>
+
+  
+  
+  
+  
+
+<mediaobject>
+<!-- papoteur 2013-04-11  - created -->
+<!-- marja 2013-04-16 added screenshot + made title longer (because it was the same as for add_supplemental_media)-->
+<!-- marja 2013-04-16 s/in/during/ as suggested by Tristan Campbell -->
+<!--marja 2013-04-17 s/xml:id="media-selection"/xml:id="media_selection"/ (html filename was wrong)-->
+<imageobject> <imagedata align="center" fileref="dx2-media_selection.png"
+format="PNG" revision="1" xml:id="media_selection-im1"/> </imageobject></mediaobject>
+
+  <para>Here you have the list of available repositories. Not all repositories are
+available, according to which media you use for installing. The repositories
+selection determines which packages will be available for selection during
+the next steps.</para>
+
+  <itemizedlist>
+    <listitem>
+      <para>The <emphasis>Core</emphasis> repository cannot be disabled as it contains
+the base of the distribution.</para>
+    </listitem>
+
+    <listitem>
+      <para>The <emphasis>Nonfree</emphasis> repository includes packages that are
+free-of-charge, i.e. Mageia may redistribute them, but they contain
+closed-source software (hence the name - Nonfree). For example this
+repository includes nVidia and ATI graphics card proprietary drivers,
+firmware for various WiFi cards, etc.</para>
+    </listitem>
+
+    <listitem>
+      <para>The <emphasis>Tainted</emphasis> repository includes packages released under
+a free license. The main criteria for placing packages in this repository is
+that they may infringe patents and copyright laws in some countries,
+e.g. Multimedia codecs needed to play various audio/video files; packages
+needed to play commercial video DVD, etc.</para>
+    </listitem>
+  </itemizedlist>
+</section>
+\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/docs/installer/sl/minimal-install.xml b/docs/installer/sl/minimal-install.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..2156d572
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/installer/sl/minimal-install.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,27 @@
+<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns42="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:lang="sl" xml:id="minimal-install">
+    <!--2012-12-26 marja - exported this section from choosePackages.xml to start a new page-->
+<!--2013-05-05 marja - added screenshot and s/next/related/ -->
+<info>
+      <title xml:id="minimal-install-ti1">Minimalna namestitev</title>
+    </info>
+
+    
+    
+
+    <para>You can choose a Minimal Installation by de-selecting everything in the
+Package Group Selection screen, see <xref
+linkend="choosePackageGroups"></xref>.</para>
+    <para>Minimal Installation is intended for those with specific uses in mind for
+their <application>Mageia</application>, such as a server or a specialised
+workstation. You will probably use this option combined with Manual Package
+Selection, see <xref linkend="choosePackagesTree"></xref>.</para>
+    <para>If you choose this installation class, then the related screen will offer
+you a few useful extras to install, such as documentation and X.</para>
+
+<mediaobject>
+<imageobject> <imagedata revision="1" fileref="dx2-minimal-install.png"
+align="center" format="PNG" xml:id="minimal-install-im1"></imagedata>
+</imageobject></mediaobject>
+
+  </section>
+
diff --git a/docs/installer/sl/misc-params.xml b/docs/installer/sl/misc-params.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..0afa2c99
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/installer/sl/misc-params.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,210 @@
+<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xml:id="misc-params" version="5.0" xml:lang="sl">
+  <info>
+    <title xml:id="misc-params-ti1">Summary of miscellaneous parameters</title>
+  </info>
+
+  
+
+  
+
+  
+
+  
+
+  
+
+  
+
+  
+
+  
+
+  
+
+  
+
+  
+
+  
+
+  <mediaobject>
+<!-- Started by marja on 2012 03 31 -->
+<!-- NEEDS TO BE WRITTEN AND REVIEWED! -->
+<!--marja - 2012 04 15 added some text, not much, unfortunately :( -->
+<!--marja 2012-04-24 added screenshots -->
+<!--JohnR 2012-04-25 Added text as requested by Psec :-)-->
+<!--marja 2012-04-24 added 2 links to other help pages -->
+<!--marja 2012-04-24 added some text in the drakxid-configureServices and 
+      the drakxid-miscellaneous section -->
+<!--marja 2012-04-24 corrected "Magaia" in the last paragraph -->
+<!--marja 2012-04-24 corrected para xml:id number in the last paragraph -->
+<!-- 2012-05-01 marja - added You-Cheng Hsieh's section about IBus etc. -->
+<!-- 2012-08-09 marja - replaced linkend="setupBootloaderBeginner" by linkend="setupBootloader" -->
+<!--2012-12-25 marja - moved configureTimezoneUTC, selectCountry, configureServices and SecurityLevel out to separate files-->
+<imageobject> <imagedata fileref="dx2-summary.png" revision="1"
+align="center" format="PNG" xml:id="summary-im1" /> </imageobject></mediaobject>
+
+  <para revision="1" xml:id="misc-params-pa1">DrakX made smart choices for the configuration of your system depending on
+the choices you made and on the hardware DrakX detected. You can check the
+settings here and change them if you want after pressing
+<guibutton>Configure</guibutton>.</para>
+
+  <section xml:id="misc-params-system">
+    <info>
+      <title xml:id="misc-params-system-ti2">System parameters</title>
+    </info>
+
+    <itemizedlist>
+      <listitem>
+        <para xml:id="misc-params-system-pa2" revision="1"><guilabel>Časovni pas</guilabel></para>
+
+        <para xml:id="misc-params-system-pa2a" revision="1">DrakX selected a time zone for you, depending on your preferred
+language. You can change it if needed. See also <xref
+linkend="configureTimezoneUTC"/></para>
+      </listitem>
+
+      <listitem>
+        <para xml:id="misc-params-system-pa3" revision="1"><guilabel>Država</guilabel></para>
+
+        <para revision="1" xml:id="misc-params-system-pa3a">If you are not in the selected country, it is very important that you
+correct the setting. See <xref linkend="selectCountry"/></para>
+      </listitem>
+
+      <listitem>
+        <para xml:id="misc-params-system-pa4" revision="1"><guilabel>Zagonski nalagalnik</guilabel></para>
+
+        <para revision="2" xml:id="misc-params-system-pa4a">DrakX has made good choices for the bootloader setting.</para>
+
+        <para revision="2" xml:id="misc-params-system-pa4b">Do not change anything, unless you know how to configure Grub and/or Lilo</para>
+
+        <para revision="2" xml:id="misc-params-system-pa4c">For more information, see <xref linkend="setupBootloader"/></para>
+      </listitem>
+
+      <listitem>
+        <para revision="1" xml:id="misc-params-system-pa5"><guilabel>User management</guilabel></para>
+
+        <para revision="2" xml:id="misc-params-system-pa5a">You can add extra users here. They will each get their own
+<literal>/home</literal> directories.</para>
+      </listitem>
+
+      <listitem>
+        <para revision="1" xml:id="misc-params-system-pa6"><guilabel>Services</guilabel>:</para>
+
+        <para xml:id="misc-params-system-pa6a" revision="1">System services refer to those small programs which run the background
+(daemons). This tool allows you to enable or disable certain tasks.</para>
+
+        <para xml:id="misc-params-system-pa6b" revision="1">You should check carefully before changing anything here - a mistake may
+prevent your computer from operating correctly.</para>
+
+        <para>For more information, see <xref linkend="configureServices"/></para>
+      </listitem>
+    </itemizedlist>
+  </section>
+
+  <section xml:id="misc-params-hardware">
+    <info>
+      <title xml:id="misc-params-hardware-ti3">Hardware parameters</title>
+    </info>
+
+    <itemizedlist>
+      <listitem>
+        <para revision="1" xml:id="misc-params-hardware-pa1"><guilabel>Tipkovnica</guilabel>:</para>
+
+        <para xml:id="misc-params-hardware-pa1a" revision="1">This is where you setup or change your keyboard layout which will depend on
+your location, language or type of keyboard.</para>
+      </listitem>
+
+      <listitem>
+        <para revision="1" xml:id="misc-params-hardware-pa2"><guilabel>Mouse</guilabel>:</para>
+
+        <para revision="1" xml:id="misc-params-hardware-pa2a">Here you can add or configure other pointing devices, tablets, trackballs
+etc.</para>
+      </listitem>
+
+      <listitem>
+        <para revision="1" xml:id="misc-params-hardware-pa3"><guilabel>Sound card</guilabel>:</para>
+
+	<para revision="1" xml:id="misc-params-hardware-pa3a">The installer uses the default driver, if there is a default one. The option
+to select a different driver is only given when there is more than one
+driver for your card, but none of them is the default one.</para>
+      </listitem>
+
+      <listitem>
+        <para xml:id="misc-params-hardware-pa4" revision="1"><guilabel>Graphical interface</guilabel>:</para>
+
+        <para revision="1" xml:id="misc-params-hardware-pa4a">This section allows you to configure your graphic card(s) and displays.</para>
+
+        <para revision="1" xml:id="misc-params-hardware-pa4b">For more information, see <xref linkend="configureX_chooser"/>.</para>
+      </listitem>
+    </itemizedlist>
+
+    <mediaobject>
+<imageobject> <imagedata xml:id="summaryBottom-im1" revision="1"
+align="center" format="PNG" fileref="dx2-summaryBottom.png" />
+</imageobject></mediaobject>
+  </section>
+
+  <section xml:id="misc-params-network">
+    <info>
+      <title xml:id="misc-params-network-ti4">Network and Internet parameters</title>
+    </info>
+
+    <itemizedlist>
+      <listitem>
+        <para revision="1" xml:id="misc-params-network-pa1"><guilabel>Network</guilabel>:</para>
+
+        <para xml:id="misc-params-network-pa2" revision="1">You can configure your network here, but for network cards with non-free
+drivers it is better to do that after reboot, in the <application>Mageia
+Control Center</application>, if you have not yet enabled the Nonfree media
+repositories.</para>
+
+        <warning>
+          <para xml:id="misc-params-network-pa3" revision="1">When you add a network card, do not forget to set your firewall to watch
+that interface as well.</para>
+        </warning>
+      </listitem>
+
+      <listitem>
+        <para xml:id="misc-params-network-pa4" revision="1"><guilabel>Proxies</guilabel>:</para>
+
+        <para xml:id="misc-params-network-pa4a" revision="1">A Proxy Server acts as an intermediary between your computer and the wider
+internet.  This section allows you to configure your computer to utilize a
+proxy service.</para>
+
+        <para revision="1" xml:id="misc-params-network-pa4b">You may need to consult your systems administrator to get the parameters you
+need to enter here</para>
+      </listitem>
+    </itemizedlist>
+  </section>
+
+  <section xml:id="misc-params-security">
+    <info>
+      <title xml:id="misc-params-security-ti5">Varnost</title>
+    </info>
+
+    <itemizedlist>
+      <listitem>
+        <para xml:id="misc-params-security-pa1" revision="1"><guilabel>Security Level</guilabel>:</para>
+
+        <para revision="1" xml:id="misc-params-security-pa1a">Here you set the Security level for your computer, in most cases the default
+setting (Standard) is adequate for general use.</para>
+
+        <para revision="1" xml:id="misc-params-security-pa1b">Check the option which best suits your usage.</para>
+      </listitem>
+
+      <listitem>
+        <para xml:id="misc-params-security-pa2" revision="1"><guilabel>Firewall</guilabel>:</para>
+
+        <para xml:id="misc-params-security-pa2a" revision="1">A firewall is intended to be a barrier between your important data and the
+rascals out there on the internet who would compromise or steal it.</para>
+
+        <para revision="1" xml:id="misc-params-security-pa2b">Select the services that you wish to have access to your system. Your
+selections will depend on what you use your computer for.</para>
+
+        <warning>
+          <para revision="1" xml:id="misc-params-security-pa2c">Bear in mind that allowing everything (no firewall) may be very risky.</para>
+        </warning>
+      </listitem>
+    </itemizedlist>
+  </section>
+</section>
diff --git a/docs/installer/sl/resizeFATChoose.xml b/docs/installer/sl/resizeFATChoose.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..22e96720
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/installer/sl/resizeFATChoose.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,33 @@
+<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?>
+<section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook"
+ xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML"
+ xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg"
+ xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml"
+ xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink"
+ xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook"
+  version="5.0" xml:lang="sl" xml:id="resizeFATChoose">
+   
+  
+
+    
+
+  <info>
+    <!-- Made by marja on 2012 03 31 -->
+<!--2013-12-01 re-adding this file to software/i18n/tools/docs/installer/en
+  in git, in case the related screen gets restored in drakx-installer-stage2-->
+<title xml:id="resizeFATChoose-ti1">Resize <application>Windows<superscript>®</superscript></application>
+partition</title>
+  </info>
+
+  <para revision="1" xml:id="resizeFATChoose-pa1">You have more than one
+<application>Windows<superscript>®</superscript></application> partition.
+Choose which one should be made smaller to make space for installing
+<application>Mageia</application>.</para>
+
+  
+   
+<!--<para revision="1" xml:id="resizeFATChoose-pa2">
+.......</para>
+
+ <para revision="1" xml:id="resizeFATChoose-pa3">........</para>-->
+</section>
diff --git a/docs/installer/sl/securityLevel.xml b/docs/installer/sl/securityLevel.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..0c7d53a9
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/installer/sl/securityLevel.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,32 @@
+<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?>
+<section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook"
+ xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML"
+ xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg"
+ xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml"
+ xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink"
+ xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook"
+ xml:id="securityLevel" version="5.0" xml:lang="sl">
+
+
+    <info>
+      <title xml:id="securityLevel-ti1">Stopnja varnosti</title>
+    </info>
+
+ 
+ 
+
+<mediaobject>
+<!-- 2012-12-25 marja - moved this part out of misc-params.xml" -->
+<!-- 2013-05-05 marja - added screenshot -->
+<imageobject> <imagedata revision="1" fileref="dx2-securityLevel.png"
+align="center" format="PNG" xml:id="securityLevel-im1"></imagedata>
+</imageobject></mediaobject>
+
+    <para revision="1" xml:id="securityLevel-pa1">You can adjust your security level here.</para>
+
+    <para revision="1" xml:id="securityLevel-pa2">Leave the default settings as they are, if you don't know what to choose.</para>
+
+    <para revision="2" xml:id="securityLevel-pa3">After install, it will always be possible to adjust your security settings
+in the <guilabel>Security</guilabel> part of the Mageia Control Center.</para>
+  </section>
+
diff --git a/docs/installer/sl/selectCountry.xml b/docs/installer/sl/selectCountry.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..76c9713a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/installer/sl/selectCountry.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,63 @@
+<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?>
+<section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook"
+ xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML"
+ xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg"
+ xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml"
+ xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink"
+ xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook"
+ xml:id="selectCountry" version="5.0" xml:lang="sl">
+
+
+
+    <info>
+      <title xml:id="selectCountry-ti1">Select your Country / Region</title>
+    </info>
+
+    
+   
+
+<mediaobject>
+<!-- 2012-12-25 marja - moved this section out of misc-params -->
+<!-- 2013-05-05 marja - added screenshot -->
+<imageobject> <imagedata revision="1" fileref="dx2-selectCountry.png"
+align="center" format="PNG" xml:id="selectCountry-im1"></imagedata>
+</imageobject></mediaobject>
+
+
+    <para revision="2" xml:id="selectCountry-pa1">Select your country or region. This is important for all kinds of settings,
+like the currency and wireless regulatory domain. Setting the wrong country
+can lead to not being able to use a Wireless network.</para>
+
+    <para revision="1" xml:id="selectCountry-pa2">If your country isn't in the list, click the <guilabel>Other
+Countries</guilabel> button and choose your country / region there.</para>
+
+    <note>
+      <para revision="1" xml:id="selectCountry-pa3">If your country is only in the <guilabel>Other Countries</guilabel> list,
+after clicking <guibutton>OK</guibutton> it may seem a country from the
+first list was chosen. Please ignore this, DrakX will follow your real
+choice.</para>
+    </note>
+
+    <section xml:id="inputMethod">
+
+      <info>
+        <title xml:id="inputMethod-ti7">Način vnosa</title>
+      </info>
+
+      <para revision="1" xml:id="selectCountry-pa4">In the <guilabel>Other Countries</guilabel> screen you can also select an
+input method (at the bottom of the list). Input methods allow users to input
+multilingual characters (Chinese, Japanese, Korean, etc). IBus is the
+default input method in Mageia DVDs, Africa/India and Asia/no-India
+Live-CDs. For Asian and African locales, IBus will be set as default input
+method so users should not need to configure it manually. Other input
+methods(SCIM, GCIN, HIME, etc) also provide similar functions and can be
+installed if you added HTTP/FTP media before package selection.</para>
+
+      <note>
+        <para revision="1" xml:id="selectCountry-pa5">If you missed the input method setup during installation, you can access it
+after you boot your installed system via "Configure your Computer" -&gt;
+"System", or by running localedrake as root.</para>
+      </note>
+    </section>
+  </section>
+
diff --git a/docs/installer/sl/selectInstallClass.xml b/docs/installer/sl/selectInstallClass.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..f32009d3
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/installer/sl/selectInstallClass.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,74 @@
+<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?>
+<section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook"
+ xmlns:ns6="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink"
+ xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML"
+ xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml"
+ xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg"
+ xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook"
+ version="5.0" xml:lang="sl" xml:id="selectInstallClass">
+
+  
+
+  
+
+  
+
+  
+  
+
+  <info>
+    <!-- Made by marja on 2012 03 18 -->
+<!-- 20120405 updated JohnR -->
+<!-- enhanced xml code for screenshot, removed para xml:id's, changed "you'll" to
+      "you will" and "don't" to "do not" and a passive to an active tense, marja, 20120409-->
+<!-- barjac 2012-04-10 In the spirit of KISS reverted to my initial basic version -->
+<!-- 2013-05-05 marja, corrected typo in screenshot name, removed  -->
+<title xml:id="selectInstallClass-ti1">Namestitev ali nadgradnja</title>
+  </info>
+
+  <mediaobject>
+<imageobject> <imagedata fileref="dx2-selectInstallClass.png" align="center"
+format="PNG"></imagedata> </imageobject></mediaobject>
+
+  <itemizedlist>
+    <listitem>
+      <para>Namesti</para>
+
+      <para>Use this option for a fresh <application>Mageia</application> installation.</para>
+    </listitem>
+
+    <listitem>
+      <para>Nadgradnja</para>
+
+      <para>If you have one or more <application>Mageia</application> installations on
+your system, the installer will allow you to upgrade one of them to the
+latest release.</para>
+
+<warning>
+	<para>Only upgrading from a previous Mageia version that was <emphasis>still
+supported</emphasis> when this installer's version was released, has been
+thoroughly tested. If you want to upgrade a Mageia version that had already
+reached its End	Of Life when this one was released, then it is better to do
+a clean install while preserving your <literal>/home</literal> partition.</para>
+</warning>
+    </listitem>
+  </itemizedlist>
+
+  <note>
+    <para>If during install you decide to stop the installation, it is possible to
+reboot, but please think twice before you do this. Once a partition has been
+formatted or updates have started to be installed, your computer isn't in
+the same state anymore and rebooting it could very well leave you with an
+unusable system. If in spite of that you are very sure rebooting is what you
+want, go to a text terminal by pressing the three keys <guilabel>Alt Ctrl
+F2</guilabel> at the same time. After that, press <guilabel>Alt Ctrl
+Delete</guilabel> simultaneously to reboot.</para>
+  </note>
+
+  <tip>
+    <para>If you have discovered that you forgot to select an additional language, you
+can return from the "Install or Upgrade" screen to the language choice
+screen by pressing <guilabel>Alt Ctrl Home</guilabel>. Do
+<emphasis>not</emphasis> do this later in the install.</para>
+  </tip>
+</section>
diff --git a/docs/installer/sl/selectKeyboard.xml b/docs/installer/sl/selectKeyboard.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..60bed22f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/installer/sl/selectKeyboard.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,56 @@
+<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?>
+<section version="5.0" xml:lang="sl" xml:id="selectKeyboard"
+         xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook"
+         xmlns:xlink="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink"
+         xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml"
+         xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg"
+         xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML"
+         xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook">
+  
+
+  
+
+  <info>
+    <!-- Started by marja on 2012 03 31 -->
+<!-- NEEDS TO BE REVIEWED! -->
+<title xml:id="selectKeyboard-ti1">Tipkovnica</title>
+  </info>
+
+  <para revision="1" xml:id="selectKeyboard-pa1">DrakX selects an appropriate keyboard for your language. If no suitable
+keyboard is found it will default to a US keyboard layout.</para>
+
+  <mediaobject>
+<imageobject> <imagedata align="center" fileref="dx2-selectKeyboard.png" />
+</imageobject></mediaobject>
+
+  <itemizedlist>
+    <listitem>
+      <para revision="1" xml:id="selectKeyboard-pa2">Make sure that the selection is correct or choose another keyboard
+layout. If you don't know which layout your keyboard has, look in the
+specifications that came with your system, or ask the computer vendor. There
+may even be a label on the keyboard that identifies the layout. You can also
+look here: <link
+xlink:href="http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Keyboard_layout">en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Keyboard_layout</link></para>
+    </listitem>
+
+    <listitem>
+      <para revision="1" xml:id="selectKeyboard-pa3">If your keyboard isn't in the list shown, click on
+<guibutton>More</guibutton> to get a full list, and select your keyboard
+there.</para>
+
+      <para revision="1"><warning>
+          <para revision="1" xml:id="selectKeyboard-pa5">After choosing a keyboard from the <guibutton>More</guibutton> dialog,
+you'll return to the first keyboard choice dialog and it will seem as though
+a keyboard from that screen was chosen. You can safely ignore this anomaly
+and continue the installation: Your keyboard is the one you chose from the
+full list.</para>
+        </warning></para>
+    </listitem>
+
+    <listitem>
+      <para revision="1" xml:id="selectKeyboard-pa4">If you choose a keyboard based on non-Latin characters, you will see an
+extra dialog screen asking how you would prefer to switch between the Latin
+and non-Latin keyboard layouts</para>
+    </listitem>
+  </itemizedlist>
+</section>
diff --git a/docs/installer/sl/selectLanguage.xml b/docs/installer/sl/selectLanguage.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..f31243fc
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/installer/sl/selectLanguage.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,67 @@
+<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?>
+<section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook"
+ xmlns:ns6="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink"
+ xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml"
+ xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg"
+ xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML"
+ xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook"
+ version="5.0" xml:lang="sl" xml:id="selectLanguage">
+
+  
+
+  
+
+  
+
+  
+
+  
+
+  <info>
+    <!-- Made by marja on 2012 04 01, using barjac's text -->
+<!-- NEEDS TO BE REVIEWED! -->
+<!-- SimonNZG 2012-04-03 has had a look -->
+<!-- removed para id's, corrected duplicate id's for segments, corrected wrong
+       code in figure, marja, 20120409 -->
+<!-- barjac 2012-04-11 - removed image figure tag - and once again had to clean
+       up mess made of this header by xxe -->
+<title xml:id="selectLanguage-ti1">Izberite jezik namestitve</title>
+  </info>
+
+  <para>Select your preferred language, by first expanding the list for your
+continent. <application>Mageia</application> will use this selection during
+the installation and for your installed system.</para>
+
+  <para>If it is likely that you will require several languages installed on your
+system, for yourself or other users, then you should use the
+<guibutton>Multiple languages</guibutton> button to add them now. It will be
+difficult to add extra language support after installation.</para>
+
+  <mediaobject>
+<imageobject> <imagedata fileref="dx2-selectLanguage.png" align="center"
+format="PNG" > </imagedata> </imageobject></mediaobject>
+
+  <warning>
+    <para>Even if you choose more than one language, you must first choose one of them
+as your preferred language in the first language screen. It will also be
+marked as chosen in the multiple languages screen .</para>
+  </warning>
+
+  <itemizedlist>
+    <listitem>
+      <para>If your keyboard language is not the same as your preferred language, then
+it is advisable to install the language of your keyboard as well.</para>
+    </listitem>
+
+    <listitem>
+      <para>Mageia uses UTF-8 (Unicode) support by default. This may be disabled in the
+"multiple languages" screen if you know that it is inappropriate for your
+language. Disabling UTF-8 applies to all installed languages.</para>
+    </listitem>
+
+    <listitem>
+      <para>You can change the language of your system after installation in the Mageia
+Control Center -&gt; System -&gt; Manage localization for your system.</para>
+    </listitem>
+  </itemizedlist>
+</section>
diff --git a/docs/installer/sl/selectMouse.xml b/docs/installer/sl/selectMouse.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..1660399d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/installer/sl/selectMouse.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,31 @@
+<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns42="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xml:id="selectMouse" version="5.0" xml:lang="sl">
+
+  <info>
+    <title xml:id="selectMouse-ti1">Select mouse</title>
+  </info>
+
+  
+
+  
+  
+  
+  
+  
+  
+   <mediaobject>
+<!-- Made by marja on 2012 04 11 -->
+<!-- NEEDS TO BE REVIEWED! -->
+<!-- adding some "real" text now that we know the page shows up in the right place-->
+<!-- marja 2012-04-24 adding screenshot -->
+<imageobject> <imagedata fileref="dx2-selectMouse.png" align="center"
+format="PNG" > </imagedata> </imageobject></mediaobject>
+
+  <para revision="2" xml:id="selectMouse-pa1">If you are not happy with how your mouse responds, you can select a
+different one here.</para>
+
+ <para revision="2" xml:id="selectMouse-pa2">Usually, <guilabel>Universal</guilabel> - <guilabel>Any PS/2 and USB
+mice</guilabel> is a good choice.</para>
+
+  <para revision="2" xml:id="selectMouse-pa3">Select <guilabel>Universal</guilabel> - <guilabel>Force evdev</guilabel> to
+configure the buttons that do not work on a mouse with six or more buttons.</para>
+</section>
diff --git a/docs/installer/sl/setupBootloader.xml b/docs/installer/sl/setupBootloader.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..628a3fb1
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/installer/sl/setupBootloader.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,89 @@
+<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns42="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:lang="sl" xml:id="setupBootloader">
+  <info>
+    <title xml:id="setupBootloader-ti1">Glavne možnosti zagonskega nalagalnika</title>
+  </info>
+
+  
+
+  <mediaobject>
+<!-- 2012-08-12 Copied this page, setupBootloader.xml,  from setupBootloaderBeginner.xml and REMOVED the string "Beginner" everywhere, except in this sentence.  
+
+ 2013-3-30 Removed refernce to bootloader expert page and suggest using grub2 where other grub2 systems exist-->
+<imageobject> <imagedata revision="1" align="center"
+fileref="dx2-setupBootloader.png" xml:id="setupBootloader-im1" format="PNG"
+/> </imageobject></mediaobject>
+
+  <para xml:id="setupBootloader-pa1" revision="4">If you prefer different bootloader settings to those chosen automatically by
+the installer, you can change them here.</para>
+
+  <para xml:id="setupBootloader-pa2" revision="4">You may already have another operating system on your machine, in which case
+you need to decide whether to add Mageia to your existing bootloader, or
+allow Mageia to create a new one.</para>
+
+  <tip>
+    <para revision="2" xml:id="setupBootloader-pa3">The Mageia graphical menus are nice :)</para>
+  </tip>
+
+  <section xml:id="usingMageiaBootloader">
+    <info>
+      <title xml:id="usingMageiaBootloader-ti2">Using a Mageia bootloader</title>
+    </info>
+
+    <para revision="3" xml:id="setupBootloader-pa4">By default, Mageia writes a new GRUB (legacy) bootloader into the MBR
+(Master Boot Record) of your first hard drive. If you already have other
+operating systems installed, Mageia attempts to add them to your new Mageia
+boot menu.</para>
+
+    <para revision="3">Mageia now also offers GRUB2 as an optional bootloader in addition to GRUB
+legacy and Lilo.</para>
+
+    <warning>
+      <para revision="3" xml:id="setupBootloader-pa6">Linux systems which use the GRUB2 bootloader are not currently supported by
+GRUB (legacy) and will not be recognised if the default GRUB bootloader is
+used.</para>
+
+      <para revision="3">The best solution here is to use the GRUB2 bootloader which is available at
+the Summary page during installation.</para>
+    </warning>
+  </section>
+
+  <section xml:id="usingExistingBootloader">
+    <info>
+      <title revision="2" xml:id="usingExistingBootloader-ti4">Using an existing bootloader</title>
+    </info>
+
+    <para revision="3" xml:id="setupBootloader-pa46">If you decide to use an existing bootloader then you will need to remember
+to STOP at the summary page during the installation and click the Bootloader
+<guibutton>Configure</guibutton> button, which will allow you to change the
+bootloader install location.</para>
+
+    <para revision="1" xml:id="setupBootloader-pa47">Do not select a device e.g."sda", or you will overwrite your existing
+MBR. You must select the root partition that you chose during the
+partitioning phase earlier, e.g.  sda7.</para>
+
+    <para xml:id="setupBootloader-pa48" revision="1">To be clear, sda is a device, sda7 is a partition on that device.</para>
+
+    <tip>
+      <para revision="1" xml:id="setupBootloader-pa48a">Go to tty2 with Ctrl+Alt+F2 and type <literal>df</literal> to check where
+your <literal>/</literal> (root) partition is. Ctrl+Alt+F7 takes you back to
+the installer screen.</para>
+    </tip>
+
+    <para revision="2" xml:id="setupBootloader-pa49">The exact procedure for adding your Mageia system to an existing bootloader
+is beyond the scope of this help, however in most cases it will involve
+running the relevant bootloader installation program which should detect and
+add it automatically. See the documentation for the operating system in
+question.</para>
+  </section>
+
+  <section xml:id="advancedOptionBootloader">
+    <info>
+      <title revision="2" xml:id="advancedOptionBootloader-ti5">Napredne možnosti zagonskega nalagalnika</title>
+    </info>
+
+    <para revision="3" xml:id="setupBootloader-pa52">If you have very limited disk space for the <literal>/</literal> partition
+that contains <literal>/tmp</literal>, click on
+<guibutton>Advanced</guibutton> and check the box for <guilabel>Clean /tmp
+at each boot</guilabel>. This helps to maintain some free space.</para>
+  </section>
+</section>
+\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/docs/installer/sl/setupBootloaderAddEntry.xml b/docs/installer/sl/setupBootloaderAddEntry.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..cf393cfc
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/installer/sl/setupBootloaderAddEntry.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,39 @@
+<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xml:id="setupBootloaderAddEntry" version="5.0" xml:lang="sl">
+  <info>
+    <title xml:id="setupBootloaderAddEntry-ti1">Add or Modify a Boot Menu Entry</title>
+  </info>
+
+  <mediaobject>
+<imageobject> <imagedata revision="1"
+fileref="dx2-bootloaderConfiguration.png" align="center" format="PNG"
+xml:id="bootloaderConfiguration-im1"/> </imageobject></mediaobject>
+
+  <para>You can add an entry or modify the one you select first, by pressing the
+relevant button in the <emphasis>Bootloader Configuration</emphasis> screen
+and editing the screen that pops up on top of it.</para>
+
+  <note>
+    <para>If you have chosen <code>Grub 2</code> as your bootloader, you cannot use
+this tool to edit entries at this step, press 'Next'. You need to manually
+edit <code>/boot/grub2/custom.cfg</code> or use <code>grub-customizer</code>
+instead.</para>
+  </note>
+
+  <mediaobject>
+<imageobject> <imagedata revision="1" xml:id="setupBootloaderAddEntry-im1"
+align="center" format="PNG" fileref="dx2-setupBootloaderAddEntry.png"/>
+</imageobject></mediaobject>
+
+  <para>Some things that can be done without any risk, are changing the label of an
+entry and ticking the box to make an entry the default one.</para>
+
+  <para>You can add the proper version number of an entry, or rename it completely.</para>
+
+  <para>The default entry is the one the systems boots into if you don't make a
+choice while booting up.</para>
+
+  <warning>
+    <para>Editing other things can leave you with an unbootable system. Please don't
+just try something without knowing what you are doing.</para>
+  </warning>
+</section>
+\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/docs/installer/sl/setupSCSI.xml b/docs/installer/sl/setupSCSI.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..4a5da6b8
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/installer/sl/setupSCSI.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,45 @@
+<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?>
+<section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook"
+ xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml"
+ xmlns:ns42="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML"
+ xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink"
+ xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg"
+ xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook"
+ xml:id="setupSCSI" version="5.0" xml:lang="sl">
+
+  <info>
+    <title xml:id="setupSCSI-ti1">Setup SCSI</title>
+  </info>
+
+  
+  
+  
+  
+   
+  
+  
+  
+  
+  
+   <mediaobject>
+<!-- Made by marja on 2012 04 02 -->
+<!-- NEEDS TO BE REVIEWED! -->
+<!-- JohnR - edited 2012-03-03 -->
+<!-- SimonNZG has reviewed 2012-04-03 (changed editted to edited in JohnR's comment ;-) -->
+<!-- barjac has re-reviewed and made some minor tweaks. Revisions incremented. -->
+<!-- marja 2012-04-24 added screenshot -->
+<!-- marja 2012-04-25 replacing John's version 1.6 because that one was based on the
+       Mdv doc instead of on our setupSCSI file -->
+<imageobject> <imagedata revision="1" fileref="dx2-setupSCSI.png"
+format="PNG" align="center" xml:id="setupSCSI-im1"></imagedata>
+</imageobject></mediaobject>
+
+  <para revision="3.1" xml:id="setupSCSI-pa1">DrakX usually detects hard disks correctly. With some older SCSI controllers
+it may be unable to determine the correct drivers to use and subsequently
+fail to recognise the drive.</para>
+
+  <para revision="2" xml:id="setupSCSI-pa2">If this happens, you will need to manually tell Drakx which SCSI drive(s)
+you have.</para>
+
+  <para revision="3" xml:id="setupSCSI-pa3">DrakX should then be able to configure the drive(s) correctly.</para>
+</section>
diff --git a/docs/installer/sl/soundConfig.xml b/docs/installer/sl/soundConfig.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..6fcd9bee
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/installer/sl/soundConfig.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,52 @@
+<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?>
+<section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook"
+	xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML"
+	xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg"
+	xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml"
+	xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink"
+	xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook"
+	xml:id="soundConfig" version="5.0" xml:lang="sl">
+
+  <info>
+    <title xml:id="soundConfig-ti1">Nastavitve zvoka</title>
+  </info>
+
+  
+
+  <mediaobject>
+<!-- Started by marja on 2013-12-07 -->
+<imageobject> <imagedata fileref="dx2-soundConfig.png" revision="1"
+format="PNG" xml:id="soundConfig-im1" /> </imageobject></mediaobject>
+
+  <para>In this screen the name of the driver that the installer chose for your
+sound card is given, which will be the default driver if we have a default
+one.
+  </para>
+  <para>The default driver should work without problems. However, if after install
+you do encounter problems, then run <command>draksound</command> or start
+this tool via MCC (Mageia Control Center), by choosing the
+<guilabel>Hardware</guilabel> tab and clicking on <guilabel>Sound
+Configuration</guilabel> at the top right of the screen.
+  </para>
+  <para>Then, in the draksound or "Sound Configuration" tool screen, click on
+<guibutton>Advanced</guibutton> and then on
+<guibutton>Troubleshooting</guibutton> to find very useful advice about how
+to solve the problem.
+  </para>
+
+  <section xml:id="soundConfig-Advanced">
+    <info>
+      <title xml:id="soundConfig-Advanced-ti1">Napredno</title>
+    </info>
+
+    <para>Clicking <guibutton>Advanced</guibutton> in this screen, during install, is
+useful if there is no default driver and there are several drivers
+available, but you think the installer selected the wrong one.
+    </para>
+
+    <para>In that case you can select a different driver after clicking on
+<guibutton>Let me pick any driver</guibutton>.
+    </para>
+
+  </section>
+</section>
diff --git a/docs/installer/sl/takeOverHdConfirm.xml b/docs/installer/sl/takeOverHdConfirm.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..3639e776
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/installer/sl/takeOverHdConfirm.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,30 @@
+<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns42="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:lang="sl" xml:id="takeOverHdConfirm">
+
+  <info>
+    <title xml:id="takeOverHdConfirm-ti1">Confirm hard disk to be formatted</title>
+  </info>
+
+  
+
+  
+  
+  
+
+  
+
+<mediaobject>
+<!-- Made by marja on 2012 04 03 -->
+<!-- test comment - johnr -->
+<!-- 2012-04-24 marja - replaced "if you are not sure you selected the correct
+    hard disk." with "if you are not sure about your choice", because I'm sure I
+    saw this help screen when I had only one HD -->
+<!-- 2013-05-05 marja added screenshot -->
+<imageobject> <imagedata fileref="dx2-takeOverHdConfirm.png" format="PNG"
+align="center" ></imagedata> </imageobject></mediaobject>
+
+  <para revision="1" xml:id="takeOverHdConfirm-pa1">Click on <guibutton>Previous</guibutton> if you are not sure about your
+choice.</para>
+
+  <para revision="1" xml:id="takeOverHdConfirm-pa2">Click on <guibutton>Next</guibutton> if you are sure and want to erase every
+partition, every operating system and all data on that hard disk.</para>
+</section>
diff --git a/docs/mcc-help/cs.po b/docs/mcc-help/cs.po
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..50cf399f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/mcc-help/cs.po
@@ -0,0 +1,9619 @@
+# SOME DESCRIPTIVE TITLE
+# Copyright (C) YEAR Mageia
+# This file is distributed under the same license as the Mageia Control Center Help package.
+# 
+# Translators:
+# Jiří Vírava <appukonrad@gmail.com>, 2014
+# fri, 2013
+msgid ""
+msgstr ""
+"Project-Id-Version: Mageia\n"
+"Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: doc-discuss@ml.mageia.org\n"
+"POT-Creation-Date: 2015-01-28 18:34+0200\n"
+"PO-Revision-Date: 2015-02-01 17:21+0000\n"
+"Last-Translator: Jiří Vírava <appukonrad@gmail.com>\n"
+"Language-Team: Czech (http://www.transifex.com/projects/p/mageia/language/cs/)\n"
+"MIME-Version: 1.0\n"
+"Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n"
+"Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n"
+"Language: cs\n"
+"Plural-Forms: nplurals=3; plural=(n==1) ? 0 : (n>=2 && n<=4) ? 1 : 2;\n"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><title>
+#: en/diskdrake--dav.xml:11
+msgid "Access WebDAV shared drives and directories"
+msgstr "Přístup k diskům a adresářům sdíleným pomocí WebDAV"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle>
+#: en/diskdrake--dav.xml:14
+msgid "diskdrake --dav"
+msgstr "diskdrake --dav"
+
+#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of:
+#. <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata>
+#: en/diskdrake--dav.xml:19
+msgid "diskdrake--dav1.png"
+msgstr "diskdrake--dav1.png"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para><footnote><para>
+#: en/diskdrake--dav.xml:24
+msgid ""
+"You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis "
+"role=\"bold\">diskdrake --dav</emphasis> as root."
+msgstr "Tento nástroj můžete spustit z příkazového řádku zadáním <emphasis role=\"bold\">diskdrake --dav</emphasis> jako superuživatel."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/diskdrake--dav.xml:24
+msgid ""
+"This tool<placeholder type=\"footnote\" id=\"0\"/> is found in the Mageia "
+"Control Center, under the Network Sharing tab, labeled <guilabel>Configure "
+"WebDAV shares</guilabel>."
+msgstr "Tento nástroj<placeholder type=\"footnote\" id=\"0\"/> se nachází v ovládacím středisku Mageia v kartě pro Sdílení v síti označené <guilabel>Nastavit sdílení pomocí WebDAV</guilabel>."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><title>
+#: en/diskdrake--dav.xml:30 en/diskdrake--nfs.xml:22 en/diskdrake--smb.xml:21
+#: en/drak3d.xml:15 en/drakconnect.xml:16 en/draknetcenter.xml:29
+#: en/draksambashare.xml:27 en/drakvpn.xml:16 en/drakwizard_apache2.xml:27
+#: en/drakwizard_dhcp.xml:41 en/drakwizard_proftpd.xml:27
+#: en/drakwizard_squid.xml:46 en/keyboarddrake.xml:17
+#: en/system-config-printer.xml:21
+msgid "Introduction"
+msgstr "Úvod"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/diskdrake--dav.xml:32
+msgid ""
+"<link xlink:href=\"http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/WebDAV\">WebDAV</link> is a "
+"protocol that allows to mount a web server's directory locally, so that it "
+"appears as a local directory. It is necessary that the remote machine run a "
+"WebDAV server. This is not the aim of this tool to configure the WebDAV "
+"server."
+msgstr "<link xlink:href=\"http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/WebDAV\">WebDAV</link> je protokol, který umožňuje připojit adresář webového serveru, tak že vypadá jako adrsář lokální. Je nezbytné, aby na vzdáleném stroji byl spuštěn WebDAV server. Účelem tohoto nástroje není konfiguraci serveru WebDAV."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><title>
+#: en/diskdrake--dav.xml:40
+msgid "Creating a new entry"
+msgstr "Vytvoření nového záznamu"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/diskdrake--dav.xml:42
+msgid ""
+"The first screen of the tool displays the already configured entries, if "
+"any, and a <guibutton>New</guibutton> button. Use it to create a new entry. "
+"Insert the server URL in the field of the new screen."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/diskdrake--dav.xml:46
+msgid ""
+"Then you get a screen with radio buttons to select some actions.  Continue "
+"with the action <guibutton>Mount point</guibutton> by clicking "
+"<guibutton>OK</guibutton> after selecting the radio button, as the "
+"<guibutton>Server</guibutton> is already configured. You can however correct"
+" it, if needed."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of:
+#. <section><section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata>
+#: en/diskdrake--dav.xml:54
+msgid "diskdrake--dav3.png"
+msgstr "diskdrake--dav3.png"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/diskdrake--dav.xml:58
+msgid ""
+"The content of the remote directory will be accessible through this mount "
+"point."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/diskdrake--dav.xml:61
+msgid ""
+"In the next step, give your user name and password. If you need some other "
+"options, you can give them in the <guibutton>advanced</guibutton> screen."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of:
+#. <section><section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata>
+#: en/diskdrake--dav.xml:67
+msgid "diskdrake--dav4.png"
+msgstr "diskdrake--dav4.png"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/diskdrake--dav.xml:71
+msgid ""
+"The option <guibutton>Mount</guibutton> allows you to mount immediately the "
+"access."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/diskdrake--dav.xml:74
+msgid ""
+"After you accepted the configuration with the radio button "
+"<guibutton>Done</guibutton>, the first screen is displayed again and your "
+"new mount point is listed. After you choose <guibutton>Quit</guibutton>, you"
+" are asked whether or not to save the modifications in "
+"<emphasis>/etc/fstab</emphasis>. Choose this option if you want that the "
+"remote directory is available at each boot. If your configuration is for "
+"one-time usage, do not save it."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><title>
+#: en/diskdrake--fileshare.xml:3
+msgid "Share your hard disk partitions"
+msgstr "Sdílet diskové oddíly tohoto počítače"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle>
+#: en/diskdrake--fileshare.xml:6
+msgid "diskdrake --fileshare"
+msgstr "diskdrake --fileshare"
+
+#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of:
+#. <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata>
+#: en/diskdrake--fileshare.xml:11
+msgid "diskdrake--fileshare.png"
+msgstr "diskdrake--fileshare.png"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para><footnote><para>
+#: en/diskdrake--fileshare.xml:15
+msgid ""
+"You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis "
+"role=\"bold\">diskdrake --fileshare</emphasis> as root."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/diskdrake--fileshare.xml:15
+msgid ""
+"This simple tool<placeholder type=\"footnote\" id=\"0\"/> allows you, the "
+"administrator, to allow users to share parts of their own /home "
+"subdirectories with other users of a same local network which may have "
+"computers running either Linux or Windows operating system."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/diskdrake--fileshare.xml:20
+msgid ""
+"It is found in the Mageia Control Center, under the Local Disk tab, labelled"
+" \"Share your hard disk partitions\"."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/diskdrake--fileshare.xml:23
+msgid ""
+"First, answer the question : \"<guilabel>Would you like to allow users to "
+"share some of their directories ?</guilabel>\", click on <guibutton>No "
+"sharing</guibutton> if the answer is no for all users, click on "
+"<guibutton>Allow all users</guibutton> for all users and click on "
+"<guibutton>Custom</guibutton> if the answer is no for some users and yes for"
+" the others. In this last case, the users that are authorised to share their"
+" directories must belong to the fileshare group, which is automatically "
+"created by the system. You will be asked about this later."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/diskdrake--fileshare.xml:32
+msgid ""
+"Click on <guilabel>OK</guilabel>, a second screen appears which asks you "
+"choose between <guibutton>NFS</guibutton> or <guibutton>SMB</guibutton>.  "
+"Check <guibutton>NFS</guibutton> if Linux is the only operating system on "
+"the network, check <guibutton>SMB</guibutton> if the network includes both "
+"Linux and Windows machines and then click on <guibutton>OK</guibutton>. Any "
+"required packages will be installed if necessary."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/diskdrake--fileshare.xml:39
+msgid ""
+"The configuration is now complete unless the Custom option was chosen.  In "
+"this case, an extra screen prompts you to open Userdrake. This tool allows "
+"you to add users authorised to share their directories to the fileshare "
+"group. In the User tab, click on the user to add to the fileshare group, "
+"then on <guimenuitem>Edit</guimenuitem>, In the Groups tab. Check the "
+"fileshare group and click on <guibutton>OK</guibutton>. For more information"
+" about Userdrake, see <link ns2:href=\"userdrake.xml\">this page</link>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><note><para>
+#: en/diskdrake--fileshare.xml:50
+msgid ""
+"When adding a new user to the fileshare group, you have to disconnect and "
+"reconnect the network for the modifications to be taken into account."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/diskdrake--fileshare.xml:55
+msgid ""
+"From now on each user belonging to the fileshare group can select in his/her"
+" file manager the directories to be shared, although not all file managers "
+"have this facility."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Attribute 'xml:lang' of: <section>
+#: en/diskdrake--nfs.xml:1 en/mcc-network.xml:1 en/MCC.xml:1
+#: en/software-management.xml:2 en/transfugdrake.xml:1
+msgid "en"
+msgstr "cs"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><title>
+#: en/diskdrake--nfs.xml:3
+msgid "Access NFS shared drives and directories"
+msgstr "Nastavit přístup k diskům a adresářům sdíleným pomocí NFS"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle>
+#: en/diskdrake--nfs.xml:6
+msgid "diskdrake --nfs"
+msgstr "diskdrake --nfs"
+
+#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of:
+#. <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata>
+#: en/diskdrake--nfs.xml:11
+msgid "diskdrake--nfs.png"
+msgstr "diskdrake--nfs.png"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/diskdrake--nfs.xml:17
+msgid "."
+msgstr "."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><footnote><para>
+#: en/diskdrake--nfs.xml:25
+msgid ""
+"You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis "
+"role=\"bold\">diskdrake --nfs</emphasis> as root."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/diskdrake--nfs.xml:24
+msgid ""
+"This tool<placeholder type=\"footnote\" id=\"0\"/> allows you to declare "
+"some shared directories to be accessible to all users on the machine. The "
+"protocol used for this is NFS which is available on most Linux or Unix "
+"systems. The shared directory will be thus available directly at boot. "
+"Shared directories can be also accessible directly in a single session for a"
+" user with tools such as file browsers."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><title>
+#: en/diskdrake--nfs.xml:36 en/diskdrake--smb.xml:38
+msgid "Procedure"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/diskdrake--nfs.xml:38
+msgid ""
+"Select <guibutton>search servers</guibutton> to obtain a list of servers "
+"which share directories."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/diskdrake--nfs.xml:41
+msgid ""
+"Click on the > symbol before the server name to display the list of the "
+"shared directories and select the directory you want to access."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of:
+#. <section><section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata>
+#: en/diskdrake--nfs.xml:47
+msgid "diskdrake--nfs2.png"
+msgstr "diskdrake--nfs2.png"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/diskdrake--nfs.xml:51
+msgid ""
+"The button <guibutton>Mount point</guibutton> will be available and you have"
+" to specify where to mount the directory."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of:
+#. <section><section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata>
+#: en/diskdrake--nfs.xml:56
+msgid "diskdrake--nfs3.png"
+msgstr "diskdrake--nfs3.png"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/diskdrake--nfs.xml:60
+msgid ""
+"After choosing the mount point, You can mount it. You can also verify and "
+"change some options with the <guibutton>Options</guibutton> button. After "
+"mounting the directory, you can unmount it with the same button."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of:
+#. <section><section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata>
+#: en/diskdrake--nfs.xml:67
+msgid "diskdrake--nfs4.png"
+msgstr "diskdrake--nfs4.png"
+
+#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of:
+#. <section><section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata>
+#: en/diskdrake--nfs.xml:73
+msgid "diskdrake--nfs5.png"
+msgstr "diskdrake--nfs5.png"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/diskdrake--nfs.xml:77
+msgid ""
+"On accepting the configuration with the <guibutton>Done</guibutton> button, "
+"a message will displayed, asking \"Do you want to save the /etc/fstab "
+"modifications\". This will make the directory available at each boot, if the"
+" network is accessible. The new directory is then available in your file "
+"browser, for example in Dolphin."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of:
+#. <section><section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata>
+#: en/diskdrake--nfs.xml:85
+msgid "diskdrake--nfs6.png"
+msgstr "diskdrake--nfs6.png"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><title>
+#: en/diskdrake--removable.xml:3
+msgid "CD/DVD burner"
+msgstr "CD / DVD vypalovačka"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle>
+#: en/diskdrake--removable.xml:5
+msgid "diskdrake --removable"
+msgstr "diskdrake --removable"
+
+#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of:
+#. <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata>
+#: en/diskdrake--removable.xml:10
+msgid "diskdrake--removable.png"
+msgstr "diskdrake--removable.png"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para><footnote><para>
+#: en/diskdrake--removable.xml:15
+msgid ""
+"You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis "
+"role=\"bold\">diskdrake --removable</emphasis> as root."
+msgstr "Tento nástroj můžete jako root spustit z příkazového řádku zadáním <emphasis role=\"bold\">diskdrake --removable</emphasis>."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/diskdrake--removable.xml:14
+msgid ""
+"This tool <placeholder type=\"footnote\" id=\"0\"/>is found under the tab "
+"Local disks in the Mageia Control Center labelled accordingly with your "
+"removable hardware (CD/DVD players and burners and floppy drives only)."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/diskdrake--removable.xml:20
+msgid "Its goal is to define the way your removable disk is mounted."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/diskdrake--removable.xml:22
+msgid ""
+"At the top of the window there is a short description of your hardware and "
+"the chosen options to mount it. Use the menu on the bottom to change them. "
+"Check the item to be changed and then on the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> "
+"button."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><title>
+#: en/diskdrake--removable.xml:28
+msgid "Mount point"
+msgstr "Přípojný bod"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/diskdrake--removable.xml:30
+msgid ""
+"Check this box to change the mount point. The default one is /media/cdrom."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><bridgehead>
+#: en/diskdrake--removable.xml:37 en/harddrake2.xml:66
+msgid "Options"
+msgstr "Volby"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/diskdrake--removable.xml:39
+msgid ""
+"Many mount options can be chosen here either directly in the list or via the"
+" <guilabel>Advanced</guilabel> submenu. The main are:"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><title>
+#: en/diskdrake--removable.xml:45
+msgid "user/nouser"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para>
+#: en/diskdrake--removable.xml:47
+msgid ""
+"user allows an ordinary user (not root) to mount the removable disk, this "
+"option involves noexec, nosuid and nodev. The user who mounted the disk is "
+"the only one who can umount it."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><title>
+#: en/diskdrake--smb.xml:11
+msgid "Access Windows (SMB) shared drives and directories"
+msgstr "Přístup k diskům a adresářům na systémech Windows (pomocí Samba)"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle>
+#: en/diskdrake--smb.xml:14
+msgid "diskdrake --smb"
+msgstr "diskdrake --smb"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><footnote><para>
+#: en/diskdrake--smb.xml:24
+msgid ""
+"You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis "
+"role=\"bold\">diskdrake --smb</emphasis> as root."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/diskdrake--smb.xml:23
+msgid ""
+"This tool<placeholder type=\"footnote\" id=\"0\"/> allows you to declare "
+"which shared directories to be accessible to all users on the machine. The "
+"protocol used for this is SMB which has been popularized on Windows(R) "
+"systems. The shared directory will be available directly at boot. Shared "
+"directories can be also accessed directly in a single session by a user with"
+" tools such as file browsers."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/diskdrake--smb.xml:33
+msgid ""
+"Before starting the tool, it is a good idea to declare the names of "
+"available servers, for example with <xref linkend=\"drakhosts\"/>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/diskdrake--smb.xml:40
+msgid ""
+"Select <guibutton>search servers</guibutton> to obtain a list of servers who"
+" share directories."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/diskdrake--smb.xml:43
+msgid ""
+"Click on the server name and on &gt; before the server name to display the "
+"list of the shared directories and select the directory you want to access."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/diskdrake--smb.xml:47
+msgid ""
+"The <guibutton>Mount point</guibutton> button will become available, you "
+"have to specify where to mount the directory."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of:
+#. <section><section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata>
+#: en/diskdrake--smb.xml:52
+msgid "diskdrake--smb2.png"
+msgstr "diskdrake--smb2.png"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/diskdrake--smb.xml:56
+msgid ""
+"After choosing the mount point, it can be mounted with the <guimenu>Mount "
+"button</guimenu>. You can also verify and change some options with the "
+"<guibutton>Options</guibutton> button."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/diskdrake--smb.xml:60
+msgid ""
+"In options, you can specify the user name and the password of those able to "
+"connect to the SMB server. After mounting the directory, you can unmount it "
+"with the same button."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of:
+#. <section><section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata>
+#: en/diskdrake--smb.xml:66
+msgid "diskdrake--smb3.png"
+msgstr "diskdrake--smb3.png"
+
+#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of:
+#. <section><section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata>
+#: en/diskdrake--smb.xml:72
+msgid "diskdrake--smb4.png"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/diskdrake--smb.xml:76
+msgid ""
+"After accepting the configuration with the Done button, a message will ask "
+"\"Do you want to save the /etc/fstab modifications\". Saving, will allow "
+"directory to made available at each boot, if the network is accessible. The "
+"new directory is then available in your file browser, for example in "
+"dolphin."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of:
+#. <section><section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata>
+#: en/diskdrake--smb.xml:84
+msgid "diskdrake--smb5.png"
+msgstr "diskdrake--smb5.png"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><title>
+#: en/drak3d.xml:3
+msgid "3D Desktop Effects"
+msgstr "Efekty 3D grafického prostředí"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle>
+#: en/drak3d.xml:5
+msgid "drak3d"
+msgstr "drak3d"
+
+#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of:
+#. <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata>
+#: en/drak3d.xml:10
+msgid "drak3d.png"
+msgstr "drak3d.png"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><footnote><para>
+#: en/drak3d.xml:18
+msgid ""
+"You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis "
+"role=\"bold\">drak3d</emphasis> as root."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/drak3d.xml:17
+msgid ""
+"This tool<placeholder type=\"footnote\" id=\"0\"/> lets you manage the 3D "
+"desktop effects on your operating system. 3D effects are turned off by "
+"default."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><title>
+#: en/drak3d.xml:25
+msgid "Getting Started"
+msgstr "Začínáme"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/drak3d.xml:27
+msgid ""
+"To use this tool, you need to have the glxinfo package installed. If the "
+"package is not installed, you will be prompted to do so before drak3d can "
+"start."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/drak3d.xml:31
+msgid ""
+"After starting drak3d, you will be presented with a menu window.  Here you "
+"can choose either <guilabel>No 3D Desktop Effects</guilabel> or "
+"<guilabel>Compiz Fusion</guilabel>. Compiz Fusion is part of a "
+"composite/window manager, which includes hardware-accelerated special "
+"effects for your desktop. Choose <guilabel>Compiz Fusion</guilabel> to turn "
+"it on."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/drak3d.xml:38
+msgid ""
+"If this is your first time using this program after a clean installation of "
+"Mageia, you will get a warning message telling you which packages need to be"
+" installed in order to use Compiz Fusion. Click on the "
+"<guibutton>Ok</guibutton> button to continue."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of:
+#. <section><section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata>
+#: en/drak3d.xml:45
+msgid "drak3d_installing_CompizFusion.png"
+msgstr "drak3d_installing_CompizFusion.png"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/drak3d.xml:49
+msgid ""
+"Once the appropriate packages are installed, you will notice that Compiz "
+"Fusion is selected in the drak3d menu, but you must log out and log back in "
+"for the changes to take effect."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/drak3d.xml:53
+msgid ""
+"After logging back in, Compiz Fusion will be activated. To configure Compiz "
+"Fusion, see the page for the ccsm (CompizConfig Settings Manager)  tool."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><title>
+#: en/drak3d.xml:59
+msgid "Troubleshooting"
+msgstr "Řešení problémů"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><title>
+#: en/drak3d.xml:62
+msgid "Can't See Desktop after Logging in"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para>
+#: en/drak3d.xml:64
+msgid ""
+"If after turning on Compiz Fusion you attempt to log back into your desktop "
+"but can't see anything, restart your computer to get back to the log in "
+"screen. Once there, click on the Desktop icon and select drak3d."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of:
+#. <section><section><section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata>
+#: en/drak3d.xml:71
+msgid "drak3d_troubleshooting_login_option.png"
+msgstr "drak3d_troubleshooting_login_option.png"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para>
+#: en/drak3d.xml:75
+msgid ""
+"When you log in, if your account is listed as an administrator, you will be "
+"prompted for your password again. Otherwise, use the administrator login "
+"with his/her account. Then you can undo any changes that may have caused the"
+" log in problem."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><title>
+#: en/drakauth.xml:9
+msgid "Authentication"
+msgstr "Ověření"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle>
+#: en/drakauth.xml:11
+msgid "drakauth"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of:
+#. <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata>
+#: en/drakauth.xml:16
+msgid "drakauth.png"
+msgstr "drakauth.png"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para><footnote><para>
+#: en/drakauth.xml:21
+msgid ""
+"You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis "
+"role=\"bold\">drakauth</emphasis> as root."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/drakauth.xml:21
+msgid ""
+"This tool<placeholder type=\"footnote\" id=\"0\"/> enables you to modify the"
+" manner in which you can be recognized as user of the machine or on the net."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/drakauth.xml:25
+msgid ""
+"By default, information for your authentication is stored in a file on your "
+"computer. Modify it only if your network administrator invites you to do so "
+"and give information about that."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><title>
+#: en/drakboot--boot.xml:3
+msgid "Set up boot system"
+msgstr "Nastavit způsob zavedení systému"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle>
+#: en/drakboot--boot.xml:5
+msgid "drakboot --boot"
+msgstr "drakboot --boot"
+
+#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of:
+#. <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata>
+#: en/drakboot--boot.xml:10
+msgid "drakboot--boot.png"
+msgstr "drakboot--boot.png"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para><footnote><para>
+#: en/drakboot--boot.xml:15
+msgid ""
+"You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis "
+"role=\"bold\">drakboot --boot</emphasis> as root."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/drakboot--boot.xml:14
+msgid ""
+"this tool<placeholder type=\"footnote\" id=\"0\"/> allows you to configure "
+"the boot options (choice of the bootloader, set a password, the default "
+"boot, etc.)"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/drakboot--boot.xml:19
+msgid ""
+"It is found under the Boot tab in the Mageia Control Center labelled \"Set "
+"up boot system\"."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><warning><para>
+#: en/drakboot--boot.xml:23
+msgid ""
+"Don't use this tool if you don't know exactly what you are doing.  Changing "
+"some settings may prevent your machine from booting again !"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/drakboot--boot.xml:28
+msgid ""
+"In the first part, called <guilabel>Bootloader</guilabel>, it is possible to"
+" choose which <guibutton>Bootloader to use</guibutton>, Grub or Lilo, and "
+"with a graphical or a text menu. It is just a question of taste, there are "
+"no other consequences. You can also set the <guibutton>Boot "
+"device</guibutton>, don't change anything here unless you are an expert. The"
+" boot device is where the bootloader is installed and any modification can "
+"prevent you machine from booting."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/drakboot--boot.xml:36
+msgid ""
+"In the second part, called <guilabel>Main options</guilabel>, you can set "
+"the <guibutton>Delay before booting default image</guibutton>, in seconds. "
+"During this delay, grub or Lilo will display the list of available operating"
+" systems, prompting you to make your choice, if no selection is made, the "
+"bootloader will boot the default one once the delay elapses."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/drakboot--boot.xml:43
+msgid ""
+"In the third and last part, called <guibutton>Security</guibutton>, it is "
+"possible to set a password."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/drakboot--boot.xml:46
+msgid "The <guibutton>Advanced</guibutton> button gives some extra options."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/drakboot--boot.xml:49
+msgid "<guibutton>Enable ACPI:</guibutton>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/drakboot--boot.xml:51
+msgid ""
+"ACPI (Advanced Configuration and Power Interface) is a standard for the "
+"power management. It can save energy by stopping unused devices, this was "
+"the method used before APM. Check this box if your hardware is ACPI "
+"compatible."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/drakboot--boot.xml:56
+msgid "<guibutton>Enable SMP:</guibutton>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/drakboot--boot.xml:58
+msgid ""
+"SMP stands for Symmetric Multi Processors, it's an architecture for "
+"multicore processors."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><note><para>
+#: en/drakboot--boot.xml:62
+msgid ""
+"If you have a processor with HyperThreading, Mageia will see it as a dual "
+"processor and enable SMP."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/drakboot--boot.xml:66
+msgid ""
+"<guibutton>Enable APIC</guibutton> and <guibutton>Enable Local "
+"APIC:</guibutton>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/drakboot--boot.xml:69
+msgid ""
+"APIC stands for Advanced Programmable Interrupt Controller. There are two "
+"components in the Intel APIC system, the local APIC (LAPIC) and the I/O "
+"APIC. This one routes the interrupts it receives them from peripheral buses "
+"to one or more local APICs that are in the processor. It is really useful "
+"for multi-processor systems. Some computers have problems with the APIC "
+"system which can cause freezes or incorrect device detection (error message "
+"\"spurious 8259A interrupt: IRQ7\"). In this case, disable APIC and/or Local"
+" APIC."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of:
+#. <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata>
+#: en/drakboot--boot.xml:80
+msgid "drakboot1.png"
+msgstr "drakboot1.png"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/drakboot--boot.xml:84
+msgid ""
+"In the <guibutton>Next</guibutton> screen, you can see the list of all the "
+"available entries at boot time. The default one is asterisked. To change the"
+" order of the menu entries, click on the up or down arrows to move the "
+"selected item. If you click on the <guibutton>Add</guibutton> or "
+"<guibutton>Modify </guibutton>buttons, a new window appears to add a new "
+"entry in the Grub menu or to modify an existing one. You need to be familiar"
+" with Lilo or Grub to be able to use these tools."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of:
+#. <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata>
+#: en/drakboot--boot.xml:94
+msgid "drakboot2.png"
+msgstr "drakboot2.png"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/drakboot--boot.xml:98
+msgid ""
+"The <guilabel>Label</guilabel> field is freeform, write here what you want "
+"to be displayed in the menu. It matches the Grub command \"title\". For "
+"example: Mageia3."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/drakboot--boot.xml:102
+msgid ""
+"The <guilabel>Image</guilabel> field contains the kernel name. It matches "
+"the Grub command \"kernel\". For example /boot/vmlinuz."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/drakboot--boot.xml:105
+msgid ""
+"The <guilabel>Root</guilabel> field contains the device name where the "
+"kernel is stored. It matches the Grub command \"root\". For example (hd0,1)."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/drakboot--boot.xml:109
+msgid ""
+"The <guilabel>Append</guilabel> field contains the options to be given to "
+"the kernel at boot time."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/drakboot--boot.xml:112
+msgid ""
+"If the box <guilabel>Default</guilabel> is checked, Grub will boot this "
+"entry by default."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/drakboot--boot.xml:115
+msgid ""
+"In the extra screen called <guilabel>Advanced</guilabel>, it is possible to "
+"choose the <guilabel>Video mode</guilabel>, an <guilabel>initrd</guilabel> "
+"file and a <xref linkend=\"draknetprofile\"></xref> in the drop-down lists."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><title>
+#: en/drakboot.xml:3
+msgid "Set up autologin to automatically log in"
+msgstr "Nastavit automatické přihlášení do systému"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle>
+#: en/drakboot.xml:6
+msgid "drakboot"
+msgstr "drakboot"
+
+#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of:
+#. <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata>
+#: en/drakboot.xml:11
+msgid "drakboot.png"
+msgstr "drakboot.png"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para><footnote><para>
+#: en/drakboot.xml:16
+msgid ""
+"You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis "
+"role=\"bold\">drakboot</emphasis> as root."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/drakboot.xml:15
+msgid ""
+"This tool<placeholder type=\"footnote\" id=\"0\"/> allows you to "
+"automatically login the same user, in her/his desktop environment, without "
+"asking for any password. It's called autologin.  This is generally a good "
+"idea when there is only one user like to be using the machine."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/drakboot.xml:22
+msgid ""
+"It is found under the <emphasis role=\"bold\">Boot</emphasis> tab in the "
+"Mageia Control Center labelled \"Set up autologin to automatically log in\"."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/drakboot.xml:26
+msgid "The interface buttons are pretty obvious:"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/drakboot.xml:28
+msgid ""
+"Check <guibutton>Launch the graphical environment when your system "
+"starts</guibutton>, if you want X Window System to be executed after the "
+"boot. If not, the system will start in text mode. Nevertheless, it will be "
+"possible to launch the graphic interface manually. This can be done by "
+"launching the command 'startx' or 'systemctl start dm'."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/drakboot.xml:34
+msgid ""
+"If the first box is checked, two other options are available, check either "
+"<guibutton>No, I don't want autologin</guibutton>, if you want the system to"
+" continue to ask for which user to connect (and password) or check "
+"<guibutton>Yes, I want autologin with this (user, desktop)</guibutton>, if "
+"needed. In this case, you also need to supply the <guilabel>Default "
+"username</guilabel> and the <guilabel>Default desktop</guilabel>."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><title>
+#: en/drakbug_report.xml:11
+msgid "Collect Logs and System Information for Bug Reports"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle>
+#: en/drakbug_report.xml:12
+msgid "drakbug_report"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para><footnote><para>
+#: en/drakbug_report.xml:15
+msgid ""
+"You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis "
+"role=\"bold\">drakbug_report</emphasis> as root."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/drakbug_report.xml:15
+msgid ""
+"This tool<placeholder type=\"footnote\" id=\"0\"/> can only be started and "
+"used on the command line."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/drakbug_report.xml:20
+msgid ""
+"It is advised to write the output of this command to a file, for instance by"
+" doing <emphasis role=\"bold\">drakbug_report > "
+"drakbugreport.txt</emphasis>, but make sure you have enough disk space "
+"first: the file can easily be several GBs large."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><note><para>
+#: en/drakbug_report.xml:24
+msgid ""
+"The output is far too large to attach to a bug report without first removing"
+" the unneeded parts."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/drakbug_report.xml:26
+msgid "This command collects the following information on your system:"
+msgstr "Tyto následující příkazy shromažďují informace o vašem systému:"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakbug_report.xml:29
+msgid "lspci"
+msgstr "lspci"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakbug_report.xml:30
+msgid "pci_devices"
+msgstr "pci_devices"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakbug_report.xml:31
+msgid "dmidecode"
+msgstr "dmidecode"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakbug_report.xml:32
+msgid "fdisk"
+msgstr "fdisk"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakbug_report.xml:33
+msgid "scsi"
+msgstr "scsi"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakbug_report.xml:34
+msgid "/sys/bus/scsi/devices"
+msgstr "/sys/bus/scsi/devices"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakbug_report.xml:35
+msgid "lsmod"
+msgstr "lsmod"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakbug_report.xml:36
+msgid "cmdline"
+msgstr "cmdline"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakbug_report.xml:37
+msgid "pcmcia: stab"
+msgstr "pcmcia: stab"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakbug_report.xml:38
+msgid "usb"
+msgstr "usb"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakbug_report.xml:39
+msgid "partitions"
+msgstr "partitions"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakbug_report.xml:40
+msgid "cpuinfo"
+msgstr "cpuinfo"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakbug_report.xml:41
+msgid "syslog"
+msgstr "syslog"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakbug_report.xml:42
+msgid "Xorg.log"
+msgstr "Xorg.log"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakbug_report.xml:43
+msgid "monitor_full_edid"
+msgstr "monitor_full_edid"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakbug_report.xml:44
+msgid "stage1.log"
+msgstr "stage1.log"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakbug_report.xml:45
+msgid "ddebug.log"
+msgstr "ddebug.log"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakbug_report.xml:46
+msgid "install.log"
+msgstr "install.log"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakbug_report.xml:47
+msgid "fstab"
+msgstr "fstab"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakbug_report.xml:48
+msgid "modprobe.conf"
+msgstr "modprobe.conf"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakbug_report.xml:49
+msgid "lilo.conf"
+msgstr "lilo.conf"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakbug_report.xml:50
+msgid "grub: menu.lst"
+msgstr "grub: menu.lst"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakbug_report.xml:51
+msgid "grub: install.sh"
+msgstr "grub: install.sh"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakbug_report.xml:52
+msgid "grub: device.map"
+msgstr "grub: device.map"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakbug_report.xml:53
+msgid "xorg.conf"
+msgstr "xorg.conf"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakbug_report.xml:54
+msgid "urpmi.cfg"
+msgstr "urpmi.cfg"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakbug_report.xml:55
+msgid "modprobe.preload"
+msgstr "modprobe.preload"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakbug_report.xml:56
+msgid "sysconfig/i18n"
+msgstr "sysconfig/i18n"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakbug_report.xml:57
+msgid "/proc/iomem"
+msgstr "/proc/iomem"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakbug_report.xml:58
+msgid "/proc/ioport"
+msgstr "/proc/ioport"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakbug_report.xml:59
+msgid "mageia version"
+msgstr "mageia version"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakbug_report.xml:60
+msgid "rpm -qa"
+msgstr "rpm -qa"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakbug_report.xml:61
+msgid "df"
+msgstr "df"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><note><para>
+#: en/drakbug_report.xml:65
+msgid ""
+"At the time this help page was written, the \"syslog\" part of this "
+"command's output was empty, because this tool had not yet been adjusted to "
+"our switch to systemd. If it is still empty, you can retrieve the \"syslog\""
+" by doing (as root) <emphasis role=\"bold\"> journalctl -a > "
+"journalctl.txt</emphasis>. If you don't have a lot of diskspace, you can, "
+"for instance, take the last 5000 lines of the log instead with: <emphasis "
+"role=\"bold\">journalctl -a | tail -n5000 > journalctl5000.txt</emphasis>."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><title>
+#: en/drakbug.xml:9
+msgid "Mageia Bug Report Tool"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle>
+#: en/drakbug.xml:9
+msgid "drakbug"
+msgstr "drakbug"
+
+#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of:
+#. <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata>
+#: en/drakbug.xml:15
+msgid "drakbug.png"
+msgstr "drakbug.png"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para><footnote><para>
+#: en/drakbug.xml:19
+msgid ""
+"You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis "
+"role=\"bold\">drakbug</emphasis>."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/drakbug.xml:19
+msgid ""
+"Usually, this tool<placeholder type=\"footnote\" id=\"0\"/> starts "
+"automatically when a Mageia tool crashes. However, it is also possible that,"
+" after filing a bug report, you are asked to start this tool to check some "
+"of the information it gives, and then provide that in that existing bug "
+"report."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/drakbug.xml:21
+msgid ""
+"If a new bug report needs to be filed and you are not used to doing that, "
+"then please read <link "
+"xlink:href=\"https://wiki.mageia.org/en/How_to_report_a_bug_properly\">How "
+"to report a bug report properly</link> before clicking on the \"Report\" "
+"button."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/drakbug.xml:23
+msgid ""
+"In case the bug has already been filed by someone else (the error message "
+"that drakbug gave will be the same, then), it is useful to add a comment to "
+"that existing report that you saw the bug, too."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><title>
+#: en/drakclock.xml:3
+msgid "Manage date and time"
+msgstr "Upravit datum a čas"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle>
+#: en/drakclock.xml:5
+msgid "drakclock"
+msgstr "drakclock"
+
+#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of:
+#. <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata>
+#: en/drakclock.xml:10
+msgid "drakclock.png"
+msgstr "drakclock.png"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para><footnote><para>
+#: en/drakclock.xml:15
+msgid ""
+"You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis "
+"role=\"bold\">drakclock</emphasis> as root."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/drakclock.xml:14
+msgid ""
+"This tool<placeholder type=\"footnote\" id=\"0\"/> is found under the tab "
+"System in the Mageia Control Center labelled <guilabel>\"Manage date and "
+"time\"</guilabel>. In some desktop environments it is also available by a "
+"right click / Adjust date and Time ... on the clock in the system tray."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/drakclock.xml:21
+msgid "It's a very simple tool."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/drakclock.xml:23
+msgid ""
+"On the upper left part, is the <emphasis role=\"bold\">calendar</emphasis>. "
+"On the screenshot above, the date is September (on the upper left), 2012 (on"
+" the upper right), the 2nd (in blue)  and it is a Sunday. Select the month "
+"(or year) by clicking on the little arrows on each side of September (or "
+"2012). Select the day by clicking on its number."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/drakclock.xml:29
+msgid ""
+"On the bottom left is the <emphasis role=\"bold\">Network Time "
+"Protocol</emphasis> synchronising, it is possible to have a clock always on "
+"time by synchronising it with a server. Check <guilabel>Enable Network Time "
+"Protocol</guilabel> and choose the closest server."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/drakclock.xml:34
+msgid ""
+"On the right part is the <emphasis role=\"bold\">clock</emphasis>. It's "
+"useless to set the clock if NTP is enabled. Three boxes display hours, "
+"minutes and seconds (15, 28 and 22 on the screenshot). Use the little arrows"
+" to set the clock to the correct time. The format can't be changed here, see"
+" your desktop environment settings for that."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/drakclock.xml:40
+msgid ""
+"At least, on the bottom right, select your time zone by clicking on the "
+"<guibutton>Change Time Zone</guibutton> button and choosing in the list the "
+"nearest town."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><note><para>
+#: en/drakclock.xml:45
+msgid ""
+"Even if it isn't possible to choose a date or time format in this tool, they"
+" will be displayed on your desktop in accordance with the localisation "
+"settings."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><title>
+#: en/drakconnect--del.xml:3
+msgid "Remove a connection"
+msgstr "Odstranit připojení"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle>
+#: en/drakconnect--del.xml:3
+msgid "drakconnect --del"
+msgstr "drakconnect --del"
+
+#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of:
+#. <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata>
+#: en/drakconnect--del.xml:8
+msgid "drakconnect--del.png"
+msgstr "drakconnect--del.png"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para><footnote><para>
+#: en/drakconnect--del.xml:12
+msgid ""
+"You can also start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis "
+"role=\"bold\">drakconnect --del</emphasis> as root."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/drakconnect--del.xml:12
+msgid ""
+"Here, you can delete a network interface<placeholder type=\"footnote\" "
+"id=\"0\"/>."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/drakconnect--del.xml:14
+msgid ""
+"Click on the drop down menu, choose the one you want to remove and then "
+"click <emphasis>next</emphasis>."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/drakconnect--del.xml:15
+msgid ""
+"You'll see a message that the network interface has been deleted "
+"successfully."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><title>
+#: en/drakconnect.xml:3
+msgid "Set up a new network interface (LAN, ISDN, ADSL, ...)"
+msgstr "Nastavit nové síťové rozhraní (LAN, ISDN, ADSL, ...)"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle>
+#: en/drakconnect.xml:6
+msgid "drakconnect"
+msgstr "drakconnect"
+
+#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of:
+#. <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata>
+#: en/drakconnect.xml:11
+msgid "drakconnect.png"
+msgstr "drakconnect.png"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><footnote><para>
+#: en/drakconnect.xml:19
+msgid ""
+"You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis "
+"role=\"bold\">drakconnect</emphasis> as root."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/drakconnect.xml:18
+msgid ""
+"This tool<placeholder type=\"footnote\" id=\"0\"/> allows to configure much "
+"of local network or Internet access. You have to know some information from "
+"your access provider or your network administrator."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/drakconnect.xml:25
+msgid ""
+"Select the type of connection you want to set, according to which hardware "
+"and provider you have."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><title>
+#: en/drakconnect.xml:30
+msgid "A new Wired connection (Ethernet)"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakconnect.xml:34 en/drakconnect.xml:162
+msgid ""
+"The first window lists the interfaces which are available.  Select the one "
+"to configure."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakconnect.xml:39 en/drakconnect.xml:167
+msgid ""
+"At this point, the choice is given between an automatic or a manual IP "
+"address."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakconnect.xml:44 en/drakconnect.xml:187 en/drakconnect.xml:557
+msgid "Automatic IP"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of:
+#. <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakconnect.xml:48
+msgid ""
+"<emphasis>Ethernet/IP settings</emphasis>: you have to select if DNS servers"
+" are declared by the DHCP server or are manually specified, as explained "
+"below. In the last case, the IP address of DNS servers has to be set. The "
+"HOSTNAME of the computer can be specified here. If no HOSTNAME is specified,"
+" the name <literal>localhost.localdomain</literal> is attributed by default."
+"  The Hostname can also be provided by the DHCP server with the option "
+"<emphasis>Assign host name from DHCP server</emphasis>. Not all DHCP servers"
+" have such a function and if you're setting up your PC to get an IP address "
+"from a domestic ADSL router, it is unlikely."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of:
+#. <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><listitem><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata>
+#: en/drakconnect.xml:62
+msgid "drakconnect5.png"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of:
+#. <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakconnect.xml:68 en/drakconnect.xml:205 en/drakconnect.xml:572
+msgid "The advanced button give the opportunity to specify:"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of:
+#. <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakconnect.xml:72 en/drakconnect.xml:209 en/drakconnect.xml:576
+msgid "Search domain (not accessible, as provided by the DHCP server)"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of:
+#. <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakconnect.xml:77 en/drakconnect.xml:214 en/drakconnect.xml:581
+msgid "the DHCP client"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of:
+#. <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakconnect.xml:81 en/drakconnect.xml:218 en/drakconnect.xml:585
+msgid "DHCP timeout"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of:
+#. <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakconnect.xml:85 en/drakconnect.xml:222
+msgid "Get YP server from DHCP (checked by default): specify the NIS server"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of:
+#. <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakconnect.xml:90 en/drakconnect.xml:227 en/drakconnect.xml:594
+msgid "Get NTPD server from DHCP (synchronisation of clocks)"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of:
+#. <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakconnect.xml:95 en/drakconnect.xml:232 en/drakconnect.xml:599
+msgid ""
+"the HOSTNAME required by DHCP. Only use this option if the DHCP server "
+"requires the client to specify a hostname before receiving an IP address. "
+"This option is not dealt by some DHCP servers."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of:
+#. <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakconnect.xml:104 en/drakconnect.xml:241
+msgid ""
+"After accepting, the last steps which are common to all connection "
+"configurations are explained: <xref linkend=\"drakconnect-end\"/>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakconnect.xml:111 en/drakconnect.xml:248 en/drakconnect.xml:615
+msgid "Manual configuration"
+msgstr "Ruční nastavení"
+
+#. type: Content of:
+#. <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakconnect.xml:115
+msgid ""
+"<emphasis>Ethernet/IP settings</emphasis>: you need to declare what DNS "
+"servers to use. The HOSTNAME of the computer can be specified here. If no "
+"HOSTNAME is specified, the name <literal>localhost.localdomain</literal> is "
+"attributed by default."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of:
+#. <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakconnect.xml:121 en/drakconnect.xml:258
+msgid ""
+"For a residential network, the IP address usually looks like "
+"<emphasis>192.168.x.x</emphasis>, Netmask is "
+"<emphasis>255.255.255.0</emphasis>, and the Gateway and DNS servers are "
+"available from your service provider's website."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of:
+#. <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakconnect.xml:126
+msgid ""
+"In advanced settings, you can specified a <emphasis>Search "
+"domain</emphasis>. It would usually be your home domain, i.e. if your "
+"computer is called \"splash\", and it's full domain name is "
+"\"splash.boatanchor.net\", the Search Domain would be \"boatanchor.net\". "
+"Unless you specifically need it, it's ok not to define this setting. Again, "
+"domestic ADSL would not need this setting."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of:
+#. <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><listitem><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata>
+#: en/drakconnect.xml:136
+msgid "drakconnect30.png"
+msgstr "drakconnect30.png"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakconnect.xml:142 en/drakconnect.xml:279 en/drakconnect.xml:351
+#: en/drakconnect.xml:458 en/drakconnect.xml:636 en/drakconnect.xml:688
+#: en/drakconnect.xml:780
+msgid "The next steps are exposed at <xref linkend=\"drakconnect-end\"/>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><title>
+#: en/drakconnect.xml:150
+msgid "A new Satellite connection (DVB)"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/drakconnect.xml:152 en/drakconnect.xml:696 en/draknetcenter.xml:136
+#: en/draknetcenter.xml:142 en/draknetcenter.xml:203
+msgid ""
+"This section hasn't been written yet for lack of resources. If you think you"
+" can write this help, please contact <link "
+"ns2:href=\"https://wiki.mageia.org/en/Documentation_team\"> the Doc "
+"team.</link> Thanking you in advance."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><title>
+#: en/drakconnect.xml:158
+msgid "A new Cable modem connection"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakconnect.xml:172
+msgid "You have to specify a authentication method:"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of:
+#. <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakconnect.xml:176
+msgid "None"
+msgstr "Žádné"
+
+#. type: Content of:
+#. <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakconnect.xml:180
+msgid ""
+"BPALogin (necessary for Telstra). In this case you have to provide User name"
+" and password."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of:
+#. <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakconnect.xml:191
+msgid ""
+"<emphasis>Cable/IP settings</emphasis>: you have to select if DNS servers "
+"are declared by the DHCP server or are manually specified, as explained "
+"below. In the last case, the IP address of DNS servers has to be set. The "
+"HOSTNAME of the computer can be specified here. If no HOSTNAME is specified,"
+" the name <literal>localhost.localdomain</literal> is attributed by default."
+"  The Hostname can also be provided by the DHCP server with the option "
+"<emphasis>Assign host name from DHCP server</emphasis>. Not all DHCP servers"
+" have such a function and if you're setting up your PC to get an IP address "
+"from a domestic ADSL router, it is unlikely."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of:
+#. <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakconnect.xml:252
+msgid ""
+"<emphasis>Cable/IP settings</emphasis>: you need to declare what DNS servers"
+" to use. The HOSTNAME of the computer can be specified here. If no HOSTNAME "
+"is specified, the name <literal>localhost.localdomain</literal> is "
+"attributed by default."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of:
+#. <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakconnect.xml:263
+msgid ""
+"In advanced settings, you can specified a <emphasis>Search "
+"domain</emphasis>. It would usually be your home domain, i.e. if your "
+"computer is called \"splash\", and it's full domain name is "
+"\"splash.boatanchor.net\", the Search Domain would be \"boatanchor.net\". "
+"Unless you specifically need it, it's ok not to define this setting. Again, "
+"domestic connection would not need this setting."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of:
+#. <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><listitem><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata>
+#: en/drakconnect.xml:273
+msgid "drakconnect32.png"
+msgstr "drakconnect32.png"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><title>
+#: en/drakconnect.xml:287
+msgid "A new DSL connection"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><orderedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakconnect.xml:291
+msgid ""
+"If the tool detects network interfaces, it offers to select one and to "
+"configure it."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><orderedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakconnect.xml:296 en/drakconnect.xml:663
+msgid ""
+"A list of providers is proposed, classified by countries.  Select your "
+"provider. If it is not listed, select the option "
+"<guilabel>Unlisted</guilabel> and then enter the options your provider gave."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><orderedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakconnect.xml:303 en/drakconnect.xml:380
+msgid "Select one of the protocols available:"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of:
+#. <section><section><para><orderedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakconnect.xml:307
+msgid "Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP)"
+msgstr "Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP)"
+
+#. type: Content of:
+#. <section><section><para><orderedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakconnect.xml:311
+msgid "Manual TCP/IP configuration"
+msgstr "Ruční nastavení TCP/IP"
+
+#. type: Content of:
+#. <section><section><para><orderedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakconnect.xml:315
+msgid "PPP over ADSL (PPPoA)"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of:
+#. <section><section><para><orderedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakconnect.xml:319
+msgid "PPP over Ethernet (PPPoE)"
+msgstr "PPP přes Ethernet (PPPoE)"
+
+#. type: Content of:
+#. <section><section><para><orderedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakconnect.xml:323
+msgid "Point to Point Tunneling Protocol (PPTP)"
+msgstr "Point to Point Tunneling Protocol (PPTP)"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><orderedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakconnect.xml:329
+msgid "Access settings"
+msgstr "Nastavení přístupu"
+
+#. type: Content of:
+#. <section><section><para><orderedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakconnect.xml:333 en/drakconnect.xml:678
+msgid "Account Login (user name)"
+msgstr "Váš účet (uživatelské jméno)"
+
+#. type: Content of:
+#. <section><section><para><orderedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakconnect.xml:337 en/drakconnect.xml:414 en/drakconnect.xml:682
+msgid "Account password"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of:
+#. <section><section><para><orderedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakconnect.xml:341
+msgid "(Advanced) Virtual Path ID (VPI)"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of:
+#. <section><section><para><orderedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakconnect.xml:345
+msgid "(Advanced) Virtual Circuit ID (VCI)"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/drakconnect.xml:289 en/drakconnect.xml:359 en/drakconnect.xml:646
+msgid "<placeholder type=\"orderedlist\" id=\"0\"/>"
+msgstr "<placeholder type=\"orderedlist\" id=\"0\"/>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><title>
+#: en/drakconnect.xml:357
+msgid "A new ISDN connection"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakconnect.xml:361 en/drakconnect.xml:706
+msgid "The wizard asks which device to configure:"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of:
+#. <section><section><para><orderedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakconnect.xml:365
+msgid "Manual choice (internal ISDN card)"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of:
+#. <section><section><para><orderedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakconnect.xml:369
+msgid "External ISDN modem"
+msgstr "Externí ISDN modem"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><orderedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakconnect.xml:375
+msgid ""
+"A list of hardware is proposed, classified by category and manufacturer. "
+"Select your card."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of:
+#. <section><section><para><orderedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakconnect.xml:384
+msgid "Protocol for the rest of the world, except Europe (DHCP)"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of:
+#. <section><section><para><orderedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakconnect.xml:389
+msgid "Protocol for Europe (EDSS1)"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><orderedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakconnect.xml:395
+msgid ""
+"A list of providers is then offered, classified by countries.  Select your "
+"provider. If it is not listed, select the option "
+"<guilabel>Unlisted</guilabel> and then enter the options your provider gave "
+"you. Then it is asked for parameters:"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of:
+#. <section><section><para><orderedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakconnect.xml:402
+msgid "Connection name"
+msgstr "Název připojení"
+
+#. type: Content of:
+#. <section><section><para><orderedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakconnect.xml:406
+msgid "Phone number"
+msgstr "Telefonní číslo"
+
+#. type: Content of:
+#. <section><section><para><orderedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakconnect.xml:410
+msgid "Login ID"
+msgstr "Přihlašovací jméno"
+
+#. type: Content of:
+#. <section><section><para><orderedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakconnect.xml:418
+msgid "Authentication method"
+msgstr "Metoda ověření"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><orderedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakconnect.xml:424
+msgid ""
+"After that, you have to select if you get the IP address by automatic or "
+"manual method. In the last case, specify IP address and Subnet mask."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><orderedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakconnect.xml:430
+msgid ""
+"The next step is to choose how DNS servers address are obtained, by "
+"automatic or manual method. In the case of manual configuration, you have to"
+" put:"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of:
+#. <section><section><para><orderedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakconnect.xml:436
+msgid "Domain name"
+msgstr "Název domény"
+
+#. type: Content of:
+#. <section><section><para><orderedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakconnect.xml:440
+msgid "First and second DNS Server"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of:
+#. <section><section><para><orderedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakconnect.xml:444
+msgid ""
+"Select if the hostname is set from IP. This option is to select only if you "
+"are sure that your provider is configured to accept it."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><orderedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakconnect.xml:452
+msgid ""
+"The next step is to choose how the gateway address is obtained, by automatic"
+" or manual method. In the case of manual configuration, you have to enter "
+"the IP address."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><title>
+#: en/drakconnect.xml:464
+msgid "A new Wireless connection (WiFi)"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakconnect.xml:468
+msgid ""
+"A first window lists the interfaces which are available and an entry for "
+"Windows driver (ndiswrapper). Select the one to configure.  Use ndiswrapper "
+"only if the other configuration methods did not work."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakconnect.xml:475
+msgid ""
+"At this step, the choice is given between the different access points that "
+"the card has detected."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakconnect.xml:480
+msgid "Specific parameter for the wireless card are to provide:"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of:
+#. <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata>
+#: en/drakconnect.xml:484
+msgid "drakconnect31.png"
+msgstr "drakconnect31.png"
+
+#. type: Content of:
+#. <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakconnect.xml:490
+msgid "Operating mode:"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of:
+#. <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><variablelist><varlistentry><term>
+#: en/drakconnect.xml:494
+msgid "Managed"
+msgstr "Spravované"
+
+#. type: Content of:
+#. <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><variablelist><varlistentry><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakconnect.xml:497
+msgid "To access to an existing access point (the most frequent)."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of:
+#. <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><variablelist><varlistentry><term>
+#: en/drakconnect.xml:503
+msgid "Ad-Hoc"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of:
+#. <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><variablelist><varlistentry><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakconnect.xml:506
+msgid "To configure direct connection between computers."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of:
+#. <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakconnect.xml:514
+msgid "Network Name (ESSID)"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of:
+#. <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakconnect.xml:518
+msgid "Encryption mode: it depends of how the access point is configured."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of:
+#. <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><variablelist><varlistentry><term>
+#: en/drakconnect.xml:523
+msgid "WPA/WPA2"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of:
+#. <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><variablelist><varlistentry><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakconnect.xml:526
+msgid "This encryption mode is to prefer if your hardware allows it."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of:
+#. <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><variablelist><varlistentry><term>
+#: en/drakconnect.xml:532
+msgid "WEP"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of:
+#. <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><variablelist><varlistentry><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakconnect.xml:535
+msgid "Some old hardware deals only this encryption method."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of:
+#. <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakconnect.xml:543
+msgid "Encryption key"
+msgstr "Šifrovací klíč"
+
+#. type: Content of:
+#. <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakconnect.xml:545
+msgid ""
+"It is generally provided with the hardware which give the access point."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakconnect.xml:552
+msgid ""
+"At this step, the choice is given between an automatic IP address or a "
+"manual IP address."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of:
+#. <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakconnect.xml:561
+msgid ""
+"<emphasis>IP settings</emphasis>: you have to select if DNS servers are "
+"declared by the DHCP server or are manually specified, as explained below. "
+"In the last case, IP address of DNS servers has to be set. The HOSTNAME of "
+"the computer can be specified here.  If no HOSTNAME is specified, the name "
+"localhost.localdomain is attributed by default. The Hostname can also be "
+"provided by the DHCP server with the option <emphasis>Assign host name from "
+"DHCP server</emphasis>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of:
+#. <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakconnect.xml:589
+msgid "Get YP server from DHCP (checked by default): specify the NIS servers"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of:
+#. <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakconnect.xml:608
+msgid ""
+"After accepting the configuration the step, which is common to all "
+"connection configurations, is explained: <xref linkend=\"drakconnect-end\"/>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of:
+#. <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakconnect.xml:619
+msgid ""
+"<emphasis>IP settings</emphasis>: you have to declare DNS servers. The "
+"HOSTNAME of the computer can be specified here. If no HOSTNAME is specified,"
+" the name <literal>localhost.localdomain</literal> is attributed by default."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of:
+#. <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakconnect.xml:625
+msgid ""
+"For a residential network, the IP address always looks like "
+"<emphasis>192.168.x.x</emphasis>, Netmask is "
+"<emphasis>255.255.255.0</emphasis>, and the Gateway and DNS servers are "
+"available from your providers website."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of:
+#. <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakconnect.xml:630
+msgid ""
+"In advanced settings, you can specified a <emphasis>Search "
+"domain</emphasis>. It must seem to your hostname without the first name, "
+"before the period."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><title>
+#: en/drakconnect.xml:644
+msgid "A new GPRS/Edge/3G connection"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><orderedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakconnect.xml:648
+msgid ""
+"If the tool detects wireless interfaces, it offers to select one and to "
+"configure it."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><orderedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakconnect.xml:653
+msgid "The PIN is asked. Leave empty if the PIN is not required."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><orderedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakconnect.xml:658
+msgid ""
+"The wizard asks for network. If it is not detected, select the option "
+"<guilabel>Unlisted</guilabel>."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><orderedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakconnect.xml:670
+msgid "Provide access settings"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of:
+#. <section><section><para><orderedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakconnect.xml:674
+msgid "Access Point Name"
+msgstr "Název přístupového bodu"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><title>
+#: en/drakconnect.xml:694
+msgid "A new Bluetooth Dial-Up Networking connection"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><title>
+#: en/drakconnect.xml:702
+msgid "A new Analog telephone modem connection (POTS)"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of:
+#. <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakconnect.xml:710
+msgid "Manual choice"
+msgstr "Ruční volba"
+
+#. type: Content of:
+#. <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakconnect.xml:714
+msgid "Detected hardware, if any."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakconnect.xml:720
+msgid "A list of ports is proposed. Select your port."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakconnect.xml:724
+msgid ""
+"If not yet installed, it will be suggested that you install the package "
+"<emphasis>kppp-provider</emphasis>."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakconnect.xml:729
+msgid ""
+"A list of providers is proposed, classified by countries. Select your "
+"provider. If it is not listed, select the option "
+"<guilabel>Unlisted</guilabel> and then enter the options your provider gave."
+" Then it is asked for Dialup options:"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of:
+#. <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakconnect.xml:736
+msgid "<emphasis>Connection name</emphasis>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of:
+#. <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakconnect.xml:740
+msgid "<emphasis>Phone number</emphasis>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of:
+#. <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakconnect.xml:744
+msgid "<emphasis>Login ID</emphasis>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of:
+#. <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakconnect.xml:748
+msgid "<emphasis>Password</emphasis>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of:
+#. <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakconnect.xml:752
+msgid "<emphasis>Authentication</emphasis>, choose between:"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of:
+#. <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakconnect.xml:756
+msgid "PAP/CHAP"
+msgstr "PAP/CHAP"
+
+#. type: Content of:
+#. <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakconnect.xml:760
+msgid "Script-based"
+msgstr "Script-based"
+
+#. type: Content of:
+#. <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakconnect.xml:764
+msgid "PAP"
+msgstr "PAP"
+
+#. type: Content of:
+#. <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakconnect.xml:768
+msgid "Terminal-based"
+msgstr "Terminal-based"
+
+#. type: Content of:
+#. <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakconnect.xml:772
+msgid "CHAP"
+msgstr "CHAP"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><title>
+#: en/drakconnect.xml:786
+msgid "Ending the configuration"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/drakconnect.xml:788
+msgid "In the next step, you can specify:"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakconnect.xml:792
+msgid "<emphasis>Allow users to manage the connection</emphasis>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakconnect.xml:796
+msgid "<emphasis>Start the connection at boot</emphasis>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakconnect.xml:800
+msgid "<emphasis>Enable traffic accounting</emphasis>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakconnect.xml:804
+msgid ""
+"<emphasis>Allow interface to be controlled by Network Manager</emphasis>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakconnect.xml:809
+msgid ""
+"In the case of a wireless connection, a supplemental box is <emphasis>Allow "
+"access point roaming</emphasis> which give the possibility to switch "
+"automatically between access point according to the signal strength."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/drakconnect.xml:816
+msgid "With the advanced button, you can specify:"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakconnect.xml:820
+msgid "Metric (10 by default)"
+msgstr "Metrika (výchozí je 10)"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakconnect.xml:824
+msgid "MTU"
+msgstr "MTU"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakconnect.xml:828
+msgid "Network Hotplugging"
+msgstr "Rychlé připojení do sítě"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakconnect.xml:832
+msgid "Enable IPv6 to IPv4 tunnel"
+msgstr "Povolit tunel IPv6 na IPv4"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/drakconnect.xml:836
+msgid ""
+"The last step allows you to specify if the connection is to start "
+"immediately or not."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of:
+#. <section><section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata>
+#: en/drakconnect.xml:841
+msgid "drakconnect9.png"
+msgstr "drakconnect9.png"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><title>
+#: en/drakconsole.xml:3
+msgid "Open a console as administrator"
+msgstr "Spustit konzoli pro správce systému"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle>
+#: en/drakconsole.xml:5
+msgid "drakconsole"
+msgstr "drakconsole"
+
+#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of:
+#. <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata>
+#: en/drakconsole.xml:10
+msgid "drakconsole.png"
+msgstr "drakconsole.png"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para><footnote><para>
+#: en/drakconsole.xml:15
+msgid ""
+"You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis "
+"role=\"bold\">drakconsole</emphasis> as root."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/drakconsole.xml:14
+msgid ""
+"This tool<placeholder type=\"footnote\" id=\"0\"/> gives you access to a "
+"console which is directly opened as root. We do not think that you need more"
+" information about that."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><title>
+#: en/drakdisk.xml:8
+msgid "Manage disk partitions"
+msgstr "Spravovat diskové oddíly"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle>
+#: en/drakdisk.xml:10
+msgid "drakdisk or diskdrake"
+msgstr "drakdisk nebo diskdrake"
+
+#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of:
+#. <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata>
+#: en/drakdisk.xml:15
+msgid "drakdiskBackup.png"
+msgstr "drakdiskBackup.png"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><warning><para><footnote><para>
+#: en/drakdisk.xml:21
+msgid ""
+"You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis "
+"role=\"bold\">drakdisk</emphasis> or <emphasis "
+"role=\"bold\">diskdrake</emphasis> as root."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><warning><para>
+#: en/drakdisk.xml:20
+msgid ""
+"This tool<placeholder type=\"footnote\" id=\"0\"/> is very powerful, a tiny "
+"error or a cat jumping on your keyboard can lead to losing all data on a "
+"partition or even to erasing the entire hard disk. For that reason, you'll "
+"see the screen above on top of the tool screen. Click on "
+"<emphasis>Exit</emphasis> if you're not sure you want to continue."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/drakdisk.xml:30
+msgid ""
+"If you have more than one hard disk, you can switch to the hard disk you "
+"want to work on by selecting the correct tab (sda, sdb, sdc etc)."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of:
+#. <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata>
+#: en/drakdisk.xml:35
+msgid "drakdisk.png"
+msgstr "drakdisk.png"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/drakdisk.xml:39
+msgid ""
+"You can choose from many actions to adjust your hard disk to your "
+"preferences. Wiping an entire hard disk, splitting or merging partitions, "
+"resizing them or changing the filesystem, formatting or viewing what is in a"
+" partition: it is all possible. The <emphasis><guibutton>Clear "
+"all</guibutton></emphasis> button at the bottom is to erase the complete "
+"disk, the other buttons become visible on the right after you click on a "
+"partition."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/drakdisk.xml:47
+msgid ""
+"If the selected partition is mounted, like in the example below, you cannot "
+"choose to resize, format or delete it. To be able to do that the partition "
+"must be unmounted first."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/drakdisk.xml:51
+msgid "It is only possible to resize a partition on its right side"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/drakdisk.xml:53
+msgid ""
+"To change a partition type (change ext3 to ext4 for example) you have to "
+"delete the partition and then re-create it with the new type. The button "
+"<guibutton role=\"bold\">Create</guibutton> appears when a disk empty part "
+"is selected"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/drakdisk.xml:58
+msgid "You can choose a mount point that doesn't exist, it will be created."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of:
+#. <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata>
+#: en/drakdisk.xml:63
+msgid "drakdiskMountedPartition.png"
+msgstr "drakdiskMountedPartition.png"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/drakdisk.xml:67
+msgid ""
+"Selecting <emphasis><guibutton>Toggle to expert mode</guibutton></emphasis> "
+"gives some extra available actions, like labelling the partition, as can be "
+"seen in the screenshot below."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of:
+#. <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata>
+#: en/drakdisk.xml:73
+msgid "drakdiskExpertUnmounted.png"
+msgstr "drakdiskExpertUnmounted.png"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><title>
+#: en/drakedm.xml:5
+msgid "Set up display manager"
+msgstr "Nastavit správce obrazovky"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle>
+#: en/drakedm.xml:7
+msgid "drakedm"
+msgstr "drakedm"
+
+#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of:
+#. <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata>
+#: en/drakedm.xml:12
+msgid "drakedm.png"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para><footnote><para>
+#: en/drakedm.xml:17
+msgid ""
+"You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis "
+"role=\"bold\">drakedm</emphasis> as root."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/drakedm.xml:16
+msgid ""
+"Here<placeholder type=\"footnote\" id=\"0\"/> you can choose which display "
+"manager to use to log into your desktop environment. Only the ones available"
+" on your system will be shown."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/drakedm.xml:24
+msgid ""
+"Most users will only notice that the provided login screens look different. "
+"However, there are differences in supported features, too. LXDM is a "
+"lightweight display manager, KDM and GDM have more extras."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><title>
+#: en/drakfirewall.xml:3
+msgid "Set up your personal firewall"
+msgstr "Nastavit váš osobní firewall"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle>
+#: en/drakfirewall.xml:5
+msgid "drakfirewall"
+msgstr "drakfirewall"
+
+#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of:
+#. <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata>
+#: en/drakfirewall.xml:10
+msgid "drakfirewall.png"
+msgstr "drakfirewall.png"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para><footnote><para>
+#: en/drakfirewall.xml:15
+msgid ""
+"You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis "
+"role=\"bold\">drakfirewall</emphasis> as root."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/drakfirewall.xml:14
+msgid ""
+"This tool<placeholder type=\"footnote\" id=\"0\"/> is found under the "
+"Security tab in the Mageia Control Center labelled \"Set up your personal "
+"firewall\". It is the same tool in the first tab of \"Configure system "
+"security, permissions and audit\"."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/drakfirewall.xml:20
+msgid ""
+"A basic firewall is installed by default with Mageia. All the incoming "
+"connections from the outside are blocked if they aren't authorised. In the "
+"first screen above, you can select the services for which outside connection"
+" attempts are accepted. For your security, uncheck the first box - "
+"<guilabel>Everything (no firewall)</guilabel> - unless you want to disable "
+"the firewall, and only check the needed services."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/drakfirewall.xml:27
+msgid ""
+"It is possible to manually enter the port numbers to open. Click on "
+"<guibutton>Advanced</guibutton> and a new window is opened. In the field "
+"<guilabel>Other ports</guilabel>, enter the needed ports following these "
+"examples :"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/drakfirewall.xml:32
+msgid "80/tcp : open the port 80 tcp protocol"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/drakfirewall.xml:34
+msgid "24000:24010/udp : open all the ports from 24000 to 24010 udp protocol"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/drakfirewall.xml:37
+msgid "The listed ports should be separated by a space."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/drakfirewall.xml:39
+msgid ""
+"If the box <guilabel>Log firewall messages in system logs</guilabel> is "
+"checked, the firewall messages will be saved in system logs"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of:
+#. <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata>
+#: en/drakfirewall.xml:44
+msgid "drakfirewall2.png"
+msgstr "drakfirewall2.png"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><note><para>
+#: en/drakfirewall.xml:49
+msgid ""
+"If you don't host specific services (web or mail server, file sharing, ...) "
+"it is completely possible to have nothing checked at all, it is even "
+"recommended, it won't prevent you from connecting to the internet."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/drakfirewall.xml:55
+msgid ""
+"The next screen deals with the Interactive Firewall options. These feature "
+"allow you to be warned of connection attempts if at least the first box "
+"<guilabel>Use Interactive Firewall </guilabel>is checked. Check the second "
+"box to be warned if the ports are scanned (in order to find a failure "
+"somewhere and enter your machine). Each box from the third one onwards "
+"corresponds to a port you opened in the two first screens; in the screenshot"
+" below, there are two such boxes: SSH server and 80:150/tcp. Check them to "
+"be warned each time a connection is attempted on those ports."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/drakfirewall.xml:64
+msgid "These warning are given by alert popups through the network applet."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of:
+#. <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata>
+#: en/drakfirewall.xml:69
+msgid "drakfirewall3.png"
+msgstr "drakfirewall3.png"
+
+#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of:
+#. <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata>
+#: en/drakfirewall.xml:75
+msgid "drakfirewall4.png"
+msgstr "drakfirewall4.png"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/drakfirewall.xml:79
+msgid ""
+"In the last screen, choose which network interfaces are connected to the "
+"Internet and must be protected. Once the OK button is clicked, the necessary"
+" packages are downloaded."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><tip><para>
+#: en/drakfirewall.xml:84
+msgid ""
+"If you don't know what to choose, have a look in MCC tab Network &amp; "
+"Internet, icon Set up a new network interface."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><title>
+#: en/drakfont.xml:3
+msgid "Manage, add and remove fonts. Import Windows(TM) fonts"
+msgstr "Spravovat, přidávat a odebírat písma, včetně importu písem ze systému Windows(TM)"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle>
+#: en/drakfont.xml:6
+msgid "drakfont"
+msgstr "drakfont"
+
+#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of:
+#. <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata>
+#: en/drakfont.xml:11
+msgid "drakfont.png"
+msgstr "drakfont.png"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para><footnote><para>
+#: en/drakfont.xml:16
+msgid ""
+"You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis "
+"role=\"bold\">drakfont</emphasis> as root."
+msgstr "Tento nástroj můžete spustit z příkazového řádku zadáním <emphasis role=\"bold\">drakfont</emphasis> jako superuživatel."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/drakfont.xml:15
+msgid ""
+"This tool<placeholder type=\"footnote\" id=\"0\"/> is present in the Mageia "
+"Control Center under the <emphasis role=\"bold\">System</emphasis> tab. It "
+"allows you to manage the fonts available on the computer. The main screen "
+"above shows:"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakfont.xml:22
+msgid "the installed font names, styles and sizes."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakfont.xml:26
+msgid "a preview of the selected font."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakfont.xml:30
+msgid "some buttons explained here later."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/drakfont.xml:36
+msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">Get Windows Fonts: <emphasis/></emphasis>"
+msgstr "<emphasis role=\"bold\">Získat Windows písma: <emphasis/></emphasis>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/drakfont.xml:38
+msgid ""
+"This button automatically adds the fonts found on the Windows partition. You"
+" must have Microsoft Windows installed."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/drakfont.xml:41
+msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">Options:</emphasis>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/drakfont.xml:43
+msgid ""
+"It allows you to specify the applications or devices (printers mostly)  able"
+" to use the fonts."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/drakfont.xml:46
+msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">Uninstall:</emphasis>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/drakfont.xml:48
+msgid ""
+"This button is to remove installed fonts and possibly save some place.  Be "
+"careful when removing fonts because it may have serious consequences on the "
+"documents that use them."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/drakfont.xml:52
+msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">Import:</emphasis>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/drakfont.xml:54
+msgid ""
+"Allows you to add fonts from a third party (CD, internet, ...). The "
+"supported formats are ttf, pfa, pfb, pcf, pfm and gsf. Click on the "
+"<emphasis role=\"bold\">Import</emphasis> button and then on <emphasis "
+"role=\"bold\">Add</emphasis>, a file manager pops up where you can select "
+"the fonts to install, click on <emphasis role=\"bold\">Install</emphasis> "
+"when done. They are installed in the folder /usr/share/fonts."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/drakfont.xml:60
+msgid ""
+"If the newly installed (or removed) fonts doesn't appear in the Drakfont "
+"main screen, close and re open it to see the modifications."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><title>
+#: en/drakguard.xml:3
+msgid "Parental Controls"
+msgstr "Rodičovský dohled"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle>
+#: en/drakguard.xml:5
+msgid "drakguard"
+msgstr "drakguard"
+
+#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of:
+#. <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata>
+#: en/drakguard.xml:10
+msgid "drakguard.png"
+msgstr "drakguard.png"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para><footnote><para>
+#: en/drakguard.xml:15
+msgid ""
+"You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis "
+"role=\"bold\">drakguard</emphasis> as root."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/drakguard.xml:14
+msgid ""
+"This tool<placeholder type=\"footnote\" id=\"0\"/> is found in the Mageia "
+"Control Center, under the Security tab, labelled <guilabel>Parental "
+"Control</guilabel>. If you don't see this label, you have to install the "
+"drakguard package (not installed by default)."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><title>
+#: en/drakguard.xml:21 en/msecgui.xml:19
+msgid "Presentation"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/drakguard.xml:23
+msgid ""
+"Drakguard is an easy way to set up parental controls on your computer to "
+"restrict who can do what, and at which times of day. Drakguard has three "
+"useful capabilities:"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakguard.xml:29
+msgid ""
+"It restricts web access to named users to set times of day. It does this by "
+"controlling the shorewall firewall built into Mageia."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakguard.xml:35
+msgid ""
+"It blocks execution of particular commands by named users so these users can"
+" only execute what you accept them to execute."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakguard.xml:40
+msgid ""
+"It restricts access to websites, both manually defined through "
+"blacklists/whitelists, but also dynamically based on the content of the "
+"website. To achieve this Drakguard uses the leading opensource parental "
+"control blocker DansGuardian."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><title>
+#: en/drakguard.xml:49
+msgid "Configuring Parental controls"
+msgstr "Nastavení rodičovského dohledu"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><warning><para>
+#: en/drakguard.xml:52
+msgid ""
+"If your computer contains hard drive partitions that are formatted in Ext2, "
+"Ext3, or ReiserFS format you will see a pop up offering to configure ACL on "
+"your partitions. ACL stands for Access Control Lists, and is a Linux kernel "
+"feature that allows access to individual files to be restricted to named "
+"users. ACL is built into Ext4 and Btrfs file systems, but must be enabled by"
+" an option in Ext2, Ext3, or Reiserfs partitions. If you select 'Yes' to "
+"this prompt drakguard will configure all your partitions to support ACL, and"
+" will then suggest you reboot."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/drakguard.xml:61
+msgid ""
+"<guibutton>Enable parental control</guibutton>: If checked, the parental "
+"control is enabled and the access to <guilabel>Block programs</guilabel> tab"
+" is opened."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/drakguard.xml:65
+msgid ""
+"<guibutton>Block all network traffic</guibutton>: If checked, all the "
+"websites are blocked, except the ones in the whitelist tab. Otherwise, all "
+"the websites are allowed, except the ones in the blacklist tab."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/drakguard.xml:69
+msgid ""
+"<guibutton>User access</guibutton>: Users on the left hand side will have "
+"their access restricted according to the rules you define. Users on the "
+"right hand side have unrestricted access so adult users of the computer are "
+"not inconvenienced. Select a user in the left hand side and click on "
+"<guibutton>Add</guibutton> to add him/her as an allowed user.  Select an "
+"user in the right hand side and click on <guibutton>Remove</guibutton> to "
+"remove him/her from the allowed users."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/drakguard.xml:77
+msgid ""
+"<guibutton>Time control:</guibutton> If checked, internet access is allowed "
+"with restrictions between the <guilabel>Start</guilabel> time and "
+"<guilabel>End</guilabel> time. It is totally blocked outside these time "
+"window."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><title>
+#: en/drakguard.xml:83
+msgid "Blacklist/Whitelist tab"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para>
+#: en/drakguard.xml:85
+msgid ""
+"Enter the website URL in the first field at the top and click on the "
+"<guibutton>Add</guibutton> button."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><title>
+#: en/drakguard.xml:90
+msgid "Block Programs Tab"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para>
+#: en/drakguard.xml:92
+msgid ""
+"<guibutton>Block Defined Applications</guibutton>: Enables the use of ACL to"
+" restrict access to specific applications. Insert the path to the "
+"applications you wish to block."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para>
+#: en/drakguard.xml:96
+msgid ""
+"<guibutton>Unblock Users list</guibutton>: Users listed on the right hand "
+"side will not be subject to acl blocking."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><title>
+#: en/drakgw.xml:9
+msgid "Share the Internet connection with other local machines"
+msgstr "Sdílet připojení k internetu s ostatními lokálními počítači"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle>
+#: en/drakgw.xml:12
+msgid "drakgw"
+msgstr "drakgw"
+
+#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of:
+#. <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata>
+#: en/drakgw.xml:17
+msgid "drakgw.png"
+msgstr "drakgw.png"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><title>
+#: en/drakgw.xml:25
+msgid "Principles"
+msgstr "Zásady"
+
+#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of:
+#. <section><section><para><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata>
+#: en/drakgw.xml:29
+msgid "drakgw-net.png"
+msgstr "drakgw-net.png"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/drakgw.xml:27
+msgid ""
+"<placeholder type=\"mediaobject\" id=\"0\"/>This is useful when you have a "
+"computer (3) which has Internet (2) access and is connected also to a local "
+"network (1). You can use computer (3) as a gateway to give that access to "
+"other workstations (5) and (6) in the local network (1). For this, the "
+"gateway must have two interfaces; the first one such as an ethernet card "
+"must be connected to the local network, and the second one (4) connected to "
+"the Internet (2)."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/drakgw.xml:39
+msgid ""
+"The first step is to verify that the network and the access to Internet are "
+"set up, as documented in <xref linkend=\"draknetcenter\"/>."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><title>
+#: en/drakgw.xml:45
+msgid "Gateway wizard"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><footnote><para>
+#: en/drakgw.xml:48
+msgid ""
+"You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis "
+"role=\"bold\">drakgw</emphasis> as root."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/drakgw.xml:47
+msgid ""
+"The wizard<placeholder type=\"footnote\" id=\"0\"/> offers successive steps "
+"which are shown below:"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakgw.xml:54
+msgid ""
+"If the wizard does not detect at least two interfaces, it warns about this "
+"and asks to stop the network and configure the hardware."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakgw.xml:60
+msgid ""
+"specify the interface used for the Internet connection. The wizard "
+"automatically suggests one of the interfaces, but you should verify that "
+"what is proposed is correct."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakgw.xml:66
+msgid ""
+"specify which interface is used for the Lan access. The wizard also proposes"
+" one, check that this is correct."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakgw.xml:71
+msgid ""
+"The wizard proposes parameters for the Lan network, such as IP address, mask"
+" and domain name. Check that these parameters are compatible with the actual"
+" configuration. It is recommended that you accept these values."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakgw.xml:78
+msgid ""
+"specify if the computer has to be used as a DNS server. If yes, the wizard "
+"will check that <code>bind</code> is installed.  Otherwise, you have to "
+"specify the address of a DNS server."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakgw.xml:84
+msgid ""
+"specify if the computer is to be used as a DHCP server. If yes, the wizard "
+"will check that <code>dhcp-server</code> is installed and offer to configure"
+" it, with start and end addresses in the DHCP range."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakgw.xml:91
+msgid ""
+"specify if the computer is to be used as a proxy server. If yes, the wizard "
+"will check that <code>squid</code> is installed and offer to configure it, "
+"with the address of the administrator (admin@mydomain.com), name of the "
+"proxy (myfirewall@mydomaincom), the port (3128) and the cache size (100 Mb)."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakgw.xml:99
+msgid ""
+"The last step allows you to check if the gateway machine is connected to "
+"printers and to share them."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/drakgw.xml:104
+msgid ""
+"You will be warned about the need to check the firewall if it is active."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><title>
+#: en/drakgw.xml:109
+msgid "Configure the client"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/drakgw.xml:111
+msgid ""
+"If you have configured the gateway machine with DHCP, you only need to "
+"specify in the network configuration tool that you get an address "
+"automatically (using DHCP). The parameters will be obtained when connecting "
+"to the network. This method is valid whatever operating system the client is"
+" using."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/drakgw.xml:117
+msgid ""
+"If you must manually specify the network parameters, you must in particular "
+"specify the gateway by entering the IP-address of the machine acting as the "
+"gateway."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><title>
+#: en/drakgw.xml:123
+msgid "Stop connection sharing"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/drakgw.xml:125
+msgid ""
+"If you want to stop sharing the connection on the Mageia computer, launch "
+"the tool. It will offer to reconfigure the connection or to stop the "
+"sharing."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><title>
+#: en/drakhosts.xml:3
+msgid "Hosts definitions"
+msgstr "Určení adres počítačů"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle>
+#: en/drakhosts.xml:5
+msgid "drakhosts"
+msgstr "drakhosts"
+
+#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of:
+#. <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata>
+#: en/drakhosts.xml:10
+msgid "drakhosts.png"
+msgstr "drakhosts.png"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para><footnote><para>
+#: en/drakhosts.xml:16
+msgid ""
+"You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis "
+"role=\"bold\">drakhosts</emphasis> as root."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/drakhosts.xml:14
+msgid ""
+"If some systems on your network grant you services, and have fixed IP-"
+"addresses, this tool<placeholder type=\"footnote\" id=\"0\"/> allows to "
+"specify a name to access them more easily. Then you can use that name "
+"instead of the IP-address."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/drakhosts.xml:20
+msgid "<guibutton>Add</guibutton>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/drakhosts.xml:22
+msgid ""
+"With this button, you add the name for a new system. You will get a window "
+"to specify the IP-address, the host name for the system, and optionally an "
+"alias which can be used in the same way that the name is."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/drakhosts.xml:27
+msgid "<guibutton>Modify</guibutton>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/drakhosts.xml:29
+msgid ""
+"You can access the parameters of an entry previously defined. You get the "
+"same window."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><title>
+#: en/drakinvictus.xml:3
+msgid "Advanced setup for network interfaces and firewall"
+msgstr "Pokročilé nastavení síťových rozhraní a firewallů"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle>
+#: en/drakinvictus.xml:3
+msgid "drakinvictus"
+msgstr "drakinvictus"
+
+#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of:
+#. <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata>
+#: en/drakinvictus.xml:8
+msgid "drakinvictus.png"
+msgstr "drakinvictus.png"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/drakinvictus.xml:12 en/draknetcenter.xml:187 en/draknetprofile.xml:12
+#: en/drakups.xml:12 en/drakwizard_bind.xml:12 en/drakxservices.xml:12
+msgid ""
+"This page hasn't been written yet for lack of resources. If you think you "
+"can write this help, please contact <link "
+"ns2:href=\"https://wiki.mageia.org/en/Documentation_team\"> the Doc "
+"team.</link> Thanking you in advance."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/drakinvictus.xml:15
+msgid ""
+"You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis "
+"role=\"bold\">drakinvictus</emphasis> as root."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><title>
+#: en/draknetcenter.xml:10
+msgid "Network Center"
+msgstr "Síťové centrum"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle>
+#: en/draknetcenter.xml:12
+msgid "draknetcenter"
+msgstr "draknetcenter"
+
+#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of:
+#. <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata>
+#: en/draknetcenter.xml:17
+msgid "draknetcenter.png"
+msgstr "draknetcenter.png"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para><footnote><para>
+#: en/draknetcenter.xml:22
+msgid ""
+"You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis "
+"role=\"bold\">draknetcenter</emphasis> as root."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/draknetcenter.xml:21
+msgid ""
+"This tool<placeholder type=\"footnote\" id=\"0\"/> is found under the "
+"Network &amp; Internet tab in the Mageia Control Center labelled \"Network "
+"Center\""
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/draknetcenter.xml:31
+msgid ""
+"When this tool is launched, a window opens listing all the networks "
+"configured on the computer, whatever their type (wired, wireless, satellite,"
+" etc.). When clicking on one of them, three or four buttons appear, "
+"depending on the network type, to allow you to look after the network, "
+"change its settings or connect/disconnect. This tool isn't intended to "
+"create a network, for this see <guilabel>Set up a new network interface "
+"(LAN, ISDN, ADSL, ...)</guilabel> in the same MCC tab."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of:
+#. <section><section><para><inlinemediaobject><imageobject><imagedata>
+#: en/draknetcenter.xml:43
+msgid "draknetcenterEthernet-on.png"
+msgstr "draknetcenterEthernet-on.png"
+
+#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of:
+#. <section><section><para><inlinemediaobject><imageobject><imagedata>
+#: en/draknetcenter.xml:47
+msgid "draknetcenterEthernet-off.png"
+msgstr "draknetcenterEthernet-off.png"
+
+#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of:
+#. <section><section><para><inlinemediaobject><imageobject><imagedata>
+#: en/draknetcenter.xml:52
+msgid "draknetcenterWireless-off.png"
+msgstr "draknetcenterWireless-off.png"
+
+#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of:
+#. <section><section><para><inlinemediaobject><imageobject><imagedata>
+#: en/draknetcenter.xml:56
+msgid "draknetcenterWireless-on.png"
+msgstr "draknetcenterWireless-on.png"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/draknetcenter.xml:39
+msgid ""
+"In the screenshot below, given as example, we can see two networks, the "
+"first one is wired and connected, recognizable by this icon <placeholder "
+"type=\"inlinemediaobject\" id=\"0\"/> (this one is not connected<placeholder"
+" type=\"inlinemediaobject\" id=\"1\"/> ) and the second section shows "
+"wireless networks, not connected recognizable by this icon <placeholder "
+"type=\"inlinemediaobject\" id=\"2\"/> and this one <placeholder "
+"type=\"inlinemediaobject\" id=\"3\"/>if connected. For the other network "
+"types, the colour code is always the same, green if connected and red if not"
+" connected."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/draknetcenter.xml:62
+msgid ""
+"In the wireless part of the screen, you can also see all the detected "
+"networks, with the <guilabel>SSID</guilabel>, the <guilabel>Signal "
+"strengh</guilabel>, if they are encrypted (in red) or not (in green), and "
+"the <guilabel>Operating mode</guilabel>. Click on the chosen one and then "
+"either on <guibutton>Monitor</guibutton>, <guibutton>Configure</guibutton> "
+"or <guibutton>Connect</guibutton>. It is possible here to go from a network "
+"to another one. If a private network is selected, the Network Settings "
+"window (see below) will open and ask you for extra settings ( an encryption "
+"key in particular)."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/draknetcenter.xml:72
+msgid "Click on <guibutton>Refresh</guibutton> to update the screen."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of:
+#. <section><section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata>
+#: en/draknetcenter.xml:76
+msgid "draknetcenter1.png"
+msgstr "draknetcenter1.png"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><title>
+#: en/draknetcenter.xml:84
+msgid "The Monitor button"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of:
+#. <section><section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata>
+#: en/draknetcenter.xml:88
+msgid "draknetcenter4.png"
+msgstr "draknetcenter4.png"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/draknetcenter.xml:92
+msgid ""
+"This button allows you to watch the network activity, downloads (toward the "
+"PC, in red) and uploads (toward the Internet, in green). The same screen is "
+"available by right clicking on the <guimenu>Internet icon in the system tray"
+" -> Monitor Network</guimenu>."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/draknetcenter.xml:97
+msgid ""
+"There is a tab for each network (here eth0 is the wired network, lo the "
+"local loopback and wlan0 the wireless network) and a tab connection which "
+"gives details about connection status."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><note><para>
+#: en/draknetcenter.xml:102
+msgid ""
+"At the bottom of the window is a title <guilabel>Traffic "
+"accounting</guilabel>, we will look at that in the next section."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><title>
+#: en/draknetcenter.xml:108
+msgid "The Configure button"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/draknetcenter.xml:110
+msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">A - For a wired network</emphasis>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of:
+#. <section><section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata>
+#: en/draknetcenter.xml:114
+msgid "draknetcenter2.png"
+msgstr "draknetcenter2.png"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/draknetcenter.xml:118
+msgid ""
+"It is possible to change all the settings given during network creation. "
+"Most of the time, checking <guibutton>Automatic IP</guibutton> "
+"<guibutton>(BOOTP/DHCP)</guibutton> will do, but in case of problems, manual"
+" configuration may give better results."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/draknetcenter.xml:123
+msgid ""
+"For a residential network, the <guilabel>IP address</guilabel> always looks "
+"like 192.168.0.x, <guilabel>Netmask</guilabel> is 255.255.255.0, and the "
+"<guilabel>Gateway</guilabel> and <guilabel>DNS servers</guilabel> are "
+"available from your providers website."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/draknetcenter.xml:128
+msgid ""
+"<guibutton>Enable traffic accounting</guibutton> if checked this will count "
+"the traffic on a hourly, daily or monthly basis. The results are visible in "
+"the Network monitor detailed in the previous section. Once enabled, you may "
+"have to reconnect to the network."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/draknetcenter.xml:133
+msgid ""
+"<emphasis role=\"bold\">Allow interface to be controlled by Network "
+"Manager:</emphasis>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/draknetcenter.xml:140 en/draknetcenter.xml:185
+msgid "<guibutton>The button Advanced:</guibutton>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of:
+#. <section><section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata>
+#: en/draknetcenter.xml:148
+msgid "draknetcenter5.png"
+msgstr "draknetcenter5.png"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/draknetcenter.xml:152
+msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">B - For a wireless network</emphasis>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/draknetcenter.xml:154
+msgid "Only the items not already seen above are explained."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of:
+#. <section><section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata>
+#: en/draknetcenter.xml:158
+msgid "draknetcenter3.png"
+msgstr "draknetcenter3.png"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/draknetcenter.xml:162
+msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">Operating mode:</emphasis>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/draknetcenter.xml:164
+msgid ""
+"Select <guilabel>Managed</guilabel> if the connection is via an access "
+"point, there is an <emphasis role=\"bold\">ESSID</emphasis> detected.  "
+"Select <guilabel>Ad-hoc</guilabel> if it is a peer to peer network. Select "
+"<emphasis role=\"bold\">Master</emphasis> if your network card is used as "
+"the access point, your network card needs to support this mode."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/draknetcenter.xml:170
+msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">Encryption mode and Encryption key:</emphasis>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/draknetcenter.xml:173
+msgid "If it is a private network, you need to know these settings."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/draknetcenter.xml:175
+msgid ""
+"<guilabel>WEP</guilabel> uses a password and is weaker than WPA which uses a"
+" passphrase. <guilabel>WPA Pre-Shared Key</guilabel> is also called WPA "
+"personal or WPA home. <guilabel>WPA Enterprise</guilabel> is not often used "
+"in private networks."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/draknetcenter.xml:180
+msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">Allow access point roaming</emphasis>:"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/draknetcenter.xml:182
+msgid ""
+"Roaming is a technology which enables allows computer to change its access "
+"point while remaining connected to the network."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of:
+#. <section><section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata>
+#: en/draknetcenter.xml:193
+msgid "draknetcenter6.png"
+msgstr "draknetcenter6.png"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><title>
+#: en/draknetcenter.xml:201
+msgid "The Advanced Settings button"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of:
+#. <section><section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata>
+#: en/draknetcenter.xml:209
+msgid "draknetcenter7.png"
+msgstr "draknetcenter7.png"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><title>
+#: en/draknetprofile.xml:3
+msgid "Manage different network profiles"
+msgstr "Spravovat různé síťové profily"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle>
+#: en/draknetprofile.xml:3
+msgid "draknetprofile"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of:
+#. <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata>
+#: en/draknetprofile.xml:8
+msgid "draknetprofile.png"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/draknetprofile.xml:15
+msgid ""
+"You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis "
+"role=\"bold\">draknetprofile</emphasis> as root."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><title>
+#: en/draknfs.xml:9
+msgid "Share drives and directories using NFS"
+msgstr "Nastavit sdílení disků a adresářů pomocí NFS"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle>
+#: en/draknfs.xml:11
+msgid "draknfs"
+msgstr "draknfs"
+
+#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of:
+#. <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata>
+#: en/draknfs.xml:16
+msgid "draknfs.png"
+msgstr "draknfs.png"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><title>
+#: en/draknfs.xml:24
+msgid "Prerequisites"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><footnote><para>
+#: en/draknfs.xml:27
+msgid ""
+"You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis "
+"role=\"bold\">draknfs</emphasis> as root."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/draknfs.xml:26
+msgid ""
+"When the wizard<placeholder type=\"footnote\" id=\"0\"/> is launched for the"
+" first time, it may display the following message:"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><blockquote><para>
+#: en/draknfs.xml:33
+msgid ""
+"The package nfs-utils needs to be installed. Do you want to install it?"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/draknfs.xml:37
+msgid ""
+"After completing the installation, a window with an empty list is displayed."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><title>
+#: en/draknfs.xml:42
+msgid "Main window"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/draknfs.xml:44
+msgid ""
+"A list of directories which are shared is displayed. At this step, the list "
+"is empty. The <guibutton>Add</guibutton> button gives access to a "
+"configuration tool."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><title>
+#: en/draknfs.xml:50
+msgid "Modify entry"
+msgstr "Upravit záznam"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/draknfs.xml:52
+msgid ""
+"The configuration tool is labeled \"Modify entry\". It may be also launched "
+"with the <guibutton>Modify</guibutton> button. The following parameters are "
+"available."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of:
+#. <section><section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata>
+#: en/draknfs.xml:58
+msgid "draknfs4.png"
+msgstr "draknfs4.png"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><title>
+#: en/draknfs.xml:64
+msgid "NFS Directory"
+msgstr "Adresář NFS"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para>
+#: en/draknfs.xml:66
+msgid ""
+"Here you can specify which directory is to be shared. The "
+"<guibutton>Directory</guibutton> button gives access to a browser to choose "
+"it."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><title>
+#: en/draknfs.xml:72
+msgid "Host access"
+msgstr "Přístup k počítači"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para>
+#: en/draknfs.xml:74
+msgid ""
+"Here you can specify the hosts that are authorized to access the shared "
+"directory."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para>
+#: en/draknfs.xml:77
+msgid "NFS clients may be specified in a number of ways:"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para>
+#: en/draknfs.xml:79
+msgid ""
+"<emphasis>single host</emphasis>: a host either by an abbreviated name "
+"recognized be the resolver, fully qualified domain name, or an IP address"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para>
+#: en/draknfs.xml:83
+msgid "<emphasis>netgroups</emphasis>: NIS netgroups may be given as @group."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para>
+#: en/draknfs.xml:86
+msgid ""
+"<emphasis>wildcards</emphasis>: machine names may contain the wildcard "
+"characters * and ?. For instance: *.cs.foo.edu matches all hosts in the "
+"domain cs.foo.edu."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para>
+#: en/draknfs.xml:90
+msgid ""
+"<emphasis>IP networks</emphasis>: you can also export directories to all "
+"hosts on an IP (sub-)network simultaneously. For example, either "
+"`/255.255.252.0' or `/22' appended to the network base address."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><title>
+#: en/draknfs.xml:96
+msgid "User ID Mapping"
+msgstr "Mapování uživatelského ID"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para>
+#: en/draknfs.xml:98
+msgid ""
+"<emphasis>map root user as anonymous</emphasis>: maps requests from uid/gid "
+"0 to the anonymous uid/gid (root_squash). The root user from the client "
+"cannot read or write to the files on the server which are created by root on"
+" the server itself."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para>
+#: en/draknfs.xml:103
+msgid ""
+"<emphasis>allow real remote root access</emphasis>: turn off root squashing."
+" This option is mainly useful for diskless clients (no_root_squash)."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para>
+#: en/draknfs.xml:107
+msgid ""
+"<emphasis>map all users to anonymous user</emphasis>: maps all uids and gids"
+" to the anonymous user (all_squash). Useful for NFS-exported public FTP "
+"directories, news spool directories, etc. The opposite option is no user UID"
+" mapping (no_all_squash), which is the default setting."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para>
+#: en/draknfs.xml:113
+msgid ""
+"<emphasis>anonuid and anongid</emphasis>: explicitly set the uid and gid of "
+"the anonymous account."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><title>
+#: en/draknfs.xml:118
+msgid "Advanced options"
+msgstr "Pokročilé volby"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para>
+#: en/draknfs.xml:120
+msgid ""
+"<emphasis>Secured Connection</emphasis>: this option requires that requests "
+"originate on an internet port less than IPPORT_RESERVED (1024).  This option"
+" is on by default."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para>
+#: en/draknfs.xml:124
+msgid ""
+"<emphasis>Read-Only share</emphasis>: allow either only read or both read "
+"and write requests on this NFS volume. The default is to disallow any "
+"request which changes the filesystem. This can also be made explicit by "
+"using this option."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para>
+#: en/draknfs.xml:129
+msgid ""
+"<emphasis>Synchronous access</emphasis>: prevents the NFS server from "
+"violating the NFS protocol and to reply to requests before any changes made "
+"by these requests have been committed to stable storage (e.g. disc drive)."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para>
+#: en/draknfs.xml:134
+msgid ""
+"<emphasis>Subtree checking</emphasis>: enable subtree checking which can "
+"help improve security in some cases, but can decrease reliability. See "
+"exports(5) man page for more details."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><title>
+#: en/draknfs.xml:141 en/draksambashare.xml:201
+msgid "Menu entries"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/draknfs.xml:143
+msgid "So far the list has at least one entry."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of:
+#. <section><section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata>
+#: en/draknfs.xml:147
+msgid "draknfs5.png"
+msgstr "draknfs5.png"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><formalpara><title>
+#: en/draknfs.xml:153 en/draksambashare.xml:207
+msgid "File|Write conf"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para>
+#: en/draknfs.xml:155
+msgid "Save the current configuration."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><title>
+#: en/draknfs.xml:159
+msgid "NFS Server|Restart"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><formalpara><para>
+#: en/draknfs.xml:161 en/draksambashare.xml:222
+msgid ""
+"The server is stopped and restarted with the current configuration files."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><title>
+#: en/draknfs.xml:166
+msgid "NFS Server|Reload"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><formalpara><para>
+#: en/draknfs.xml:168 en/draksambashare.xml:229
+msgid ""
+"The configuration displayed is reloaded from the current configuration "
+"files."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><title>
+#: en/drakproxy.xml:10
+msgid "Proxy"
+msgstr "Proxy"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle>
+#: en/drakproxy.xml:12
+msgid "drakproxy"
+msgstr "drakproxy"
+
+#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of:
+#. <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata>
+#: en/drakproxy.xml:17
+msgid "drakproxy.png"
+msgstr "drakproxy.png"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para><footnote><para>
+#: en/drakproxy.xml:24
+msgid ""
+"You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis "
+"role=\"bold\">drakproxy</emphasis> as root."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/drakproxy.xml:22
+msgid ""
+"If you have to use a proxy server to access to the internet, you can use "
+"this tool<placeholder type=\"footnote\" id=\"0\"/> to configure it. Your net"
+" administrator will give you the information you need. You can also specify "
+"some services which can be accessed without the proxy by exception."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/drakproxy.xml:30
+msgid ""
+"From Wikipedia, on 2012-09-24, article Proxy server: In computer networks, a"
+" proxy server is a server (a computer system or an application)  that acts "
+"as an intermediary for requests from clients seeking resources from other "
+"servers. A client connects to the proxy server, requesting some service, "
+"such as a file, connection, web page, or other resource available from a "
+"different server. The proxy server evaluates the request as a way to "
+"simplify and control their complexity."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><title>
+#: en/drakrpm-edit-media.xml:3
+msgid "Configure Media"
+msgstr "Nastavení zdrojů"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle>
+#: en/drakrpm-edit-media.xml:5
+msgid "drakrpm-edit-media"
+msgstr "drakrpm-edit-media"
+
+#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of:
+#. <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata>
+#: en/drakrpm-edit-media.xml:17
+msgid "drakrpm-edit-media.png"
+msgstr "drakrpm-edit-media.png"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para><important><para>
+#: en/drakrpm-edit-media.xml:22
+msgid ""
+"First thing to do after an install is to add software sources (also known as"
+" repositories, media, mirrors). That means you must select the media sources"
+" to be used to install and update packages and applications. (see Add button"
+" below)."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para><note><para>
+#: en/drakrpm-edit-media.xml:27
+msgid ""
+"If you install (or upgrade) Mageia using an optical media (DVD or CD) or a "
+"USB device, there will be a software source configured to the optical media "
+"used. To avoid being asked to insert the media when you install new "
+"packages, you should disable (or delete) this media.  (It will have the "
+"media type CD-Rom)."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para><note><para>
+#: en/drakrpm-edit-media.xml:33
+msgid ""
+"Your system is running under an architecture which may be 32-bit (called "
+"i586), or 64-bit (called x86_64). Some packages are independent of whether "
+"your system is 32-bit or 64-bit; these are called noarch packages. They "
+"don't have their own noarch directories on the mirrors, but are all in both "
+"the i586 and the x86_64 media."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para><footnote><para>
+#: en/drakrpm-edit-media.xml:42
+msgid ""
+"You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis "
+"role=\"bold\">drakrpm-edit-media</emphasis> as root."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/drakrpm-edit-media.xml:40
+msgid ""
+"This tool is present in the Mageia Control Center under the tab <emphasis "
+"role=\"bold\">Software management.</emphasis><placeholder type=\"footnote\" "
+"id=\"0\"/>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><title>
+#: en/drakrpm-edit-media.xml:46
+msgid "The columns"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><bridgehead>
+#: en/drakrpm-edit-media.xml:48
+msgid "Column Enable:"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/drakrpm-edit-media.xml:50
+msgid ""
+"The checked media will be used to install new packages. Be cautious with "
+"some media such as Testing and Debug, they could make your system unusable."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><bridgehead>
+#: en/drakrpm-edit-media.xml:54
+msgid "Column Update:"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/drakrpm-edit-media.xml:56
+msgid ""
+"The checked media will be used to update packages, it must be enabled. Only "
+"media with \"Update\" in its name should be selected. For security reasons, "
+"this column isn't modifiable in this tool, you must open a console as root "
+"and type <emphasis role=\"bold\">drakrpm-edit-media --expert.</emphasis>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><bridgehead>
+#: en/drakrpm-edit-media.xml:62
+msgid "Column medium:"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/drakrpm-edit-media.xml:64
+msgid ""
+"Display the medium name. Mageia official repositories for final release "
+"versions contain at least:"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakrpm-edit-media.xml:69
+msgid ""
+"<emphasis role=\"bold\">Core</emphasis> which contains most programs "
+"available supported by Mageia."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakrpm-edit-media.xml:74
+msgid ""
+"<emphasis role=\"bold\">Nonfree</emphasis> which contains some programs "
+"which are not free"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakrpm-edit-media.xml:79
+msgid ""
+"<emphasis role=\"bold\">Tainted</emphasis> free software for which there "
+"might be patent claims in some countries."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakrpm-edit-media.xml:82
+msgid "Each medium has 4 sub-sections:"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakrpm-edit-media.xml:86
+msgid ""
+"<emphasis role=\"bold\">Release</emphasis> the packages as of the day the "
+"this version of Mageia was released."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakrpm-edit-media.xml:91
+msgid ""
+"<emphasis role=\"bold\">Updates</emphasis> the packages updated since "
+"release due to security or bug concerns. Everyone should have this medium "
+"enabled, even with a very slow internet connection."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakrpm-edit-media.xml:97
+msgid ""
+"<emphasis role=\"bold\">Backports</emphasis> some packages of new versions "
+"backported from Cauldron (the next version under development)."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakrpm-edit-media.xml:103
+msgid ""
+"<emphasis role=\"bold\">Testing</emphasis> which is used for temporary tests"
+" of new updates, to allow the bug reporters and the QA team to validate the "
+"corrections."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><title>
+#: en/drakrpm-edit-media.xml:111
+msgid "The buttons on the right"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/drakrpm-edit-media.xml:114
+msgid "<guibutton>Remove:</guibutton>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/drakrpm-edit-media.xml:116
+msgid ""
+"To remove a medium, click on it and then on this button. It is wise to "
+"remove the medium used for the installation (CD or DVD for example)  since "
+"all the packages it contains are in the official Core release medium."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/drakrpm-edit-media.xml:121
+msgid "<guibutton>Edit:</guibutton>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/drakrpm-edit-media.xml:123
+msgid ""
+"Allows you to modify the selected medium settings, (URL, downloader and "
+"proxy)."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/drakrpm-edit-media.xml:126
+msgid "<guibutton>Add:</guibutton>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/drakrpm-edit-media.xml:128
+msgid ""
+"Add the official repositories available on the Internet. These repositories "
+"contain only safe and well tested software. Clicking on the \"Add\" button "
+"adds the mirrorlist to your configuration, it is designed to make sure that "
+"you install and update from a mirror close to you. If you prefer to choose a"
+" specific mirror, then add it by choosing \"Add a specific media mirror\" "
+"from the drop-down \"File\" menu."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/drakrpm-edit-media.xml:135
+msgid "<guibutton>Up and down arrows:</guibutton>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/drakrpm-edit-media.xml:137
+msgid ""
+"Change the list order. When Drakrpm looks for a package, it reads the list "
+"in the displayed order and will install the first package found for the same"
+" release number - in the event of a version mismatch, the latest release "
+"will be installed. So if possible, put the fastest repositories at the top."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><title>
+#: en/drakrpm-edit-media.xml:145 en/harddrake2.xml:64
+msgid "The menu"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/drakrpm-edit-media.xml:147
+msgid "<guimenu>File -> Update:</guimenu>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/drakrpm-edit-media.xml:149
+msgid ""
+"A window pops up with the media list. Select the ones you want to update and"
+" click on the <guibutton>Update</guibutton> button."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/drakrpm-edit-media.xml:152
+msgid "<guimenu>File -> Add a specific media mirror:</guimenu>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/drakrpm-edit-media.xml:154
+msgid ""
+"Suppose you aren't happy with the actual mirror, because for example it's "
+"too slow or often unavailable, you can choose another mirror. Select all the"
+" actual media and click on <guibutton>Remove</guibutton> to take them out. "
+"Click on <guimenu>File -> Add a specific media mirror</guimenu>, choose "
+"between update only or the full set (if you do not know, choose the "
+"<guibutton>Full set of sources</guibutton>) and accept the contact by "
+"clicking on <guibutton>Yes</guibutton>. This window opens:"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of:
+#. <section><section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata>
+#: en/drakrpm-edit-media.xml:165
+msgid "drakrpmEditMedia2.png"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/drakrpm-edit-media.xml:169
+msgid ""
+"You can see, on the left, a list of countries, choose yours or one very "
+"close by clicking on the > symbol, this will display all the available "
+"mirrors in that country. Select one and click on <guibutton>OK</guibutton>."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/drakrpm-edit-media.xml:174
+msgid "<guimenu>File -> Add a custom medium:</guimenu>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/drakrpm-edit-media.xml:176
+msgid ""
+"It is possible to install a new media (from a third party for example) that "
+"isn't supported by Mageia. A new window appears:"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of:
+#. <section><section><para><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata>
+#: en/drakrpm-edit-media.xml:181
+msgid "rpmdrakeEditMedia1.png"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/drakrpm-edit-media.xml:179
+msgid ""
+"<placeholder type=\"mediaobject\" id=\"0\"/>Select the medium type, find a "
+"smart name that well define the medium and give the URL (or the path, "
+"according to the medium type)"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/drakrpm-edit-media.xml:187
+msgid "<guimenu>Options -> Global options:</guimenu>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/drakrpm-edit-media.xml:189
+msgid ""
+"This item allows you to choose when to \"Verify RPMs to be installed\" "
+"(always or never), the download program (curl, wget or aria2) and to define "
+"the download policy for information about the packages (on demand -by "
+"default-, update only, always or never)."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/drakrpm-edit-media.xml:194
+msgid "<guimenu>Options -> Manage keys:</guimenu>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/drakrpm-edit-media.xml:196
+msgid ""
+"To guarantee a high level of security, digital keys are used to authenticate"
+" the media. It is possible for each medium to allow or disallow a key. In "
+"the window that appear, select a medium and then click on "
+"<guibutton>Add</guibutton> to allow a new key or to select a key and click "
+"on <guibutton>Remove</guibutton> to disallow that key."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><warning><para>
+#: en/drakrpm-edit-media.xml:203
+msgid "Do this with care, as with all security-related questions"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/drakrpm-edit-media.xml:204
+msgid "<guimenu>Options -> Proxy:</guimenu>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/drakrpm-edit-media.xml:206
+msgid ""
+"If you need to use a proxy server for internet access, you can configure it "
+"here. You only need to give the <guibutton>Proxy hostname</guibutton> and if"
+" necessary a <guilabel>Username</guilabel> and "
+"<guilabel>Password</guilabel>."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/drakrpm-edit-media.xml:213
+msgid ""
+"For more information about configuring the media, see <link "
+"ns2:href=\"https://wiki.mageia.org/en/Software_management\">the Mageia Wiki "
+"page</link>."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><title>
+#: en/draksambashare.xml:10
+msgid "Share directories and drives with Samba"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle>
+#: en/draksambashare.xml:13
+msgid "draksambashare"
+msgstr "draksambashare"
+
+#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of:
+#. <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata>
+#: en/draksambashare.xml:18
+msgid "draksambashare.png"
+msgstr "draksambashare.png"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/draksambashare.xml:29
+msgid ""
+"Samba is a protocol used in different Operating Systems to share some "
+"resources like directories or printers. This tool allows you to configure "
+"the machine as a Samba server using the protocol SMB/CIFS. This protocol is "
+"also used by Windows(R) and workstations with this OS can access the "
+"resources of the Samba server."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><title>
+#: en/draksambashare.xml:37
+msgid "Preparation"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/draksambashare.xml:39
+msgid ""
+"To be accessed from other workstations, the server has to have a fixed IP "
+"address. This can be specified directly on the server, for example with "
+"<xref linkend=\"draknetcenter-ti1\"/>, or at the DHCP server which "
+"identifies the station with its MAC-address and give it always the same "
+"address. The firewall has also to allow the incoming requests to the Samba "
+"server."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><title>
+#: en/draksambashare.xml:50
+msgid "Wizard - Standalone server"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><footnote><para>
+#: en/draksambashare.xml:53
+msgid ""
+"You can start this tool from the command line, by typing<emphasis "
+"role=\"bold\"> draksambashare</emphasis> as root."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/draksambashare.xml:52
+msgid ""
+"At the first run, the tools <placeholder type=\"footnote\" id=\"0\"/> checks"
+" if needed packages are installed and proposes to install them if they are "
+"not yet present. Then the wizard to configure the Samba server is launched."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of:
+#. <section><section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata>
+#: en/draksambashare.xml:61
+msgid "draksambashare0.png"
+msgstr "draksambashare0.png"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/draksambashare.xml:67
+msgid ""
+"In the next window the Standalone server configuration option is already "
+"selected."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of:
+#. <section><section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata>
+#: en/draksambashare.xml:71
+msgid "draksambashare1.png"
+msgstr "draksambashare1.png"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/draksambashare.xml:77
+msgid ""
+"Then specify the name of the workgroup. This name should be the same for the"
+" access to the shared resources."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/draksambashare.xml:80
+msgid ""
+"The netbios name is the name which will be used to designate the server on "
+"the network."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of:
+#. <section><section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata>
+#: en/draksambashare.xml:85
+msgid "draksambashare2.png"
+msgstr "draksambashare2.png"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/draksambashare.xml:91
+msgid "Choose the security mode:"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/draksambashare.xml:95
+msgid ""
+"<guilabel>user</guilabel>: the client must be authorized to access the "
+"resource"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/draksambashare.xml:100
+msgid ""
+"<guilabel>share</guilabel>: the client authenticates itself separately for "
+"each share"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/draksambashare.xml:105
+msgid ""
+"You can specify which hosts are allowed to access the resources, with IP "
+"address or host name."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of:
+#. <section><section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata>
+#: en/draksambashare.xml:110
+msgid "draksambashare3.png"
+msgstr "draksambashare3.png"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/draksambashare.xml:115
+msgid ""
+"Specify the server banner. The banner is the way this server will be "
+"described in the Windows workstations."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of:
+#. <section><section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata>
+#: en/draksambashare.xml:120
+msgid "draksambashare4.png"
+msgstr "draksambashare4.png"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/draksambashare.xml:126
+msgid ""
+"The place where Samba can log information can be specified at the next step."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of:
+#. <section><section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata>
+#: en/draksambashare.xml:131
+msgid "draksambashare5.png"
+msgstr "draksambashare5.png"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/draksambashare.xml:137
+msgid ""
+"The wizard displays a list of the chosen parameters before you accept the "
+"configuration. When accepted, the configuration will be written in "
+"<code>/etc/samba/smb.conf</code>."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of:
+#. <section><section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata>
+#: en/draksambashare.xml:143
+msgid "draksambashare6.png"
+msgstr "draksambashare6.png"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><title>
+#: en/draksambashare.xml:151
+msgid "Wizard - Primary domain controller"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of:
+#. <section><section><para><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata>
+#: en/draksambashare.xml:155
+msgid "draksambashare13.png"
+msgstr "draksambashare13.png"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/draksambashare.xml:153
+msgid ""
+"<placeholder type=\"mediaobject\" id=\"0\"/>If the \"Primary domain "
+"controller\" option is selected, the wizard asks for indication if Wins is "
+"to support or not and to provide admin users names. The following steps are "
+"then the same as for standalone server, except you can choose also the "
+"security mode:"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/draksambashare.xml:164
+msgid ""
+"<guilabel>domain</guilabel>: provides a mechanism for storing all user and "
+"group accounts in a central, shared, account repository.  The centralized "
+"account repository is shared between (security)  controllers."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><title>
+#: en/draksambashare.xml:173
+msgid "Declare a directory to share"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/draksambashare.xml:175
+msgid "With the <guibutton>Add</guibutton> button, we get:"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of:
+#. <section><section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata>
+#: en/draksambashare.xml:179
+msgid "draksambashare15.png"
+msgstr "draksambashare15.png"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/draksambashare.xml:184
+msgid ""
+"A new entry is thus added. It can be modified with the "
+"<guibutton>Modify</guibutton> button. Options can be edited, such as whether"
+" the directory is visible to the public, writable or browseable.  The share "
+"name can not be modified."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of:
+#. <section><section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata>
+#: en/draksambashare.xml:191
+msgid "draksambashare16.png"
+msgstr "draksambashare16.png"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/draksambashare.xml:203
+msgid "When the list has at least one entry, menu entries can be used."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><formalpara><para>
+#: en/draksambashare.xml:209
+msgid "Save the current configuration in <code>/etc/samba/smb.conf</code>."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><formalpara><title>
+#: en/draksambashare.xml:214
+msgid "Samba server|Configure"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><formalpara><para>
+#: en/draksambashare.xml:216
+msgid "The wizard can be run again with this command."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><formalpara><title>
+#: en/draksambashare.xml:220
+msgid "Samba server|Restart"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><formalpara><title>
+#: en/draksambashare.xml:227
+msgid "Samba Server|Reload"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><title>
+#: en/draksambashare.xml:235
+msgid "Printers share"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/draksambashare.xml:237
+msgid "Samba also allows you to share printers."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of:
+#. <section><section><para><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata>
+#: en/draksambashare.xml:241
+msgid "draksambashare17.png"
+msgstr "draksambashare17.png"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><screenshot>
+#: en/draksambashare.xml:239 en/drakvpn.xml:46 en/logdrake.xml:89
+#: en/rpmdrake.xml:58 en/rpmdrake.xml:163 en/rpmdrake.xml:173
+#: en/rpmdrake.xml:183 en/rpmdrake.xml:193 en/rpmdrake.xml:203
+#: en/rpmdrake.xml:238
+msgid "<placeholder type=\"mediaobject\" id=\"0\"/>"
+msgstr "<placeholder type=\"mediaobject\" id=\"0\"/>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><title>
+#: en/draksambashare.xml:247
+msgid "Samba users"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of:
+#. <section><section><para><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata>
+#: en/draksambashare.xml:253
+msgid "draksambashare18.png"
+msgstr "draksambashare18.png"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/draksambashare.xml:249
+msgid ""
+"In this tab, you can add users who are allowed to access the shared "
+"resources when authentication is required. You can add users from <xref "
+"linkend=\"userdrake-ti1\"/><placeholder type=\"mediaobject\" id=\"0\"/>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><title>
+#: en/draksec.xml:3
+msgid "Configure authentication for Mageia tools"
+msgstr "Konfigurace ověřování na nástroje Mageia"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle>
+#: en/draksec.xml:6
+msgid "draksec"
+msgstr "draksec"
+
+#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of:
+#. <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata>
+#: en/draksec.xml:11
+msgid "draksec0.png"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para><footnote><para>
+#: en/draksec.xml:16
+msgid ""
+"You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis "
+"role=\"bold\">draksec</emphasis> as root."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/draksec.xml:15
+msgid ""
+"This tool<placeholder type=\"footnote\" id=\"0\"/>is present in the Mageia "
+"Control Center under the tab <emphasis role=\"bold\">Security</emphasis>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/draksec.xml:19
+msgid ""
+"It allows to give the regular users the needed rights to accomplish tasks "
+"usually done by the administrator."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/draksec.xml:22
+msgid "Click on the little arrow before the item you want to drop down:"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of:
+#. <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata>
+#: en/draksec.xml:27
+msgid "draksec.png"
+msgstr "draksec.png"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/draksec.xml:31
+msgid ""
+"Most of the tools available in the Mageia Control Center are displayed in "
+"the left side of the window (see the screenshot above) and for each tool, a "
+"drop down list on the right side gives the choice between:"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/draksec.xml:37
+msgid ""
+"Default: The launch mode depends on the chosen security level. See in the "
+"same MCC tab, the tool \"Configure system security, permissions and audit\"."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/draksec.xml:43
+msgid "User password: The user password is asked before the tool launching."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/draksec.xml:48
+msgid ""
+"Administrator password: The root password is asked before the tool launching"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/draksec.xml:53
+msgid "No password: The tool is launched without asking any password."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><title>
+#: en/draksnapshot-config.xml:11
+msgid "Snapshots"
+msgstr "Snímky"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle>
+#: en/draksnapshot-config.xml:12
+msgid "draksnapshot-config"
+msgstr "draksnapshot-config"
+
+#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of:
+#. <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata>
+#: en/draksnapshot-config.xml:18
+msgid "draksnapshot-config.png"
+msgstr "draksnapshot-config.png"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para><footnote><para>
+#: en/draksnapshot-config.xml:22
+msgid ""
+"You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis "
+"role=\"bold\">draksnapshot-config </emphasis> as root."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/draksnapshot-config.xml:22
+msgid ""
+"This tool<placeholder type=\"footnote\" id=\"0\"/> is available in MCC's "
+"<guilabel>System</guilabel> tab, in the <guilabel>Administration "
+"tools</guilabel> section."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/draksnapshot-config.xml:26
+msgid ""
+"When you start this tool in MCC for the first time, you will see a message "
+"about installing draksnapshot. Click on <guibutton>Install</guibutton> to "
+"proceed. Draksnapshot and some other packages it needs will be installed."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/draksnapshot-config.xml:31
+msgid ""
+"Click again on <guilabel>Snapshots</guilabel>, you will see the "
+"<guilabel>Settings</guilabel> screen. Tick <guilabel>Enable "
+"Backups</guilabel> and, if you want to backup the whole system, "
+"<guilabel>Backup the whole system</guilabel>."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/draksnapshot-config.xml:34
+msgid ""
+"If you only want to backup part of your directories, then choose "
+"<guilabel>Advanced</guilabel>. You will see a little pop-up screen. Use the "
+"<guibutton>Add</guibutton> and <guibutton>Remove</guibutton> buttons next to"
+" the <guilabel>Backup list</guilabel> to include or exclude directories and "
+"files from the backup. Use the same buttons next to the "
+"<guilabel>Exclude</guilabel> list to remove subdirectories and/or files from"
+" the chosen directories, that should <emphasis role=\"bold\">not</emphasis> "
+"be included in the backup. Click on <guibutton>Close</guibutton> when you "
+"are done."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/draksnapshot-config.xml:41
+msgid ""
+"Now give the path to <guilabel>Where to backup</guilabel>, or choose the "
+"<guibutton>Browse</guibutton> button to select the correct path. Any mounted"
+" USB-key or external HD can be found in <emphasis "
+"role=\"bold\">/run/media/your_user_name/</emphasis>."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/draksnapshot-config.xml:45
+msgid "Click on <guibutton>Apply</guibutton> to make the snapshot."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><title>
+#: en/draksound.xml:3
+msgid "Sound Configuration"
+msgstr "Nastavit zvuk"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle>
+#: en/draksound.xml:5
+msgid "draksound"
+msgstr "draksound"
+
+#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of:
+#. <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata>
+#: en/draksound.xml:10
+msgid "draksound.png"
+msgstr "draksound.png"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para><footnote><para>
+#: en/draksound.xml:15
+msgid ""
+"You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis "
+"role=\"bold\">draksound</emphasis> as root."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/draksound.xml:14
+msgid ""
+"This tool<placeholder type=\"footnote\" id=\"0\"/> is present in the Mageia "
+"Control Center under the tab <emphasis role=\"bold\">Hardware</emphasis>.¶"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/draksound.xml:19
+msgid ""
+"Draksound deals with the sound configuration, including the driver choice, "
+"PulseAudio options and trouble shooting. It will help you if you experience "
+"sound problems or if you change the sound card."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/draksound.xml:23
+msgid ""
+"The drop down list called <guilabel>Driver</guilabel> allows you to select a"
+" driver from all the ones available on the computer that match the sound "
+"card."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><note><para>
+#: en/draksound.xml:28
+msgid ""
+"Most of the time, it is possible to choose a driver using the OSS or ALSA "
+"API. OSS is the oldest and very basic, we recommend to choose ALSA when "
+"possible for its enhanced features."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/draksound.xml:33
+msgid ""
+"<guilabel>PulseAudio</guilabel> is a sound server. It receives all the sound"
+" inputs, mixes them according to the user preferences and sends the "
+"resulting sound to the output. See <guimenu>Menu ->Sound and video -> "
+"PulseAudio volume control</guimenu> to set these preferences."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/draksound.xml:38
+msgid ""
+"PulseAudio is the default sound server and it is recommended to leave it "
+"enabled."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/draksound.xml:41
+msgid ""
+"<guilabel>Glitch-Free</guilabel> improves PulseAudio with some programs. It "
+"is also recommended to leave it enabled."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/draksound.xml:44
+msgid ""
+"The button <guibutton>Advanced</guibutton> display a new window with two or "
+"three buttons:"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of:
+#. <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata>
+#: en/draksound.xml:49
+msgid "Draksound1.png"
+msgstr "Draksound1.png"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/draksound.xml:53
+msgid ""
+"The first button gives total freedom of choice. You have to know what you "
+"are doing. This button is not available when the system has found a driver "
+"for your device."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/draksound.xml:57
+msgid ""
+"The second one is obvious and the last one gives assistance with fixing any "
+"problems you may have. You will find it helpful to try this before asking "
+"the community for help."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><title>
+#: en/drakups.xml:3
+msgid "Set up a UPS for power monitoring"
+msgstr "Nastavit UPS pro sledování elektrického napájení"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle>
+#: en/drakups.xml:3
+msgid "drakups"
+msgstr "drakups"
+
+#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of:
+#. <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata>
+#: en/drakups.xml:8
+msgid "drakups.png"
+msgstr "drakups.png"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/drakups.xml:16
+msgid ""
+"You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis "
+"role=\"bold\">drakups</emphasis> as root."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><title>
+#: en/drakvpn.xml:3
+msgid "Configure VPN Connection to secure network access"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle>
+#: en/drakvpn.xml:6
+msgid "drakvpn"
+msgstr "drakvpn"
+
+#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of:
+#. <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata>
+#: en/drakvpn.xml:11
+msgid "drakvpn1.png"
+msgstr "drakvpn1.png"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><footnote><para>
+#: en/drakvpn.xml:19
+msgid ""
+"You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis "
+"role=\"bold\">drakvpn</emphasis> as root."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/drakvpn.xml:18
+msgid ""
+"This tool<placeholder type=\"footnote\" id=\"0\"/> allows to configure "
+"secure access to a remote network establishing a tunnel between the local "
+"workstation and the remote network. We discuss here only of the "
+"configuration on the workstation side. We assume that the remote network is "
+"already in operation, and that you have the connection information from the "
+"network administrator, like a .pcf configuration file ."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><title>
+#: en/drakvpn.xml:30
+msgid "Configuration"
+msgstr "Nastavení"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/drakvpn.xml:32
+msgid ""
+"First, select either Cisco VPN Concentrator or OpenVPN, depending on which "
+"protocol is used for your virtual private network."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/drakvpn.xml:35
+msgid "Then give your connection a name."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/drakvpn.xml:37
+msgid "At the next screen, provide the details for your VPN connection."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakvpn.xml:42
+msgid "For Cisco VPN"
+msgstr "Pro Cisco VPN"
+
+#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of:
+#. <section><section><para><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata>
+#: en/drakvpn.xml:48
+msgid "drakvpn3.png"
+msgstr "drakvpn3.png"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakvpn.xml:54
+msgid ""
+"For openvpn. The openvpn package and its dependencies will be installed the "
+"first time the tool is used."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of:
+#. <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata>
+#: en/drakvpn.xml:59
+msgid "drakvpn7.png"
+msgstr "drakvpn7.png"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakvpn.xml:57
+msgid ""
+"<placeholder type=\"mediaobject\" id=\"0\"/>Select the files that you "
+"received from the network administrator."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakvpn.xml:64
+msgid "Advanced parameters:"
+msgstr "Rozšířené parametry:"
+
+#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of:
+#. <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata>
+#: en/drakvpn.xml:68
+msgid "drakvpn8.png"
+msgstr "drakvpn8.png"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakvpn.xml:72
+msgid "The next screen asks for IP-address of the gateway."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/drakvpn.xml:76
+msgid ""
+"When the parameters are set, you have the option of starting the VPN "
+"connection."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/drakvpn.xml:79
+msgid ""
+"This VPN connection can be set to start automatically with a network "
+"connection. To do this, reconfigure the network connection to always connect"
+" to this VPN."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><title>
+#: en/drakwizard_apache2.xml:3
+msgid "Configure webserver"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle>
+#: en/drakwizard_apache2.xml:3
+msgid "drakwizard apache2"
+msgstr "drakwizard apache2"
+
+#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of:
+#. <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata>
+#: en/drakwizard_apache2.xml:8
+msgid "drakwizard_apache2.png"
+msgstr "drakwizard_apache2.png"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para><footnote><para>
+#: en/drakwizard_apache2.xml:12
+msgid ""
+"You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis "
+"role=\"bold\">drakwizard apache2</emphasis> as root."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/drakwizard_apache2.xml:12
+msgid ""
+"This tool<placeholder type=\"footnote\" id=\"0\"/> can help you to set up a "
+"web server."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><title>
+#: en/drakwizard_apache2.xml:15
+msgid "What is a web server?"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/drakwizard_apache2.xml:17
+msgid ""
+"Web server is the software that helps to deliver web content that can be "
+"accessed through the Internet. (From Wikipedia)"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><title>
+#: en/drakwizard_apache2.xml:21
+msgid "Setting up a web server with drakwizard apache2"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/drakwizard_apache2.xml:23
+msgid "Welcome to the web server wizard."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of:
+#. <section><section><procedure><step><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata>
+#: en/drakwizard_apache2.xml:30
+msgid "drakwizard-web-step1.png"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><procedure><step><para>
+#: en/drakwizard_apache2.xml:34 en/drakwizard_dhcp.xml:49
+#: en/drakwizard_proftpd.xml:34 en/drakwizard_squid.xml:55
+msgid ""
+"The first page is just an introduction, click <guibutton>Next</guibutton>."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><procedure><step><title>
+#: en/drakwizard_apache2.xml:38 en/drakwizard_proftpd.xml:38
+msgid "Selecting Server Exposer: Local Net and/or World"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of:
+#. <section><section><procedure><step><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata>
+#: en/drakwizard_apache2.xml:41
+msgid "drakwizard-web-step2.png"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><procedure><step><para>
+#: en/drakwizard_apache2.xml:45
+msgid ""
+"Exposing the web server to the Internet has it's risks. Be ready for bad "
+"things."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><procedure><step><title>
+#: en/drakwizard_apache2.xml:49
+msgid "Server User Module"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of:
+#. <section><section><procedure><step><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata>
+#: en/drakwizard_apache2.xml:52
+msgid "drakwizard-web-step3.png"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><procedure><step><para>
+#: en/drakwizard_apache2.xml:56
+msgid "Allows users to create their own sites."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><procedure><step><title>
+#: en/drakwizard_apache2.xml:60
+msgid "User web directory name"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of:
+#. <section><section><procedure><step><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata>
+#: en/drakwizard_apache2.xml:63
+msgid "drakwizard-web-step4.png"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><procedure><step><para>
+#: en/drakwizard_apache2.xml:67
+msgid ""
+"The user needs to create and populate this directory, then the server will "
+"display it."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><procedure><step><title>
+#: en/drakwizard_apache2.xml:71
+msgid "Server Document Root"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of:
+#. <section><section><procedure><step><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata>
+#: en/drakwizard_apache2.xml:74
+msgid "drakwizard-web-step5.png"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><procedure><step><para>
+#: en/drakwizard_apache2.xml:78
+msgid "Allows you to configure the path to the web servers default documents."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><procedure><step><title>
+#: en/drakwizard_apache2.xml:82 en/drakwizard_dhcp.xml:83
+#: en/drakwizard_proftpd.xml:71 en/drakwizard_squid.xml:144
+#: en/drakwizard_sshd.xml:105
+msgid "Summary"
+msgstr "Souhrn"
+
+#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of:
+#. <section><section><procedure><step><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata>
+#: en/drakwizard_apache2.xml:85
+msgid "drakwizard-web-step6.png"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><procedure><step><para>
+#: en/drakwizard_apache2.xml:89 en/drakwizard_dhcp.xml:91
+#: en/drakwizard_proftpd.xml:78 en/drakwizard_squid.xml:153
+#: en/drakwizard_sshd.xml:112
+msgid ""
+"Take a second to check these options, then click "
+"<guibutton>Next</guibutton>."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><procedure><step><title>
+#: en/drakwizard_apache2.xml:93 en/drakwizard_proftpd.xml:82
+#: en/drakwizard_squid.xml:173 en/drakwizard_sshd.xml:116
+msgid "Finish"
+msgstr "Ukončit"
+
+#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of:
+#. <section><section><procedure><step><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata>
+#: en/drakwizard_apache2.xml:96
+msgid "drakwizard-web-step7.png"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><procedure><step><para>
+#: en/drakwizard_apache2.xml:100 en/drakwizard_proftpd.xml:89
+#: en/drakwizard_squid.xml:183 en/drakwizard_sshd.xml:123
+msgid "You're done! Click <guibutton>Finish</guibutton>."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><title>
+#: en/drakwizard_bind.xml:3
+msgid "Configure DNS"
+msgstr "Upravit nastavení DNS"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle>
+#: en/drakwizard_bind.xml:3
+msgid "drakwizard bind"
+msgstr "drakwizard bind"
+
+#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of:
+#. <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata>
+#: en/drakwizard_bind.xml:8
+msgid "drakwizard_bind.png"
+msgstr "drakwizard_bind.png"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/drakwizard_bind.xml:16
+msgid ""
+"You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis "
+"role=\"bold\">drakwizard bind</emphasis> as root."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><title>
+#: en/drakwizard_dhcp.xml:3
+msgid "Configure DHCP"
+msgstr "Upravit nastavení DHCP"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle>
+#: en/drakwizard_dhcp.xml:5
+msgid "drakwizard dhcp"
+msgstr "drakwizard dhcp"
+
+#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of:
+#. <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata>
+#: en/drakwizard_dhcp.xml:10
+msgid "drakwizard_dhcp.png"
+msgstr "drakwizard_dhcp.png"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para><note><para>
+#: en/drakwizard_dhcp.xml:15
+msgid ""
+"This tool is broken in Mageia 4 because of new naming scheme for the Net "
+"interfaces"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para><footnote><para>
+#: en/drakwizard_dhcp.xml:20
+msgid ""
+"You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis "
+"role=\"bold\">drakwizard dhcp</emphasis> as root."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/drakwizard_dhcp.xml:19
+msgid ""
+"This tool<placeholder type=\"footnote\" id=\"0\"/> can help you to set up a "
+"<acronym>DHCP</acronym> server. It is a component of drakwizard which should"
+" be installed before you can access to it."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><title>
+#: en/drakwizard_dhcp.xml:26
+msgid "What is DHCP?"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/drakwizard_dhcp.xml:28
+msgid ""
+"The Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (<acronym>DHCP</acronym>) is a "
+"standardized networking protocol used on IP networks that dynamically "
+"configures IP addresses and other information that is needed for Internet "
+"communication. (From Wikipedia)"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><title>
+#: en/drakwizard_dhcp.xml:35
+msgid "Setting up a DHCP server with drakwizard dhcp"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/drakwizard_dhcp.xml:37
+msgid "Welcome to the DHCP server wizard."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of:
+#. <section><section><procedure><step><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata>
+#: en/drakwizard_dhcp.xml:45
+msgid "drakwizard-dhcp-step1.png"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><procedure><step><title>
+#: en/drakwizard_dhcp.xml:54
+msgid "Selecting Adaptor"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of:
+#. <section><section><procedure><step><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata>
+#: en/drakwizard_dhcp.xml:58
+msgid "drakwizard-dhcp-step2.png"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><procedure><step><para>
+#: en/drakwizard_dhcp.xml:62
+msgid ""
+"Choose the network interface, which is connected to the subnet, and for "
+"which DHCP will assign IP addresses, and then click "
+"<guibutton>Next</guibutton>."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><procedure><step><title>
+#: en/drakwizard_dhcp.xml:68
+msgid "Select IP range"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of:
+#. <section><section><procedure><step><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata>
+#: en/drakwizard_dhcp.xml:72
+msgid "drakwizard-dhcp-step3.png"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><procedure><step><para>
+#: en/drakwizard_dhcp.xml:76
+msgid ""
+"Select the beginning and ending IP addresses of the range of IPs you want "
+"the server to offer, along with the IP of the gateway machine connecting to "
+"some place outside the local network, hopefully close to the Internet, then "
+"click <guibutton>Next</guibutton>."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of:
+#. <section><section><procedure><step><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata>
+#: en/drakwizard_dhcp.xml:87
+msgid "drakwizard-dhcp-step4.png"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><procedure><step><title>
+#: en/drakwizard_dhcp.xml:96
+msgid "Hold on..."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of:
+#. <section><section><procedure><step><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata>
+#: en/drakwizard_dhcp.xml:100
+msgid "drakwizard-dhcp-step5.png"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><procedure><step><para>
+#: en/drakwizard_dhcp.xml:104
+msgid ""
+"This can be fixed. Click <guibutton>Previous</guibutton> a few times and "
+"change things around."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><procedure><step><title>
+#: en/drakwizard_dhcp.xml:109
+msgid "Hours later..."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of:
+#. <section><section><procedure><step><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata>
+#: en/drakwizard_dhcp.xml:113
+msgid "drakwizard-dhcp-step6.png"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><title>
+#: en/drakwizard_dhcp.xml:121 en/drakwizard_ntp.xml:87
+#: en/drakwizard_squid.xml:189
+msgid "What is done"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakwizard_dhcp.xml:125
+msgid "Installing the package dhcp-server if needed;"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakwizard_dhcp.xml:129
+msgid ""
+"Saving <code>/etc/dhcpd.conf</code> in <code>/etc/dhcpd.conf.orig;</code>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakwizard_dhcp.xml:134
+msgid ""
+"Creating a new <code>dhcpd.conf</code> starting from "
+"<code>/usr/share/wizards/dhcp_wizard/scripts/dhcpd.conf.default</code> and "
+"adding the new parameters:"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of:
+#. <section><section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakwizard_dhcp.xml:140
+msgid "<code>hname</code>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of:
+#. <section><section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakwizard_dhcp.xml:144
+msgid "<code>dns</code>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of:
+#. <section><section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakwizard_dhcp.xml:148
+msgid "net"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of:
+#. <section><section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakwizard_dhcp.xml:152
+msgid "ip"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of:
+#. <section><section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakwizard_dhcp.xml:156
+msgid "<code>mask</code>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of:
+#. <section><section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakwizard_dhcp.xml:160
+msgid "<code>rng1</code>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of:
+#. <section><section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakwizard_dhcp.xml:164
+msgid "<code>rng2</code>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of:
+#. <section><section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakwizard_dhcp.xml:168
+msgid "<code>dname</code>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of:
+#. <section><section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakwizard_dhcp.xml:172
+msgid "<code>gateway</code>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of:
+#. <section><section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakwizard_dhcp.xml:176
+msgid "<code>tftpserverip</code>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of:
+#. <section><section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakwizard_dhcp.xml:180
+msgid "<code>dhcpd_interface</code>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakwizard_dhcp.xml:186
+msgid ""
+"Also modifying Webmin configuration file "
+"<code>/etc/webmin/dhcpd/config</code>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakwizard_dhcp.xml:191
+msgid "Restarting <code>dhcpd.</code>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><title>
+#: en/drakwizard_ntp.xml:10
+msgid "Configure time"
+msgstr "Nastavit čas"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle>
+#: en/drakwizard_ntp.xml:12
+msgid "drakwizard ntp"
+msgstr "drakwizard ntp"
+
+#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of:
+#. <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata>
+#: en/drakwizard_ntp.xml:19
+msgid "drakwizard_ntp.png"
+msgstr "drakwizard_ntp.png"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para><footnote><para>
+#: en/drakwizard_ntp.xml:25
+msgid ""
+"You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis "
+"role=\"bold\">drakwizard ntp</emphasis> as root."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/drakwizard_ntp.xml:24
+msgid ""
+"This tool<placeholder type=\"footnote\" id=\"0\"/> purpose is to set the "
+"time of your server synchronised with an external server. It isn't installed"
+" by default and you have to also install the drakwizard and drakwizard-base "
+"packages."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><title>
+#: en/drakwizard_ntp.xml:32
+msgid "Setup a NTP server with drakwizard ntp"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><procedure><step><para>
+#: en/drakwizard_ntp.xml:36
+msgid ""
+"After a welcome screen (see above), the second one ask you to choose three "
+"time servers in the drop down lists and suggests to use pool.ntp.org twice "
+"because this server always points to available time servers."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of:
+#. <section><section><procedure><step><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata>
+#: en/drakwizard_ntp.xml:43
+msgid "drakwizard-ntp1.png"
+msgstr "drakwizard-ntp1.png"
+
+#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of:
+#. <section><section><procedure><step><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata>
+#: en/drakwizard_ntp.xml:49
+msgid "drakwizard-ntp2.png"
+msgstr "drakwizard-ntp2.png"
+
+#. type: Content of:
+#. <section><section><procedure><step><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata><info>
+#: en/drakwizard_ntp.xml:51
+msgid "<author> <personname/> </author> <pubdate/>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of:
+#. <section><section><procedure><step><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata>
+#: en/drakwizard_ntp.xml:50
+msgid "<placeholder type=\"info\" id=\"0\"/>"
+msgstr "<placeholder type=\"info\" id=\"0\"/>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><procedure><step><para>
+#: en/drakwizard_ntp.xml:63
+msgid ""
+"The following screens allows to choose the region and the city and then, you"
+" arrive on a summary. If something is wrong, you can obviously change it "
+"using the <guibutton>Previous</guibutton>button.  If everything is right, "
+"click on the <guibutton>Next</guibutton> button to proceed to the test. It "
+"may take a while and you finally get this screen below:"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of:
+#. <section><section><procedure><step><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata>
+#: en/drakwizard_ntp.xml:72
+msgid "drakwizard-ntp3.png"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><procedure><step><para>
+#: en/drakwizard_ntp.xml:78
+msgid "Click on the <guibutton>Finish</guibutton> button to close the tool"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/drakwizard_ntp.xml:89
+msgid "This tool executes the following steps:"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakwizard_ntp.xml:93
+msgid "Installing the package <code>ntp</code> if needed"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakwizard_ntp.xml:97
+msgid ""
+"Saving the files <code>/etc/sysconfig/clock</code> to "
+"<code>/etc/sysconfig/clock.orig</code> and <code>/etc/ntp/step-"
+"tickers</code> to <code>/etc/ntp/step-tickers.orig</code>;"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakwizard_ntp.xml:104
+msgid ""
+"Writing a new file <code>/etc/ntp/step-tickers</code> with the list of "
+"servers;"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakwizard_ntp.xml:109
+msgid ""
+"Modifying the file <code>/etc/ntp.conf</code> by inserting the first server "
+"name;"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakwizard_ntp.xml:114
+msgid ""
+"Stopping and starting <code>crond</code>, <code>atd</code> and "
+"<code>ntpd</code> services;"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakwizard_ntp.xml:119
+msgid ""
+"Setting the hardware clock to the current system time with UTC reference."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><title>
+#: en/drakwizard_proftpd.xml:3
+msgid "Configure FTP"
+msgstr "Nastavit FTP"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle>
+#: en/drakwizard_proftpd.xml:3
+msgid "drakwizard proftpd"
+msgstr "drakwizard proftpd"
+
+#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of:
+#. <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata>
+#: en/drakwizard_proftpd.xml:8
+msgid "drakwizard_proftpd.png"
+msgstr "drakwizard_proftpd.png"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para><footnote><para>
+#: en/drakwizard_proftpd.xml:12
+msgid ""
+"You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis "
+"role=\"bold\">drakwizard proftpd</emphasis> as root."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/drakwizard_proftpd.xml:12
+msgid ""
+"This tool<placeholder type=\"footnote\" id=\"0\"/> can help you to set up an"
+" <acronym>FTP</acronym> server."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><title>
+#: en/drakwizard_proftpd.xml:15
+msgid "What is <acronym>FTP</acronym>?"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/drakwizard_proftpd.xml:17
+msgid ""
+"File Transfer Protocol (<acronym>FTP</acronym>) is a standard network "
+"protocol used to transfer files from one host to another host over a "
+"<acronym>TCP</acronym>-based network, such as the Internet. (From Wikipedia)"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><title>
+#: en/drakwizard_proftpd.xml:21
+msgid "Setting up an FTP server with drakwizard proftpd"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/drakwizard_proftpd.xml:23
+msgid "Welcome to the FTP wizard. Buckle up."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of:
+#. <section><section><procedure><step><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata>
+#: en/drakwizard_proftpd.xml:30
+msgid "drakwizard-ftp-step1.png"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of:
+#. <section><section><procedure><step><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata>
+#: en/drakwizard_proftpd.xml:41
+msgid "drakwizard-ftp-step2.png"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><procedure><step><para>
+#: en/drakwizard_proftpd.xml:45
+msgid ""
+"Exposing the FTP server to the Internet has it's risks. Be ready for bad "
+"things."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><procedure><step><title>
+#: en/drakwizard_proftpd.xml:49
+msgid "Server Information"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of:
+#. <section><section><procedure><step><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata>
+#: en/drakwizard_proftpd.xml:52
+msgid "drakwizard-ftp-step3.png"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><procedure><step><para>
+#: en/drakwizard_proftpd.xml:56
+msgid ""
+"Enter name the sever will use to introduce itself, someone to email "
+"complaints too and whether to allow root login access."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><procedure><step><title>
+#: en/drakwizard_proftpd.xml:60
+msgid "Server Options"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of:
+#. <section><section><procedure><step><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata>
+#: en/drakwizard_proftpd.xml:63
+msgid "drakwizard-ftp-step4.png"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><procedure><step><para>
+#: en/drakwizard_proftpd.xml:67
+msgid ""
+"Set listening port, jailed user, allow resumes and/or <acronym>FXP</acronym>"
+" (File eXchange Protocol)"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of:
+#. <section><section><procedure><step><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata>
+#: en/drakwizard_proftpd.xml:74
+msgid "drakwizard-ftp-step5.png"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of:
+#. <section><section><procedure><step><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata>
+#: en/drakwizard_proftpd.xml:85
+msgid "drakwizard-ftp-step6.png"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><title>
+#: en/drakwizard_squid.xml:10
+msgid "Configure proxy"
+msgstr "Upravit nastavení proxy"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle>
+#: en/drakwizard_squid.xml:12
+msgid "drakwizard squid"
+msgstr "drakwizard squid"
+
+#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of:
+#. <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata>
+#: en/drakwizard_squid.xml:17
+msgid "drakwizard_squid.png"
+msgstr "drakwizard_squid.png"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para><footnote><para>
+#: en/drakwizard_squid.xml:23
+msgid ""
+"You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis "
+"role=\"bold\">drakwizard squid</emphasis> as root."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/drakwizard_squid.xml:22
+msgid ""
+"This tool<placeholder type=\"footnote\" id=\"0\"/> can help you to set up a "
+"proxy server. It is a component of drakwizard which should be installed "
+"before you can access to it."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><title>
+#: en/drakwizard_squid.xml:29
+msgid "What is a proxy server?"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/drakwizard_squid.xml:31
+msgid ""
+"A proxy server is a server (a computer system or an application)  that acts "
+"as an intermediary for requests from clients seeking resources from other "
+"servers. A client connects to the proxy server, requesting some service, "
+"such as a file, connection, web page, or other resource available from a "
+"different server and the proxy server evaluates the request as a way to "
+"simplify and control its complexity. (From Wikipedia)"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><title>
+#: en/drakwizard_squid.xml:40
+msgid "Setting up a proxy server with drakwizard squid"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/drakwizard_squid.xml:42
+msgid "Welcome to the proxy server wizard."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of:
+#. <section><section><procedure><step><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata>
+#: en/drakwizard_squid.xml:50
+msgid "drakwizard-proxy-step1.png"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><procedure><step><title>
+#: en/drakwizard_squid.xml:60
+msgid "Selecting the proxy port"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of:
+#. <section><section><procedure><step><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata>
+#: en/drakwizard_squid.xml:64
+msgid "drakwizard-proxy-step2.png"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><procedure><step><para>
+#: en/drakwizard_squid.xml:69
+msgid ""
+"Select the proxy port browsers will connect through, then click "
+"<guibutton>Next</guibutton>."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><procedure><step><title>
+#: en/drakwizard_squid.xml:74
+msgid "Set Memory and Disk Usage"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of:
+#. <section><section><procedure><step><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata>
+#: en/drakwizard_squid.xml:78
+msgid "drakwizard-proxy-step3.png"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><procedure><step><para>
+#: en/drakwizard_squid.xml:83
+msgid ""
+"Set memory and disk cache limits, then click <guibutton>Next</guibutton>."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><procedure><step><title>
+#: en/drakwizard_squid.xml:88
+msgid "Select Network Access Control"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of:
+#. <section><section><procedure><step><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata>
+#: en/drakwizard_squid.xml:92
+msgid "drakwizard-proxy-step4.png"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><procedure><step><para>
+#: en/drakwizard_squid.xml:97
+msgid ""
+"Set visibility to local network or world, then click "
+"<guibutton>Next</guibutton>."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><procedure><step><title>
+#: en/drakwizard_squid.xml:102
+msgid "Grant Network Access"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of:
+#. <section><section><procedure><step><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata>
+#: en/drakwizard_squid.xml:106
+msgid "drakwizard-proxy-step5.png"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><procedure><step><para>
+#: en/drakwizard_squid.xml:111
+msgid ""
+"Grant access to local networks, then click <guibutton>Next</guibutton>."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><procedure><step><title>
+#: en/drakwizard_squid.xml:116
+msgid "Use Upper Level Proxy Server?"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of:
+#. <section><section><procedure><step><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata>
+#: en/drakwizard_squid.xml:120
+msgid "drakwizard-proxy-step6.png"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><procedure><step><para>
+#: en/drakwizard_squid.xml:125
+msgid "Cascade through another proxy server? If no, skip next step."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><procedure><step><title>
+#: en/drakwizard_squid.xml:130
+msgid "Upper Level Proxy URL and Port"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of:
+#. <section><section><procedure><step><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata>
+#: en/drakwizard_squid.xml:134
+msgid "drakwizard-proxy-step7.png"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><procedure><step><para>
+#: en/drakwizard_squid.xml:139
+msgid ""
+"Provide upper level proxy hostname and port, then click "
+"<guibutton>Next</guibutton>."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of:
+#. <section><section><procedure><step><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata>
+#: en/drakwizard_squid.xml:148
+msgid "drakwizard-proxy-step8.png"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><procedure><step><title>
+#: en/drakwizard_squid.xml:158
+msgid "Start during boot?"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of:
+#. <section><section><procedure><step><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata>
+#: en/drakwizard_squid.xml:162
+msgid "drakwizard-proxy-step9.png"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><procedure><step><para>
+#: en/drakwizard_squid.xml:168
+msgid ""
+"Choose if the proxy server should be started during the boot time, then "
+"click <guibutton>Next</guibutton>."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of:
+#. <section><section><procedure><step><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata>
+#: en/drakwizard_squid.xml:177
+msgid "drakwizard-proxy-step10.png"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakwizard_squid.xml:193
+msgid "Installing the package squid if needed;"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakwizard_squid.xml:197
+msgid ""
+"Saving <code>/etc/squid/squid.conf</code> in "
+"<code>/etc/squid/squid.conf.orig;</code>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakwizard_squid.xml:202
+msgid ""
+"Creating a new <code>squid.conf</code> starting from "
+"<code>squid.conf.default</code> and adding the new parameters:"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of:
+#. <section><section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakwizard_squid.xml:208
+msgid "<code>cache_dir</code>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of:
+#. <section><section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakwizard_squid.xml:212
+msgid "<code>localnet</code>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of:
+#. <section><section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakwizard_squid.xml:216
+msgid "cache_mem"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of:
+#. <section><section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakwizard_squid.xml:220
+msgid "http_port"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of:
+#. <section><section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakwizard_squid.xml:224
+msgid ""
+"<code>level</code> 1, 2 or 3 and <code>http_access</code> according to level"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of:
+#. <section><section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakwizard_squid.xml:229
+msgid "<code>cache_peer</code>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of:
+#. <section><section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakwizard_squid.xml:233
+msgid "<code>visible_hostname</code>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/drakwizard_squid.xml:239
+msgid "Restarting <code>squid.</code>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><title>
+#: en/drakwizard_sshd.xml:3
+msgid "OpenSSH daemon configuration"
+msgstr "Nastavení démonu OpenSSH"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle>
+#: en/drakwizard_sshd.xml:3
+msgid "drakwizard sshd"
+msgstr "drakwizard sshd"
+
+#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of:
+#. <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata>
+#: en/drakwizard_sshd.xml:8
+msgid "drakwizard_sshd.png"
+msgstr "drakwizard_sshd.png"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para><footnote><para>
+#: en/drakwizard_sshd.xml:13
+msgid ""
+"You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis "
+"role=\"bold\">drakwizard sshd</emphasis> as root."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/drakwizard_sshd.xml:13
+msgid ""
+"This tool<placeholder type=\"footnote\" id=\"0\"/> can help you to set up an"
+" <acronym>SSH</acronym> daemon."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><title>
+#: en/drakwizard_sshd.xml:16
+msgid "What is <acronym>SSH</acronym>?"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/drakwizard_sshd.xml:18
+msgid ""
+"Secure Shell (SSH) is a cryptographic network protocol for secure data "
+"communication, remote command-line login, remote command execution, and "
+"other secure network services between two networked computers that connects,"
+" via a secure channel over an insecure network, a server and a client "
+"(running SSH server and <acronym>SSH</acronym> client programs, "
+"respectively). (From Wikipedia)"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><title>
+#: en/drakwizard_sshd.xml:22
+msgid "Setting up an <acronym>SSH</acronym> daemon with drakwizard sshd"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/drakwizard_sshd.xml:24
+msgid "Welcome to the Open SSH wizard."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><procedure><step><title>
+#: en/drakwizard_sshd.xml:28
+msgid "Select Type of Configure Options"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of:
+#. <section><section><procedure><step><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata>
+#: en/drakwizard_sshd.xml:31
+msgid "drakwizard-sshd-step1.png"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><procedure><step><para>
+#: en/drakwizard_sshd.xml:35
+msgid ""
+"Choose <guilabel>Expert</guilabel> for all options or "
+"<guilabel>Newbie</guilabel> to skip steps 3-7, click "
+"<guibutton>Next</guibutton>."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><procedure><step><title>
+#: en/drakwizard_sshd.xml:39
+msgid "General Options"
+msgstr "Obecné volby"
+
+#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of:
+#. <section><section><procedure><step><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata>
+#: en/drakwizard_sshd.xml:42
+msgid "drakwizard-sshd-step2.png"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><procedure><step><para>
+#: en/drakwizard_sshd.xml:46
+msgid ""
+"Sets visibility and root access options. Port 22 is the standard "
+"<acronym>SSH</acronym> port."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><procedure><step><title>
+#: en/drakwizard_sshd.xml:50
+msgid "Authentication Methods"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of:
+#. <section><section><procedure><step><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata>
+#: en/drakwizard_sshd.xml:53
+msgid "drakwizard-sshd-step3.png"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><procedure><step><para>
+#: en/drakwizard_sshd.xml:57
+msgid ""
+"Allow a variety of authentication methods users can use while connecting, "
+"then click <guibutton>Next</guibutton>."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><procedure><step><title>
+#: en/drakwizard_sshd.xml:61
+msgid "Logging"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of:
+#. <section><section><procedure><step><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata>
+#: en/drakwizard_sshd.xml:64
+msgid "drakwizard-sshd-step4.png"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><procedure><step><para>
+#: en/drakwizard_sshd.xml:68
+msgid ""
+"Choose logging facility and level of output, then click "
+"<guibutton>Next</guibutton>."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><procedure><step><title>
+#: en/drakwizard_sshd.xml:72
+msgid "Login Options"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of:
+#. <section><section><procedure><step><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata>
+#: en/drakwizard_sshd.xml:75
+msgid "drakwizard-sshd-step5.png"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><procedure><step><para>
+#: en/drakwizard_sshd.xml:79
+msgid "Configure per-login settings, then click <guibutton>Next</guibutton>."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><procedure><step><title>
+#: en/drakwizard_sshd.xml:83
+msgid "User Login Options"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of:
+#. <section><section><procedure><step><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata>
+#: en/drakwizard_sshd.xml:86
+msgid "drakwizard-sshd-step6.png"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><procedure><step><para>
+#: en/drakwizard_sshd.xml:90
+msgid ""
+"Configure the user access settings, then click <guibutton>Next</guibutton>."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><procedure><step><title>
+#: en/drakwizard_sshd.xml:94
+msgid "Compression and Forwarding"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of:
+#. <section><section><procedure><step><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata>
+#: en/drakwizard_sshd.xml:97
+msgid "drakwizard-sshd-step7.png"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><procedure><step><para>
+#: en/drakwizard_sshd.xml:101
+msgid ""
+"Configure X11 forwarding and compression during transfer, then click "
+"<guibutton>Next</guibutton>."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of:
+#. <section><section><procedure><step><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata>
+#: en/drakwizard_sshd.xml:108
+msgid "drakwizard-sshd-step8.png"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of:
+#. <section><section><procedure><step><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata>
+#: en/drakwizard_sshd.xml:119
+msgid "drakwizard-sshd-step9.png"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><title>
+#: en/drakxservices.xml:3
+msgid "Manage system services by enabling or disabling them"
+msgstr "Spouštět a zastavovat systémové služby"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle>
+#: en/drakxservices.xml:3
+msgid "drakxservices"
+msgstr "drakxservices"
+
+#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of:
+#. <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata>
+#: en/drakxservices.xml:8
+msgid "drakxservices.png"
+msgstr "drakxservices.png"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/drakxservices.xml:15
+msgid ""
+"You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis "
+"role=\"bold\">drakxservices</emphasis> as root."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><title>
+#: en/harddrake2.xml:10
+msgid "Hardware configuration"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle>
+#: en/harddrake2.xml:12
+msgid "harddrake2"
+msgstr "harddrake2"
+
+#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of:
+#. <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata>
+#: en/harddrake2.xml:17
+msgid "harddrake2.png"
+msgstr "harddrake2.png"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para><footnote><para>
+#: en/harddrake2.xml:23
+msgid ""
+"You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis "
+"role=\"bold\">harddrake2</emphasis> as root."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/harddrake2.xml:22
+msgid ""
+"This tool<placeholder type=\"footnote\" id=\"0\"/> gives a general view of "
+"the hardware of your computer. When the tool is launched, it executes a job "
+"to look for every element of the hardware. For that, it uses the command "
+"<code>ldetect </code>which refers to a list of hardware in <code>ldetect-"
+"lst</code> package."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><title>
+#: en/harddrake2.xml:31
+msgid "The window"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/harddrake2.xml:33
+msgid "The window is divided in two columns."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/harddrake2.xml:35
+msgid ""
+"The left column contains a list of the detected hardware. The devices are "
+"grouped by categories. Click on the &gt; to expand the content of a "
+"category. Each device can be selected in this column."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/harddrake2.xml:39
+msgid ""
+"The right column displays information about the selected device.  The "
+"<guimenu>Help -&gt; Fields description</guimenu> gives some information "
+"about the content of the fields."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/harddrake2.xml:43
+msgid ""
+"According to which type of device is selected, either one or two buttons are"
+" available at the bottom of the right column:"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/harddrake2.xml:48
+msgid ""
+"<guibutton>Set current driver options</guibutton>: this can be used to "
+"parameterize the module which is used in relation to the device. This must "
+"used by experts only."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/harddrake2.xml:54
+msgid ""
+"<guibutton>Run config tool</guibutton>: access to the tool which can "
+"configure the device. The tool can often be accessed directly from the MCC."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/harddrake2.xml:68
+msgid ""
+"The <guimenu>options</guimenu> menu gives the opportunity to check boxes to "
+"enable automatic detection:"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/harddrake2.xml:73
+msgid "modem"
+msgstr "modem"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/harddrake2.xml:77
+msgid "Jaz devices"
+msgstr "Jednotka JAZ"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/harddrake2.xml:81
+msgid "Zip parallel devices"
+msgstr "Paralelní jednotka ZIP"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/harddrake2.xml:83
+msgid ""
+"By default these detections are not enabled, because they are slow. Check "
+"the appropriate box(es) if you have this hardware connected. Detection will "
+"be operational the next time this tool is started."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><title>
+#: en/keyboarddrake.xml:3
+msgid "Set up the Keyboard Layout"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle>
+#: en/keyboarddrake.xml:7
+msgid "keyboarddrake"
+msgstr "keyboarddrake"
+
+#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of:
+#. <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata>
+#: en/keyboarddrake.xml:12
+msgid "keyboarddrake.png"
+msgstr "keyboarddrake.png"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><footnote><para>
+#: en/keyboarddrake.xml:20
+msgid ""
+"You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis "
+"role=\"bold\">keyboarddrake</emphasis> as root."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/keyboarddrake.xml:19
+msgid ""
+"The keyboarddrake tool<placeholder type=\"footnote\" id=\"0\"/> helps you "
+"configure the basic layout for the keyboard that you wish to use on Mageia. "
+"It affects the keyboard layout for all users on the system. It can be found "
+"in the Hardware section of the Mageia Control Center (MCC) labelled "
+"\"Configure mouse and keyboard\"."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><title>
+#: en/keyboarddrake.xml:29
+msgid "Keyboard Layout"
+msgstr "Rozložení klávesnice"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/keyboarddrake.xml:31
+msgid ""
+"Here you can select which keyboard layout you wish to use. The names (listed"
+" in alphabetical order) describe the language, country, and/or ethnicity "
+"each layout should be used for."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><title>
+#: en/keyboarddrake.xml:37
+msgid "Keyboard Type"
+msgstr "Typ klávesnice"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/keyboarddrake.xml:39
+msgid ""
+"This menu lets you select the type of keyboard you are using. If you are "
+"unsure of which to choose, it is best to leave it as the default type."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><title>
+#: en/localedrake.xml:10
+msgid "Manage localization for your system"
+msgstr "Upravit nastavení lokalizace systému"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle>
+#: en/localedrake.xml:13
+msgid "localedrake"
+msgstr "localedrake"
+
+#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of:
+#. <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata>
+#: en/localedrake.xml:18
+msgid "localedrake.png"
+msgstr "localedrake.png"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para><footnote><para>
+#: en/localedrake.xml:24
+msgid ""
+"You can also start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis "
+"role=\"bold\">localedrake</emphasis> as root."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/localedrake.xml:24
+msgid ""
+"This tool<placeholder type=\"footnote\" id=\"0\"/> can be found in the "
+"System section of the Mageia Control Center (MCC) labelled \"Manage "
+"localization for your system\". It opens with a window in which you can "
+"choose your language. The choice is adapted to languages selected during "
+"installation."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/localedrake.xml:31
+msgid ""
+"The <guibutton>Advanced</guibutton> button give access to activate "
+"compatibility with old encoding (non UTF8)."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/localedrake.xml:34
+msgid ""
+"The second window shows a list of countries according to the selected "
+"language. The button <guibutton>Other Countries</guibutton> gives access to "
+"countries not listed."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/localedrake.xml:38
+msgid "You have to restart your session after any modifications."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><info><title>
+#: en/localedrake.xml:42
+msgid "Input method"
+msgstr "Vstupní metoda"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/localedrake.xml:44
+msgid ""
+"In the <guilabel>Other Countries</guilabel> screen you can also select an "
+"input method (from the drop-down menu at the bottom of the list). Input "
+"methods allow users to input multilingual characters (Chinese, Japanese, "
+"Korean, etc)."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/localedrake.xml:48
+msgid ""
+"For Asian and African locales, IBus will be set as default input method so "
+"users should not need to configure it manually."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/localedrake.xml:50
+msgid ""
+"Other input methods (SCIM, GCIN, HIME, etc.) also provide similar functions "
+"and can, if not available from the drop-down menu, be installed in another "
+"part of the Mageia Control Center. See <xref linkend=\"rpmdrake\"></xref>."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><title>
+#: en/logdrake.xml:3
+msgid "View and search system logs"
+msgstr "Prohlížet a prohledávat systémové záznamy"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle>
+#: en/logdrake.xml:5
+msgid "logdrake"
+msgstr "logdrake"
+
+#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of:
+#. <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata>
+#: en/logdrake.xml:10
+msgid "logdrake.png"
+msgstr "logdrake.png"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para><footnote><para>
+#: en/logdrake.xml:15
+msgid ""
+"You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis "
+"role=\"bold\">logdrake</emphasis> as root."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/logdrake.xml:14
+msgid ""
+"This tool<placeholder type=\"footnote\" id=\"0\"/> is found in the Mageia "
+"Control Center System tab, labelled \"<guilabel>View and search system "
+"logs</guilabel>\"."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><title>
+#: en/logdrake.xml:22
+msgid "To do a search in the logs"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/logdrake.xml:24
+msgid ""
+"First, enter the key string you want to look for in the <emphasis "
+"role=\"bold\">Matching</emphasis> field and/or the key string you want to "
+"<emphasis>do not</emphasis> wish to see amongst the answers in the field "
+"<emphasis role=\"bold\">but not matching</emphasis>. Then select the file(s)"
+"  to search in the <guilabel>Choose file</guilabel> field. Optionally, it is"
+" possible to limit the search to only one day. Select it in the <emphasis "
+"role=\"bold\">Calendar</emphasis>, using the little arrows on each side of "
+"the month and year, and check \"<guibutton>Show only for the selected "
+"day</guibutton>\". At last, click on the <guibutton>search</guibutton> "
+"button to see the results in the window called <guilabel>Content of the "
+"file</guilabel>. It is possible to save the results in the .txt format by "
+"clicking on the <emphasis role=\"bold\">Save</emphasis> button."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><note><para>
+#: en/logdrake.xml:36
+msgid ""
+"The <guibutton>Mageia Tools Logs</guibutton> houses the logs from the Mageia"
+" configuration tools such as the Mageia Control Center tools.  These logs "
+"are updated each time a configuration is modified."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><title>
+#: en/logdrake.xml:43
+msgid "To configure a mail alert"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/logdrake.xml:45
+msgid ""
+"<guibutton>Mail alert</guibutton> automatically checks the system load and "
+"the services every hour and if necessary sends an e-mail to the configured "
+"address."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/logdrake.xml:49
+msgid ""
+"To configure this tool, click on the <emphasis role=\"bold\">Mail "
+"Alert</emphasis> button and then, in the next screen, on the<guibutton> "
+"Configure the mail alert system</guibutton> drop down button. Here, all the "
+"running services are displayed and you can choose which ones you want to "
+"look watch. (See screenshot above)."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/logdrake.xml:55
+msgid "The following services can be watched :"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/logdrake.xml:59
+msgid "Webmin Service"
+msgstr "Služba Webmin"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/logdrake.xml:63
+msgid "Postfix Mail Server"
+msgstr "Postfix Mail Server"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/logdrake.xml:67
+msgid "FTP Server"
+msgstr "FTP Server"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/logdrake.xml:71
+msgid "Apache World Wide Web Server"
+msgstr "Apache World Wide Web Server"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/logdrake.xml:75
+msgid "SSH Server"
+msgstr "SSH Server"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/logdrake.xml:79
+msgid "Samba Server"
+msgstr "Samba Server"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/logdrake.xml:83
+msgid "Xinetd Service"
+msgstr "Xinetd Service"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/logdrake.xml:87
+msgid "BIND Domain Name Resolve"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of:
+#. <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata>
+#: en/logdrake.xml:91
+msgid "logdrake1.png"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/logdrake.xml:97
+msgid ""
+"In the next screen, select the <guilabel>Load</guilabel> value you consider "
+"unacceptable. The load represents the demand to a process, a high load slows"
+" the system down and a very high load may indicate that a process has gone "
+"out of control. The default value is 3. We recommend setting the load value "
+"to 3 times the number of processors."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/logdrake.xml:103
+msgid ""
+"In the last screen, enter the <guilabel>Email address</guilabel> of the "
+"person to be warned and the <guilabel>Email server</guilabel> to use (local "
+"or on the Internet)."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><title>
+#: en/lsnetdrake.xml:10
+msgid "Display Available NFS And SMB Shares"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle>
+#: en/lsnetdrake.xml:11
+msgid "lsnetdrake"
+msgstr "lsnetdrake"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para><footnote><para>
+#: en/lsnetdrake.xml:16
+msgid ""
+"You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis "
+"role=\"bold\">lsnetdrake</emphasis>."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/lsnetdrake.xml:14
+msgid ""
+"This tool <placeholder type=\"footnote\" id=\"0\"/> can only be started and "
+"used on the command line."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/lsnetdrake.xml:21
+msgid ""
+"This page hasn't been written yet for lack of resources. If you think you "
+"can write this help, please contact <link "
+"ns2:href=\"https://wiki.mageia.org/en/Documentation_team\"> the "
+"Documentation team.</link> Thanking you in advance."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><title>
+#: en/lspcidrake.xml:3
+msgid "Display Your PCI, USB and PCMCIA Information"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle>
+#: en/lspcidrake.xml:6
+msgid "lspcidrake"
+msgstr "lspcidrake"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para><footnote><para>
+#: en/lspcidrake.xml:10
+msgid ""
+"You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis "
+"role=\"bold\">lspcidrake</emphasis>."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/lspcidrake.xml:9
+msgid ""
+"This tool <placeholder type=\"footnote\" id=\"0\"/> can only be started and "
+"used on the command line. It will give some more information if used under "
+"root."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/lspcidrake.xml:14
+msgid ""
+"lspcidrake gives the list of all the connected devices to the computer (USB,"
+" PCI and PCMCIA) and the used drivers. It needs the ldetect and ldetect-lst "
+"packages to work."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of:
+#. <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata>
+#: en/lspcidrake.xml:20
+msgid "lspcidrake1.png"
+msgstr "lspcidrake1.png"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/lspcidrake.xml:24
+msgid ""
+"With the -v option, lspcidrake adds the vendor and device identifications."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/lspcidrake.xml:27
+msgid ""
+"lspcidrake often generates very long lists, so, to find an information, it "
+"is often used in a pipeline with the grep command, like in these examples:"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/lspcidrake.xml:31
+msgid "Information about the graphic card;"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/lspcidrake.xml:33
+msgid "<command>lspcidrake | grep VGA</command>"
+msgstr "<command>lspcidrake | grep VGA</command>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/lspcidrake.xml:35
+msgid "Information about the network"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/lspcidrake.xml:37
+msgid "<command>lspcidrake | grep -i network</command>"
+msgstr "<command>lspcidrake | grep -i network</command>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/lspcidrake.xml:39
+msgid "-i to ignore case distinctions."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/lspcidrake.xml:41
+msgid ""
+"In this screenshot below, you can see the action of the -v option for "
+"lspcidrake and the -i option for grep."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of:
+#. <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata>
+#: en/lspcidrake.xml:46
+msgid "lspcidrake2.png"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/lspcidrake.xml:50
+msgid ""
+"There is another tool that gives information about the hardware, it is "
+"called <emphasis role=\"bold\">dmidecode</emphasis> (under root)"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><title>
+#: en/MageiaUpdate.xml:3
+msgid "Software Packages Update"
+msgstr "Aktualizace balíčků softwaru"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle>
+#: en/MageiaUpdate.xml:5
+msgid "MageiaUpdate or drakrpm-update"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of:
+#. <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata>
+#: en/MageiaUpdate.xml:10
+msgid "MageiaUpdate.png"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para><footnote><para>
+#: en/MageiaUpdate.xml:14
+msgid ""
+"You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis "
+"role=\"bold\">MageiaUpdate</emphasis> or <emphasis role=\"bold\">drakrpm-"
+"update</emphasis> as root."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/MageiaUpdate.xml:14
+msgid ""
+"This tool<placeholder type=\"footnote\" id=\"0\"/> is present in the Mageia "
+"Control Center under the tab <emphasis role=\"bold\">Software "
+"management.</emphasis>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para><note><para>
+#: en/MageiaUpdate.xml:18
+msgid ""
+"To work, MageiaUpdate needs the repositories to be configured with rpmdrake-"
+"edit-media with some media checked as updates. If they are not, you are "
+"prompted to do so."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/MageiaUpdate.xml:23
+msgid ""
+"As soon as this tool is launched, it scans the installed packages and lists "
+"those with an update available in the repositories. They are all selected by"
+" default to be automatically downloaded and installed. Click on the "
+"<guibutton>Update</guibutton> button to start the process."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/MageiaUpdate.xml:28
+msgid ""
+"By clicking on a package, more information is displayed in the lower half of"
+" the window. The print<emphasis role=\"bold\"> ></emphasis> before a title "
+"means you can click to drop down a text."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of:
+#. <section><para><inlinemediaobject><imageobject><imagedata>
+#: en/MageiaUpdate.xml:36 en/mgaapplet-config.xml:21
+msgid "MageiaUpdate1.png"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para><note><para>
+#: en/MageiaUpdate.xml:33
+msgid ""
+"When updates are available, an applet in the system tray warns you by "
+"displaying this red icon <placeholder type=\"inlinemediaobject\" id=\"0\"/> "
+". Just click and enter the user password to update the system alike."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><title>
+#: en/mcc-boot.xml:5
+msgid "Boot"
+msgstr "Zavádění systému"
+
+#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of:
+#. <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata>
+#: en/mcc-boot.xml:10
+msgid "mcc-boot.png"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/mcc-boot.xml:16
+msgid ""
+"In this screen you can choose between several tools to configure your boot "
+"steps. Click on a link below to learn more."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><title>
+#: en/mcc-boot.xml:19
+msgid "Configure boot steps"
+msgstr "Nastavit kroky zavádění systému"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/mcc-boot.xml:21
+msgid "<xref linkend=\"drakboot\"/>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/mcc-boot.xml:25
+msgid "<xref linkend=\"drakboot--boot\"/>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/mcc-boot.xml:29
+msgid "<xref linkend=\"drakedm\"/>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><title>
+#: en/mcc-hardware.xml:4
+msgid "Hardware"
+msgstr "Hardware"
+
+#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of:
+#. <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata>
+#: en/mcc-hardware.xml:9
+msgid "mcc-hardware.png"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/mcc-hardware.xml:15
+msgid ""
+"In this screen you can choose between several tools to configure your "
+"hardware. Click on a link below to learn more."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><title>
+#: en/mcc-hardware.xml:20
+msgid "Manage your hardware"
+msgstr "Spravovat hardware počítače"
+
+#. type: Content of:
+#. <section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/mcc-hardware.xml:22
+msgid ""
+"<xref linkend=\"harddrake2\"/><emphasis> = Browse and configure "
+"hardware</emphasis>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of:
+#. <section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/mcc-hardware.xml:27
+msgid "<xref linkend=\"draksound\"/>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><title>
+#: en/mcc-hardware.xml:34
+msgid "Configure graphics"
+msgstr "Nastavit grafiku"
+
+#. type: Content of:
+#. <section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/mcc-hardware.xml:36
+msgid ""
+"<xref linkend=\"drak3d\"/><emphasis> = Configure 3D Desktop "
+"effects</emphasis>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of:
+#. <section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/mcc-hardware.xml:41
+msgid "<xref linkend=\"XFdrake\"/>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><title>
+#: en/mcc-hardware.xml:48
+msgid "Configure mouse and keyboard"
+msgstr "Nastavit myš a klávesnici"
+
+#. type: Content of:
+#. <section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/mcc-hardware.xml:50
+msgid "<xref linkend=\"keyboarddrake\"/>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of:
+#. <section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/mcc-hardware.xml:54
+msgid "<xref linkend=\"mousedrake\"/>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><title>
+#: en/mcc-hardware.xml:61
+msgid "Configure printing and scanning"
+msgstr "Nastavit tisk a skenování"
+
+#. type: Content of:
+#. <section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/mcc-hardware.xml:63
+msgid ""
+"<xref linkend=\"system-config-printer\"/><emphasis> = Set up the printer(s),"
+" the print job queues, ...</emphasis>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of:
+#. <section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/mcc-hardware.xml:68
+msgid "<xref linkend=\"scannerdrake\"/>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><title>
+#: en/mcc-hardware.xml:75 en/mcc-network.xml:58
+msgid "Others"
+msgstr "Ostatní"
+
+#. type: Content of:
+#. <section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/mcc-hardware.xml:77
+msgid "<xref linkend=\"drakups\"/>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><title>
+#: en/mcc-intro.xml:3
+msgid "About the Manual for the Mageia Control Center"
+msgstr "O příručce pro Ovládací centrum Mageia"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/mcc-intro.xml:6
+msgid ""
+"The Mageia Control Center (MCC) has eight different options or tabs to "
+"choose from in the left column, and even ten if the drakwizard package was "
+"installed. Each of these tabs gives a different set of tools that can be "
+"selected in the big right panel."
+msgstr "Ovládací centrum Mageia (MCC) má na výběr v levém sloupci osm různých záložek  a pokud byl nainstalován balíček drakwizard dokonce záložek deset. Každá z těchto záložek poskytuje odlišnou sadu nástrojů, které mohou být vybrány v pravé části."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/mcc-intro.xml:8
+msgid ""
+"The ten following chapters are about those ten options and the related "
+"tools."
+msgstr "Deset následujících kapitol je o těchto deseti záložkách a souvisejících nástrojích."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/mcc-intro.xml:10
+msgid ""
+"The last chapter is about some other Mageia tools, that cannot be chosen in "
+"any of the MCC tabs."
+msgstr "Poslední kapitola je o některých dalších nástrojích Mageia, které nemohou být vybrány ze záložek v MCC."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/mcc-intro.xml:12
+msgid ""
+"The titles of the pages will often be the same as the titles of the tool "
+"screens."
+msgstr "Názvy zde se budou mnohdy shodovat s názvy obrazovek nástrojů."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/mcc-intro.xml:14
+msgid ""
+"There is also a search bar available, which you can access by clicking on "
+"the \"Search\" tab in the left column."
+msgstr "Je zde také k dispozici vyhledávací lišta, ke které můžete přistupovat kliknutím na záložku \"Hledat\" v levém sloupci."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><title>
+#: en/mcc-localdisks.xml:6 en/mcc-localdisks.xml:17
+msgid "Local disks"
+msgstr "Místní disky"
+
+#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of:
+#. <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata>
+#: en/mcc-localdisks.xml:11
+msgid "mcc-localdisks.png"
+msgstr "mcc-localdisks.png"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/mcc-localdisks.xml:15
+msgid ""
+"In this screen you can choose between several tools to manage or share your "
+"local disks. Click on a link below to learn more."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/mcc-localdisks.xml:18
+msgid "<xref linkend=\"drakdisk\"></xref>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/mcc-localdisks.xml:19
+msgid "<xref linkend=\"diskdrake--removable\"></xref>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/mcc-localdisks.xml:20
+msgid "<xref linkend=\"diskdrake--fileshare\"></xref>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><title>
+#: en/mcc-networkservices.xml:4 en/mcc-networkservices.xml:17
+msgid "Network Services"
+msgstr "Síťové služby"
+
+#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of:
+#. <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata>
+#: en/mcc-networkservices.xml:9
+msgid "mcc-networkservices.png"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/mcc-networkservices.xml:15
+msgid ""
+"This screen and the one for <emphasis>Sharing</emphasis> are only visible if"
+" the <emphasis>drakwizard</emphasis> package is installed. You can choose "
+"between several tools to set up different servers. Click on a link below or "
+"on <xref linkend=\"mcc-sharing\"/>to learn more."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/mcc-networkservices.xml:19
+msgid "<xref linkend=\"drakwizard_dhcp\"/>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/mcc-networkservices.xml:23
+msgid "<xref linkend=\"drakwizard_bind\"/>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/mcc-networkservices.xml:27
+msgid "<xref linkend=\"drakwizard_squid\"/>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/mcc-networkservices.xml:31
+msgid "<xref linkend=\"drakwizard_ntp\"/>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/mcc-networkservices.xml:35
+msgid "<xref linkend=\"drakwizard_sshd\"/>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><title>
+#: en/mcc-networksharing.xml:4
+msgid "Network Sharing"
+msgstr "Sdílení v síti"
+
+#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of:
+#. <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata>
+#: en/mcc-networksharing.xml:9
+msgid "mcc-networksharing.png"
+msgstr "mcc-networksharing.png"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/mcc-networksharing.xml:13
+msgid ""
+"In this screen you can choose between several tools for sharing drives and "
+"directories. Click on a link below to learn more."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><title>
+#: en/mcc-networksharing.xml:17
+msgid "Configure Windows(R) shares"
+msgstr "Nastavit sdílení s Windows"
+
+#. type: Content of:
+#. <section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/mcc-networksharing.xml:18
+msgid "<xref linkend=\"diskdrake--smb\"></xref>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of:
+#. <section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/mcc-networksharing.xml:19
+msgid ""
+"<xref linkend=\"draksambashare\"></xref><emphasis> = Share drives and "
+"directories with Windows (SMB) systems</emphasis>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><title>
+#: en/mcc-networksharing.xml:22
+msgid "Configure NFS shares"
+msgstr "Nastavit sdílení pomocí NFS"
+
+#. type: Content of:
+#. <section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/mcc-networksharing.xml:23
+msgid "<xref linkend=\"diskdrake--nfs\"></xref>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of:
+#. <section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/mcc-networksharing.xml:24
+msgid "<xref linkend=\"draknfs\"></xref>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><title>
+#: en/mcc-networksharing.xml:27
+msgid "Configure WebDAV shares"
+msgstr "Nastavit sdílení pomocí WebDAV"
+
+#. type: Content of:
+#. <section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/mcc-networksharing.xml:28
+msgid "<xref linkend=\"diskdrake--dav\"></xref>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><title>
+#: en/mcc-network.xml:3
+msgid "Network and Internet"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of:
+#. <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata>
+#: en/mcc-network.xml:8
+msgid "mcc-network.png"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/mcc-network.xml:12
+msgid ""
+"In this screen you can choose between several network tools. Click on a link"
+" below to learn more."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><title>
+#: en/mcc-network.xml:18
+msgid "Manage your network devices"
+msgstr "Spravovat síťová zařízení"
+
+#. type: Content of:
+#. <section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/mcc-network.xml:21
+msgid "<xref linkend=\"draknetcenter\"/>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of:
+#. <section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/mcc-network.xml:25
+msgid "<xref linkend=\"drakconnect\"/>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of:
+#. <section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/mcc-network.xml:29
+msgid "<xref linkend=\"drakconnect--del\"/>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><title>
+#: en/mcc-network.xml:36
+msgid "Personalize and Secure your network"
+msgstr "Přizpůsobit síť a nastavit její zabezpečení"
+
+#. type: Content of:
+#. <section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/mcc-network.xml:39
+msgid "<xref linkend=\"drakproxy\"/>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of:
+#. <section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/mcc-network.xml:43
+msgid "<xref linkend=\"drakgw\"/>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of:
+#. <section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/mcc-network.xml:47
+msgid "<xref linkend=\"draknetprofile\"/>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of:
+#. <section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/mcc-network.xml:51
+msgid "<xref linkend=\"drakvpn\"/>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of:
+#. <section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/mcc-network.xml:61
+msgid "<xref linkend=\"drakhosts\"/>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><title>
+#: en/mcc-security.xml:5 en/mcc-security.xml:18
+msgid "Security"
+msgstr "Bezpečnost"
+
+#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of:
+#. <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata>
+#: en/mcc-security.xml:10
+msgid "mcc-security.png"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/mcc-security.xml:16
+msgid ""
+"In this screen you can choose between several security tools. Click on a "
+"link below to learn more."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/mcc-security.xml:20
+msgid ""
+"<xref linkend=\"msecgui\"/><emphasis> = Configure system security, "
+"permissions and audit</emphasis>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/mcc-security.xml:25
+msgid "<xref linkend=\"drakfirewall\"/>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/mcc-security.xml:29
+msgid "<xref linkend=\"draksec\"/>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/mcc-security.xml:33
+msgid "<xref linkend=\"drakinvictus\"/>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/mcc-security.xml:37
+msgid "<xref linkend=\"drakguard\"/>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><title>
+#: en/mcc-sharing.xml:4 en/mcc-sharing.xml:17
+msgid "Sharing"
+msgstr "Sdílení"
+
+#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of:
+#. <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata>
+#: en/mcc-sharing.xml:9
+msgid "mcc-sharing.png"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/mcc-sharing.xml:15
+msgid ""
+"This screen and the one for <emphasis>Network Services</emphasis> are only "
+"visible if the <emphasis>drakwizard</emphasis> package is installed. You can"
+" choose between several tools to set up different servers. Click on a link "
+"below or on <xref linkend=\"mcc-networkservices\"/>to learn more."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/mcc-sharing.xml:19
+msgid "<xref linkend=\"drakwizard_proftpd\"/>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/mcc-sharing.xml:23
+msgid "<xref linkend=\"drakwizard_apache2\"/>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><title>
+#: en/mcc-system.xml:4
+msgid "System"
+msgstr "Systém"
+
+#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of:
+#. <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata>
+#: en/mcc-system.xml:9
+msgid "mcc-system.png"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/mcc-system.xml:13
+msgid ""
+"In this screen you can choose between several system and administration "
+"tools. Click on a link below to learn more."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><title>
+#: en/mcc-system.xml:18
+msgid "Manage system services"
+msgstr "Spravovat systémové služby"
+
+#. type: Content of:
+#. <section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/mcc-system.xml:20
+msgid "<xref linkend=\"drakauth\"></xref>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of:
+#. <section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/mcc-system.xml:24
+msgid "<xref linkend=\"drakxservices\"></xref>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of:
+#. <section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/mcc-system.xml:28
+msgid "<xref linkend=\"drakfont\"></xref>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><title>
+#: en/mcc-system.xml:35
+msgid "Localization"
+msgstr "Lokalizace"
+
+#. type: Content of:
+#. <section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/mcc-system.xml:37
+msgid "<xref linkend=\"drakclock\"></xref>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of:
+#. <section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/mcc-system.xml:41
+msgid "<xref linkend=\"localedrake\"></xref>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><title>
+#: en/mcc-system.xml:48
+msgid "Administration tools"
+msgstr "Nástroje pro správu"
+
+#. type: Content of:
+#. <section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/mcc-system.xml:50
+msgid "<xref linkend=\"logdrake\"></xref>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of:
+#. <section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/mcc-system.xml:54
+msgid "<xref linkend=\"drakconsole\"></xref>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of:
+#. <section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/mcc-system.xml:58
+msgid ""
+"<xref linkend=\"userdrake\"></xref><emphasis> = Manage users on "
+"system</emphasis>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of:
+#. <section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/mcc-system.xml:62
+msgid "<xref linkend=\"transfugdrake\"></xref>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of:
+#. <section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/mcc-system.xml:66
+msgid "<xref linkend=\"draksnapshot-config\"></xref>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <article><info><title>
+#: en/MCC.xml:4
+msgid "Mageia Control Center"
+msgstr "Ovládací centrum Mageia"
+
+#. type: Content of: <article><info><cover><para>
+#: en/MCC.xml:6
+msgid ""
+"The texts and screenshots in this manual are available under the CC BY-SA "
+"3.0 license <link ns6:href=\"http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-"
+"sa/3.0/\">http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-sa/3.0/</link>."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <article><info><cover><para>
+#: en/MCC.xml:9
+msgid ""
+"This manual was produced with the help of the <link "
+"ns6:href=\"http://www.calenco.com\">Calenco CMS</link> developed by <link "
+"ns6:href=\"http://www.neodoc.biz\">NeoDoc</link>."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <article><info><cover><para>
+#: en/MCC.xml:11
+msgid ""
+"It was written by volunteers in their free time. Please contact <link "
+"ns6:href=\"https://wiki.mageia.org/en/Documentation_team\">Documentation "
+"Team</link>, if you would like to help improve this manual."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><title>
+#: en/mgaapplet-config.xml:3
+msgid "Configure updates frequency"
+msgstr "Nastavit frekvenci aktualizací"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle>
+#: en/mgaapplet-config.xml:5
+msgid "mgaapplet-config"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of:
+#. <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata>
+#: en/mgaapplet-config.xml:10
+msgid "mgaapplet-config.png"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para><footnote><para>
+#: en/mgaapplet-config.xml:15
+msgid ""
+"You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis "
+"role=\"bold\">mgaapplet-config</emphasis> as root."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/mgaapplet-config.xml:14
+msgid ""
+"This tool<placeholder type=\"footnote\" id=\"0\"/> is present in the Mageia "
+"Control Center under the tab <emphasis role=\"bold\">Software "
+"management</emphasis>. It is also available by a <guimenu>right click / "
+"Updates configuration</guimenu> on the red icon <placeholder "
+"type=\"inlinemediaobject\" id=\"1\"/> in the system tray."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/mgaapplet-config.xml:27
+msgid ""
+"The first slider allows you to change how frequently Mageia will check for "
+"updates and the second the delay after booting before the first check.  The "
+"check box gives you the option to be warned when a new Mageia release is "
+"out."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><title>
+#: en/mousedrake.xml:3
+msgid "Set up the pointer device (mouse, touchpad)"
+msgstr "Nastavit polohovací zařízení (myš, touchpad)"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle>
+#: en/mousedrake.xml:6
+msgid "mousedrake"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of:
+#. <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata>
+#: en/mousedrake.xml:11
+msgid "mousedrake.png"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para><footnote><para>
+#: en/mousedrake.xml:15
+msgid ""
+"You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis "
+"role=\"bold\">mousedrake</emphasis> as root."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/mousedrake.xml:15
+msgid ""
+"This tool<placeholder type=\"footnote\" id=\"0\"/> is present in the Mageia "
+"Control Center under the tab <emphasis role=\"bold\">Hardware</emphasis>."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/mousedrake.xml:20
+msgid ""
+"As you must have a mouse to install Mageia, that one is already installed by"
+" Drakinstall. This tool allows installation of another mouse."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/mousedrake.xml:23
+msgid ""
+"The mice are sorted by connection type and then by model. Select your mouse "
+"and click on <guibutton>OK</guibutton>. Most of the time \"Universal / Any "
+"PS/2 &amp; USB mice\" is suitable for a recent mouse. The new mouse is "
+"immediately taken into account."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><title>
+#: en/msecgui.xml:3
+msgid "MSEC: System Security and Audit"
+msgstr "MSEC: Zabezpečení a audit systému"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle>
+#: en/msecgui.xml:5
+msgid "msecgui"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of:
+#. <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata>
+#: en/msecgui.xml:13
+msgid "msecgui.png"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><footnote><para>
+#: en/msecgui.xml:21
+msgid ""
+"You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis "
+"role=\"bold\">msecgui</emphasis> as root."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/msecgui.xml:21
+msgid ""
+"msecgui<placeholder type=\"footnote\" id=\"0\"/> is a graphic user interface"
+" for msec that allows to configure your system security according to two "
+"approaches:"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/msecgui.xml:28
+msgid ""
+"It sets the system behaviour, msec imposes modifications to the system to "
+"make it more secure."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/msecgui.xml:33
+msgid ""
+"It carries on periodic checks automatically on the system in order to warn "
+"you if something seems dangerous."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/msecgui.xml:38
+msgid ""
+"msec uses the concept of \"security levels\" which are intended to configure"
+" a set of system permissions, which can be audited for changes or "
+"enforcement. Several of them are proposed by Mageia, but you can define your"
+" own customised security levels."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><title>
+#: en/msecgui.xml:45
+msgid "Overview tab"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/msecgui.xml:47
+msgid "See the screenshot above"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/msecgui.xml:49
+msgid ""
+"The first tab takes up the list of the different security tools with a "
+"button on the right side to configure them:"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/msecgui.xml:54
+msgid ""
+"Firewall, also found in the MCC / Security / Set up your personal firewall"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/msecgui.xml:59
+msgid "Updates, also found in MCC / Software Management / Update your system"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/msecgui.xml:64
+msgid "msec itself with some information:"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of:
+#. <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/msecgui.xml:68
+msgid "enabled or not"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of:
+#. <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/msecgui.xml:72
+msgid "the configured Base security level"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of:
+#. <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/msecgui.xml:76
+msgid ""
+"the date of the last Periodic checks and a button to see a detailed report "
+"and another button to execute the checks just now."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><title>
+#: en/msecgui.xml:86
+msgid "Security settings tab"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/msecgui.xml:88
+msgid ""
+"A click on the second tab or on the Security "
+"<guibutton>Configure</guibutton> button leads to the same screen shown "
+"below."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of:
+#. <section><section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata>
+#: en/msecgui.xml:94
+msgid "msecgui2.png"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><title>
+#: en/msecgui.xml:100
+msgid "Basic security tab"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para>
+#: en/msecgui.xml:103
+msgid "<emphasis role=\"underline\">Security levels:</emphasis>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para>
+#: en/msecgui.xml:106
+msgid ""
+"After having checked the box <guilabel>Enable MSEC tool</guilabel>, this tab"
+" allows you by a double click to choose the security level that appears then"
+" in bold. If the box is not checked, the level « none » is applied. The "
+"following levels are available:"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><orderedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/msecgui.xml:113
+msgid ""
+"Level <emphasis role=\"bold\">none</emphasis>. This level is intended if you"
+" do not want to use msec to control system security, and prefer tuning it on"
+" your own. It disables all security checks and puts no restrictions or "
+"constraints on system configuration and settings. Please use this level only"
+" if you are knowing what you are doing, as it would leave your system "
+"vulnerable to attack."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><orderedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/msecgui.xml:122
+msgid ""
+"Level <emphasis role=\"bold\">standard</emphasis>. This is the default "
+"configuration when installed and is intended for casual users.  It "
+"constrains several system settings and executes daily security checks which "
+"detect changes in system files, system accounts, and vulnerable directory "
+"permissions. (This level is similar to levels 2 and 3 from past msec "
+"versions)."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><orderedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/msecgui.xml:131
+msgid ""
+"Level <emphasis role=\"bold\">secure</emphasis>. This level is intended when"
+" you want to ensure your system is secure, yet usable.  It further restricts"
+" system permissions and executes more periodic checks. Moreover, access to "
+"the system is more restricted. (This level is similar to levels 4 (High) and"
+" 5 (Paranoid) from old msec versions)."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><orderedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/msecgui.xml:140
+msgid ""
+"Besides those levels, different task-oriented security are also provided, "
+"such as the <emphasis role=\"bold\">fileserver </emphasis>, <emphasis "
+"role=\"bold\">webserver</emphasis> and <emphasis "
+"role=\"bold\">netbook</emphasis> levels. Such levels attempt to pre-"
+"configure system security according to the most common use cases."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><orderedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/msecgui.xml:149
+msgid ""
+"The last two levels called <emphasis role=\"bold\">audit_daily </emphasis> "
+"and <emphasis role=\"bold\">audit_weekly</emphasis> are not really security "
+"levels but rather tools for periodic checks only."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para>
+#: en/msecgui.xml:156
+msgid ""
+"These levels are saved in "
+"<filename>etc/security/msec/level.&lt;levelname></filename>. You can define "
+"your own customised security levels, saving them into specific files called "
+"<filename>level.&lt;levelname></filename>, placed into the folder "
+"<filename>etc/security/msec/.</filename> This function is intended for power"
+" users which require a customised or more secure system configuration."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><caution><para>
+#: en/msecgui.xml:165
+msgid ""
+"Keep in mind that user-modified parameters take precedence over default "
+"level settings."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para>
+#: en/msecgui.xml:170
+msgid "<emphasis role=\"underline\">Security alerts:</emphasis>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para>
+#: en/msecgui.xml:173
+msgid ""
+"If you check the box <guibutton>Send security alerts by email "
+"to:</guibutton>, the security alerts generated by msec are going to be sent "
+"by local e-mail to the security administrator named in the nearby field. You"
+" can fill either a local user or a complete e-mail address (the local e-mail"
+" and the e-mail manager must be set accordingly). At last, you can receive "
+"the security alerts directly on your desktop.  Check the relevant box to "
+"enable it."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><important><para>
+#: en/msecgui.xml:182
+msgid ""
+"It is strongly advisable to enable the security alerts option in order to "
+"immediately inform the security administrator of possible security problems."
+" If not, the administrator will have to regularly check the logs files "
+"available in <filename>/var/log/security.</filename>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para>
+#: en/msecgui.xml:188
+msgid "<emphasis role=\"underline\">Security options:</emphasis>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para>
+#: en/msecgui.xml:190
+msgid ""
+"Creating a customised level is not the only way to customise the computer "
+"security, it is also possible to use the tabs presented here after to change"
+" any option you want. Current configuration for msec is stored in "
+"<filename>/etc/security/msec/security.conf</filename>. This file contains "
+"the current security level name and the list of all the modifications done "
+"to the options."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><title>
+#: en/msecgui.xml:199
+msgid "System security tab"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para>
+#: en/msecgui.xml:201
+msgid ""
+"This tab displays all the security options on the left side column, a "
+"description in the centre column, and their current values on the right side"
+" column."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of:
+#. <section><section><section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata>
+#: en/msecgui.xml:207
+msgid "msecgui3.png"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para>
+#: en/msecgui.xml:211
+msgid ""
+"To modify an option, double click on it and a new window appears (see "
+"screenshot below). It displays the option name, a short description, the "
+"actual and default values, and a drop down list where the new value can be "
+"selected. Click on the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button to validate the "
+"choice."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of:
+#. <section><section><section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata>
+#: en/msecgui.xml:219
+msgid "msecgui11.png"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><caution><para>
+#: en/msecgui.xml:224
+msgid ""
+"Do not forget when leaving msecgui to save definitively your configuration "
+"using the menu <guimenu>File -> Save the configuration</guimenu>. If you "
+"have changed the settings, msecgui allows you to preview the changes before "
+"saving them."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of:
+#. <section><section><section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata>
+#: en/msecgui.xml:232
+msgid "msecgui10.png"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><title>
+#: en/msecgui.xml:238
+msgid "Network security"
+msgstr "Zabezpečení sítě"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para>
+#: en/msecgui.xml:240
+msgid ""
+"This tab displays all the network options and works like the previous tab"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of:
+#. <section><section><section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata>
+#: en/msecgui.xml:245
+msgid "msecgui4.png"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><title>
+#: en/msecgui.xml:251
+msgid "Periodic checks tab"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para>
+#: en/msecgui.xml:253
+msgid ""
+"Periodic checks aim to inform the security administrator by means of "
+"security alerts of all situations msec thinks potentially dangerous."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para>
+#: en/msecgui.xml:257
+msgid ""
+"This tab displays all the periodic checks done by msec and their frequency "
+"if the box <guibutton>Enable periodic security checks</guibutton> is "
+"checked. Changes are done like in the previous tabs."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of:
+#. <section><section><section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata>
+#: en/msecgui.xml:264
+msgid "msecgui5.png"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><title>
+#: en/msecgui.xml:270
+msgid "Exceptions tab"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para>
+#: en/msecgui.xml:272
+msgid ""
+"Sometimes alert messages are due to well known and wanted situations. In "
+"these cases they are useless and wasted time for the administrator. This tab"
+" allows you to create as many exceptions as you want to avoid unwanted alert"
+" messages. It is obviously empty at the first msec start. The screenshot "
+"below shows four exceptions."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of:
+#. <section><section><section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata>
+#: en/msecgui.xml:280
+msgid "msecgui6.png"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para>
+#: en/msecgui.xml:284
+msgid ""
+"To create an exception, click on the <guibutton>Add a rule</guibutton> "
+"button"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of:
+#. <section><section><section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata>
+#: en/msecgui.xml:289
+msgid "msecgui7.png"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para>
+#: en/msecgui.xml:293
+msgid ""
+"Select the wanted periodic check in the drop down list called "
+"<guilabel>Check</guilabel> and then, enter the "
+"<guilabel>Exception</guilabel> in the text area. Adding an exception is "
+"obviously not definitive, you can either delete it using the "
+"<guibutton>Delete</guibutton> button of the <guilabel>Exceptions</guilabel> "
+"tab or modify it with a double clicK."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><title>
+#: en/msecgui.xml:303
+msgid "Permissions"
+msgstr "Oprávnění"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para>
+#: en/msecgui.xml:304
+msgid ""
+"This tab is intended for file and directory permissions checking and "
+"enforcement."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para>
+#: en/msecgui.xml:306
+msgid ""
+"Like for the security, msec owns different permissions levels (standard, "
+"secure, ..), they are enabled accordingly with the chosen security level. "
+"You can create your own customised permissions levels, saving them into "
+"specific files called <filename>perm.&lt;levelname> </filename> placed into "
+"the folder <filename>etc/security/msec/</filename> . This function is "
+"intended for power users which require a customised configuration. It is "
+"also possible to use the tab presented here after to change any permission "
+"you want. Current configuration is stored in "
+"<filename>/etc/security/msec/perms.conf.</filename> This file contains the "
+"list of all the modifications done to the permissions."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of:
+#. <section><section><section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata>
+#: en/msecgui.xml:318
+msgid "msecgui8.png"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para>
+#: en/msecgui.xml:321
+msgid ""
+"Default permissions are visible as a list of rules (a rule per line). You "
+"can see on the left side, the file or folder concerned by the rule, then the"
+" owner, then the group and then the permissions given by the rule. If, for a"
+" given rule:"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/msecgui.xml:327
+msgid ""
+"the box <guilabel>Enforce</guilabel> is not checked, msec only checks if the"
+" defined permissions for this rule are respected and sends an alert message "
+"if not, but does not change anything."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/msecgui.xml:333
+msgid ""
+"the box <guilabel>Enforce</guilabel> is checked, then msec will rule the "
+"permissions respect at the first periodic check and overwrite the "
+"permissions."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><important><para>
+#: en/msecgui.xml:337
+msgid ""
+"For this to work, the option CHECK_PERMS in the <emphasis "
+"role=\"bold\">Periodic check tab</emphasis> must be configured accordingly."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para>
+#: en/msecgui.xml:339
+msgid ""
+"To create a new rule, click on the <guibutton> Add a rule</guibutton> button"
+" and fill the fields as shown in the example below. The joker * is allowed "
+"in the <guilabel>File</guilabel> field. “current” means no modification."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of:
+#. <section><section><section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata>
+#: en/msecgui.xml:345
+msgid "msecgui9.png"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para>
+#: en/msecgui.xml:348
+msgid ""
+"Click on the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button to validate the choice and do "
+"not forget when leaving to save definitively your configuration using the "
+"menu <guimenu>File -> Save the configuration</guimenu>. If you have changed "
+"the settings, msecgui allows you to preview the changes before saving them."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><note><para>
+#: en/msecgui.xml:353
+msgid ""
+"It is also possible to create or modify the rules by editing the "
+"configuration file <filename>/etc/security/msec/perms.conf</filename>."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><caution><para>
+#: en/msecgui.xml:356
+msgid ""
+"Changes in the <emphasis role=\"bold\">Permission tab</emphasis> (or "
+"directly in the configuration file) are taken into account at the first "
+"periodic check (see the option CHECK_PERMS in the <emphasis "
+"role=\"bold\">Periodic checks tab</emphasis>). If you want them to be taken "
+"immediately into account, use the msecperms command in a console with root "
+"rights. You can use before, the msecperms -p command to know the permissions"
+" that will be changed by msecperms."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><caution><para>
+#: en/msecgui.xml:363
+msgid ""
+"Do not forget that if you modify the permissions in a console or in a file "
+"manager, for a file where the box <guilabel>Enforce </guilabel> is checked "
+"in the <emphasis role=\"bold\">Permissions tab </emphasis>, msecgui will "
+"write the old permissions back after a while, accordingly to the "
+"configuration of the options CHECK_PERMS and CHECK_PERMS_ENFORCE in the "
+"<emphasis role=\"bold\">Periodic Checks tab </emphasis>."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><title>
+#: en/otherMageiaTools.xml:4
+msgid "Other Mageia Tools"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/otherMageiaTools.xml:7
+msgid ""
+"There are more Mageia tools than those that can be started in the Mageia "
+"Control Center. Click on a link below to learn more, or continue reading the"
+" next pages."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/otherMageiaTools.xml:11
+msgid "<xref linkend=\"drakbug\"/><emphasis>drakbug</emphasis>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/otherMageiaTools.xml:16
+msgid "<xref linkend=\"drakbug_report\"/><emphasis>drakbug_report </emphasis>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/otherMageiaTools.xml:21
+msgid "<xref linkend=\"lsnetdrake\"/><emphasis>TO BE WRITTEN </emphasis>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/otherMageiaTools.xml:25
+msgid "<xref linkend=\"lspcidrake\"/>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/otherMageiaTools.xml:29
+msgid "And more tools?"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><title>
+#: en/rpmdrake.xml:3
+msgid "Software Management (Install and Remove Software)"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle>
+#: en/rpmdrake.xml:6
+msgid "rpmdrake"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of:
+#. <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata>
+#: en/rpmdrake.xml:11
+msgid "rpmdrake.png"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><title>
+#: en/rpmdrake.xml:18
+msgid "Introduction to rpmdrake"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><footnote><para>
+#: en/rpmdrake.xml:21
+msgid ""
+"You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis "
+"role=\"bold\">rpmdrake</emphasis> as root."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/rpmdrake.xml:20
+msgid ""
+"This tool<placeholder type=\"footnote\" id=\"0\"/>, also known as drakrpm, "
+"is a program for installing, uninstalling and updating packages. It is the "
+"graphical user interface of URPMI. At each start up, it will check online "
+"package lists (called 'media') downloaded straight from Mageia's official "
+"servers, and will show you each time the latest applications and packages "
+"available for your computer. A filter system allows you to display only "
+"certain types of packages: you may display only installed applications (by "
+"default), or only available updates. You can also view only not installed "
+"packages. You can also search by the name of a package, or in the summaries "
+"of descriptions or in the full descriptions of packages or in the file names"
+" included in the packages."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/rpmdrake.xml:35
+msgid ""
+"To work, rpmdrake needs the repositories to be configured with <xref linkend"
+"=\"drakrpm-edit-media\"/> ."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of:
+#. <section><section><important><para><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata>
+#: en/rpmdrake.xml:43
+msgid "rpmdrake8.png"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><important><para>
+#: en/rpmdrake.xml:38
+msgid ""
+"During the installation, the configured repository is the medium used for "
+"the installation, generally the DVD or CD. If you keep this medium, rpmdrake"
+" will ask it each time you want to install a package, with this pop-up "
+"window : <placeholder type=\"mediaobject\" id=\"0\"/>If the above message "
+"annoys you and you have a good internet connection without too strict "
+"download limit, it is wise to remove that medium and replace it by online "
+"repositories thanks to <xref linkend=\"drakrpm-edit-media\"/> ."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><important><para>
+#: en/rpmdrake.xml:49
+msgid ""
+"Moreover, the online repositories are always up to date, contains much more "
+"packages, and allow to update your installed packages."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><title>
+#: en/rpmdrake.xml:55
+msgid "The main parts of the screen"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of:
+#. <section><section><screenshot><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata>
+#: en/rpmdrake.xml:60
+msgid "rpmdrake1.png"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/rpmdrake.xml:67
+msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">Package type filter:</emphasis>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/rpmdrake.xml:69
+msgid ""
+"This filter allows you to display only certain types of packages. The first "
+"time you start the manager, it only displays applications with a graphical "
+"interface. You can display either all the packages and all their "
+"dependencies and libraries or only package groups such as applications only,"
+" updates only or backported packages from newer versions of Mageia."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><warning><para>
+#: en/rpmdrake.xml:77
+msgid ""
+"The default filter setting is for new entrants to Linux or Mageia, who "
+"probably do not want command line or specialist tools.  Since you're reading"
+" this documentation, you're obviously interested in improving your knowledge"
+" of Mageia, so it is best to set this filter to \"All\"."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/rpmdrake.xml:86
+msgid ""
+"<firstterm> <emphasis role=\"bold\">Package state filter:</emphasis> "
+"</firstterm>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/rpmdrake.xml:89
+msgid ""
+"This filter allows you to view only the installed packages, only the "
+"packages that are not installed or all of the packages, both installed and "
+"not installed."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/rpmdrake.xml:95
+msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">Search mode:</emphasis>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/rpmdrake.xml:97
+msgid ""
+"Click on this icon to search through the package names, through their "
+"summaries, through their complete description or through the files included "
+"in the packages."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/rpmdrake.xml:103
+msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">\"Find\" box:</emphasis>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/rpmdrake.xml:105
+msgid ""
+"Enter here one or more key words. If you want to use more than one keyword "
+"for searching use '|' between keywords, e.g. To search for \"mplayer\" and "
+"\"xine\" at the same time type 'mplayer | xine'."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/rpmdrake.xml:111
+msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">Erase all:</emphasis>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/rpmdrake.xml:113
+msgid ""
+"This icon can erase in one click all the key words entered in the \"Find\" "
+"box ."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/rpmdrake.xml:118
+msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">Categories list:</emphasis>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/rpmdrake.xml:120
+msgid ""
+"This side bar groups all applications and packages into clear categories and"
+" sub categories."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/rpmdrake.xml:125
+msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">Description panel:</emphasis>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/rpmdrake.xml:127
+msgid ""
+"This panel displays the package's name, its summary and complete "
+"description. It displays many useful elements about the selected package. It"
+" can also show precise details about the package, the files included in the "
+"package as well as a list of the last changes made by the maintainer."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><title>
+#: en/rpmdrake.xml:137
+msgid "The status column"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/rpmdrake.xml:139
+msgid ""
+"Once you correctly set the filters, you can find your software either by "
+"category (in area 6 above) or by name/summary/description using area 4. A "
+"list of packages fulfilling your query and, don't forget, the chosen medium "
+"is shown with different status markers according to whether each package is "
+"installed/not installed/an update... To change this status, just check or "
+"uncheck the box before the package name and click on "
+"<guibutton>Apply</guibutton>."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of:
+#. <section><section><para><table><tgroup><thead><row><entry>
+#: en/rpmdrake.xml:155
+msgid "Icon"
+msgstr "Ikona"
+
+#. type: Content of:
+#. <section><section><para><table><tgroup><thead><row><entry>
+#: en/rpmdrake.xml:157
+msgid "Legend"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of:
+#. <section><section><para><table><tgroup><tbody><row><entry><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata>
+#: en/rpmdrake.xml:165
+msgid "rpmdrake2.png"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of:
+#. <section><section><para><table><tgroup><tbody><row><entry>
+#: en/rpmdrake.xml:169
+msgid "This package is already installed"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of:
+#. <section><section><para><table><tgroup><tbody><row><entry><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata>
+#: en/rpmdrake.xml:175
+msgid "rpmdrake3.png"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of:
+#. <section><section><para><table><tgroup><tbody><row><entry>
+#: en/rpmdrake.xml:179
+msgid "This package will be installed"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of:
+#. <section><section><para><table><tgroup><tbody><row><entry><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata>
+#: en/rpmdrake.xml:185
+msgid "rpmdrake4.png"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of:
+#. <section><section><para><table><tgroup><tbody><row><entry>
+#: en/rpmdrake.xml:189
+msgid "This package cannot be modified"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of:
+#. <section><section><para><table><tgroup><tbody><row><entry><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata>
+#: en/rpmdrake.xml:195
+msgid "rpmdrake5.png"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of:
+#. <section><section><para><table><tgroup><tbody><row><entry>
+#: en/rpmdrake.xml:199
+msgid "This package is an update"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of:
+#. <section><section><para><table><tgroup><tbody><row><entry><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata>
+#: en/rpmdrake.xml:205
+msgid "rpmdrake6.png"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of:
+#. <section><section><para><table><tgroup><tbody><row><entry>
+#: en/rpmdrake.xml:209
+msgid "This package will be uninstalled"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/rpmdrake.xml:147
+msgid "<placeholder type=\"table\" id=\"0\"/>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/rpmdrake.xml:215
+msgid "Examples in the screenshot above:"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/rpmdrake.xml:219
+msgid ""
+"If I uncheck digikam (the green arrow tell us it is installed), the status "
+"icon will go red with an up arrow and it will be uninstalled when clicking "
+"on <guibutton>Apply</guibutton>."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/rpmdrake.xml:227
+msgid ""
+"If I check qdigidoc (which is not installed, see the status), the orange "
+"with a down arrow status icon will appear and and it will be installed when "
+"clicking on <guibutton>Apply</guibutton>."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><title>
+#: en/rpmdrake.xml:235
+msgid "The dependencies"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of:
+#. <section><section><screenshot><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata>
+#: en/rpmdrake.xml:240
+msgid "rpmdrake7.png"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/rpmdrake.xml:245
+msgid ""
+"Some packages need other packages called dependencies in order to work. They"
+" are for example libraries or tools. In this case, Rpmdrake displays an "
+"information window allowing you to choose whether to accept the selected "
+"dependencies, cancel the operation or get more information (see above). It "
+"may also happen that various packages are able to provide the needed "
+"library, in which case rpmdrake displays the list of alternatives with a "
+"button to get more information and another button to choose which package to"
+" install."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><title>
+#: en/scannerdrake.xml:10
+msgid "Set up scanner"
+msgstr "Nastavit skener"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle>
+#: en/scannerdrake.xml:11
+msgid "scannerdrake"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><info><title>
+#: en/scannerdrake.xml:18
+msgid "Installation"
+msgstr "Instalace"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><footnote><para>
+#: en/scannerdrake.xml:22
+msgid ""
+"You can start this tool from the command line, by typing "
+"<emphasis>scannerdrake</emphasis> as root."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/scannerdrake.xml:21
+msgid ""
+"This tool <placeholder type=\"footnote\" id=\"0\"/> allows you to configure "
+"a single scanner device or a multifunction device which includes scanning. "
+"It also allows you to share local devices connected to this computer with a "
+"remote computer or to access remote scanners."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/scannerdrake.xml:29
+msgid ""
+"When you start this tool for the first time, you may get the following "
+"message:"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/scannerdrake.xml:32
+msgid ""
+"<emphasis>\"SANE packages need to be installed to use scanners</emphasis>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/scannerdrake.xml:35
+msgid "<emphasis>Do you want to install the SANE packages?\"</emphasis>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/scannerdrake.xml:38
+msgid ""
+"Choose <emphasis>Yes</emphasis> to continue. It will install <code>scanner-"
+"gui</code> and <code>task-scanning</code> if they are not yet installed."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of:
+#. <section><section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata>
+#: en/scannerdrake.xml:44
+msgid "scannerdrake.png"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/scannerdrake.xml:50
+msgid ""
+"If your scanner is identified correctly, so if in the above screen you see "
+"the name of your scanner, the scanner is ready for use with, for instance, "
+"<emphasis>XSane</emphasis> or <emphasis>Simple Scan</emphasis>."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/scannerdrake.xml:55
+msgid ""
+"In that case, you might now want to want to configure the <emphasis>Scanner "
+"sharing</emphasis> option. You can read about it in the <xref "
+"linkend=\"scannersharing\"/>."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/scannerdrake.xml:59
+msgid ""
+"However, if your scanner hasn't been correctly identified, and checking its "
+"cable(s) and power switch and then pressing <emphasis>Search for new "
+"scanners</emphasis> doesn't help, you'll need to press <emphasis>Add a "
+"scanner manually</emphasis>."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/scannerdrake.xml:64
+msgid ""
+"Choose the brand of your scanner in the list you see, then its type from the"
+" list for that brand and click <emphasis>Ok</emphasis>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of:
+#. <section><section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata>
+#: en/scannerdrake.xml:69
+msgid "scannerdrake2.png"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><note><para>
+#: en/scannerdrake.xml:76
+msgid ""
+"If you can't find your scanner in the list, then click "
+"<emphasis>Cancel</emphasis>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><note><para>
+#: en/scannerdrake.xml:79
+msgid ""
+"Please check whether your scanner is supported on the <link "
+"xlink:href=\"http://www.sane-project.org/lists/sane-mfgs-cvs.html\">SANE: "
+"Supported Devices</link> page and ask for help in the <link "
+"xlink:href=\"http://forums.mageia.org/en/\">forums</link>."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><figure><info><title>
+#: en/scannerdrake.xml:87
+msgid "Choose port"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of:
+#. <section><section><figure><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata>
+#: en/scannerdrake.xml:91
+msgid "scannerdrake3.png"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><figure>
+#: en/scannerdrake.xml:86
+msgid "<placeholder type=\"info\" id=\"0\"/> <placeholder type=\"mediaobject\" id=\"1\"/>"
+msgstr "<placeholder type=\"info\" id=\"0\"/> <placeholder type=\"mediaobject\" id=\"1\"/>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/scannerdrake.xml:97
+msgid ""
+"You can leave this setting to <emphasis>Auto-detect available "
+"ports</emphasis> unless your scanner's interface is a parallel port. In that"
+" case, select <emphasis>/dev/parport0</emphasis> if you have only one."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/scannerdrake.xml:102
+msgid ""
+"After clicking <emphasis>Ok</emphasis>, in most cases you will see a screen "
+"similar to the one below."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/scannerdrake.xml:104
+msgid ""
+"If you don't get that screen, then please read the <xref "
+"linkend=\"scannerextrasteps\"/>."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of:
+#. <section><section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata>
+#: en/scannerdrake.xml:108
+msgid "scannerdrake4.png"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><info><title>
+#: en/scannerdrake.xml:117
+msgid "Scannersharing"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of:
+#. <section><section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata>
+#: en/scannerdrake.xml:122
+msgid "scannerdrake5.png"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/scannerdrake.xml:128
+msgid ""
+"Here you can choose whether the scanners connected to this machine should be"
+" accessible by remote machines and by which remote machines. You can also "
+"decide here whether scanners on remote machines should be made available on "
+"this machine."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/scannerdrake.xml:133
+msgid ""
+"Scanner sharing to hosts : name or IP address of hosts can be added or "
+"deleted from the list of hosts allowed to access the local device(s), on "
+"this computer."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/scannerdrake.xml:137
+msgid ""
+"Usage of remote scanners : name or IP address of hosts can added or deleted "
+"from the list of hosts which give access to a remote scanner."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of:
+#. <section><section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata>
+#: en/scannerdrake.xml:143
+msgid "scannerdrake6.png"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/scannerdrake.xml:149
+msgid "Scanner sharing to hosts: you can add host."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of:
+#. <section><section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata>
+#: en/scannerdrake.xml:153
+msgid "scannerdrake7.png"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/scannerdrake.xml:159
+msgid ""
+"Scanner sharing to hosts: specify which host(s) to add, or allow all remote "
+"machines."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of:
+#. <section><section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata>
+#: en/scannerdrake.xml:164
+msgid "scannerdrake8.png"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/scannerdrake.xml:170
+msgid "\"All remote machines\" are allowed to access the local scanner."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of:
+#. <section><section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata>
+#: en/scannerdrake.xml:175
+msgid "scannerdrake9.png"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/scannerdrake.xml:181
+msgid ""
+"If the package <emphasis>saned</emphasis> is not yet installed, the tool "
+"offers to do it."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/scannerdrake.xml:184
+msgid "At the end, the tool will alter these files:"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/scannerdrake.xml:186
+msgid "<emphasis>/etc/sane.d/saned.conf</emphasis>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/scannerdrake.xml:188
+msgid "<emphasis>/etc/sane.d/net.conf</emphasis>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/scannerdrake.xml:190
+msgid ""
+"<emphasis>/etc/sane.d/dll.conf </emphasis>to add or comment the directive "
+"\"net\""
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/scannerdrake.xml:193
+msgid ""
+"It will also configure <emphasis>saned</emphasis> and "
+"<emphasis>xinetd</emphasis> to be started on boot."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><title>
+#: en/scannerdrake.xml:199 en/system-config-printer.xml:278
+msgid "Specifics"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/scannerdrake.xml:205
+msgid "Hewlett-Packard"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/scannerdrake.xml:207
+msgid ""
+"Most HP scanners are managed from <emphasis>HP Device Manager</emphasis> "
+"(hplip) which also manages printers. In this case, this tool does not allow "
+"you to configure it and invites you to use <emphasis>HP Device "
+"Manager</emphasis>."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/scannerdrake.xml:214
+msgid "Epson"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/scannerdrake.xml:216
+msgid ""
+"Drivers are available from <link "
+"xlink:href=\"http://download.ebz.epson.net/dsc/search/01/search/?OSC=LX\">this"
+" page</link>. When indicated, you must install the <emphasis>iscan-"
+"data</emphasis> package first, then <emphasis>iscan</emphasis> (in this "
+"order). It is possible that the <emphasis>iscan</emphasis> package will "
+"generate a warning about a conflict with <emphasis>sane</emphasis>. Users "
+"have reported that this warning can be ignored."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><info><title>
+#: en/scannerdrake.xml:231
+msgid "Extra installation steps"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/scannerdrake.xml:234
+msgid ""
+"It is possible that after selecting a port for your scanner in the <xref "
+"linkend=\"choosescannerport\"/> screen, you need to take one or more extra "
+"steps to correctly configure your scanner."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/scannerdrake.xml:239
+msgid ""
+"In some cases, you're told the scanner needs its firmware to be uploaded "
+"each time it is started. This tool allows you to load it into the device, "
+"after you installed it on your system. In this screen you can install the "
+"firmware from a CD or a Windows installation, or install the one you "
+"downloaded from an Internet site of the vendor."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/scannerdrake.xml:241
+msgid ""
+"When your device's firmware needs to be loaded, it can take a long time at "
+"each first usage, possibly more than one minute. So be patient."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/scannerdrake.xml:246
+msgid ""
+"Also, you may get a screen telling you to adjust the "
+"<emphasis>/etc/sane.d/\"name_of_your_SANE_backend\".conf file.</emphasis>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/scannerdrake.xml:250
+msgid ""
+"Read those or other instructions you get carefully and if you don't know "
+"what to do, feel free to ask for help in the <link "
+"xlink:href=\"http://forums.mageia.org/en/\">forums</link>."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><title>
+#: en/software-management.xml:5 en/software-management.xml:15
+msgid "Software Management"
+msgstr "Správa softwaru"
+
+#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of:
+#. <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata>
+#: en/software-management.xml:10
+msgid "software-management.png"
+msgstr "software-management.png"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/software-management.xml:14
+msgid ""
+"In this screen you can choose between several tools for software management."
+" Click on a link below to learn more."
+msgstr "Na této obrazovce si můžete vybrat mezi několika nástroji pro správu softwaru. Pokud se chcete dozvědět více klikněte na některý z odkazů níže."
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/software-management.xml:17
+msgid "<xref linkend=\"rpmdrake\"></xref>"
+msgstr "<xref linkend=\"rpmdrake\"></xref>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/software-management.xml:20
+msgid ""
+"<xref linkend=\"MageiaUpdate\"></xref><emphasis> = Update your "
+"system</emphasis>"
+msgstr "<xref linkend=\"MageiaUpdate\"></xref><emphasis> = Aktualizovat váš systém</emphasis>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/software-management.xml:23
+msgid "<xref linkend=\"mgaapplet-config\"></xref>"
+msgstr "<xref linkend=\"mgaapplet-config\"></xref>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/software-management.xml:26
+msgid ""
+"<xref linkend=\"drakrpm-edit-media\"></xref><emphasis> = Configure media "
+"sources for install and update</emphasis>"
+msgstr "<xref linkend=\"drakrpm-edit-media\"></xref><emphasis> = Nastavení zdrojů software pro instalaci a aktualizaci</emphasis>"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><title>
+#: en/system-config-printer.xml:8
+msgid "Install and configure a printer"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle>
+#: en/system-config-printer.xml:11
+msgid "system-config-printer"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of:
+#. <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata>
+#: en/system-config-printer.xml:16
+msgid "system-config-printer.png"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/system-config-printer.xml:23
+msgid ""
+"Printing is managed on Mageia by a server named CUPS. It has its own <link "
+"ns2:title=\"CUPS\" ns2:href=\"http://localhost:631\">configuration "
+"interface</link> which is accessible via an Internet browser, but Mageia "
+"offers its own tool for installing printers called system-config-printer "
+"which is shared with other distributions such as Fedora, Mandriva, Ubuntu "
+"and openSUSE."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/system-config-printer.xml:30
+msgid ""
+"You should enable the non-free repository before proceeding with the "
+"installation, because some drivers may only be available in this way."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><footnote><para>
+#: en/system-config-printer.xml:37
+msgid ""
+"You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis>system-"
+"config-printer</emphasis>. The root password will be asked for."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/system-config-printer.xml:34
+msgid ""
+"Printer installation is carried out in the <guilabel>Hardware</guilabel> "
+"section of the Mageia Control Centre. Select the <guilabel>Configure "
+"printing and scanning</guilabel> tool<placeholder type=\"footnote\" "
+"id=\"0\"/>."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/system-config-printer.xml:42
+msgid "MCC will ask for the installation two packages:"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><blockquote><para>
+#: en/system-config-printer.xml:45
+msgid "task-printing-server"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><blockquote><para>
+#: en/system-config-printer.xml:47
+msgid "task-printing-hp"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/system-config-printer.xml:50
+msgid ""
+"It is necessary to accept this installation to continue. Up to 230MB of "
+"dependencies are needed."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/system-config-printer.xml:53
+msgid ""
+"To add a printer, choose the \"Add\" printer button. The system will try to "
+"detect any printers and the ports available. The screenshot displays a "
+"printer connected to a parallel port. If a printer is detected, such as a "
+"printer on a USB port, it will be displayed on the first line.  The window "
+"will also attempt to configure a network printer."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><title>
+#: en/system-config-printer.xml:61
+msgid "Automatically detected printer"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/system-config-printer.xml:63
+msgid ""
+"This usually refers to USB printers. The utility automatically finds the "
+"name of the printer and displays it. Select the printer and then click "
+"\"Next\". If there is a known driver associated for the printer, it will be "
+"automatically installed. If there is more than one driver or no known "
+"drivers, a window will ask you to select or furnish one, as explained in the"
+" next paragraph. Continue with <xref linkend=\"terminate\"/>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><title>
+#: en/system-config-printer.xml:72
+msgid "No automatically detected printer"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of:
+#. <section><section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata>
+#: en/system-config-printer.xml:76
+msgid "printer3.png"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/system-config-printer.xml:80
+msgid ""
+"When you select a port, the system loads a driver list and displays a window"
+" to select a driver. The choice can be made through one of the following "
+"options."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/system-config-printer.xml:86
+msgid "Select printer from database"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/system-config-printer.xml:92
+msgid "provide PPD file"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/system-config-printer.xml:98
+msgid "search for a driver to download"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/system-config-printer.xml:102
+msgid ""
+"By selecting from the database, the window suggests a printer manufacturer "
+"first, and then a device and a driver associated with it. If more than one "
+"driver is suggested, select one which is recommended, unless you have "
+"encountered some problems with that one before, in this case select the one "
+"which know to work."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><title>
+#: en/system-config-printer.xml:110
+msgid "Complete the installation process"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/system-config-printer.xml:112
+msgid ""
+"After the driver selection, a window requests some information which will "
+"allow the system to designate and discover the printer. The first line is "
+"the name under which the device will appear in applications in the list of "
+"available printers. The installer then suggests printing a test page. After "
+"this step, the printer is added and appears in the list of available "
+"printers."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><title>
+#: en/system-config-printer.xml:121
+msgid "Network printer"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/system-config-printer.xml:123
+msgid ""
+"Network printers are printers that are attached directly to a wired or "
+"wireless network, that are attached to a printserver or that are attached to"
+" another workstation that serves as printserver."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><note><para>
+#: en/system-config-printer.xml:128
+msgid ""
+"Often, it is better to configure the DHCP server to always associate a fixed"
+" IP address with the printer's MAC-address. Of course that should be the "
+"same as the IP address the printer of printserver is set to, if it has a "
+"fixed one."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/system-config-printer.xml:134
+msgid ""
+"The printer's Mac-address is a serial number given to the printer or "
+"printserver or computer it is attached to, that can be obtained from a "
+"configuration page printed by the printer or which may be written on a label"
+" on the printer or printserver. If your shared printer is attached to a "
+"Mageia system, you can run <emphasis><code>ifconfig</code></emphasis> on it "
+"as root to find the MAC-address. It is the sequence of numbers and letters "
+"after \"HWaddr\"."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/system-config-printer.xml:142
+msgid ""
+"You can add your network printer by choosing the protocol it uses to talk to"
+" your computer over the network. If you don't know which protocol to choose,"
+" you can try the <guilabel>Network Printer</guilabel> - <guilabel>Find "
+"Network Printer</guilabel> option in the <guilabel>Devices</guilabel> menu "
+"and give the IP address of the printer in the box on the right, where it "
+"says \"host\"."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/system-config-printer.xml:149
+msgid ""
+"If the tool recognises your printer or printserver, it will propose a "
+"protocol and a queue, but you can choose a more appropriate one from the "
+"list below it or give the correct queue name if it isn't in the list."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/system-config-printer.xml:154
+msgid ""
+"Look in the documentation that came with your printer or printserver to find"
+" which protocol(s) it supports and for possible specific queue names."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><title>
+#: en/system-config-printer.xml:160
+msgid "Network printing protocols"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/system-config-printer.xml:162
+msgid ""
+"One current technique is one developed by Hewlett-Packard and known as "
+"JetDirect. It allows access to a printer directly connected to the network "
+"via an Ethernet port. You must know the IP-address at which the printer is "
+"known on the network. This technique is also used inside some ADSL-routers "
+"which contain an USB port to connect the printer. In this case, the IP-"
+"address is that of the router. Note that the tool \"Hp Device manager\" can "
+"manage dynamically configured IP-adress, setting an URI like "
+"<emphasis>hp:/net/&lt;name-of-the-printer></emphasis> . In this case, fixed "
+"IP-adress is not required."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/system-config-printer.xml:172
+msgid ""
+"Choose the option <guilabel>AppSocket/HP JetDirect</guilabel> as the "
+"protocol and set the address in <guilabel>Host:</guilabel>, do not change "
+"the <guilabel>Port Number</guilabel>, unless you know that it needs to be "
+"changed. After the selection of the protocol, the selection of the driver is"
+" the same as above."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of:
+#. <section><section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata>
+#: en/system-config-printer.xml:180
+msgid "printer5.png"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/system-config-printer.xml:184
+msgid "The other protocols are:"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/system-config-printer.xml:188
+msgid ""
+"<emphasis>Internet Printing Protocol (ipp)</emphasis>: a printer which can "
+"be accessed on a TCP/IP network via the IPP protocol, for example a printer "
+"connected to a station using CUPS. This protocol may also be used also by "
+"some ADSL-routers."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/system-config-printer.xml:197
+msgid ""
+"<emphasis>Internet Printing Protocol (https): </emphasis>the same as ipp, "
+"but using http transport and with TLS secured protocol.  The port has to be "
+"defined. By default, the port 631 is used."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/system-config-printer.xml:205
+msgid ""
+"<emphasis>Internet Printing Protocol (ipps): </emphasis>the same as ipp, but"
+" with TLS secured protocol."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/system-config-printer.xml:212
+msgid ""
+"<emphasis>LPD/LPR host or Printer</emphasis>: a printer which can be "
+"accessed on a TCP/IP network via the LPD protocol, for example a printer "
+"connected to a station using LPD."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/system-config-printer.xml:220
+msgid ""
+"<emphasis>Windows printer via SAMBA</emphasis>: a printer connected to a "
+"station running Windows or a SMB server and shared."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/system-config-printer.xml:226
+msgid ""
+"The URI can also be added directly. Here are some examples on how to form "
+"the URI:"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/system-config-printer.xml:231
+msgid "Appsocket"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/system-config-printer.xml:233
+msgid "<uri>socket://ip-address-or-hostname:port </uri>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/system-config-printer.xml:237
+msgid "Internet Printing Protocol (IPP)"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/system-config-printer.xml:239
+msgid "<uri>ipp://ip-address-or-hostname:port-number/resource</uri>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/system-config-printer.xml:241
+msgid "<uri>http://ip-address-or-hostname:port-number/resource</uri>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/system-config-printer.xml:245
+msgid "Line Printer Daemon (LPD) Protocol"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/system-config-printer.xml:247
+msgid "<uri>lpd://username@ip-address-or-hostname/queue</uri>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/system-config-printer.xml:251
+msgid ""
+"Additional information can be found in the <link "
+"ns2:href=\"http://www.cups.org/documentation.php/doc-1.5/network.html\">CUPS"
+" documentation.</link>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><title>
+#: en/system-config-printer.xml:256
+msgid "Device Properties"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/system-config-printer.xml:258
+msgid ""
+"You can access the properties of the device. The menu allows access to "
+"parameters for the CUPS server. By default a CUPS server is launched on your"
+" system, but you can specify a different one with the "
+"<guimenu>Server</guimenu> | <guimenuitem>Connect...</guimenuitem> menu, "
+"another window which gives access to the tuning of other specific parameters"
+" of the server, following <guimenu>Server</guimenu> | "
+"<guimenuitem>Settings.</guimenuitem>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><title>
+#: en/system-config-printer.xml:268
+msgid "Troubleshoot"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/system-config-printer.xml:270
+msgid ""
+"You can find some information on occurring errors during printing by "
+"inspecting <filename>/var/log/cups/error_log</filename>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/system-config-printer.xml:273
+msgid ""
+"You can also access to a tool to diagnose problems using the "
+"<guimenu>Help</guimenu> | <guilabel>Troubleshoot</guilabel> menu."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/system-config-printer.xml:280
+msgid ""
+"It is possible that some drivers for specific printers are not available in "
+"Mageia or are not functional. In this case, have a look at the <link "
+"ns2:href=\"http://openprinting.org/printers/\">openprinting</link> site to "
+"check if a driver for your device is available. If yes, check if the package"
+" is already present in Mageia and in this case install it manually. Then, "
+"redo the installation process to configure the printer. In all cases, report"
+" the problem in bugzilla or on the forum if you are comfortable with this "
+"tool and furnish the model and driver information and whether the printer "
+"works or not after installation. Here are some sources to find other up-to-"
+"date drivers or for more recent devices."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/system-config-printer.xml:292
+msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">Brother printers</emphasis>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/system-config-printer.xml:294
+msgid ""
+"<link "
+"ns2:href=\"http://welcome.solutions.brother.com/bsc/public_s/id/linux/en/download_prn.html\">This"
+" page</link> give a list of drivers provided by Brother. Search the driver "
+"for your device, download the rpm(s) and install."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/system-config-printer.xml:298
+msgid ""
+"You should install Brother drivers before running the configuration utility."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/system-config-printer.xml:301
+msgid ""
+"<emphasis role=\"bold\">Hewlett-Packard printers and All in one "
+"devices</emphasis>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/system-config-printer.xml:304
+msgid ""
+"These devices use the hplip tool. It is installed automatically after the "
+"detection or the selection of the printer. You can find other information "
+"<link ns2:href=\"http://hplipopensource.com/hplip-"
+"web/index.html\">here</link>.  The tool \"HP Device Manager\" is available "
+"in the <guilabel>System</guilabel> menu. Also view <link "
+"ns2:href=\"http://hplipopensource.com/hplip-"
+"web/install/manual/hp_setup.html\">configuration</link> for the management "
+"of the printer."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/system-config-printer.xml:311
+msgid ""
+"A HP All in one device must be installed as a printer and the scanner "
+"features will be added. Note that sometimes, the Xsane interface doesn't "
+"allow to scan films or slides (the lighting slid can't operate).  In this "
+"case, it is possible to scan, using the standalone mode, and save the "
+"picture on a memory card or USB stick inserted in the device.  Afterwards, "
+"open your favourite imaging software and load your picture from the memory "
+"card which is appeared in the /media folder."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/system-config-printer.xml:319
+msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">Samsung colour printer</emphasis>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/system-config-printer.xml:321
+msgid ""
+"For specific Samsung and Xerox colour printers, <link "
+"ns2:href=\"http://foo2qpdl.rkkda.com/\">this site provides drivers</link> "
+"for the QPDL protocol."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/system-config-printer.xml:324
+msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">Epson printers and scanners</emphasis>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/system-config-printer.xml:326
+msgid ""
+"Drivers for Epson printers are available from <link "
+"ns2:href=\"http://download.ebz.epson.net/dsc/search/01/search/?OSC=LX\">this"
+" search page</link>. For the scanner part, you must install the \"iscan-"
+"data\" package first, then \"iscan\" (in this order). A iscan-plugin package"
+" can also be available and is to install. Choose the "
+"<emphasis>rpm</emphasis> packages according to your architecture."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/system-config-printer.xml:332
+msgid ""
+"It is possible that the iscan package will generate a warning about a "
+"conflict with sane. Users have reported that this warning can be ignored."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/system-config-printer.xml:336
+msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">Canon printers</emphasis>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><section><para>
+#: en/system-config-printer.xml:338
+msgid ""
+"For Canon printers, it may be advisable to install a tool named turboprint "
+"<link ns2:href=\"http://www.turboprint.info/\">available here </link>."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><title>
+#: en/transfugdrake.xml:9
+msgid "Import Windows(TM) documents and settings"
+msgstr "Importovat dokumenty a nastavení z MS Windows"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle>
+#: en/transfugdrake.xml:12
+msgid "transfugdrake"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of:
+#. <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata>
+#: en/transfugdrake.xml:17
+msgid "transfugdrake.png"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para><footnote><para>
+#: en/transfugdrake.xml:22
+msgid ""
+"You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis "
+"role=\"bold\">transfugdrake</emphasis> as root."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/transfugdrake.xml:21
+msgid ""
+"This tool<placeholder type=\"footnote\" id=\"0\"/> is found under the "
+"<emphasis role=\"bold\">System</emphasis> tab in the Mageia Control Center "
+"labelled <guilabel>Import Windows(TM) documents and settings</guilabel>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/transfugdrake.xml:27
+msgid ""
+"The tool allows an administrator to import the user documents and settings "
+"from a <trademark class=\"registered\">Windows</trademark> 2000, <trademark "
+"class=\"registered\">Windows</trademark> XP or <trademark "
+"class=\"registered\">Windows</trademark> <trademark>Vista</trademark> "
+"installation on the same computer as the Mageia installation."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><warning><para>
+#: en/transfugdrake.xml:33
+msgid ""
+"Please note that all the changes will be applied by transfugdrake "
+"immediately after pressing <guibutton>Next</guibutton>."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/transfugdrake.xml:37
+msgid ""
+"After starting transfugdrake you will see the first wizard page with some "
+"explanation about the tool and import options."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/transfugdrake.xml:40
+msgid ""
+"As soon as you read and understand the instructions, press the "
+"<guibutton>Next</guibutton> button. This should run a detection of "
+"<trademark class=\"registered\">Windows</trademark> installation."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/transfugdrake.xml:44
+msgid ""
+"When the detection step is complete you will see a page which allows you to "
+"choose accounts in <trademark class=\"registered\">Windows</trademark> and "
+"Mageia for the import procedure. It is possible to choose other user account"
+" than yours own."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of:
+#. <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata>
+#: en/transfugdrake.xml:51
+msgid "transfugdrake1.png"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><note><para>
+#: en/transfugdrake.xml:56
+msgid ""
+"Please take into account that due to migrate-assistant (the backend of "
+"transfugdrake) limitations <trademark "
+"class=\"registered\">Windows</trademark> user account names with special "
+"symbols can be displayed incorrectly."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><note><para>
+#: en/transfugdrake.xml:62
+msgid ""
+"Migration may take some time depending on the size of the document folders."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><warning><para>
+#: en/transfugdrake.xml:67
+msgid ""
+"Some <trademark class=\"registered\">Windows</trademark> applications "
+"(especially drivers) may create user accounts for different purposes. For "
+"example, NVidia drivers in <trademark "
+"class=\"registered\">Windows</trademark>are updated using "
+"<emphasis>UpdatusUser</emphasis>. Please do not use such accounts for the "
+"import purposes."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/transfugdrake.xml:74
+msgid ""
+"When you finished with the accounts selection press "
+"<guibutton>Next</guibutton> button. The next page is used to select a method"
+" to import documents:"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of:
+#. <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata>
+#: en/transfugdrake.xml:80
+msgid "transfugdrake2.png"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/transfugdrake.xml:84
+msgid ""
+"Transfugdrake is designed to import <trademark "
+"class=\"registered\">Windows</trademark> data from <emphasis>My "
+"Documents</emphasis>, <emphasis>My Music</emphasis> and <emphasis>My "
+"Pictures</emphasis> folders. It is possible to skip import by selecting the "
+"appropriate item in this window."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/transfugdrake.xml:89
+msgid ""
+"When you finished with the document import method choosing press "
+"<guibutton>Next</guibutton> button. The next page is used to select a method"
+" to import bookmarks:"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of:
+#. <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata>
+#: en/transfugdrake.xml:95
+msgid "transfugdrake3.png"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/transfugdrake.xml:99
+msgid ""
+"Transfugdrake can import <emphasis>Internet Explorer</emphasis> and "
+"<emphasis>Mozilla Firefox</emphasis> bookmarks into the bookmarks of Mageia "
+"<emphasis>Mozilla Firefox</emphasis> instance."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/transfugdrake.xml:103
+msgid ""
+"Choose the preferred import option and press the <guibutton>Next</guibutton>"
+" button."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/transfugdrake.xml:112
+msgid "The next page allows you to import desktop background:"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of:
+#. <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata>
+#: en/transfugdrake.xml:116
+msgid "transfugdrake4.png"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/transfugdrake.xml:120
+msgid ""
+"Choose the preferred option and press the <guibutton>Next</guibutton> "
+"button."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/transfugdrake.xml:123
+msgid ""
+"The last page of wizard shows some congratulation message. Just press the "
+"<guibutton>Finish</guibutton> button."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of:
+#. <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata>
+#: en/transfugdrake.xml:128
+msgid "transfugdrake5.png"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><title>
+#: en/userdrake.xml:11
+msgid "Users and Groups"
+msgstr "Uživatelé a skupiny"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle>
+#: en/userdrake.xml:13
+msgid "userdrake"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of:
+#. <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata>
+#: en/userdrake.xml:18
+msgid "userdrake.png"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para><footnote><para>
+#: en/userdrake.xml:23
+msgid ""
+"You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis "
+"role=\"bold\">userdrake</emphasis> as root."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/userdrake.xml:22
+msgid ""
+"This tool<placeholder type=\"footnote\" id=\"0\"/> is found under the "
+"<emphasis role=\"bold\">System</emphasis> tab in the Mageia Control Center "
+"labelled \"Manage users on system\""
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/userdrake.xml:27
+msgid ""
+"The tool allows an administrator to manage the users and the groups, this "
+"means to add or delete a user or group and to modify user and group settings"
+" (ID, shell, ...)"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/userdrake.xml:31
+msgid ""
+"When userdrake is opened, all the users existing on the system are listed in"
+" the <guibutton>Users</guibutton> tab, and all the groups in the "
+"<guibutton>Groups</guibutton> tab. Both tabs operate the same way."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/userdrake.xml:35
+msgid "<guibutton>1 Add User</guibutton>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/userdrake.xml:37
+msgid "This button opens a new window with all fields shown empty:"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of:
+#. <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata>
+#: en/userdrake.xml:41
+msgid "userdrake1.png"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/userdrake.xml:45
+msgid ""
+"The field <emphasis role=\"bold\">Full Name</emphasis> is intended for the "
+"entry of a family name and first name, but it is possible to write anything "
+"or nothing as well!"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/userdrake.xml:49
+msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">Login</emphasis> is the only required field."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/userdrake.xml:52
+msgid ""
+"Setting a <emphasis role=\"bold\">Password</emphasis> is highly recommended."
+" There is a little shield on the right, if it is red, the password is weak, "
+"too short or is too similar to the login name. You should use figures, lower"
+" and upper case characters, punctuation marks, etc. The shield will turn "
+"orange and then green as the password strength improves."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/userdrake.xml:59
+msgid ""
+"<emphasis role=\"bold\">Confirm Password</emphasis> field is there to ensure"
+" you entered what you intended to."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/userdrake.xml:62
+msgid ""
+"<emphasis role=\"bold\">Login Shell </emphasis>is a drop down list that "
+"allows you to change the shell used by the user you are adding, the options "
+"are Bash, Dash and Sh."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/userdrake.xml:66
+msgid ""
+"<emphasis role=\"bold\">Create a private group for the user</emphasis>, if "
+"checked will automatically create a group with the same name and the new "
+"user as the only member (this may be edited)."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/userdrake.xml:70
+msgid ""
+"The other options should be obvious. The new user is created immediately "
+"after you click on <guibutton>OK</guibutton>."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/userdrake.xml:73
+msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">2 Add Group</emphasis>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/userdrake.xml:75
+msgid ""
+"You only need to enter the new group name, and if required, the specific "
+"group ID."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/userdrake.xml:78
+msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">3 Edit</emphasis> (a selected user)"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/userdrake.xml:80
+msgid ""
+"<guibutton>User Data</guibutton>: Allows you to modify all the data given "
+"for the user at creation (the ID can't be changed)."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/userdrake.xml:83
+msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">Account Info</emphasis>:"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of:
+#. <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata>
+#: en/userdrake.xml:87
+msgid "userdrake2.png"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/userdrake.xml:91
+msgid ""
+"The first option is for setting an expiration date for the account.  "
+"Connection is impossible after this date. This is useful for temporary "
+"accounts."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/userdrake.xml:95
+msgid ""
+"The second option is to lock the account, connection is impossible as long "
+"as the account is locked."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/userdrake.xml:98
+msgid "It is also possible to change the icon."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/userdrake.xml:100
+msgid ""
+"<emphasis role=\"bold\">Password Info</emphasis>: Allows you to set an "
+"expiration date for the password, this forces the user to change his "
+"password periodically."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of:
+#. <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata>
+#: en/userdrake.xml:106
+msgid "userdrake3.png"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/userdrake.xml:110
+msgid ""
+"<emphasis role=\"bold\">Group</emphasis>: Here you can select the groups "
+"that the user is a member of."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><note><para>
+#: en/userdrake.xml:114
+msgid ""
+"If you are modifying a connected user account, modifications will not be "
+"effective until his/her next login."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/userdrake.xml:118
+msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">4 Edit</emphasis> (with a group selected)"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/userdrake.xml:120
+msgid ""
+"<emphasis role=\"bold\">Group Data</emphasis>: Allows you to modify the "
+"group name."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/userdrake.xml:123
+msgid ""
+"<emphasis role=\"bold\">Group Users</emphasis>: Here you can select the "
+"users who are members of the group"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/userdrake.xml:126
+msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">5 Delete</emphasis>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/userdrake.xml:128
+msgid ""
+"Select a user or a group and click on <emphasis "
+"role=\"bold\">Delete</emphasis> to remove it. For a user, a window appears "
+"to ask if home directory and mailbox must also be deleted. If a private "
+"group has been created for the user, it will be deleted as well."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><warning><para>
+#: en/userdrake.xml:133
+msgid "It is possible to delete a group which is not empty."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/userdrake.xml:136
+msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">6 Refresh</emphasis>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/userdrake.xml:138
+msgid ""
+"The User database can be changed outside of Userdrake. Click on this icon to"
+" refresh the display."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/userdrake.xml:141
+msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">7 Guest Account</emphasis>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/userdrake.xml:143
+msgid ""
+"<emphasis role=\"bold\">guest</emphasis> is a special account. It is "
+"intended to give somebody temporary access to the system with total "
+"security. Login is xguest, there is no password, and it is impossible to "
+"make modifications to the system from this account. The personal directories"
+" are deleted at the end of the session. This account is enabled by default, "
+"to disable it, click in the menu on<guimenu> Actions -> Uninstall guest "
+"account</guimenu>."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><title>
+#: en/XFdrake.xml:3
+msgid "Set up the graphical server"
+msgstr "Nastavit grafický server"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle>
+#: en/XFdrake.xml:5
+msgid "XFdrake"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of:
+#. <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata>
+#: en/XFdrake.xml:10
+msgid "XFdrake.png"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para><footnote><para>
+#: en/XFdrake.xml:17
+msgid ""
+"You can start this tool from the command line, by typing "
+"<emphasis>XFdrake</emphasis> as normal user or <emphasis>drakx11</emphasis> "
+"as root. Mind the capital letters."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/XFdrake.xml:14
+msgid ""
+"This tool is present in the Mageia Control Center under the tab <emphasis "
+"role=\"bold\">Hardware</emphasis>. Select <emphasis><guilabel>Set up the "
+"graphical server</guilabel></emphasis>.  <placeholder type=\"footnote\" "
+"id=\"0\"/>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/XFdrake.xml:23
+msgid "The buttons allow you to change the graphical configuration."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/XFdrake.xml:25
+msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">Graphic card</emphasis>:"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/XFdrake.xml:27
+msgid ""
+"The graphic card currently detected is displayed and the matching server "
+"configured. Click on this button to change to another server, for example "
+"one with a proprietary driver."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/XFdrake.xml:31
+msgid ""
+"The available servers are sorted under <guilabel>Vendor</guilabel> by "
+"manufacturer in alphabetical order and then by model also in alphabetical "
+"order. The free drivers are sorted by alphabetical order under<guilabel> "
+"Xorg</guilabel>."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para><note><para>
+#: en/XFdrake.xml:37
+msgid ""
+"In case of problems, <emphasis>Xorg - Vesa</emphasis> will work with most "
+"graphic cards and give you time to find and install the right driver while "
+"in your Desktop Environment."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para><note><para>
+#: en/XFdrake.xml:38
+msgid ""
+"If even Vesa doesn't work, choose <emphasis><guilabel>Xorg</guilabel> - "
+"<guilabel>fbdev</guilabel></emphasis>, which is used while installing "
+"Mageia, but doesn't allow you to change resolution or refresh rates."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/XFdrake.xml:39
+msgid ""
+"If you made your choice for a free driver, you may be asked if you want to "
+"use a proprietary driver instead with more features (3D effects for "
+"example)."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/XFdrake.xml:45
+msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">Monitor:</emphasis>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/XFdrake.xml:47
+msgid ""
+"In the same way as above, the monitor currently detected is displayed and "
+"you can click on the button to change to another one. If the desired monitor"
+" isn't in the <guilabel>Vendor</guilabel> list, choose in the "
+"<guilabel>Generic</guilabel> list a monitor with the same features."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/XFdrake.xml:54
+msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">Resolution:</emphasis>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/XFdrake.xml:56
+msgid ""
+"This button allows the choice of the resolution (number of pixels) and the "
+"colour depth (number of colours). It displays this screen:"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of:
+#. <section><para><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata>
+#: en/XFdrake.xml:61
+msgid "XFdrake1.png"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/XFdrake.xml:59
+msgid ""
+"<placeholder type=\"mediaobject\" id=\"0\"/>The image of the monitor in the "
+"middle gives a preview with the chosen configuration."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/XFdrake.xml:66
+msgid ""
+"The first button shows the currently resolution, click to change for another"
+" one. The list gives all the possible choices according to the graphic card "
+"and the monitor, it is possible to click on <guilabel>Other</guilabel> to "
+"set other resolutions, but bear in mind that you can damage your monitor or "
+"select an uncomfortable setting."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/XFdrake.xml:72
+msgid ""
+"The second button shows the currently colour depth, click to change this for"
+" another one."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para><note><para>
+#: en/XFdrake.xml:76
+msgid ""
+"Depending on the chosen resolution, it may be necessary to logout and "
+"restart the graphical environment for the settings to take effect."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/XFdrake.xml:83
+msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">Test:</emphasis>"
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/XFdrake.xml:85
+msgid ""
+"Once the configuration done, it is recommended to do a test before clicking "
+"on OK because it is easier to modify the settings now than later if the "
+"graphical environment doesn't work."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para><note><para>
+#: en/XFdrake.xml:90
+msgid ""
+"In case of a non working graphical environment, type Alt+Ctrl+F2 to open a "
+"text environment, connect as root and type XFdrake (with the caps) to to use"
+" XFdrake's text version."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/XFdrake.xml:93
+msgid ""
+"If the test fails, just wait until the end, if it works but you don't want "
+"to change after all, click on <guibutton>No</guibutton>, if everything is "
+"right, click on <guibutton role=\"bold\">OK</guibutton>."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><title>
+#: en/XFdrake.xml:97
+msgid "Options:"
+msgstr "Volby:"
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/XFdrake.xml:99
+msgid ""
+"<guilabel>Global options</guilabel>: If <emphasis>Disable Ctrl-Alt-"
+"Backspace</emphasis> is checked, it will no longer be possible to restart X "
+"server using Ctrl+Alt+Backspace keys."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/XFdrake.xml:103
+msgid ""
+"<guilabel>Graphic card options</guilabel>: Allows you to enable or disable "
+"three specific features depending on the graphic card."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><para>
+#: en/XFdrake.xml:107
+msgid ""
+"<guilabel>Graphical interface at startup</guilabel>: Most of the time, "
+"<emphasis>Automatically start the graphical interface (Xorg) upon "
+"booting</emphasis> is checked to make the boot switch to graphical mode, it "
+"may be unchecked for a server."
+msgstr ""
+
+#. type: Content of: <section><para>
+#: en/XFdrake.xml:112
+msgid ""
+"After a click on the <guibutton>Quit</guibutton> button, the system will ask"
+" you to confirm.  There is still time to cancel everything and keep the "
+"previous configuration, or to accept. In this case, you have to disconnect "
+"and reconnect to activate the new configuration."
+msgstr ""
diff --git a/docs/mcc-help/cs/MCC.xml b/docs/mcc-help/cs/MCC.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..7a57c165
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/mcc-help/cs/MCC.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,46 @@
+<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?><!-- Converted by db4-upgrade version 1.0 -->
+<article xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:xi="http://www.w3.org/2001/XInclude" xmlns:ns6="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:lang="cs" xml:id="MCC">
+
+  <info>
+    <title>Ovládací centrum Mageia</title>
+    <cover>
+	    <para xml:id="CC_BY-SA">The texts and screenshots in this manual are available under the CC BY-SA
+3.0 license <link
+ns6:href="http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-sa/3.0/">http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-sa/3.0/</link>.
+	    </para>
+	    <para>This manual was produced with the help of the <link
+ns6:href="http://www.calenco.com">Calenco CMS</link> developed by <link
+ns6:href="http://www.neodoc.biz">NeoDoc</link>.
+	    </para>
+            <para>It was written by volunteers in their free time. Please contact <link
+ns6:href="https://wiki.mageia.org/en/Documentation_team">Documentation
+Team</link>, if you would like to help improve this manual.</para>
+    </cover>
+  </info>
+
+  
+<xi:include href="mcc-intro.xml"></xi:include>
+
+<xi:include href="software-management.xml"></xi:include>
+
+<xi:include href="mcc-sharing.xml"></xi:include>
+
+<xi:include href="mcc-networkservices.xml"></xi:include>
+
+<xi:include href="mcc-hardware.xml"></xi:include>
+
+<xi:include href="mcc-network.xml"></xi:include>
+
+<xi:include href="mcc-system.xml"></xi:include>
+
+<xi:include href="mcc-networksharing.xml"></xi:include>
+
+<xi:include href="mcc-localdisks.xml"></xi:include>
+
+<xi:include href="mcc-security.xml"></xi:include>
+
+<xi:include href="mcc-boot.xml"></xi:include>
+
+<xi:include href="otherMageiaTools.xml"></xi:include>
+
+</article>
diff --git a/docs/mcc-help/cs/MageiaUpdate.xml b/docs/mcc-help/cs/MageiaUpdate.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..2cb02af9
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/mcc-help/cs/MageiaUpdate.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,47 @@
+<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:lang="cs" xml:id="MageiaUpdate">
+  <info>
+    <title xml:id="MageiaUpdate-ti1">Aktualizace balíčků softwaru</title>
+
+    <subtitle>MageiaUpdate or drakrpm-update</subtitle>
+  </info>
+
+  <mediaobject>
+    <imageobject>
+      <imagedata  revision="1" xml:id="MageiaUpdate-im1" align="center" fileref="MageiaUpdate.png" format="PNG" />
+    </imageobject>
+  </mediaobject>
+
+  <para>This tool<footnote><para>You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis
+role="bold">MageiaUpdate</emphasis> or <emphasis
+role="bold">drakrpm-update</emphasis> as root.</para></footnote> is present in the Mageia
+Control Center under the tab <emphasis role="bold">Software
+management.</emphasis></para>
+
+  <para><note>
+      <para>To work, MageiaUpdate needs the repositories to be configured with
+rpmdrake-edit-media with some media checked as updates. If they are not, you
+are prompted to do so.</para>
+    </note></para>
+
+  <para>As soon as this tool is launched, it scans the installed packages and lists
+those with an update available in the repositories. They are all selected by
+default to be automatically downloaded and installed. Click on the
+<guibutton>Update</guibutton> button to start the process. </para>
+
+  <para>By clicking on a package, more information is displayed in the lower half of
+the window. The print<emphasis role="bold"> ></emphasis> before a title
+means you can click to drop down a text. </para>
+
+  <para><note>
+      <para>When updates are available, an applet in the system tray warns you by
+displaying this red icon <inlinemediaobject>
+          <imageobject>
+            <imagedata fileref="MageiaUpdate1.png"/>
+          </imageobject>
+        </inlinemediaobject>
+. Just click and enter the user password to update the system alike. </para>
+    </note></para>
+
+  <para/>
+
+</section>
+\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/docs/mcc-help/cs/XFdrake.xml b/docs/mcc-help/cs/XFdrake.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..d2098733
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/mcc-help/cs/XFdrake.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,127 @@
+<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xml:id="XFdrake" version="5.0" xml:lang="cs">
+  <info>
+    <title xml:id="XFdrake-ti1">Nastavit grafický server</title>
+
+    <subtitle>XFdrake</subtitle>
+  </info>
+
+  <mediaobject>
+    <imageobject>
+      <imagedata  xml:id="XFdrake-im1" revision="1" align="center" format="PNG" fileref="XFdrake.png" />
+    </imageobject>
+  </mediaobject>
+
+  <para>This tool is present in the Mageia Control Center under the tab <emphasis
+role="bold">Hardware</emphasis>. Select <emphasis><guilabel>Set up the
+graphical server</guilabel></emphasis>.  <footnote>
+        <para>You can start this tool from the command line, by typing
+<emphasis>XFdrake</emphasis> as normal user or <emphasis>drakx11</emphasis>
+as root. Mind the capital letters.</para>
+      </footnote></para>
+
+  <para/>
+
+  <para>The buttons allow you to change the graphical configuration.</para>
+
+  <para><emphasis role="bold">Graphic card</emphasis>:</para>
+
+  <para>The graphic card currently detected is displayed and the matching server
+configured. Click on this button to change to another server, for example
+one with a proprietary driver.</para>
+
+  <para>The available servers are sorted under <guilabel>Vendor</guilabel> by
+manufacturer in alphabetical order and then by model also in alphabetical
+order. The free drivers are sorted by alphabetical order under<guilabel>
+Xorg</guilabel>.</para>
+
+  <para><note>
+      <para>In case of problems, <emphasis>Xorg - Vesa</emphasis> will work with most
+graphic cards and give you time to find and install the right driver while
+in your Desktop Environment.</para>
+<para> If even Vesa doesn't work, choose <emphasis><guilabel>Xorg</guilabel> -
+<guilabel>fbdev</guilabel></emphasis>, which is used while installing
+Mageia, but doesn't allow you to change resolution or refresh rates.</para>
+    </note>If you made your choice for a free driver, you may be asked if you want to
+use a proprietary driver instead with more features (3D effects for
+example).</para>
+
+  <para/>
+
+  <para><emphasis role="bold">Monitor:</emphasis></para>
+
+  <para>In the same way as above, the monitor currently detected is displayed and
+you can click on the button to change to another one. If the desired monitor
+isn't in the <guilabel>Vendor</guilabel> list, choose in the
+<guilabel>Generic</guilabel> list a monitor with the same features.</para>
+
+  <para/>
+
+  <para><emphasis role="bold">Resolution:</emphasis></para>
+
+  <para>This button allows the choice of the resolution (number of pixels) and the
+colour depth (number of colours). It displays this screen:</para>
+
+  <para><mediaobject>
+      <imageobject>
+        <imagedata fileref="XFdrake1.png" />
+      </imageobject>
+    </mediaobject>The image of the monitor in the
+middle gives a preview with the chosen configuration. </para>
+
+  <para>The first button shows the currently resolution, click to change for another
+one. The list gives all the possible choices according to the graphic card
+and the monitor, it is possible to click on <guilabel>Other</guilabel> to
+set other resolutions, but bear in mind that you can damage your monitor or
+select an uncomfortable setting.</para>
+
+  <para>The second button shows the currently colour depth, click to change this for
+another one.</para>
+
+  <para><note>
+      <para>Depending on the chosen resolution, it may be necessary to logout and
+restart the graphical environment for the settings to take effect.
+      </para>
+    </note></para>
+
+  <para/>
+
+  <para><emphasis role="bold">Test:</emphasis></para>
+
+  <para>Once the configuration done, it is recommended to do a test before clicking
+on OK because it is easier to modify the settings now than later if the
+graphical environment doesn't work.</para>
+
+  <para><note>
+      <para>In case of a non working graphical environment, type Alt+Ctrl+F2 to open a
+text environment, connect as root and type XFdrake (with the caps) to to use
+XFdrake's text version. </para>
+    </note>If the test fails, just wait until the end, if it works but you don't want
+to change after all, click on <guibutton>No</guibutton>, if everything is
+right, click on <guibutton role="bold">OK</guibutton>.</para>
+
+<orderedlist><title>Volby:</title>
+	<listitem>
+   <para><guilabel>Global options</guilabel>: If <emphasis>Disable
+Ctrl-Alt-Backspace</emphasis> is checked, it will no longer be possible to
+restart X server using Ctrl+Alt+Backspace keys.</para>
+   </listitem>
+   <listitem>
+  <para><guilabel>Graphic card options</guilabel>: Allows you to enable or disable
+three specific features depending on the graphic card.</para>
+</listitem>
+<listitem>
+  <para><guilabel>Graphical interface at startup</guilabel>: Most of the time,
+<emphasis>Automatically start the graphical interface (Xorg) upon
+booting</emphasis> is checked to make the boot switch to graphical mode, it
+may be unchecked for a server.</para>
+  </listitem>
+  </orderedlist>
+
+
+  <para>After a click on the <guibutton>Quit</guibutton> button, the system will ask
+you to confirm.  There is still time to cancel everything and keep the
+previous configuration, or to accept. In this case, you have to disconnect
+and reconnect to activate the new configuration.</para>
+
+  
+</section>
diff --git a/docs/mcc-help/cs/diskdrake--dav.xml b/docs/mcc-help/cs/diskdrake--dav.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..90132180
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/mcc-help/cs/diskdrake--dav.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,80 @@
+<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?>
+<section version="5.0" xml:lang="cs" xml:id="diskdrake--dav"
+         xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook"
+         xmlns:xlink="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink"
+         xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML"
+         xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg"
+         xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml"
+         xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink"
+         xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook">
+  <info>
+    <title xml:id="diskdrake--dav-ti1">Přístup k diskům a adresářům sdíleným pomocí WebDAV</title>
+
+    <subtitle>diskdrake --dav</subtitle>
+  </info>
+
+  <mediaobject>
+    <imageobject>
+      <imagedata align="center" fileref="diskdrake--dav1.png" format="PNG"
+                 revision="1" xml:id="diskdrake--dav-im1"/>
+    </imageobject>
+  </mediaobject>
+
+  <para>Tento nástroj<footnote><para>Tento nástroj můžete spustit z příkazového řádku zadáním <emphasis
+role="bold">diskdrake --dav</emphasis> jako superuživatel.</para>
+  </footnote> se nachází v ovládacím
+středisku Mageia v kartě pro Sdílení v síti označené <guilabel>Nastavit
+sdílení pomocí WebDAV</guilabel>.</para>
+
+  <section>
+    <title>Úvod</title>
+
+ <para><link xlink:href="http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/WebDAV">WebDAV</link> je
+protokol, který umožňuje připojit adresář webového serveru, tak že vypadá
+jako adrsář lokální. Je nezbytné, aby na vzdáleném stroji byl spuštěn WebDAV
+server. Účelem tohoto nástroje není konfiguraci serveru WebDAV.</para>
+  </section>
+
+  <section>
+    <title>Vytvoření nového záznamu</title>
+
+    <para>The first screen of the tool displays the already configured entries, if
+any, and a <guibutton>New</guibutton> button. Use it to create a new
+entry. Insert the server URL in the field of the new screen.</para>
+
+    <para>Then you get a screen with radio buttons to select some actions.  Continue
+with the action <guibutton>Mount point</guibutton> by clicking
+<guibutton>OK</guibutton> after selecting the radio button, as the
+<guibutton>Server</guibutton> is already configured. You can however correct
+it, if needed.</para>
+
+    <mediaobject>
+        <imageobject>
+          <imagedata fileref="diskdrake--dav3.png"/>
+        </imageobject>
+      </mediaobject>
+
+    <para>The content of the remote directory will be accessible through this mount
+point.</para>
+
+    <para>In the next step, give your user name and password. If you need some other
+options, you can give them in the <guibutton>advanced</guibutton> screen.</para>
+
+    <mediaobject>
+        <imageobject>
+          <imagedata fileref="diskdrake--dav4.png"/>
+        </imageobject>
+      </mediaobject>
+
+    <para>The option <guibutton>Mount</guibutton> allows you to mount immediately the
+access.</para>
+
+    <para>After you accepted the configuration with the radio button
+<guibutton>Done</guibutton>, the first screen is displayed again and your
+new mount point is listed. After you choose <guibutton>Quit</guibutton>, you
+are asked whether or not to save the modifications in
+<emphasis>/etc/fstab</emphasis>. Choose this option if you want that the
+remote directory is available at each boot. If your configuration is for
+one-time usage, do not save it.</para>
+  </section>
+</section>
diff --git a/docs/mcc-help/cs/diskdrake--fileshare.xml b/docs/mcc-help/cs/diskdrake--fileshare.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..7c8bacd7
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/mcc-help/cs/diskdrake--fileshare.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,58 @@
+<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:lang="cs" xml:id="diskdrake--fileshare">
+  <info>
+    <title xml:id="diskdrake--fileshare-ti1">Sdílet diskové oddíly tohoto počítače</title>
+
+    <subtitle>diskdrake --fileshare</subtitle>
+  </info>
+
+  <mediaobject>
+    <imageobject>
+      <imagedata  fileref="diskdrake--fileshare.png" revision="1" xml:id="diskdrake--fileshare-im1" align="center" format="PNG" />
+    </imageobject>
+  </mediaobject>
+
+  <para>This simple tool<footnote><para>You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis
+role="bold">diskdrake --fileshare</emphasis> as root.</para></footnote> allows you, the
+administrator, to allow users to share parts of their own /home
+subdirectories with other users of a same local network which may have
+computers running either Linux or Windows operating system.</para>
+
+  <para>It is found in the Mageia Control Center, under the Local Disk tab, labelled
+"Share your hard disk partitions".</para>
+
+  <para>First, answer the question : "<guilabel>Would you like to allow users to
+share some of their directories ?</guilabel>", click on <guibutton>No
+sharing</guibutton> if the answer is no for all users, click on
+<guibutton>Allow all users</guibutton> for all users and click on
+<guibutton>Custom</guibutton> if the answer is no for some users and yes for
+the others. In this last case, the users that are authorised to share their
+directories must belong to the fileshare group, which is automatically
+created by the system. You will be asked about this later.</para>
+
+  <para>Click on <guilabel>OK</guilabel>, a second screen appears which asks you
+choose between <guibutton>NFS</guibutton> or <guibutton>SMB</guibutton>.
+Check <guibutton>NFS</guibutton> if Linux is the only operating system on
+the network, check <guibutton>SMB</guibutton> if the network includes both
+Linux and Windows machines and then click on <guibutton>OK</guibutton>. Any
+required packages will be installed if necessary.</para>
+
+  <para>The configuration is now complete unless the Custom option was chosen.  In
+this case, an extra screen prompts you to open Userdrake. This tool allows
+you to add users authorised to share their directories to the fileshare
+group. In the User tab, click on the user to add to the fileshare group,
+then on <guimenuitem>Edit</guimenuitem>, In the Groups tab. Check the
+fileshare group and click on <guibutton>OK</guibutton>. For more information
+about Userdrake, see <link ns2:href="userdrake.xml">this page</link></para>
+
+  <para/>
+
+  <note>
+    <para>When adding a new user to the fileshare group, you have to disconnect and
+reconnect the network for the modifications to be taken into account.</para>
+  </note>
+
+  <para>From now on each user belonging to the fileshare group can select in his/her
+file manager the directories to be shared, although not all file managers
+have this facility.</para>
+
+</section>
+\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/docs/mcc-help/cs/diskdrake--nfs.xml b/docs/mcc-help/cs/diskdrake--nfs.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..a10beecc
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/mcc-help/cs/diskdrake--nfs.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,88 @@
+<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:lang="cs" xml:id="diskdrake--nfs">
+  <info>
+    <title xml:id="diskdrake--nfs-ti1">Nastavit přístup k diskům a adresářům sdíleným pomocí NFS</title>
+
+    <subtitle>diskdrake --nfs</subtitle>
+  </info>
+
+  <mediaobject>
+    <imageobject>
+      <imagedata revision="2" xml:id="diskdrake--nfs-im1" align="center" fileref="diskdrake--nfs.png" format="PNG"/>
+    </imageobject>
+  </mediaobject>
+
+  <para/>
+
+  <para>.</para>
+
+  <para/>
+
+  <section>
+    <title>Úvod</title>
+
+    <para>This tool<footnote>
+        <para>You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis
+role="bold">diskdrake --nfs</emphasis> as root.</para>
+      </footnote> allows you to declare some
+shared directories to be accessible to all users on the machine. The
+protocol used for this is NFS which is available on most Linux or Unix
+systems. The shared directory will be thus available directly at
+boot. Shared directories can be also accessible directly in a single session
+for a user with tools such as file browsers.</para>
+  </section>
+
+  <section>
+    <title>Procedure</title>
+
+    <para>Select <guibutton>search servers</guibutton> to obtain a list of servers
+which share directories.</para>
+
+    <para>Click on the > symbol before the server name to display the list of the
+shared directories and select the directory you want to access.</para>
+
+    <mediaobject ns2:href="diskdrake--nfs2.png">
+      <imageobject>
+        <imagedata fileref="diskdrake--nfs2.png"/>
+      </imageobject>
+    </mediaobject>
+
+    <para>The button <guibutton>Mount point</guibutton> will be available and you have
+to specify where to mount the directory.</para>
+
+    <mediaobject ns2:href="diskdrake--nfs3.png">
+      <imageobject>
+        <imagedata fileref="diskdrake--nfs3.png"/>
+      </imageobject>
+    </mediaobject>
+
+    <para>After choosing the mount point, You can mount it. You can also verify and
+change some options with the <guibutton>Options</guibutton> button. After
+mounting the directory, you can unmount it with the same button.</para>
+
+    <mediaobject>
+      <imageobject>
+        <imagedata fileref="diskdrake--nfs4.png"/>
+      </imageobject>
+    </mediaobject>
+
+    <mediaobject>
+      <imageobject>
+        <imagedata fileref="diskdrake--nfs5.png"/>
+      </imageobject>
+    </mediaobject>
+
+    <para>On accepting the configuration with the <guibutton>Done</guibutton> button,
+a message will displayed, asking "Do you want to save the /etc/fstab
+modifications". This will make the directory available at each boot, if the
+network is accessible. The new directory is then available in your file
+browser, for example in Dolphin.</para>
+
+    <mediaobject>
+      <imageobject>
+        <imagedata fileref="diskdrake--nfs6.png"/>
+      </imageobject>
+    </mediaobject>
+
+    <para/>
+  </section>
+</section>
+\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/docs/mcc-help/cs/diskdrake--removable.xml b/docs/mcc-help/cs/diskdrake--removable.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..97d840b3
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/mcc-help/cs/diskdrake--removable.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,52 @@
+<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:lang="cs" xml:id="diskdrake--removable">
+  <info>
+    <title xml:id="diskdrake--removable-ti1">CD / DVD vypalovačka</title>
+
+    <subtitle>diskdrake --removable</subtitle>
+  </info>
+
+  <mediaobject>
+    <imageobject>
+      <imagedata revision="1" fileref="diskdrake--removable.png" align="center" format="PNG" xml:id="diskdrake--removable-im1"/>
+    </imageobject>
+  </mediaobject>
+
+  <para>This tool <footnote>
+      <para>Tento nástroj můžete jako root spustit z příkazového řádku zadáním <emphasis
+role="bold">diskdrake --removable</emphasis>.</para>
+    </footnote>is found under the tab Local
+disks in the Mageia Control Center labelled accordingly with your removable
+hardware (CD/DVD players and burners and floppy drives only). </para>
+
+  <para>Its goal is to define the way your removable disk is mounted. </para>
+
+  <para>At the top of the window there is a short description of your hardware and
+the chosen options to mount it. Use the menu on the bottom to change
+them. Check the item to be changed and then on the <guibutton>OK</guibutton>
+button. </para>
+
+  <section>
+    <title>Přípojný bod</title>
+
+    <para>Check this box to change the mount point. The default one is /media/cdrom.</para>
+
+    <para/>
+  </section>
+
+  <section>
+    <title>Volby</title>
+
+    <para>Many mount options can be chosen here either directly in the list or via the
+<guilabel>Advanced</guilabel> submenu. The main are:</para>
+
+    <para/>
+
+    <section>
+      <title>user/nouser</title>
+
+      <para>user allows an ordinary user (not root) to mount the removable disk, this
+option involves noexec, nosuid and nodev. The user who mounted the disk is
+the only one who can umount it. </para>
+    </section>
+  </section>
+</section>
+\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/docs/mcc-help/cs/diskdrake--smb.xml b/docs/mcc-help/cs/diskdrake--smb.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..c4ef2ba4
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/mcc-help/cs/diskdrake--smb.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,89 @@
+<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?>
+<section version="5.0" xml:lang="cs" xml:id="diskdrake--smb"
+         xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook"
+         xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML"
+         xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg"
+         xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml"
+         xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink"
+         xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook">
+
+  <info>
+    <title xml:id="diskdrake--smb-ti1">Přístup k diskům a adresářům na systémech Windows (pomocí Samba)</title>
+
+    <subtitle>diskdrake --smb</subtitle>
+
+  </info>
+
+  <para/>
+
+  <section>
+    <title>Úvod</title>
+
+    <para>This tool<footnote>
+        <para>You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis
+role="bold">diskdrake --smb</emphasis> as root.</para>
+      </footnote> allows you to declare which
+shared directories to be accessible to all users on the machine. The
+protocol used for this is SMB which has been popularized on Windows(R)
+systems. The shared directory will be available directly at boot. Shared
+directories can be also accessed directly in a single session by a user with
+tools such as file browsers.</para>
+
+    <para>Before starting the tool, it is a good idea to declare the names of
+available servers, for example with <xref linkend="drakhosts"/></para>
+  </section>
+
+  <section>
+    <title>Procedure</title>
+
+    <para>Select <guibutton>search servers</guibutton> to obtain a list of servers who
+share directories.</para>
+
+    <para>Click on the server name and on &gt; before the server name to display the
+list of the shared directories and select the directory you want to access.</para>
+
+    <para>The <guibutton>Mount point</guibutton> button will become available, you
+have to specify where to mount the directory.</para>
+
+    <mediaobject>
+      <imageobject>
+        <imagedata fileref="diskdrake--smb2.png"/>
+      </imageobject>
+    </mediaobject>
+
+    <para>After choosing the mount point, it can be mounted with the <guimenu>Mount
+button</guimenu>. You can also verify and change some options with the
+<guibutton>Options</guibutton> button.</para>
+
+    <para>In options, you can specify the user name and the password of those able to
+connect to the SMB server. After mounting the directory, you can unmount it
+with the same button.</para>
+
+    <mediaobject>
+      <imageobject>
+        <imagedata fileref="diskdrake--smb3.png"/>
+      </imageobject>
+    </mediaobject>
+
+    <mediaobject>
+      <imageobject>
+        <imagedata fileref="diskdrake--smb4.png"/>
+      </imageobject>
+    </mediaobject>
+
+    <para>After accepting the configuration with the Done button, a message will ask
+"Do you want to save the /etc/fstab modifications". Saving, will allow
+directory to made available at each boot, if the network is accessible. The
+new directory is then available in your file browser, for example in
+dolphin.</para>
+
+    <mediaobject>
+      <imageobject>
+        <imagedata fileref="diskdrake--smb5.png"/>
+      </imageobject>
+    </mediaobject>
+
+    <para/>
+
+  </section>
+</section>
diff --git a/docs/mcc-help/cs/drak3d.xml b/docs/mcc-help/cs/drak3d.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..339539c6
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/mcc-help/cs/drak3d.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,80 @@
+<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xml:id="drak3d" version="5.0" xml:lang="cs">
+  <info>
+    <title xml:id="drak3d-ti1">Efekty 3D grafického prostředí</title>
+
+    <subtitle>drak3d</subtitle>
+  </info>
+
+  <mediaobject>
+    <imageobject>
+      <imagedata xml:id="drak3d-im1" revision="1" align="center" fileref="drak3d.png" format="PNG"/>
+    </imageobject>
+  </mediaobject>
+
+  <section>
+    <title>Úvod</title>
+
+    <para>This tool<footnote>
+        <para>You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis
+role="bold">drak3d</emphasis> as root.</para>
+      </footnote> lets you manage the 3D
+desktop effects on your operating system. 3D effects are turned off by
+default.</para>
+  </section>
+
+  <section annotations="center">
+    <title>Začínáme</title>
+
+    <para>To use this tool, you need to have the glxinfo package installed. If the
+package is not installed, you will be prompted to do so before drak3d can
+start.</para>
+
+    <para>After starting drak3d, you will be presented with a menu window.  Here you
+can choose either <guilabel>No 3D Desktop Effects</guilabel> or
+<guilabel>Compiz Fusion</guilabel>. Compiz Fusion is part of a
+composite/window manager, which includes hardware-accelerated special
+effects for your desktop. Choose <guilabel>Compiz Fusion</guilabel> to turn
+it on.</para>
+
+    <para>If this is your first time using this program after a clean installation of
+Mageia, you will get a warning message telling you which packages need to be
+installed in order to use Compiz Fusion. Click on the
+<guibutton>Ok</guibutton> button to continue.</para>
+
+    <mediaobject>
+      <imageobject>
+        <imagedata xml:id="drak3d-im3" fileref="drak3d_installing_CompizFusion.png" align="center" format="PNG"/>
+      </imageobject>
+    </mediaobject>
+
+    <para>Once the appropriate packages are installed, you will notice that Compiz
+Fusion is selected in the drak3d menu, but you must log out and log back in
+for the changes to take effect.</para>
+
+    <para>After logging back in, Compiz Fusion will be activated. To configure Compiz
+Fusion, see the page for the ccsm (CompizConfig Settings Manager)  tool.</para>
+  </section>
+
+  <section>
+    <title>Řešení problémů</title>
+
+    <section>
+      <title>Can't See Desktop after Logging in</title>
+
+      <para>If after turning on Compiz Fusion you attempt to log back into your desktop
+but can't see anything, restart your computer to get back to the log in
+screen. Once there, click on the Desktop icon and select drak3d.</para>
+
+      <mediaobject>
+        <imageobject>
+          <imagedata align="center" fileref="drak3d_troubleshooting_login_option.png" format="PNG"/>
+        </imageobject>
+      </mediaobject>
+
+      <para>When you log in, if your account is listed as an administrator, you will be
+prompted for your password again. Otherwise, use the administrator login
+with his/her account. Then you can undo any changes that may have caused the
+log in problem.</para>
+    </section>
+  </section>
+</section>
+\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/docs/mcc-help/cs/drakauth.xml b/docs/mcc-help/cs/drakauth.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..18d14829
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/mcc-help/cs/drakauth.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,29 @@
+<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?>
+<section version="5.0" xml:lang="cs" xml:id="drakauth" xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook"
+         xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML"
+         xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg"
+         xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml"
+         xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink"
+         xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook">
+  <info>
+    <title xml:id="drakauth-ti1">Ověření</title>
+
+    <subtitle>drakauth</subtitle>
+  </info>
+
+  <mediaobject>
+    <imageobject>
+      <imagedata align="center"  fileref="drakauth.png"
+                 format="PNG" revision="1"  xml:id="drakauth-im1"/>
+    </imageobject>
+  </mediaobject>
+
+  <para>This tool<footnote><para>You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis
+role="bold">drakauth</emphasis> as root.</para></footnote> enables you to modify the
+manner in which you can be recognized as user of the machine or on the net.</para>
+
+  <para>By default, information for your authentication is stored in a file on your
+computer. Modify it only if your network administrator invites you to do so
+and give information about that.</para>
+
+</section>
diff --git a/docs/mcc-help/cs/drakboot--boot.xml b/docs/mcc-help/cs/drakboot--boot.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..4c5977d9
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/mcc-help/cs/drakboot--boot.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,117 @@
+<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:lang="cs" xml:id="drakboot--boot">
+  <info>
+    <title xml:id="drakboot--boot-ti1">Nastavit způsob zavedení systému</title>
+
+    <subtitle>drakboot --boot</subtitle>
+  </info>
+
+  <mediaobject>
+    <imageobject>
+      <imagedata revision="1" fileref="drakboot--boot.png" align="center" xml:id="drakboot--boot-im1" format="PNG"/>
+    </imageobject>
+  </mediaobject>
+
+  <para>this tool<footnote>
+      <para>You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis
+role="bold">drakboot --boot</emphasis> as root.</para>
+    </footnote> allows you to configure the
+boot options (choice of the bootloader, set a password, the default boot,
+etc.)</para>
+
+  <para>It is found under the Boot tab in the Mageia Control Center labelled "Set up
+boot system".</para>
+
+  <warning>
+    <para>Don't use this tool if you don't know exactly what you are doing.  Changing
+some settings may prevent your machine from booting again !</para>
+  </warning>
+
+  <para>In the first part, called <guilabel>Bootloader</guilabel>, it is possible to
+choose which <guibutton>Bootloader to use</guibutton>, Grub or Lilo, and
+with a graphical or a text menu. It is just a question of taste, there are
+no other consequences. You can also set the <guibutton>Boot
+device</guibutton>, don't change anything here unless you are an expert. The
+boot device is where the bootloader is installed and any modification can
+prevent you machine from booting.</para>
+
+  <para>In the second part, called <guilabel>Main options</guilabel>, you can set
+the <guibutton>Delay before booting default image</guibutton>, in
+seconds. During this delay, grub or Lilo will display the list of available
+operating systems, prompting you to make your choice, if no selection is
+made, the bootloader will boot the default one once the delay elapses.</para>
+
+  <para>In the third and last part, called <guibutton>Security</guibutton>, it is
+possible to set a password.</para>
+
+  <para>The <guibutton>Advanced</guibutton> button gives some extra options.</para>
+
+  <para><guibutton>Enable ACPI:</guibutton></para>
+
+  <para>ACPI (Advanced Configuration and Power Interface) is a standard for the
+power management. It can save energy by stopping unused devices, this was
+the method used before APM. Check this box if your hardware is ACPI
+compatible.</para>
+
+  <para><guibutton>Enable SMP:</guibutton></para>
+
+  <para>SMP stands for Symmetric Multi Processors, it's an architecture for
+multicore processors.</para>
+
+  <note>
+    <para>If you have a processor with HyperThreading, Mageia will see it as a dual
+processor and enable SMP.</para>
+  </note>
+
+  <para><guibutton>Enable APIC</guibutton> and <guibutton>Enable Local
+APIC:</guibutton></para>
+
+  <para>APIC stands for Advanced Programmable Interrupt Controller. There are two
+components in the Intel APIC system, the local APIC (LAPIC) and the I/O
+APIC. This one routes the interrupts it receives them from peripheral buses
+to one or more local APICs that are in the processor. It is really useful
+for multi-processor systems. Some computers have problems with the APIC
+system which can cause freezes or incorrect device detection (error message
+"spurious 8259A interrupt: IRQ7"). In this case, disable APIC and/or Local
+APIC.</para>
+
+  <mediaobject>
+    <imageobject>
+      <imagedata fileref="drakboot1.png"/>
+    </imageobject>
+  </mediaobject>
+
+  <para>In the <guibutton>Next</guibutton> screen, you can see the list of all the
+available entries at boot time. The default one is asterisked. To change the
+order of the menu entries, click on the up or down arrows to move the
+selected item. If you click on the <guibutton>Add</guibutton> or
+<guibutton>Modify </guibutton>buttons, a new window appears to add a new
+entry in the Grub menu or to modify an existing one. You need to be familiar
+with Lilo or Grub to be able to use these tools.</para>
+
+  <mediaobject>
+    <imageobject>
+      <imagedata fileref="drakboot2.png"/>
+    </imageobject>
+  </mediaobject>
+
+  <para>The <guilabel>Label</guilabel> field is freeform, write here what you want
+to be displayed in the menu. It matches the Grub command "title". For
+example: Mageia3.</para>
+
+  <para>The <guilabel>Image</guilabel> field contains the kernel name. It matches
+the Grub command "kernel". For example /boot/vmlinuz.</para>
+
+  <para>The <guilabel>Root</guilabel> field contains the device name where the
+kernel is stored. It matches the Grub command "root". For example (hd0,1).</para>
+
+  <para>The <guilabel>Append</guilabel> field contains the options to be given to
+the kernel at boot time.</para>
+
+  <para>If the box <guilabel>Default</guilabel> is checked, Grub will boot this
+entry by default.</para>
+
+  <para>In the extra screen called <guilabel>Advanced</guilabel>, it is possible to
+choose the <guilabel>Video mode</guilabel>, an <guilabel>initrd</guilabel>
+file and a <xref linkend="draknetprofile"></xref> in the drop-down lists.</para>
+
+</section>
+\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/docs/mcc-help/cs/drakboot.xml b/docs/mcc-help/cs/drakboot.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..fc909fa3
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/mcc-help/cs/drakboot.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,39 @@
+<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:lang="cs" xml:id="drakboot">
+  <info>
+    <title xml:id="drakboot-ti1">Nastavit automatické přihlášení do systému</title>
+
+    <subtitle>drakboot</subtitle>
+  </info>
+
+  <mediaobject>
+    <imageobject>
+      <imagedata revision="1" xml:id="drakboot-im1" fileref="drakboot.png" align="center" format="PNG"/>
+    </imageobject>
+  </mediaobject>
+
+  <para>This tool<footnote>
+      <para>You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis
+role="bold">drakboot</emphasis> as root.</para>
+    </footnote> allows you to automatically
+login the same user, in her/his desktop environment, without asking for any
+password. It's called autologin.  This is generally a good idea when there
+is only one user like to be using the machine.</para>
+
+  <para>It is found under the <emphasis role="bold">Boot</emphasis> tab in the
+Mageia Control Center labelled "Set up autologin to automatically log in".</para>
+
+  <para>The interface buttons are pretty obvious:</para>
+
+  <para>Check <guibutton>Launch the graphical environment when your system
+starts</guibutton>, if you want X Window System to be executed after the
+boot. If not, the system will start in text mode. Nevertheless, it will be
+possible to launch the graphic interface manually. This can be done by
+launching the command 'startx' or 'systemctl start dm'.</para>
+
+  <para>If the first box is checked, two other options are available, check either
+<guibutton>No, I don't want autologin</guibutton>, if you want the system to
+continue to ask for which user to connect (and password) or check
+<guibutton>Yes, I want autologin with this (user, desktop)</guibutton>, if
+needed. In this case, you also need to supply the <guilabel>Default
+username</guilabel> and the <guilabel>Default desktop</guilabel>.</para>
+</section>
+\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/docs/mcc-help/cs/drakbug.xml b/docs/mcc-help/cs/drakbug.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..38cf2149
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/mcc-help/cs/drakbug.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,34 @@
+<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section
+xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook"
+xmlns:xlink="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink"
+xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML"
+xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg"
+xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml"
+xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xml:id="drakbug" version="5.0" xml:lang="cs">
+  <info>
+    <title xml:id="drakbug-ti1">Mageia Bug Report Tool</title><subtitle>drakbug</subtitle>
+  </info>
+
+  <mediaobject>
+    <imageobject>
+      <imagedata  xml:id="drakbug-im1" revision="1" align="center" format="PNG"
+ fileref="drakbug.png"/>
+    </imageobject>
+  </mediaobject>
+
+  <para>Usually, this tool<footnote><para>You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis
+role="bold">drakbug</emphasis>.</para></footnote> starts automatically
+when a Mageia tool crashes. However, it is also possible that, after filing
+a bug report, you are asked to start this tool to check some of the
+information it gives, and then provide that in that existing bug report.</para>
+
+  <para>If a new bug report needs to be filed and you are not used to doing that,
+then please read <link
+xlink:href="https://wiki.mageia.org/en/How_to_report_a_bug_properly">How to
+report a bug report properly</link> before clicking on the "Report" button.</para>
+
+  <para>In case the bug has already been filed by someone else (the error message
+that drakbug gave will be the same, then), it is useful to add a comment to
+that existing report that you saw the bug, too.</para>
+  
+</section>
diff --git a/docs/mcc-help/cs/drakbug_report.xml b/docs/mcc-help/cs/drakbug_report.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..62d8f027
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/mcc-help/cs/drakbug_report.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,71 @@
+<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section
+xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook"
+xmlns:xlink="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink"
+xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML"
+xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg"
+xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml"
+xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook"
+xml:id="drakbug_report" version="5.0" xml:lang="cs">
+
+  <info>
+	  <title xml:id="drakbug_report-ti1">Collect Logs and System Information for Bug Reports</title><subtitle>drakbug_report</subtitle>
+  </info>
+
+  <para>This tool<footnote><para>You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis
+role="bold">drakbug_report</emphasis> as root.</para></footnote> can only be started and used
+on the command line.</para>
+
+<para>It is advised to write the output of this command to a file, for instance by
+doing <emphasis role="bold">drakbug_report > drakbugreport.txt</emphasis>,
+but make sure you have enough disk space first: the file can easily be
+several GBs large.</para>
+<note><para>The output is far too large to attach to a bug report without first removing
+the unneeded parts.</para></note>
+  <para>Tyto následující příkazy shromažďují informace o vašem systému:</para>
+
+  <itemizedlist>
+	  <listitem><para> lspci</para></listitem>
+	  <listitem><para> pci_devices</para></listitem>
+	  <listitem><para> dmidecode</para></listitem>
+	  <listitem><para> fdisk</para></listitem>
+	  <listitem><para> scsi</para></listitem>
+	  <listitem><para> /sys/bus/scsi/devices</para></listitem>
+	  <listitem><para> lsmod</para></listitem>
+	  <listitem><para> cmdline</para></listitem>
+	  <listitem><para> pcmcia: stab</para></listitem>
+	  <listitem><para> usb</para></listitem>
+	  <listitem><para> partitions</para></listitem>
+	  <listitem><para> cpuinfo</para></listitem>
+	  <listitem><para> syslog</para></listitem>
+	  <listitem><para> Xorg.log</para></listitem>
+	  <listitem><para> monitor_full_edid</para></listitem>
+	  <listitem><para> stage1.log</para></listitem>
+	  <listitem><para> ddebug.log</para></listitem>
+	  <listitem><para> install.log</para></listitem>
+	  <listitem><para> fstab</para></listitem>
+	  <listitem><para> modprobe.conf</para></listitem>
+	  <listitem><para> lilo.conf</para></listitem>
+	  <listitem><para> grub: menu.lst</para></listitem>
+	  <listitem><para> grub: install.sh</para></listitem>
+	  <listitem><para> grub: device.map</para></listitem>
+	  <listitem><para> xorg.conf</para></listitem>
+	  <listitem><para> urpmi.cfg</para></listitem>
+	  <listitem><para> modprobe.preload</para></listitem>
+	  <listitem><para> sysconfig/i18n</para></listitem>
+	  <listitem><para> /proc/iomem</para></listitem>
+	  <listitem><para> /proc/ioport</para></listitem>
+	  <listitem><para> mageia version</para></listitem>
+	  <listitem><para> rpm -qa</para></listitem>
+	  <listitem><para> df</para></listitem>
+  </itemizedlist>
+
+
+  <note><para>At the time this help page was written, the "syslog" part of this command's
+output was empty, because this tool had not yet been adjusted to our switch
+to systemd. If it is still empty, you can retrieve the "syslog" by doing (as
+root) <emphasis role="bold"> journalctl -a > journalctl.txt</emphasis>. If
+you don't have a lot of diskspace, you can, for instance, take the last 5000
+lines of the log instead with: <emphasis role="bold">journalctl -a | tail
+-n5000 > journalctl5000.txt</emphasis>.</para></note>
+  
+</section>
diff --git a/docs/mcc-help/cs/drakclock.xml b/docs/mcc-help/cs/drakclock.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..5bf74c02
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/mcc-help/cs/drakclock.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,50 @@
+<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:lang="cs" xml:id="drakclock">
+  <info>
+    <title xml:id="drakclock-ti1">Upravit datum a čas</title>
+
+    <subtitle>drakclock</subtitle>
+  </info>
+
+  <mediaobject>
+    <imageobject>
+      <imagedata fileref="drakclock.png" xml:id="drakclock-im1" revision="1" align="center" format="PNG"/>
+    </imageobject>
+  </mediaobject>
+
+  <para>This tool<footnote>
+      <para>You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis
+role="bold">drakclock</emphasis> as root.</para>
+    </footnote> is found under the tab System
+in the Mageia Control Center labelled <guilabel>"Manage date and
+time"</guilabel>. In some desktop environments it is also available by a
+right click / Adjust date and Time ... on the clock in the system tray.</para>
+
+  <para>It's a very simple tool.</para>
+
+  <para>On the upper left part, is the <emphasis role="bold">calendar</emphasis>. On
+the screenshot above, the date is September (on the upper left), 2012 (on
+the upper right), the 2nd (in blue)  and it is a Sunday. Select the month
+(or year) by clicking on the little arrows on each side of September (or
+2012). Select the day by clicking on its number.</para>
+
+  <para>On the bottom left is the <emphasis role="bold">Network Time
+Protocol</emphasis> synchronising, it is possible to have a clock always on
+time by synchronising it with a server. Check <guilabel>Enable Network Time
+Protocol</guilabel> and choose the closest server.</para>
+
+  <para>On the right part is the <emphasis role="bold">clock</emphasis>. It's
+useless to set the clock if NTP is enabled. Three boxes display hours,
+minutes and seconds (15, 28 and 22 on the screenshot). Use the little arrows
+to set the clock to the correct time. The format can't be changed here, see
+your desktop environment settings for that.</para>
+
+  <para>At least, on the bottom right, select your time zone by clicking on the
+<guibutton>Change Time Zone</guibutton> button and choosing in the list the
+nearest town.</para>
+
+  <note>
+    <para>Even if it isn't possible to choose a date or time format in this tool, they
+will be displayed on your desktop in accordance with the localisation
+settings.</para>
+  </note>
+</section>
+\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/docs/mcc-help/cs/drakconnect--del.xml b/docs/mcc-help/cs/drakconnect--del.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..66dcefc1
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/mcc-help/cs/drakconnect--del.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,18 @@
+<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xml:id="drakconnect--del" version="5.0" xml:lang="cs">
+  <info>
+    <title xml:id="drakconnect--del-ti1">Odstranit připojení</title><subtitle>drakconnect --del</subtitle>
+  </info>
+
+  <mediaobject>
+    <imageobject>
+      <imagedata   xml:id="drakconnect--del-im1" revision="1" align="center" format="PNG" fileref="drakconnect--del.png"/>
+    </imageobject>
+  </mediaobject>
+
+    <para>Here, you can delete a network interface<footnote><para>You can also start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis
+role="bold">drakconnect --del</emphasis> as root.</para></footnote>.</para> 
+    <para>Click on the drop down menu, choose the one you want to remove and then
+click <emphasis>next</emphasis>.</para> 
+    <para>You'll see a message that the network interface has been deleted
+successfully.</para> 
+</section>
diff --git a/docs/mcc-help/cs/drakconnect.xml b/docs/mcc-help/cs/drakconnect.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..b4280ff2
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/mcc-help/cs/drakconnect.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,808 @@
+<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:lang="cs" xml:id="drakconnect">
+  <info annotations="simonnzg listened to Aicha by Khaled &amp; Faudel whilst editing this document.">
+    <title xml:id="drakconnect-ti1">Nastavit nové síťové rozhraní (LAN, ISDN, ADSL, ...)</title>
+
+    <subtitle>drakconnect</subtitle>
+  </info>
+
+  <mediaobject>
+    <imageobject>
+      <imagedata revision="1" xml:id="drakconnect-im1" align="center" format="PNG" fileref="drakconnect.png"/>
+    </imageobject>
+  </mediaobject>
+
+  <section>
+    <title>Úvod</title>
+
+    <para>This tool<footnote>
+        <para>You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis
+role="bold">drakconnect</emphasis> as root.</para>
+      </footnote> allows to configure much of
+local network or Internet access. You have to know some information from
+your access provider or your network administrator.</para>
+
+    <para>Select the type of connection you want to set, according to which hardware
+and provider you have.</para>
+  </section>
+
+  <section>
+    <title>A new Wired connection (Ethernet)</title>
+
+    <orderedlist>
+      <listitem>
+        <para>The first window lists the interfaces which are available.  Select the one
+to configure.</para>
+      </listitem>
+
+      <listitem>
+        <para>At this point, the choice is given between an automatic or a manual IP
+address.</para>
+      </listitem>
+
+      <listitem>
+        <para>Automatic IP</para>
+
+        <orderedlist>
+          <listitem>
+            <para><emphasis>Ethernet/IP settings</emphasis>: you have to select if DNS servers
+are declared by the DHCP server or are manually specified, as explained
+below. In the last case, the IP address of DNS servers has to be set. The
+HOSTNAME of the computer can be specified here. If no HOSTNAME is specified,
+the name <literal>localhost.localdomain</literal> is attributed by default.
+The Hostname can also be provided by the DHCP server with the option
+<emphasis>Assign host name from DHCP server</emphasis>. Not all DHCP servers
+have such a function and if you're setting up your PC to get an IP address
+from a domestic ADSL router, it is unlikely.</para>
+
+            <mediaobject>
+              <imageobject>
+                <imagedata fileref="drakconnect5.png"/>
+              </imageobject>
+            </mediaobject>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>The advanced button give the opportunity to specify:</para>
+
+            <itemizedlist>
+              <listitem>
+                <para>Search domain (not accessible, as provided by the DHCP server)</para>
+              </listitem>
+
+              <listitem>
+                <para>the DHCP client</para>
+              </listitem>
+
+              <listitem>
+                <para>DHCP timeout</para>
+              </listitem>
+
+              <listitem>
+                <para>Get YP server from DHCP (checked by default): specify the NIS server</para>
+              </listitem>
+
+              <listitem>
+                <para>Get NTPD server from DHCP (synchronisation of clocks)</para>
+              </listitem>
+
+              <listitem>
+                <para>the HOSTNAME required by DHCP. Only use this option if the DHCP server
+requires the client to specify a hostname before receiving an IP
+address. This option is not dealt by some DHCP servers.</para>
+              </listitem>
+            </itemizedlist>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>After accepting, the last steps which are common to all connection
+configurations are explained: <xref linkend="drakconnect-end"/></para>
+          </listitem>
+        </orderedlist>
+      </listitem>
+
+      <listitem>
+        <para>Ruční nastavení</para>
+
+        <orderedlist>
+          <listitem>
+            <para><emphasis>Ethernet/IP settings</emphasis>: you need to declare what DNS
+servers to use. The HOSTNAME of the computer can be specified here. If no
+HOSTNAME is specified, the name <literal>localhost.localdomain</literal> is
+attributed by default.</para>
+
+            <para>For a residential network, the IP address usually looks like
+<emphasis>192.168.x.x</emphasis>, Netmask is
+<emphasis>255.255.255.0</emphasis>, and the Gateway and DNS servers are
+available from your service provider's website.</para>
+
+            <para>In advanced settings, you can specified a <emphasis>Search
+domain</emphasis>. It would usually be your home domain, i.e. if your
+computer is called "splash", and it's full domain name is
+"splash.boatanchor.net", the Search Domain would be "boatanchor.net". Unless
+you specifically need it, it's ok not to define this setting. Again,
+domestic ADSL would not need this setting.</para>
+
+            <mediaobject>
+              <imageobject>
+                <imagedata fileref="drakconnect30.png"/>
+              </imageobject>
+            </mediaobject>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>The next steps are exposed at <xref linkend="drakconnect-end"/></para>
+          </listitem>
+        </orderedlist>
+      </listitem>
+    </orderedlist>
+  </section>
+
+  <section>
+    <title>A new Satellite connection (DVB)</title>
+
+    <para>This section hasn't been written yet for lack of resources. If you think you
+can write this help, please contact <link
+ns2:href="https://wiki.mageia.org/en/Documentation_team"> the Doc
+team.</link> Thanking you in advance.</para>
+  </section>
+
+  <section>
+    <title>A new Cable modem connection</title>
+
+    <orderedlist>
+      <listitem>
+        <para>The first window lists the interfaces which are available.  Select the one
+to configure.</para>
+      </listitem>
+
+      <listitem>
+        <para>At this point, the choice is given between an automatic or a manual IP
+address.</para>
+      </listitem>
+
+      <listitem>
+        <para>You have to specify a authentication method:</para>
+
+        <itemizedlist>
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Žádné</para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>BPALogin (necessary for Telstra). In this case you have to provide User name
+and password.</para>
+          </listitem>
+        </itemizedlist>
+      </listitem>
+
+      <listitem>
+        <para>Automatic IP</para>
+
+        <orderedlist>
+          <listitem>
+            <para><emphasis>Cable/IP settings</emphasis>: you have to select if DNS servers
+are declared by the DHCP server or are manually specified, as explained
+below. In the last case, the IP address of DNS servers has to be set. The
+HOSTNAME of the computer can be specified here. If no HOSTNAME is specified,
+the name <literal>localhost.localdomain</literal> is attributed by default.
+The Hostname can also be provided by the DHCP server with the option
+<emphasis>Assign host name from DHCP server</emphasis>. Not all DHCP servers
+have such a function and if you're setting up your PC to get an IP address
+from a domestic ADSL router, it is unlikely.</para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>The advanced button give the opportunity to specify:</para>
+
+            <itemizedlist>
+              <listitem>
+                <para>Search domain (not accessible, as provided by the DHCP server)</para>
+              </listitem>
+
+              <listitem>
+                <para>the DHCP client</para>
+              </listitem>
+
+              <listitem>
+                <para>DHCP timeout</para>
+              </listitem>
+
+              <listitem>
+                <para>Get YP server from DHCP (checked by default): specify the NIS server</para>
+              </listitem>
+
+              <listitem>
+                <para>Get NTPD server from DHCP (synchronisation of clocks)</para>
+              </listitem>
+
+              <listitem>
+                <para>the HOSTNAME required by DHCP. Only use this option if the DHCP server
+requires the client to specify a hostname before receiving an IP
+address. This option is not dealt by some DHCP servers.</para>
+              </listitem>
+            </itemizedlist>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>After accepting, the last steps which are common to all connection
+configurations are explained: <xref linkend="drakconnect-end"/></para>
+          </listitem>
+        </orderedlist>
+      </listitem>
+
+      <listitem>
+        <para>Ruční nastavení</para>
+
+        <orderedlist>
+          <listitem>
+            <para><emphasis>Cable/IP settings</emphasis>: you need to declare what DNS servers
+to use. The HOSTNAME of the computer can be specified here. If no HOSTNAME
+is specified, the name <literal>localhost.localdomain</literal> is
+attributed by default.</para>
+
+            <para>For a residential network, the IP address usually looks like
+<emphasis>192.168.x.x</emphasis>, Netmask is
+<emphasis>255.255.255.0</emphasis>, and the Gateway and DNS servers are
+available from your service provider's website.</para>
+
+            <para>In advanced settings, you can specified a <emphasis>Search
+domain</emphasis>. It would usually be your home domain, i.e. if your
+computer is called "splash", and it's full domain name is
+"splash.boatanchor.net", the Search Domain would be "boatanchor.net". Unless
+you specifically need it, it's ok not to define this setting. Again,
+domestic connection would not need this setting.</para>
+
+            <mediaobject>
+              <imageobject>
+                <imagedata fileref="drakconnect32.png"/>
+              </imageobject>
+            </mediaobject>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>The next steps are exposed at <xref linkend="drakconnect-end"/></para>
+          </listitem>
+        </orderedlist>
+      </listitem>
+    </orderedlist>
+  </section>
+
+  <section>
+    <title>A new DSL connection</title>
+
+    <para><orderedlist>
+        <listitem>
+          <para>If the tool detects network interfaces, it offers to select one and to
+configure it.</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>A list of providers is proposed, classified by countries.  Select your
+provider. If it is not listed, select the option
+<guilabel>Unlisted</guilabel> and then enter the options your provider gave.</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Select one of the protocols available:</para>
+
+          <itemizedlist>
+            <listitem>
+              <para>Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP)</para>
+            </listitem>
+
+            <listitem>
+              <para>Ruční nastavení TCP/IP</para>
+            </listitem>
+
+            <listitem>
+              <para>PPP over ADSL (PPPoA)</para>
+            </listitem>
+
+            <listitem>
+              <para>PPP přes Ethernet (PPPoE)</para>
+            </listitem>
+
+            <listitem>
+              <para>Point to Point Tunneling Protocol (PPTP)</para>
+            </listitem>
+          </itemizedlist>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Nastavení přístupu</para>
+
+          <itemizedlist>
+            <listitem>
+              <para>Váš účet (uživatelské jméno)</para>
+            </listitem>
+
+            <listitem>
+              <para>Account password</para>
+            </listitem>
+
+            <listitem>
+              <para>(Advanced) Virtual Path ID (VPI)</para>
+            </listitem>
+
+            <listitem>
+              <para>(Advanced) Virtual Circuit ID (VCI)</para>
+            </listitem>
+          </itemizedlist>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>The next steps are exposed at <xref linkend="drakconnect-end"/></para>
+        </listitem>
+      </orderedlist></para>
+  </section>
+
+  <section>
+    <title>A new ISDN connection</title>
+
+    <para><orderedlist>
+        <listitem>
+          <para>The wizard asks which device to configure:</para>
+
+          <itemizedlist>
+            <listitem>
+              <para>Manual choice (internal ISDN card)</para>
+            </listitem>
+
+            <listitem>
+              <para>Externí ISDN modem</para>
+            </listitem>
+          </itemizedlist>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>A list of hardware is proposed, classified by category and
+manufacturer. Select your card.</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Select one of the protocols available:</para>
+
+          <itemizedlist>
+            <listitem>
+              <para>Protocol for the rest of the world, except Europe (DHCP)</para>
+            </listitem>
+
+            <listitem>
+              <para>Protocol for Europe (EDSS1)</para>
+            </listitem>
+          </itemizedlist>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>A list of providers is then offered, classified by countries.  Select your
+provider. If it is not listed, select the option
+<guilabel>Unlisted</guilabel> and then enter the options your provider gave
+you. Then it is asked for parameters:</para>
+
+          <itemizedlist>
+            <listitem>
+              <para>Název připojení</para>
+            </listitem>
+
+            <listitem>
+              <para>Telefonní číslo</para>
+            </listitem>
+
+            <listitem>
+              <para>Přihlašovací jméno</para>
+            </listitem>
+
+            <listitem>
+              <para>Account password</para>
+            </listitem>
+
+            <listitem>
+              <para>Metoda ověření</para>
+            </listitem>
+          </itemizedlist>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>After that, you have to select if you get the IP address by automatic or
+manual method. In the last case, specify IP address and Subnet mask.</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>The next step is to choose how DNS servers address are obtained, by
+automatic or manual method. In the case of manual configuration, you have to
+put:</para>
+
+          <itemizedlist>
+            <listitem>
+              <para>Název domény</para>
+            </listitem>
+
+            <listitem>
+              <para>First and second DNS Server</para>
+            </listitem>
+
+            <listitem>
+              <para>Select if the hostname is set from IP. This option is to select only if you
+are sure that your provider is configured to accept it.</para>
+            </listitem>
+          </itemizedlist>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>The next step is to choose how the gateway address is obtained, by automatic
+or manual method. In the case of manual configuration, you have to enter the
+IP address.</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>The next steps are exposed at <xref linkend="drakconnect-end"/></para>
+        </listitem>
+      </orderedlist></para>
+  </section>
+
+  <section>
+    <title>A new Wireless connection (WiFi)</title>
+
+    <orderedlist>
+      <listitem>
+        <para>A first window lists the interfaces which are available and an entry for
+Windows driver (ndiswrapper). Select the one to configure.  Use ndiswrapper
+only if the other configuration methods did not work.</para>
+      </listitem>
+
+      <listitem>
+        <para>At this step, the choice is given between the different access points that
+the card has detected.</para>
+      </listitem>
+
+      <listitem>
+        <para>Specific parameter for the wireless card are to provide:</para>
+
+        <mediaobject>
+          <imageobject>
+            <imagedata fileref="drakconnect31.png"/>
+          </imageobject>
+        </mediaobject>
+
+        <itemizedlist>
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Operating mode:</para>
+
+            <variablelist>
+              <varlistentry>
+                <term>Spravované</term>
+
+                <listitem>
+                  <para>To access to an existing access point (the most frequent).</para>
+                </listitem>
+              </varlistentry>
+
+              <varlistentry>
+                <term>Ad-Hoc</term>
+
+                <listitem>
+                  <para>To configure direct connection between computers.</para>
+                </listitem>
+              </varlistentry>
+            </variablelist>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Network Name (ESSID)</para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Encryption mode: it depends of how the access point is configured.</para>
+
+            <variablelist>
+              <varlistentry>
+                <term>WPA/WPA2</term>
+
+                <listitem>
+                  <para>This encryption mode is to prefer if your hardware allows it.</para>
+                </listitem>
+              </varlistentry>
+
+              <varlistentry>
+                <term>WEP</term>
+
+                <listitem>
+                  <para>Some old hardware deals only this encryption method.</para>
+                </listitem>
+              </varlistentry>
+            </variablelist>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Šifrovací klíč</para>
+
+            <para>It is generally provided with the hardware which give the access point.</para>
+          </listitem>
+        </itemizedlist>
+      </listitem>
+
+      <listitem>
+        <para>At this step, the choice is given between an automatic IP address or a
+manual IP address.</para>
+      </listitem>
+
+      <listitem>
+        <para>Automatic IP</para>
+
+        <orderedlist>
+          <listitem>
+            <para><emphasis>IP settings</emphasis>: you have to select if DNS servers are
+declared by the DHCP server or are manually specified, as explained
+below. In the last case, IP address of DNS servers has to be set. The
+HOSTNAME of the computer can be specified here.  If no HOSTNAME is
+specified, the name localhost.localdomain is attributed by default. The
+Hostname can also be provided by the DHCP server with the option
+<emphasis>Assign host name from DHCP server</emphasis></para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>The advanced button give the opportunity to specify:</para>
+
+            <itemizedlist>
+              <listitem>
+                <para>Search domain (not accessible, as provided by the DHCP server)</para>
+              </listitem>
+
+              <listitem>
+                <para>the DHCP client</para>
+              </listitem>
+
+              <listitem>
+                <para>DHCP timeout</para>
+              </listitem>
+
+              <listitem>
+                <para>Get YP server from DHCP (checked by default): specify the NIS servers</para>
+              </listitem>
+
+              <listitem>
+                <para>Get NTPD server from DHCP (synchronisation of clocks)</para>
+              </listitem>
+
+              <listitem>
+                <para>the HOSTNAME required by DHCP. Only use this option if the DHCP server
+requires the client to specify a hostname before receiving an IP
+address. This option is not dealt by some DHCP servers.</para>
+              </listitem>
+            </itemizedlist>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>After accepting the configuration the step, which is common to all
+connection configurations, is explained: <xref linkend="drakconnect-end"/></para>
+          </listitem>
+        </orderedlist>
+      </listitem>
+
+      <listitem>
+        <para>Ruční nastavení</para>
+
+        <orderedlist>
+          <listitem>
+            <para><emphasis>IP settings</emphasis>: you have to declare DNS servers. The
+HOSTNAME of the computer can be specified here. If no HOSTNAME is specified,
+the name <literal>localhost.localdomain</literal> is attributed by default.</para>
+
+            <para>For a residential network, the IP address always looks like
+<emphasis>192.168.x.x</emphasis>, Netmask is
+<emphasis>255.255.255.0</emphasis>, and the Gateway and DNS servers are
+available from your providers website.</para>
+
+            <para>In advanced settings, you can specified a <emphasis>Search
+domain</emphasis>. It must seem to your hostname without the first name,
+before the period.</para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>The next steps are exposed at <xref linkend="drakconnect-end"/></para>
+          </listitem>
+        </orderedlist>
+      </listitem>
+    </orderedlist>
+  </section>
+
+  <section>
+    <title>A new GPRS/Edge/3G connection</title>
+
+    <para><orderedlist>
+        <listitem>
+          <para>If the tool detects wireless interfaces, it offers to select one and to
+configure it.</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>The PIN is asked. Leave empty if the PIN is not required.</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>The wizard asks for network. If it is not detected, select the option
+<guilabel>Unlisted</guilabel>.</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>A list of providers is proposed, classified by countries.  Select your
+provider. If it is not listed, select the option
+<guilabel>Unlisted</guilabel> and then enter the options your provider gave.</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Provide access settings</para>
+
+          <itemizedlist>
+            <listitem>
+              <para>Název přístupového bodu</para>
+            </listitem>
+
+            <listitem>
+              <para>Váš účet (uživatelské jméno)</para>
+            </listitem>
+
+            <listitem>
+              <para>Account password</para>
+            </listitem>
+          </itemizedlist>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>The next steps are exposed at <xref linkend="drakconnect-end"/></para>
+        </listitem>
+      </orderedlist></para>
+  </section>
+
+  <section>
+    <title>A new Bluetooth Dial-Up Networking connection</title>
+
+    <para>This section hasn't been written yet for lack of resources. If you think you
+can write this help, please contact <link
+ns2:href="https://wiki.mageia.org/en/Documentation_team"> the Doc
+team.</link> Thanking you in advance.</para>
+  </section>
+
+  <section>
+    <title>A new Analog telephone modem connection (POTS)</title>
+
+    <orderedlist>
+      <listitem>
+        <para>The wizard asks which device to configure:</para>
+
+        <itemizedlist>
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Ruční volba</para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Detected hardware, if any.</para>
+          </listitem>
+        </itemizedlist>
+      </listitem>
+
+      <listitem>
+        <para>A list of ports is proposed. Select your port.</para>
+      </listitem>
+
+      <listitem>
+        <para>If not yet installed, it will be suggested that you install the package
+<emphasis>kppp-provider</emphasis>.</para>
+      </listitem>
+
+      <listitem>
+        <para>A list of providers is proposed, classified by countries. Select your
+provider. If it is not listed, select the option
+<guilabel>Unlisted</guilabel> and then enter the options your provider
+gave. Then it is asked for Dialup options:</para>
+
+        <itemizedlist>
+          <listitem>
+            <para><emphasis>Connection name</emphasis></para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para><emphasis>Phone number</emphasis></para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para><emphasis>Login ID</emphasis></para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para><emphasis>Password</emphasis></para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para><emphasis>Authentication</emphasis>, choose between:</para>
+
+            <itemizedlist>
+              <listitem>
+                <para>PAP/CHAP</para>
+              </listitem>
+
+              <listitem>
+                <para>Script-based</para>
+              </listitem>
+
+              <listitem>
+                <para>PAP</para>
+              </listitem>
+
+              <listitem>
+                <para>Terminal-based</para>
+              </listitem>
+
+              <listitem>
+                <para>CHAP</para>
+              </listitem>
+            </itemizedlist>
+          </listitem>
+        </itemizedlist>
+      </listitem>
+
+      <listitem>
+        <para>The next steps are exposed at <xref linkend="drakconnect-end"/></para>
+      </listitem>
+    </orderedlist>
+  </section>
+
+  <section xml:id="drakconnect-end">
+    <title>Ending the configuration</title>
+
+    <para>In the next step, you can specify:</para>
+
+    <itemizedlist>
+      <listitem>
+        <para><emphasis>Allow users to manage the connection</emphasis></para>
+      </listitem>
+
+      <listitem>
+        <para><emphasis>Start the connection at boot</emphasis></para>
+      </listitem>
+
+      <listitem>
+        <para><emphasis>Enable traffic accounting</emphasis></para>
+      </listitem>
+
+      <listitem>
+        <para><emphasis>Allow interface to be controlled by Network Manager</emphasis></para>
+      </listitem>
+
+      <listitem>
+        <para>In the case of a wireless connection, a supplemental box is <emphasis>Allow
+access point roaming</emphasis> which give the possibility to switch
+automatically between access point according to the signal strength.</para>
+      </listitem>
+    </itemizedlist>
+
+    <para>With the advanced button, you can specify:</para>
+
+    <itemizedlist>
+      <listitem>
+        <para>Metrika (výchozí je 10)</para>
+      </listitem>
+
+      <listitem>
+        <para>MTU</para>
+      </listitem>
+
+      <listitem>
+        <para>Rychlé připojení do sítě</para>
+      </listitem>
+
+      <listitem>
+        <para>Povolit tunel IPv6 na IPv4</para>
+      </listitem>
+    </itemizedlist>
+
+    <para>The last step allows you to specify if the connection is to start
+immediately or not.</para>
+
+    <mediaobject>
+      <imageobject>
+        <imagedata fileref="drakconnect9.png"/>
+      </imageobject>
+    </mediaobject>
+  </section>
+</section>
+\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/docs/mcc-help/cs/drakconsole.xml b/docs/mcc-help/cs/drakconsole.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..6e6657dc
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/mcc-help/cs/drakconsole.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,20 @@
+<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:lang="cs" xml:id="drakconsole">
+  <info>
+    <title xml:id="drakconsole-ti1">Spustit konzoli pro správce systému</title>
+
+    <subtitle>drakconsole</subtitle>
+  </info>
+
+  <mediaobject>
+    <imageobject>
+      <imagedata xml:id="drakconsole-im1" fileref="drakconsole.png" revision="1" align="center" format="PNG"/>
+    </imageobject>
+  </mediaobject>
+
+  <para>This tool<footnote>
+      <para>You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis
+role="bold">drakconsole</emphasis> as root.</para>
+    </footnote> gives you access to a console
+which is directly opened as root. We do not think that you need more
+information about that.</para>
+</section>
+\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/docs/mcc-help/cs/drakdisk.xml b/docs/mcc-help/cs/drakdisk.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..ad53b179
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/mcc-help/cs/drakdisk.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,78 @@
+<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:lang="cs" xml:id="drakdisk">
+  
+
+  
+
+  <info>
+    <!--
+ lebarhon 2012-08-30  Added some comments. Imho, the option button needs explanations -->
+<!--marja 2012-09-02 changed title to visible title for this tool in MCC -->
+<title xml:id="drakdisk-ti1">Spravovat diskové oddíly</title>
+
+    <subtitle>drakdisk nebo diskdrake</subtitle>
+  </info>
+
+  <mediaobject>
+    <imageobject>
+      <imagedata xml:id="drakdiskBackup-im1" revision="1" fileref="drakdiskBackup.png" align="center" format="PNG"/>
+    </imageobject>
+  </mediaobject>
+
+  <warning>
+    <para>This tool<footnote>
+        <para>You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis
+role="bold">drakdisk</emphasis> or <emphasis
+role="bold">diskdrake</emphasis> as root.</para>
+      </footnote> is very powerful, a tiny
+error or a cat jumping on your keyboard can lead to losing all data on a
+partition or even to erasing the entire hard disk. For that reason, you'll
+see the screen above on top of the tool screen. Click on
+<emphasis>Exit</emphasis> if you're not sure you want to continue.</para>
+  </warning>
+
+  <para>If you have more than one hard disk, you can switch to the hard disk you
+want to work on by selecting the correct tab (sda, sdb, sdc etc).</para>
+
+  <mediaobject>
+    <imageobject>
+      <imagedata revision="1" align="center" xml:id="drakdisk-im1" fileref="drakdisk.png" format="PNG"/>
+    </imageobject>
+  </mediaobject>
+
+  <para>You can choose from many actions to adjust your hard disk to your
+preferences. Wiping an entire hard disk, splitting or merging partitions,
+resizing them or changing the filesystem, formatting or viewing what is in a
+partition: it is all possible. The <emphasis><guibutton>Clear
+all</guibutton></emphasis> button at the bottom is to erase the complete
+disk, the other buttons become visible on the right after you click on a
+partition.</para>
+
+  <para>If the selected partition is mounted, like in the example below, you cannot
+choose to resize, format or delete it. To be able to do that the partition
+must be unmounted first.</para>
+
+  <para>It is only possible to resize a partition on its right side</para>
+
+  <para>To change a partition type (change ext3 to ext4 for example) you have to
+delete the partition and then re-create it with the new type. The button
+<guibutton role="bold">Create</guibutton> appears when a disk empty part is
+selected</para>
+
+  <para>You can choose a mount point that doesn't exist, it will be created.</para>
+
+  <mediaobject>
+    <imageobject>
+      <imagedata xml:id="drakdiskMountedPartition-im1" revision="1" fileref="drakdiskMountedPartition.png" align="center" format="PNG"/>
+    </imageobject>
+  </mediaobject>
+
+  <para>Selecting <emphasis><guibutton>Toggle to expert mode</guibutton></emphasis>
+gives some extra available actions, like labelling the partition, as can be
+seen in the screenshot below.</para>
+
+  <mediaobject>
+    <imageobject>
+      <imagedata revision="1" xml:id="drakdiskExpertUnmounted-im1" align="center" fileref="drakdiskExpertUnmounted.png" format="PNG"/>
+    </imageobject>
+  </mediaobject>
+</section>
+\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/docs/mcc-help/cs/drakedm.xml b/docs/mcc-help/cs/drakedm.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..a9853db6
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/mcc-help/cs/drakedm.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,27 @@
+<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xml:id="drakedm" version="5.0" xml:lang="cs">
+  <info>
+    
+
+    <!--2012-09-03 marja: changed title to the title of this screen in MCC -->
+<title xml:id="drakedm-ti1">Nastavit správce obrazovky</title>
+
+    <subtitle>drakedm</subtitle>
+  </info>
+
+  <mediaobject>
+    <imageobject>
+      <imagedata xml:id="drakedm-im1" revision="1" align="center" format="PNG" fileref="drakedm.png"/>
+    </imageobject>
+  </mediaobject>
+
+  <para revision="1" xml:id="drakedm-pa1">Here<footnote>
+      <para revision="1" xml:id="drakedm-pa3">You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis
+role="bold">drakedm</emphasis> as root.</para>
+    </footnote> you can choose which display
+manager to use to log into your desktop environment. Only the ones available
+on your system will be shown.</para>
+
+  <para revision="1" xml:id="drakedm-pa2">Most users will only notice that the provided login screens look
+different. However, there are differences in supported features, too. LXDM
+is a lightweight display manager, KDM and GDM have more extras.</para>
+</section>
+\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/docs/mcc-help/cs/drakfirewall.xml b/docs/mcc-help/cs/drakfirewall.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..87352a21
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/mcc-help/cs/drakfirewall.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,86 @@
+<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xml:id="drakfirewall" version="5.0" xml:lang="cs">
+  <info>
+    <title xml:id="drakfirewall-ti1">Nastavit váš osobní firewall</title>
+
+    <subtitle>drakfirewall</subtitle>
+  </info>
+
+  <mediaobject>
+    <imageobject>
+      <imagedata revision="1" fileref="drakfirewall.png" align="center" xml:id="drakfirewall-im1" format="PNG"/>
+    </imageobject>
+  </mediaobject>
+
+  <para>This tool<footnote>
+      <para>You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis
+role="bold">drakfirewall</emphasis> as root.</para>
+    </footnote> is found under the Security
+tab in the Mageia Control Center labelled "Set up your personal
+firewall". It is the same tool in the first tab of "Configure system
+security, permissions and audit".</para>
+
+  <para>A basic firewall is installed by default with Mageia. All the incoming
+connections from the outside are blocked if they aren't authorised. In the
+first screen above, you can select the services for which outside connection
+attempts are accepted. For your security, uncheck the first box -
+<guilabel>Everything (no firewall)</guilabel> - unless you want to disable
+the firewall, and only check the needed services.</para>
+
+  <para>It is possible to manually enter the port numbers to open. Click on
+<guibutton>Advanced</guibutton> and a new window is opened. In the field
+<guilabel>Other ports</guilabel>, enter the needed ports following these
+examples :</para>
+
+  <para>80/tcp : open the port 80 tcp protocol</para>
+
+  <para>24000:24010/udp : open all the ports from 24000 to 24010 udp protocol</para>
+
+  <para>The listed ports should be separated by a space.</para>
+
+  <para>If the box <guilabel>Log firewall messages in system logs</guilabel> is
+checked, the firewall messages will be saved in system logs</para>
+
+  <mediaobject>
+    <imageobject>
+      <imagedata fileref="drakfirewall2.png"/>
+    </imageobject>
+  </mediaobject>
+
+  <note>
+    <para>If you don't host specific services (web or mail server, file sharing, ...)
+it is completely possible to have nothing checked at all, it is even
+recommended, it won't prevent you from connecting to the internet.</para>
+  </note>
+
+  <para>The next screen deals with the Interactive Firewall options. These feature
+allow you to be warned of connection attempts if at least the first box
+<guilabel>Use Interactive Firewall </guilabel>is checked. Check the second
+box to be warned if the ports are scanned (in order to find a failure
+somewhere and enter your machine). Each box from the third one onwards
+corresponds to a port you opened in the two first screens; in the screenshot
+below, there are two such boxes: SSH server and 80:150/tcp. Check them to be
+warned each time a connection is attempted on those ports.</para>
+
+  <para>These warning are given by alert popups through the network applet.</para>
+
+  <mediaobject>
+    <imageobject>
+      <imagedata fileref="drakfirewall3.png"/>
+    </imageobject>
+  </mediaobject>
+
+  <mediaobject>
+    <imageobject>
+      <imagedata fileref="drakfirewall4.png"/>
+    </imageobject>
+  </mediaobject>
+
+  <para>In the last screen, choose which network interfaces are connected to the
+Internet and must be protected. Once the OK button is clicked, the necessary
+packages are downloaded.</para>
+
+  <tip>
+    <para>If you don't know what to choose, have a look in MCC tab Network &amp;
+Internet, icon Set up a new network interface.</para>
+  </tip>
+</section>
+\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/docs/mcc-help/cs/drakfont.xml b/docs/mcc-help/cs/drakfont.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..e4372aeb
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/mcc-help/cs/drakfont.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,66 @@
+<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:lang="cs" xml:id="drakfont">
+  <info>
+    <title xml:id="drakfont-ti1">Spravovat, přidávat a odebírat písma, včetně importu písem ze systému
+Windows(TM)</title>
+
+    <subtitle>drakfont</subtitle>
+  </info>
+
+  <mediaobject>
+    <imageobject>
+      <imagedata revision="1" xml:id="drakfont-im1" fileref="drakfont.png" align="center" format="PNG"/>
+    </imageobject>
+  </mediaobject>
+
+  <para>This tool<footnote>
+      <para>Tento nástroj můžete spustit z příkazového řádku zadáním <emphasis
+role="bold">drakfont</emphasis> jako superuživatel.</para>
+    </footnote> is present in the Mageia
+Control Center under the <emphasis role="bold">System</emphasis> tab. It
+allows you to manage the fonts available on the computer. The main screen
+above shows:</para>
+
+  <itemizedlist>
+    <listitem>
+      <para>the installed font names, styles and sizes.</para>
+    </listitem>
+
+    <listitem>
+      <para>a preview of the selected font.</para>
+    </listitem>
+
+    <listitem>
+      <para>some buttons explained here later.</para>
+    </listitem>
+  </itemizedlist>
+
+  <para/>
+
+  <para><emphasis role="bold">Získat Windows písma: <emphasis/></emphasis></para>
+
+  <para>This button automatically adds the fonts found on the Windows partition. You
+must have Microsoft Windows installed.</para>
+
+  <para><emphasis role="bold">Options:</emphasis></para>
+
+  <para>It allows you to specify the applications or devices (printers mostly)  able
+to use the fonts.</para>
+
+  <para><emphasis role="bold">Uninstall:</emphasis></para>
+
+  <para>This button is to remove installed fonts and possibly save some place.  Be
+careful when removing fonts because it may have serious consequences on the
+documents that use them.</para>
+
+  <para><emphasis role="bold">Import:</emphasis></para>
+
+  <para>Allows you to add fonts from a third party (CD, internet, ...). The
+supported formats are ttf, pfa, pfb, pcf, pfm and gsf. Click on the
+<emphasis role="bold">Import</emphasis> button and then on <emphasis
+role="bold">Add</emphasis>, a file manager pops up where you can select the
+fonts to install, click on <emphasis role="bold">Install</emphasis> when
+done. They are installed in the folder /usr/share/fonts.</para>
+
+  <para>If the newly installed (or removed) fonts doesn't appear in the Drakfont
+main screen, close and re open it to see the modifications.</para>
+</section>
+\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/docs/mcc-help/cs/drakguard.xml b/docs/mcc-help/cs/drakguard.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..458cb7ae
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/mcc-help/cs/drakguard.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,100 @@
+<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:lang="cs" xml:id="drakguard">
+  <info>
+    <title xml:id="drakguard-ti1">Rodičovský dohled</title>
+
+    <subtitle>drakguard</subtitle>
+  </info>
+
+  <mediaobject>
+    <imageobject>
+      <imagedata fileref="drakguard.png" revision="1" xml:id="drakguard-im1" align="center" format="PNG"/>
+    </imageobject>
+  </mediaobject>
+
+  <para>This tool<footnote>
+      <para>You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis
+role="bold">drakguard</emphasis> as root.</para>
+    </footnote> is found in the Mageia
+Control Center, under the Security tab, labelled <guilabel>Parental
+Control</guilabel>. If you don't see this label, you have to install the
+drakguard package (not installed by default).</para>
+
+  <section>
+    <title>Presentation</title>
+
+    <para>Drakguard is an easy way to set up parental controls on your computer to
+restrict who can do what, and at which times of day. Drakguard has three
+useful capabilities:</para>
+
+    <itemizedlist>
+      <listitem>
+        <para>It restricts web access to named users to set times of day. It does this by
+controlling the shorewall firewall built into Mageia.</para>
+      </listitem>
+
+      <listitem>
+        <para>It blocks execution of particular commands by named users so these users can
+only execute what you accept them to execute.</para>
+      </listitem>
+
+      <listitem>
+        <para>It restricts access to websites, both manually defined through
+blacklists/whitelists, but also dynamically based on the content of the
+website. To achieve this Drakguard uses the leading opensource parental
+control blocker DansGuardian.</para>
+      </listitem>
+    </itemizedlist>
+  </section>
+
+  <section>
+    <title>Nastavení rodičovského dohledu</title>
+
+    <para><warning>
+        <para>If your computer contains hard drive partitions that are formatted in Ext2,
+Ext3, or ReiserFS format you will see a pop up offering to configure ACL on
+your partitions. ACL stands for Access Control Lists, and is a Linux kernel
+feature that allows access to individual files to be restricted to named
+users. ACL is built into Ext4 and Btrfs file systems, but must be enabled by
+an option in Ext2, Ext3, or Reiserfs partitions. If you select 'Yes' to this
+prompt drakguard will configure all your partitions to support ACL, and will
+then suggest you reboot.</para>
+      </warning><guibutton>Enable parental control</guibutton>: If checked, the parental
+control is enabled and the access to <guilabel>Block programs</guilabel> tab
+is opened.</para>
+
+    <para><guibutton>Block all network traffic</guibutton>: If checked, all the
+websites are blocked, except the ones in the whitelist tab. Otherwise, all
+the websites are allowed, except the ones in the blacklist tab.</para>
+
+    <para><guibutton>User access</guibutton>: Users on the left hand side will have
+their access restricted according to the rules you define. Users on the
+right hand side have unrestricted access so adult users of the computer are
+not inconvenienced. Select a user in the left hand side and click on
+<guibutton>Add</guibutton> to add him/her as an allowed user.  Select an
+user in the right hand side and click on <guibutton>Remove</guibutton> to
+remove him/her from the allowed users.</para>
+
+    <para><guibutton>Time control:</guibutton> If checked, internet access is allowed
+with restrictions between the <guilabel>Start</guilabel> time and
+<guilabel>End</guilabel> time. It is totally blocked outside these time
+window.</para>
+
+    <section>
+      <title>Blacklist/Whitelist tab</title>
+
+      <para>Enter the website URL in the first field at the top and click on the
+<guibutton>Add</guibutton> button.</para>
+    </section>
+
+    <section>
+      <title>Block Programs Tab</title>
+
+      <para><guibutton>Block Defined Applications</guibutton>: Enables the use of ACL to
+restrict access to specific applications. Insert the path to the
+applications you wish to block.</para>
+
+      <para><guibutton>Unblock Users list</guibutton>: Users listed on the right hand
+side will not be subject to acl blocking.</para>
+    </section>
+  </section>
+</section>
+\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/docs/mcc-help/cs/drakgw.xml b/docs/mcc-help/cs/drakgw.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..edf1eec2
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/mcc-help/cs/drakgw.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,123 @@
+<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?>
+<section version="5.0" xml:lang="cs" xml:id="drakgw" xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook"
+         xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML"
+         xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg"
+         xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml"
+         xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink"
+         xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook">
+  <info>
+    <title xml:id="drakgw-ti1">Sdílet připojení k internetu s ostatními lokálními počítači</title>
+
+    <subtitle>drakgw</subtitle>
+  </info>
+
+  <mediaobject>
+    <imageobject>
+      <imagedata align="center" fileref="drakgw.png" format="PNG" revision="1"
+                 xml:id="drakgw-im1"/>
+    </imageobject>
+  </mediaobject>
+
+  <para/>
+
+  <section xml:id="drakgw-principles">
+    <title>Zásady</title>
+
+    <para><mediaobject>
+        <imageobject>
+          <imagedata fileref="drakgw-net.png"/>
+        </imageobject>
+      </mediaobject>This is useful when you have a
+computer (3) which has Internet (2) access and is connected also to a local
+network (1). You can use computer (3) as a gateway to give that access to
+other workstations (5) and (6) in the local network (1). For this, the
+gateway must have two interfaces; the first one such as an ethernet card
+must be connected to the local network, and the second one (4) connected to
+the Internet (2).</para>
+
+    <para>The first step is to verify that the network and the access to Internet are
+set up, as documented in <xref linkend="draknetcenter"/>.</para>
+  </section>
+
+  <section xml:id="drakgw-wizard">
+    <title>Gateway wizard</title>
+
+    <para>The wizard<footnote>
+        <para>You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis
+role="bold">drakgw</emphasis> as root.</para>
+      </footnote> offers successive steps
+which are shown below:</para>
+
+    <para><itemizedlist>
+        <listitem>
+          <para>If the wizard does not detect at least two interfaces, it warns about this
+and asks to stop the network and configure the hardware.</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>specify the interface used for the Internet connection. The wizard
+automatically suggests one of the interfaces, but you should verify that
+what is proposed is correct.</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>specify which interface is used for the Lan access. The wizard also proposes
+one, check that this is correct.</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>The wizard proposes parameters for the Lan network, such as IP address, mask
+and domain name. Check that these parameters are compatible with the actual
+configuration. It is recommended that you accept these values.</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>specify if the computer has to be used as a DNS server. If yes, the wizard
+will check that <code>bind</code> is installed.  Otherwise, you have to
+specify the address of a DNS server.</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>specify if the computer is to be used as a DHCP server. If yes, the wizard
+will check that <code>dhcp-server</code> is installed and offer to configure
+it, with start and end addresses in the DHCP range.</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>specify if the computer is to be used as a proxy server. If yes, the wizard
+will check that <code>squid</code> is installed and offer to configure it,
+with the address of the administrator (admin@mydomain.com), name of the
+proxy (myfirewall@mydomaincom), the port (3128) and the cache size (100 Mb).</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>The last step allows you to check if the gateway machine is connected to
+printers and to share them.</para>
+        </listitem>
+      </itemizedlist></para>
+
+    <para>You will be warned about the need to check the firewall if it is active.</para>
+  </section>
+
+  <section xml:id="drakgw-configure">
+    <title>Configure the client</title>
+
+    <para>If you have configured the gateway machine with DHCP, you only need to
+specify in the network configuration tool that you get an address
+automatically (using DHCP). The parameters will be obtained when connecting
+to the network. This method is valid whatever operating system the client is
+using.</para>
+
+    <para>If you must manually specify the network parameters, you must in particular
+specify the gateway by entering the IP-address of the machine acting as the
+gateway.</para>
+  </section>
+
+  <section xml:id="drakgw-stop">
+    <title>Stop connection sharing</title>
+
+    <para>If you want to stop sharing the connection on the Mageia computer, launch
+the tool. It will offer to reconfigure the connection or to stop the
+sharing.</para>
+  </section>
+</section>
diff --git a/docs/mcc-help/cs/drakhosts.xml b/docs/mcc-help/cs/drakhosts.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..afbbd432
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/mcc-help/cs/drakhosts.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,34 @@
+<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xml:id="drakhosts" version="5.0" xml:lang="cs">
+  <info>
+    <title xml:id="drakhosts-ti1">Určení adres počítačů</title>
+
+    <subtitle>drakhosts</subtitle>
+  </info>
+
+  <mediaobject>
+    <imageobject>
+      <imagedata revision="1" align="center" fileref="drakhosts.png" format="PNG" xml:id="drakhosts-im1"/>
+    </imageobject>
+  </mediaobject>
+
+  <para>If some systems on your network grant you services, and have fixed
+IP-addresses, this tool<footnote>
+      <para>You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis
+role="bold">drakhosts</emphasis> as root.</para>
+    </footnote> allows to
+specify a name to access them more easily. Then you can use that name
+instead of the IP-address.</para>
+
+  <para><guibutton>Add</guibutton></para>
+
+  <para>With this button, you add the name for a new system. You will get a window
+to specify the IP-address, the host name for the system, and optionally an
+alias which can be used in the same way that the name is.</para>
+
+  <para><guibutton>Modify</guibutton></para>
+
+  <para>You can access the parameters of an entry previously defined. You get the
+same window.</para>
+
+  <para/>
+</section>
+\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/docs/mcc-help/cs/drakinvictus.xml b/docs/mcc-help/cs/drakinvictus.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..e8c9fa08
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/mcc-help/cs/drakinvictus.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,19 @@
+<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xml:id="drakinvictus" version="5.0" xml:lang="cs">
+  <info>
+    <title xml:id="drakinvictus-ti1">Pokročilé nastavení síťových rozhraní a firewallů</title><subtitle>drakinvictus</subtitle>
+  </info>
+
+  <mediaobject>
+    <imageobject>
+      <imagedata   xml:id="drakinvictus-im1" revision="1" align="center" format="PNG" fileref="drakinvictus.png"/>
+    </imageobject>
+  </mediaobject>
+
+    <para>This page hasn't been written yet for lack of resources. If you think you
+can write this help, please contact <link
+ns2:href="https://wiki.mageia.org/en/Documentation_team"> the Doc
+team.</link> Thanking you in advance.</para>
+
+  <para>You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis
+role="bold">drakinvictus</emphasis> as root.</para>
+</section>
diff --git a/docs/mcc-help/cs/draknetcenter.xml b/docs/mcc-help/cs/draknetcenter.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..18b1c2b9
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/mcc-help/cs/draknetcenter.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,220 @@
+<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xml:id="draknetcenter" version="5.0" xml:lang="cs">
+  
+
+  
+
+  <info>
+    <!-- Written AM desmottes (lebarhon) 2012-08-31 
+Write some text means i can't do it :(
+What must we say about networks out of wired (Ethernet) and wireless (WI fi) like GPRS, bluetooth ? I can't write anything.
+-->
+<!-- -->
+<title xml:id="draknetcenter-ti1">Síťové centrum</title>
+
+    <subtitle>draknetcenter</subtitle>
+  </info>
+
+  <mediaobject>
+    <imageobject>
+      <imagedata revision="1" fileref="draknetcenter.png" align="center" format="PNG" xml:id="draknetcenter-im1"/>
+    </imageobject>
+  </mediaobject>
+
+  <para>This tool<footnote>
+      <para>You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis
+role="bold">draknetcenter</emphasis> as root.</para>
+    </footnote> is found under the Network
+&amp; Internet tab in the Mageia Control Center labelled "Network Center"</para>
+
+  <para/>
+
+  <section>
+    <title>Úvod</title>
+
+    <para>When this tool is launched, a window opens listing all the networks
+configured on the computer, whatever their type (wired, wireless, satellite,
+etc.). When clicking on one of them, three or four buttons appear, depending
+on the network type, to allow you to look after the network, change its
+settings or connect/disconnect. This tool isn't intended to create a
+network, for this see <guilabel>Set up a new network interface (LAN, ISDN,
+ADSL, ...)</guilabel> in the same MCC tab.</para>
+
+    <para>In the screenshot below, given as example, we can see two networks, the
+first one is wired and connected, recognizable by this icon <inlinemediaobject>
+        <imageobject>
+          <imagedata fileref="draknetcenterEthernet-on.png"/>
+        </imageobject>
+      </inlinemediaobject> (this one is not connected<inlinemediaobject>
+        <imageobject>
+          <imagedata fileref="draknetcenterEthernet-off.png"/>
+        </imageobject>
+      </inlinemediaobject> ) and the second section shows wireless
+networks, not connected recognizable by this icon <inlinemediaobject>
+        <imageobject>
+          <imagedata fileref="draknetcenterWireless-off.png"/>
+        </imageobject>
+      </inlinemediaobject> and this one <inlinemediaobject>
+        <imageobject>
+          <imagedata fileref="draknetcenterWireless-on.png"/>
+        </imageobject>
+      </inlinemediaobject>if connected. For the other network types,
+the colour code is always the same, green if connected and red if not
+connected.</para>
+
+    <para>In the wireless part of the screen, you can also see all the detected
+networks, with the <guilabel>SSID</guilabel>, the <guilabel>Signal
+strengh</guilabel>, if they are encrypted (in red) or not (in green), and
+the <guilabel>Operating mode</guilabel>. Click on the chosen one and then
+either on <guibutton>Monitor</guibutton>, <guibutton>Configure</guibutton>
+or <guibutton>Connect</guibutton>. It is possible here to go from a network
+to another one. If a private network is selected, the Network Settings
+window (see below) will open and ask you for extra settings ( an encryption
+key in particular).</para>
+
+    <para>Click on <guibutton>Refresh</guibutton> to update the screen.</para>
+
+    <mediaobject>
+      <imageobject>
+        <imagedata fileref="draknetcenter1.png"/>
+      </imageobject>
+    </mediaobject>
+
+    <para/>
+  </section>
+
+  <section>
+    <title>The Monitor button</title>
+
+    <mediaobject>
+      <imageobject>
+        <imagedata fileref="draknetcenter4.png"/>
+      </imageobject>
+    </mediaobject>
+
+    <para>This button allows you to watch the network activity, downloads (toward the
+PC, in red) and uploads (toward the Internet, in green). The same screen is
+available by right clicking on the <guimenu>Internet icon in the system tray
+-> Monitor Network</guimenu>.</para>
+
+    <para>There is a tab for each network (here eth0 is the wired network, lo the
+local loopback and wlan0 the wireless network) and a tab connection which
+gives details about connection status.</para>
+
+    <note>
+      <para>At the bottom of the window is a title <guilabel>Traffic
+accounting</guilabel>, we will look at that in the next section.</para>
+    </note>
+  </section>
+
+  <section>
+    <title>The Configure button</title>
+
+    <para><emphasis role="bold">A - For a wired network</emphasis></para>
+
+    <mediaobject>
+      <imageobject>
+        <imagedata fileref="draknetcenter2.png"/>
+      </imageobject>
+    </mediaobject>
+
+    <para>It is possible to change all the settings given during network
+creation. Most of the time, checking <guibutton>Automatic IP</guibutton>
+<guibutton>(BOOTP/DHCP)</guibutton> will do, but in case of problems, manual
+configuration may give better results.</para>
+
+    <para>For a residential network, the <guilabel>IP address</guilabel> always looks
+like 192.168.0.x, <guilabel>Netmask</guilabel> is 255.255.255.0, and the
+<guilabel>Gateway</guilabel> and <guilabel>DNS servers</guilabel> are
+available from your providers website.</para>
+
+    <para><guibutton>Enable traffic accounting</guibutton> if checked this will count
+the traffic on a hourly, daily or monthly basis. The results are visible in
+the Network monitor detailed in the previous section. Once enabled, you may
+have to reconnect to the network.</para>
+
+    <para><emphasis role="bold">Allow interface to be controlled by Network
+Manager:</emphasis></para>
+
+    <para>This section hasn't been written yet for lack of resources. If you think you
+can write this help, please contact <link
+ns2:href="https://wiki.mageia.org/en/Documentation_team"> the Doc
+team.</link> Thanking you in advance.</para>
+
+    <para><guibutton>The button Advanced:</guibutton></para>
+
+    <para>This section hasn't been written yet for lack of resources. If you think you
+can write this help, please contact <link
+ns2:href="https://wiki.mageia.org/en/Documentation_team"> the Doc
+team.</link> Thanking you in advance.</para>
+
+    <mediaobject>
+      <imageobject>
+        <imagedata fileref="draknetcenter5.png"/>
+      </imageobject>
+    </mediaobject>
+
+    <para><emphasis role="bold">B - For a wireless network</emphasis></para>
+
+    <para>Only the items not already seen above are explained.</para>
+
+    <mediaobject>
+      <imageobject>
+        <imagedata fileref="draknetcenter3.png"/>
+      </imageobject>
+    </mediaobject>
+
+    <para><emphasis role="bold">Operating mode:</emphasis></para>
+
+    <para>Select <guilabel>Managed</guilabel> if the connection is via an access
+point, there is an <emphasis role="bold">ESSID</emphasis> detected.  Select
+<guilabel>Ad-hoc</guilabel> if it is a peer to peer network. Select
+<emphasis role="bold">Master</emphasis> if your network card is used as the
+access point, your network card needs to support this mode.</para>
+
+    <para><emphasis role="bold">Encryption mode and Encryption key:</emphasis></para>
+
+    <para>If it is a private network, you need to know these settings.</para>
+
+    <para><guilabel>WEP</guilabel> uses a password and is weaker than WPA which uses a
+passphrase. <guilabel>WPA Pre-Shared Key</guilabel> is also called WPA
+personal or WPA home. <guilabel>WPA Enterprise</guilabel> is not often used
+in private networks.</para>
+
+    <para><emphasis role="bold">Allow access point roaming</emphasis>:</para>
+
+    <para>Roaming is a technology which enables allows computer to change its access
+point while remaining connected to the network.</para>
+
+    <para><guibutton>The button Advanced:</guibutton></para>
+
+    <para>This page hasn't been written yet for lack of resources. If you think you
+can write this help, please contact <link
+ns2:href="https://wiki.mageia.org/en/Documentation_team"> the Doc
+team.</link> Thanking you in advance.</para>
+
+    <mediaobject>
+      <imageobject>
+        <imagedata fileref="draknetcenter6.png"/>
+      </imageobject>
+    </mediaobject>
+
+    <para/>
+  </section>
+
+  <section>
+    <title>The Advanced Settings button</title>
+
+    <para>This section hasn't been written yet for lack of resources. If you think you
+can write this help, please contact <link
+ns2:href="https://wiki.mageia.org/en/Documentation_team"> the Doc
+team.</link> Thanking you in advance.</para>
+
+    <mediaobject>
+      <imageobject>
+        <imagedata fileref="draknetcenter7.png"/>
+      </imageobject>
+    </mediaobject>
+
+    <para/>
+  </section>
+</section>
+\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/docs/mcc-help/cs/draknetprofile.xml b/docs/mcc-help/cs/draknetprofile.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..cb7f6726
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/mcc-help/cs/draknetprofile.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,19 @@
+<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xml:id="draknetprofile" version="5.0" xml:lang="cs">
+  <info>
+    <title xml:id="draknetprofile-ti1">Spravovat různé síťové profily</title><subtitle>draknetprofile</subtitle>
+  </info>
+
+  <mediaobject>
+    <imageobject>
+      <imagedata   xml:id="draknetprofile-im1" revision="1" align="center" format="PNG" fileref="draknetprofile.png"/>
+    </imageobject>
+  </mediaobject>
+
+   <para>This page hasn't been written yet for lack of resources. If you think you
+can write this help, please contact <link
+ns2:href="https://wiki.mageia.org/en/Documentation_team"> the Doc
+team.</link> Thanking you in advance.</para>
+
+  <para>You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis
+role="bold">draknetprofile</emphasis> as root.</para>
+</section>
diff --git a/docs/mcc-help/cs/draknfs.xml b/docs/mcc-help/cs/draknfs.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..2c628f0d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/mcc-help/cs/draknfs.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,165 @@
+<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?>
+<section version="5.0" xml:lang="cs" xml:id="draknfs" xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook"
+         xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML"
+         xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg"
+         xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml"
+         xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink"
+         xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook">
+  <info>
+    <title xml:id="draknfs-ti1">Nastavit sdílení disků a adresářů pomocí NFS</title>
+
+    <subtitle>draknfs</subtitle>
+  </info>
+
+  <mediaobject>
+    <imageobject>
+      <imagedata align="center" fileref="draknfs.png" format="PNG"
+                 revision="1"  xml:id="draknfs-im1"/>
+    </imageobject>
+  </mediaobject>
+
+  <para/>
+
+  <section>
+    <title>Prerequisites</title>
+
+    <para>When the wizard<footnote>
+        <para>You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis
+role="bold">draknfs</emphasis> as root.</para>
+      </footnote> is launched for the
+first time, it may display the following message:</para>
+
+    <blockquote>
+      <para>The package nfs-utils needs to be installed. Do you want to install it?</para>
+    </blockquote>
+
+    <para>After completing the installation, a window with an empty list is displayed.</para>
+  </section>
+
+  <section>
+    <title>Main window</title>
+
+    <para>A list of directories which are shared is displayed. At this step, the list
+is empty. The <guibutton>Add</guibutton> button gives access to a
+configuration tool.</para>
+  </section>
+
+  <section>
+    <title>Upravit záznam</title>
+
+    <para>The configuration tool is labeled "Modify entry". It may be also launched
+with the <guibutton>Modify</guibutton> button. The following parameters are
+available.</para>
+
+    <mediaobject>
+      <imageobject>
+        <imagedata align="center" fileref="draknfs4.png" format="PNG"
+                   revision="1" xml:id="draknfs-im4"/>
+      </imageobject>
+    </mediaobject>
+
+    <section>
+      <title>Adresář NFS</title>
+
+      <para>Here you can specify which directory is to be shared. The
+<guibutton>Directory</guibutton> button gives access to a browser to choose
+it.</para>
+    </section>
+
+    <section>
+      <title>Přístup k počítači</title>
+
+      <para>Here you can specify the hosts that are authorized to access the shared
+directory.</para>
+
+      <para>NFS clients may be specified in a number of ways:</para>
+
+      <para><emphasis>single host</emphasis>: a host either by an abbreviated name
+recognized be the resolver, fully qualified domain name, or an IP address</para>
+
+      <para><emphasis>netgroups</emphasis>: NIS netgroups may be given as @group.</para>
+
+      <para><emphasis>wildcards</emphasis>: machine names may contain the wildcard
+characters * and ?. For instance: *.cs.foo.edu matches all hosts in the
+domain cs.foo.edu.</para>
+
+      <para><emphasis>IP networks</emphasis>: you can also export directories to all
+hosts on an IP (sub-)network simultaneously. For example, either
+`/255.255.252.0' or `/22' appended to the network base address.</para>
+    </section>
+
+    <section>
+      <title>Mapování uživatelského ID</title>
+
+      <para><emphasis>map root user as anonymous</emphasis>: maps requests from uid/gid
+0 to the anonymous uid/gid (root_squash). The root user from the client
+cannot read or write to the files on the server which are created by root on
+the server itself.</para>
+
+      <para><emphasis>allow real remote root access</emphasis>: turn off root
+squashing. This option is mainly useful for diskless clients
+(no_root_squash).</para>
+
+      <para><emphasis>map all users to anonymous user</emphasis>: maps all uids and gids
+to the anonymous user (all_squash). Useful for NFS-exported public FTP
+directories, news spool directories, etc. The opposite option is no user UID
+mapping (no_all_squash), which is the default setting.</para>
+
+      <para><emphasis>anonuid and anongid</emphasis>: explicitly set the uid and gid of
+the anonymous account.</para>
+    </section>
+
+    <section>
+      <title>Pokročilé volby</title>
+
+      <para><emphasis>Secured Connection</emphasis>: this option requires that requests
+originate on an internet port less than IPPORT_RESERVED (1024).  This option
+is on by default.</para>
+
+      <para><emphasis>Read-Only share</emphasis>: allow either only read or both read
+and write requests on this NFS volume. The default is to disallow any
+request which changes the filesystem. This can also be made explicit by
+using this option.</para>
+
+      <para><emphasis>Synchronous access</emphasis>: prevents the NFS server from
+violating the NFS protocol and to reply to requests before any changes made
+by these requests have been committed to stable storage (e.g. disc drive).</para>
+
+      <para><emphasis>Subtree checking</emphasis>: enable subtree checking which can
+help improve security in some cases, but can decrease reliability. See
+exports(5) man page for more details.</para>
+    </section>
+  </section>
+
+  <section>
+    <title>Menu entries</title>
+
+    <para>So far the list has at least one entry.</para>
+
+    <mediaobject>
+      <imageobject>
+        <imagedata align="center" fileref="draknfs5.png" format="PNG"
+                   revision="1" xml:id="draknfs-im5"/>
+      </imageobject>
+    </mediaobject>
+
+    <section>
+      <title>File|Write conf</title>
+
+      <para>Save the current configuration.</para>
+    </section>
+
+    <section>
+      <title>NFS Server|Restart</title>
+
+      <para>The server is stopped and restarted with the current configuration files.</para>
+    </section>
+
+    <section>
+      <title>NFS Server|Reload</title>
+
+      <para>The configuration displayed is reloaded from the current configuration
+files.</para>
+    </section>
+  </section>
+</section>
diff --git a/docs/mcc-help/cs/drakproxy.xml b/docs/mcc-help/cs/drakproxy.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..05641e56
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/mcc-help/cs/drakproxy.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,37 @@
+<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?>
+<section version="5.0" xml:lang="cs" xml:id="drakproxy"
+         xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook"
+         xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML"
+         xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg"
+         xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml"
+         xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink"
+         xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook">
+  <info>
+    <title xml:id="drakproxy-ti1">Proxy</title>
+
+    <subtitle>drakproxy</subtitle>
+  </info>
+
+  <mediaobject>
+    <imageobject>
+      <imagedata align="center"  fileref="drakproxy.png"
+                 format="PNG" revision="1"  xml:id="drakproxy-im1"/>
+    </imageobject>
+  </mediaobject>
+
+  <para>If you have to use a proxy server to access to the internet, you can use
+this tool<footnote>
+      <para>You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis
+role="bold">drakproxy</emphasis> as root.</para>
+    </footnote> to configure it. Your net
+administrator will give you the information you need. You can also specify
+some services which can be accessed without the proxy by exception.</para>
+
+  <para>From Wikipedia, on 2012-09-24, article Proxy server: In computer networks, a
+proxy server is a server (a computer system or an application)  that acts as
+an intermediary for requests from clients seeking resources from other
+servers. A client connects to the proxy server, requesting some service,
+such as a file, connection, web page, or other resource available from a
+different server. The proxy server evaluates the request as a way to
+simplify and control their complexity.</para>
+</section>
diff --git a/docs/mcc-help/cs/drakrpm-edit-media.xml b/docs/mcc-help/cs/drakrpm-edit-media.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..aa020f18
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/mcc-help/cs/drakrpm-edit-media.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,211 @@
+<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:lang="cs" xml:id="drakrpm-edit-media">
+  <info>
+    <title xml:id="drakrpm-edit-media-ti1">Nastavení zdrojů</title>
+
+    <subtitle>drakrpm-edit-media</subtitle>
+  </info>
+
+  
+
+  
+
+  <mediaobject>
+    <!-- 2013-01-06 marja - added Qilaq's and spturtle's corrections -->
+<!--2013-10-22 marja - improved wording, thanks to Aragorn :-) 
+                       - adjusted "Add" part to changed behaviour of this tool
+		       (no longer a choice to only add "update sources" is
+		       given) -->
+<imageobject>
+      <imagedata xml:id="drakrpm-edit-media-im1" fileref="drakrpm-edit-media.png" revision="1" align="center" format="PNG"/>
+    </imageobject>
+  </mediaobject>
+
+  <para><important>
+      <para>First thing to do after an install is to add software sources (also known as
+repositories, media, mirrors). That means you must select the media sources
+to be used to install and update packages and applications. (see Add button
+below).</para>
+    </important> <note>
+      <para>If you install (or upgrade) Mageia using an optical media (DVD or CD) or a
+USB device, there will be a software source configured to the optical media
+used. To avoid being asked to insert the media when you install new
+packages, you should disable (or delete) this media.  (It will have the
+media type CD-Rom).</para>
+    </note> <note>
+      <para>Your system is running under an architecture which may be 32-bit (called
+i586), or 64-bit (called x86_64). Some packages are independent of whether
+your system is 32-bit or 64-bit; these are called noarch packages. They
+don't have their own noarch directories on the mirrors, but are all in both
+the i586 and the x86_64 media.</para>
+    </note></para>
+
+  <para>This tool is present in the Mageia Control Center under the tab <emphasis
+role="bold">Software management.</emphasis><footnote>
+      <para>You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis
+role="bold">drakrpm-edit-media</emphasis> as root.</para>
+    </footnote></para>
+
+  <section>
+    <title xml:id="drakrpm-edit-media-columns">The columns</title>
+
+    <bridgehead>Column Enable:</bridgehead>
+
+    <para>The checked media will be used to install new packages. Be cautious with
+some media such as Testing and Debug, they could make your system unusable.</para>
+
+    <bridgehead>Column Update:</bridgehead>
+
+    <para>The checked media will be used to update packages, it must be enabled. Only
+media with "Update" in its name should be selected. For security reasons,
+this column isn't modifiable in this tool, you must open a console as root
+and type <emphasis role="bold">drakrpm-edit-media --expert.</emphasis></para>
+
+    <bridgehead>Column medium:</bridgehead>
+
+    <para>Display the medium name. Mageia official repositories for final release
+versions contain at least:</para>
+
+    <itemizedlist>
+      <listitem>
+        <para><emphasis role="bold">Core</emphasis> which contains most programs available
+supported by Mageia.</para>
+      </listitem>
+
+      <listitem>
+        <para><emphasis role="bold">Nonfree</emphasis> which contains some programs which
+are not free</para>
+      </listitem>
+
+      <listitem>
+        <para><emphasis role="bold">Tainted</emphasis> free software for which there might
+be patent claims in some countries.</para>
+
+        <para>Each medium has 4 sub-sections:</para>
+      </listitem>
+
+      <listitem>
+        <para><emphasis role="bold">Release</emphasis> the packages as of the day the this
+version of Mageia was released.</para>
+      </listitem>
+
+      <listitem>
+        <para><emphasis role="bold">Updates</emphasis> the packages updated since release
+due to security or bug concerns. Everyone should have this medium enabled,
+even with a very slow internet connection.</para>
+      </listitem>
+
+      <listitem>
+        <para><emphasis role="bold">Backports</emphasis> some packages of new versions
+backported from Cauldron (the next version under development).</para>
+      </listitem>
+
+      <listitem>
+        <para><emphasis role="bold">Testing</emphasis> which is used for temporary tests
+of new updates, to allow the bug reporters and the QA team to validate the
+corrections.</para>
+      </listitem>
+    </itemizedlist>
+  </section>
+
+  <section>
+    <title xml:id="drakrpm-edit-media-right-button">The buttons on the right</title>
+
+    <para><guibutton>Remove:</guibutton></para>
+
+    <para>To remove a medium, click on it and then on this button. It is wise to
+remove the medium used for the installation (CD or DVD for example)  since
+all the packages it contains are in the official Core release medium.</para>
+
+    <para><guibutton>Edit:</guibutton></para>
+
+    <para>Allows you to modify the selected medium settings, (URL, downloader and
+proxy).</para>
+
+    <para><guibutton>Add:</guibutton></para>
+
+    <para>Add the official repositories available on the Internet. These repositories
+contain only safe and well tested software. Clicking on the "Add" button
+adds the mirrorlist to your configuration, it is designed to make sure that
+you install and update from a mirror close to you. If you prefer to choose a
+specific mirror, then add it by choosing "Add a specific media mirror" from
+the drop-down "File" menu.</para>
+
+    <para><guibutton>Up and down arrows:</guibutton></para>
+
+    <para>Change the list order. When Drakrpm looks for a package, it reads the list
+in the displayed order and will install the first package found for the same
+release number - in the event of a version mismatch, the latest release will
+be installed. So if possible, put the fastest repositories at the top.</para>
+  </section>
+
+  <section>
+    <title xml:id="drakrpm-edit-media-menu">The menu</title>
+
+    <para><guimenu>File -> Update:</guimenu></para>
+
+    <para>A window pops up with the media list. Select the ones you want to update and
+click on the <guibutton>Update</guibutton> button.</para>
+
+    <para><guimenu>File -> Add a specific media mirror:</guimenu></para>
+
+    <para>Suppose you aren't happy with the actual mirror, because for example it's
+too slow or often unavailable, you can choose another mirror. Select all the
+actual media and click on <guibutton>Remove</guibutton> to take them
+out. Click on <guimenu>File -> Add a specific media mirror</guimenu>, choose
+between update only or the full set (if you do not know, choose the
+<guibutton>Full set of sources</guibutton>) and accept the contact by
+clicking on <guibutton>Yes</guibutton>. This window opens:</para>
+
+    <mediaobject>
+      <imageobject>
+        <imagedata fileref="drakrpmEditMedia2.png"/>
+      </imageobject>
+    </mediaobject>
+
+    <para>You can see, on the left, a list of countries, choose yours or one very
+close by clicking on the > symbol, this will display all the available
+mirrors in that country. Select one and click on <guibutton>OK</guibutton>.</para>
+
+    <para><guimenu>File -> Add a custom medium:</guimenu></para>
+
+    <para>It is possible to install a new media (from a third party for example) that
+isn't supported by Mageia. A new window appears:</para>
+
+    <para><mediaobject>
+        <imageobject>
+          <imagedata fileref="rpmdrakeEditMedia1.png"/>
+        </imageobject>
+      </mediaobject>Select the medium type, find a smart
+name that well define the medium and give the URL (or the path, according to
+the medium type)</para>
+
+    <para><guimenu>Options -> Global options:</guimenu></para>
+
+    <para>This item allows you to choose when to "Verify RPMs to be installed" (always
+or never), the download program (curl, wget or aria2) and to define the
+download policy for information about the packages (on demand -by default-,
+update only, always or never).</para>
+
+    <para><guimenu>Options -> Manage keys:</guimenu></para>
+
+    <para>To guarantee a high level of security, digital keys are used to authenticate
+the media. It is possible for each medium to allow or disallow a key. In the
+window that appear, select a medium and then click on
+<guibutton>Add</guibutton> to allow a new key or to select a key and click
+on <guibutton>Remove</guibutton> to disallow that key.</para>
+
+    <para><warning>
+        <para>Do this with care, as with all security-related questions</para>
+      </warning><guimenu>Options -> Proxy:</guimenu></para>
+
+    <para>If you need to use a proxy server for internet access, you can configure it
+here. You only need to give the <guibutton>Proxy hostname</guibutton> and if
+necessary a <guilabel>Username</guilabel> and <guilabel>Password</guilabel>.</para>
+
+    <para/>
+
+    <para>For more information about configuring the media, see <link
+ns2:href="https://wiki.mageia.org/en/Software_management">the Mageia Wiki
+page</link>.</para>
+  </section>
+</section>
+\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/docs/mcc-help/cs/draksambashare.xml b/docs/mcc-help/cs/draksambashare.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..7063a9de
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/mcc-help/cs/draksambashare.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,251 @@
+<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?>
+<section version="5.0" xml:lang="cs" xml:id="draksambashare"
+         xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook"
+         xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML"
+         xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg"
+         xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml"
+         xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink"
+         xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook">
+  <info>
+    <title xml:id="draksambashare-ti1">Share directories and drives with Samba</title>
+
+    <subtitle>draksambashare</subtitle>
+  </info>
+
+  <mediaobject>
+    <imageobject>
+      <imagedata align="center"  fileref="draksambashare.png"
+                 format="PNG" revision="1" 
+                 xml:id="draksambashare-im1"/>
+    </imageobject>
+  </mediaobject>
+
+  <para/>
+
+  <section>
+    <title>Úvod</title>
+
+    <para>Samba is a protocol used in different Operating Systems to share some
+resources like directories or printers. This tool allows you to configure
+the machine as a Samba server using the protocol SMB/CIFS. This protocol is
+also used by Windows(R) and workstations with this OS can access the
+resources of the Samba server.</para>
+  </section>
+
+  <section>
+    <title>Preparation</title>
+
+    <para>To be accessed from other workstations, the server has to have a fixed IP
+address. This can be specified directly on the server, for example with
+<xref linkend="draknetcenter-ti1"/>, or at the DHCP server which identifies
+the station with its MAC-address and give it always the same address. The
+firewall has also to allow the incoming requests to the Samba server.</para>
+
+    <para/>
+  </section>
+
+  <section>
+    <title>Wizard - Standalone server</title>
+
+    <para>At the first run, the tools <footnote>
+        <para>You can start this tool from the command line, by typing<emphasis
+role="bold"> draksambashare</emphasis> as root.</para>
+      </footnote> checks if
+needed packages are installed and proposes to install them if they are not
+yet present. Then the wizard to configure the Samba server is launched.</para>
+
+    <mediaobject>
+      <imageobject>
+        <imagedata align="center"  fileref="draksambashare0.png"
+                   format="PNG" revision="1" 
+                   xml:id="draksambashare0-im1"/>
+      </imageobject>
+    </mediaobject>
+
+    <para>In the next window the Standalone server configuration option is already
+selected.</para>
+
+    <mediaobject>
+      <imageobject>
+        <imagedata align="center"  fileref="draksambashare1.png"
+                   format="PNG" revision="1" 
+                   xml:id="draksambashare1-im1"/>
+      </imageobject>
+    </mediaobject>
+
+    <para>Then specify the name of the workgroup. This name should be the same for the
+access to the shared resources.</para>
+
+    <para>The netbios name is the name which will be used to designate the server on
+the network.</para>
+
+    <mediaobject>
+      <imageobject>
+        <imagedata align="center"  fileref="draksambashare2.png"
+                   format="PNG" revision="1" 
+                   xml:id="draksambashare2-im1"/>
+      </imageobject>
+    </mediaobject>
+
+    <para>Choose the security mode:</para>
+
+    <itemizedlist>
+      <listitem>
+        <para><guilabel>user</guilabel>: the client must be authorized to access the
+resource</para>
+      </listitem>
+
+      <listitem>
+        <para><guilabel>share</guilabel>: the client authenticates itself separately for
+each share</para>
+      </listitem>
+    </itemizedlist>
+
+    <para>You can specify which hosts are allowed to access the resources, with IP
+address or host name.</para>
+
+    <mediaobject>
+      <imageobject>
+        <imagedata align="center" fileref="draksambashare3.png" format="PNG"
+                   revision="1" xml:id="draksambashare3-im1"/>
+      </imageobject>
+    </mediaobject>
+
+    <para>Specify the server banner. The banner is the way this server will be
+described in the Windows workstations.</para>
+
+    <mediaobject>
+      <imageobject>
+        <imagedata align="center"  fileref="draksambashare4.png"
+                   format="PNG" revision="1" 
+                   xml:id="draksambashare-im4"/>
+      </imageobject>
+    </mediaobject>
+
+    <para>The place where Samba can log information can be specified at the next step.</para>
+
+    <mediaobject>
+      <imageobject>
+        <imagedata align="center"  fileref="draksambashare5.png"
+                   format="PNG" revision="1" 
+                   xml:id="draksambashare-im5"/>
+      </imageobject>
+    </mediaobject>
+
+    <para>The wizard displays a list of the chosen parameters before you accept the
+configuration. When accepted, the configuration will be written in
+<code>/etc/samba/smb.conf</code>.</para>
+
+    <mediaobject>
+      <imageobject>
+        <imagedata align="center"  fileref="draksambashare6.png"
+                   format="PNG" revision="1" 
+                   xml:id="draksambashare-im6"/>
+      </imageobject>
+    </mediaobject>
+  </section>
+
+  <section>
+    <title>Wizard - Primary domain controller</title>
+
+    <para><mediaobject>
+        <imageobject>
+          <imagedata fileref="draksambashare13.png"/>
+        </imageobject>
+      </mediaobject>If the "Primary domain controller"
+option is selected, the wizard asks for indication if Wins is to support or
+not and to provide admin users names. The following steps are then the same
+as for standalone server, except you can choose also the security mode:</para>
+
+    <itemizedlist>
+      <listitem>
+        <para><guilabel>domain</guilabel>: provides a mechanism for storing all user and
+group accounts in a central, shared, account repository.  The centralized
+account repository is shared between (security)  controllers.</para>
+      </listitem>
+    </itemizedlist>
+  </section>
+
+  <section>
+    <title>Declare a directory to share</title>
+
+    <para>With the <guibutton>Add</guibutton> button, we get:</para>
+
+    <mediaobject>
+      <imageobject>
+        <imagedata align="center" fileref="draksambashare15.png" format="PNG"
+                   revision="1" xml:id="draksambashare-im7"/>
+      </imageobject>
+    </mediaobject>
+
+    <para>A new entry is thus added. It can be modified with the
+<guibutton>Modify</guibutton> button. Options can be edited, such as whether
+the directory is visible to the public, writable or browseable.  The share
+name can not be modified.</para>
+
+    <mediaobject>
+      <imageobject>
+        <imagedata align="center"  fileref="draksambashare16.png"
+                   format="PNG" revision="1" 
+                   xml:id="draksambashare-im8"/>
+      </imageobject>
+    </mediaobject>
+
+    <para/>
+  </section>
+
+  <section>
+    <title>Menu entries</title>
+
+    <para>When the list has at least one entry, menu entries can be used.</para>
+
+    <formalpara>
+      <title>File|Write conf</title>
+
+      <para>Save the current configuration in <code>/etc/samba/smb.conf</code>.</para>
+    </formalpara>
+
+    <formalpara>
+      <title>Samba server|Configure</title>
+
+      <para>The wizard can be run again with this command.</para>
+    </formalpara>
+
+    <formalpara>
+      <title>Samba server|Restart</title>
+
+      <para>The server is stopped and restarted with the current configuration files.</para>
+    </formalpara>
+
+    <formalpara>
+      <title>Samba Server|Reload</title>
+
+      <para>The configuration displayed is reloaded from the current configuration
+files.</para>
+    </formalpara>
+  </section>
+
+  <section>
+    <title>Printers share</title>
+
+    <para>Samba also allows you to share printers.</para>
+
+    <para><mediaobject>
+        <imageobject>
+          <imagedata fileref="draksambashare17.png"/>
+        </imageobject>
+      </mediaobject></para>
+  </section>
+
+  <section>
+    <title>Samba users</title>
+
+    <para>In this tab, you can add users who are allowed to access the shared
+resources when authentication is required. You can add users from <xref
+linkend="userdrake-ti1"/><mediaobject>
+        <imageobject>
+          <imagedata fileref="draksambashare18.png"/>
+        </imageobject>
+      </mediaobject></para>
+  </section>
+</section>
diff --git a/docs/mcc-help/cs/draksec.xml b/docs/mcc-help/cs/draksec.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..4d1c434a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/mcc-help/cs/draksec.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,54 @@
+<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:lang="cs" xml:id="draksec">
+  <info>
+    <title xml:id="draksec-ti1">Konfigurace ověřování na nástroje Mageia</title>
+
+    <subtitle>draksec</subtitle>
+  </info>
+
+  <mediaobject>
+    <imageobject>
+      <imagedata xml:id="draksec-im1" revision="1" align="center" format="PNG" fileref="draksec0.png"/>
+    </imageobject>
+  </mediaobject>
+
+  <para>This tool<footnote>
+      <para>You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis
+role="bold">draksec</emphasis> as root.</para>
+    </footnote>is present in the Mageia
+Control Center under the tab <emphasis role="bold">Security</emphasis></para>
+
+  <para>It allows to give the regular users the needed rights to accomplish tasks
+usually done by the administrator.</para>
+
+  <para>Click on the little arrow before the item you want to drop down:
+  </para>
+
+  <mediaobject>
+    <imageobject>
+      <imagedata fileref="draksec.png"/>
+    </imageobject>
+  </mediaobject>
+
+  <para>Most of the tools available in the Mageia Control Center are displayed in
+the left side of the window (see the screenshot above) and for each tool, a
+drop down list on the right side gives the choice between:</para>
+
+  <itemizedlist>
+    <listitem>
+      <para>Default: The launch mode depends on the chosen security level. See in the
+same MCC tab, the tool "Configure system security, permissions and audit".</para>
+    </listitem>
+
+    <listitem>
+      <para>User password: The user password is asked before the tool launching.</para>
+    </listitem>
+
+    <listitem>
+      <para>Administrator password: The root password is asked before the tool launching</para>
+    </listitem>
+
+    <listitem>
+      <para>No password: The tool is launched without asking any password.</para>
+    </listitem>
+  </itemizedlist>
+</section>
+\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/docs/mcc-help/cs/draksnapshot-config.xml b/docs/mcc-help/cs/draksnapshot-config.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..a52a9816
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/mcc-help/cs/draksnapshot-config.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,49 @@
+<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?>
+<section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook"
+	xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML"
+	xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg"
+	xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml"
+	xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink"
+	xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook"
+	xmlns:xlink="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink"
+       	xml:id="draksnapshot-config" version="5.0" xml:lang="cs">
+  <info>
+	  <title xml:id="draksnapshot-config-ti1">Snímky</title>
+	  <subtitle>draksnapshot-config</subtitle>
+  </info>
+
+  <mediaobject>
+    <imageobject>
+	    <imagedata   xml:id="draksnapshot-config-im1" revision="1" align="center"
+		    format="PNG" fileref="draksnapshot-config.png"/>
+    </imageobject>
+  </mediaobject>
+
+  <para>This tool<footnote><para>You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis
+role="bold">draksnapshot-config </emphasis> as root.</para></footnote> is available in MCC's
+<guilabel>System</guilabel> tab, in the <guilabel>Administration
+tools</guilabel> section.</para>
+  <para>When you start this tool in MCC for the first time, you will see a message
+about installing draksnapshot. Click on <guibutton>Install</guibutton> to
+proceed. Draksnapshot and some other packages it needs will be installed.</para>
+
+ <para>Click again on <guilabel>Snapshots</guilabel>, you will see the
+<guilabel>Settings</guilabel> screen. Tick <guilabel>Enable
+Backups</guilabel> and, if you want to backup the whole system,
+<guilabel>Backup the whole system</guilabel>.</para>
+  <para>If you only want to backup part of your directories, then choose
+<guilabel>Advanced</guilabel>. You will see a little pop-up screen. Use the
+<guibutton>Add</guibutton> and <guibutton>Remove</guibutton> buttons next to
+the <guilabel>Backup list</guilabel> to include or exclude directories and
+files from the backup. Use the same buttons next to the
+<guilabel>Exclude</guilabel> list to remove subdirectories and/or files from
+the chosen directories, that should <emphasis role="bold">not</emphasis> be
+included in the backup. Click on <guibutton>Close</guibutton> when you are
+done.</para>
+	  <para>Now give the path to <guilabel>Where to backup</guilabel>, or choose the
+<guibutton>Browse</guibutton> button to select the correct path. Any mounted
+USB-key or external HD can be found in <emphasis
+role="bold">/run/media/your_user_name/</emphasis>.
+  </para>
+  <para>Click on <guibutton>Apply</guibutton> to make the snapshot.</para>
+</section>
diff --git a/docs/mcc-help/cs/draksound.xml b/docs/mcc-help/cs/draksound.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..8a8b5080
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/mcc-help/cs/draksound.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,61 @@
+<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xml:id="draksound" version="5.0" xml:lang="cs">
+  <info>
+    <title xml:id="draksound-ti1">Nastavit zvuk</title>
+
+    <subtitle>draksound</subtitle>
+  </info>
+
+  <mediaobject>
+    <imageobject>
+      <imagedata revision="1" xml:id="draksound-im1" fileref="draksound.png" align="center" format="PNG"/>
+    </imageobject>
+  </mediaobject>
+
+  <para>This tool<footnote>
+      <para>You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis
+role="bold">draksound</emphasis> as root.</para>
+    </footnote> is present in the Mageia
+Control Center under the tab <emphasis role="bold">Hardware</emphasis>.¶</para>
+
+  <para>Draksound deals with the sound configuration, including the driver choice,
+PulseAudio options and trouble shooting. It will help you if you experience
+sound problems or if you change the sound card.</para>
+
+  <para>The drop down list called <guilabel>Driver</guilabel> allows you to select a
+driver from all the ones available on the computer that match the sound
+card.</para>
+
+  <note>
+    <para>Most of the time, it is possible to choose a driver using the OSS or ALSA
+API. OSS is the oldest and very basic, we recommend to choose ALSA when
+possible for its enhanced features.</para>
+  </note>
+
+  <para><guilabel>PulseAudio</guilabel> is a sound server. It receives all the sound
+inputs, mixes them according to the user preferences and sends the resulting
+sound to the output. See <guimenu>Menu ->Sound and video -> PulseAudio
+volume control</guimenu> to set these preferences.</para>
+
+  <para>PulseAudio is the default sound server and it is recommended to leave it
+enabled.</para>
+
+  <para><guilabel>Glitch-Free</guilabel> improves PulseAudio with some programs. It
+is also recommended to leave it enabled.</para>
+
+  <para>The button <guibutton>Advanced</guibutton> display a new window with two or
+three buttons:</para>
+
+  <mediaobject>
+    <imageobject>
+      <imagedata fileref="Draksound1.png"/>
+    </imageobject>
+  </mediaobject>
+
+  <para>The first button gives total freedom of choice. You have to know what you
+are doing. This button is not available when the system has found a driver
+for your device.</para>
+
+  <para>The second one is obvious and the last one gives assistance with fixing any
+problems you may have. You will find it helpful to try this before asking
+the community for help.</para>
+</section>
+\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/docs/mcc-help/cs/drakups.xml b/docs/mcc-help/cs/drakups.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..d1c34e3c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/mcc-help/cs/drakups.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,20 @@
+<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xml:id="drakups" version="5.0" xml:lang="cs">
+  <info>
+    <title xml:id="drakups-ti1">Nastavit UPS pro sledování elektrického napájení</title><subtitle>drakups</subtitle>
+  </info>
+
+  <mediaobject>
+    <imageobject>
+      <imagedata   xml:id="drakups-im1" revision="1" align="center" format="PNG" fileref="drakups.png"/>
+    </imageobject>
+  </mediaobject>
+
+ <para>This page hasn't been written yet for lack of resources. If you think you
+can write this help, please contact <link
+ns2:href="https://wiki.mageia.org/en/Documentation_team"> the Doc
+team.</link> Thanking you in advance.</para>   
+
+
+  <para>You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis
+role="bold">drakups</emphasis> as root.</para>
+</section>
diff --git a/docs/mcc-help/cs/drakvpn.xml b/docs/mcc-help/cs/drakvpn.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..ce35c617
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/mcc-help/cs/drakvpn.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,81 @@
+<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:lang="cs" xml:id="drakvpn">
+  <info>
+    <title xml:id="drakvpn-ti1">Configure VPN Connection to secure network access</title>
+
+    <subtitle>drakvpn</subtitle>
+  </info>
+
+  <mediaobject>
+    <imageobject>
+      <imagedata  revision="1" xml:id="drakvpn-im1" align="center" fileref="drakvpn1.png" format="PNG"/>
+    </imageobject>
+  </mediaobject>
+
+  <section>
+    <title>Úvod</title>
+
+    <para>This tool<footnote>
+        <para>You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis
+role="bold">drakvpn</emphasis> as root.</para>
+      </footnote> allows to configure secure
+access to a remote network establishing a tunnel between the local
+workstation and the remote network. We discuss here only of the
+configuration on the workstation side. We assume that the remote network is
+already in operation, and that you have the connection information from the
+network administrator, like a .pcf configuration file .</para>
+  </section>
+
+  <section>
+    <title>Nastavení</title>
+
+    <para>First, select either Cisco VPN Concentrator or OpenVPN, depending on which
+protocol is used for your virtual private network.</para>
+
+    <para>Then give your connection a name.</para>
+
+    <para>At the next screen, provide the details for your VPN connection.</para>
+
+    <itemizedlist>
+      <listitem>
+        <para>Pro Cisco VPN</para>
+      </listitem>
+    </itemizedlist>
+
+    <para><mediaobject>
+        <imageobject>
+          <imagedata fileref="drakvpn3.png"/>
+        </imageobject>
+      </mediaobject></para>
+
+    <itemizedlist>
+      <listitem>
+        <para>For openvpn. The openvpn package and its dependencies will be installed the
+first time the tool is used.</para>
+
+        <para><mediaobject>
+            <imageobject>
+              <imagedata fileref="drakvpn7.png"/>
+            </imageobject>
+          </mediaobject>Select the files that you received
+from the network administrator.</para>
+
+        <para>Rozšířené parametry:</para>
+
+        <mediaobject>
+          <imageobject>
+            <imagedata fileref="drakvpn8.png"/>
+          </imageobject>
+        </mediaobject>
+
+        <para>The next screen asks for IP-address of the gateway.</para>
+      </listitem>
+    </itemizedlist>
+
+    <para>When the parameters are set, you have the option of starting the VPN
+connection.</para>
+
+    <para>This VPN connection can be set to start automatically with a network
+connection. To do this, reconfigure the network connection to always connect
+to this VPN.</para>
+  </section>
+</section>
+\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/docs/mcc-help/cs/drakwizard_apache2.xml b/docs/mcc-help/cs/drakwizard_apache2.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..716459e6
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/mcc-help/cs/drakwizard_apache2.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,111 @@
+<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xml:id="drakwizard_apache2" version="5.0" xml:lang="cs">
+  <info>
+    <title xml:id="drakwizard_apache2-ti1">Configure webserver</title><subtitle>drakwizard apache2</subtitle>
+  </info>
+
+  <mediaobject>
+    <imageobject>
+      <imagedata   xml:id="drakwizard_apache2-im1" revision="1" align="center" format="PNG" fileref="drakwizard_apache2.png"/>
+    </imageobject>
+  </mediaobject>
+
+  <para>This tool<footnote><para>You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis
+role="bold">drakwizard apache2</emphasis> as root.</para></footnote> can help you to set up a web
+server.
+  </para>
+  <section>
+    <title>What is a web server?</title>
+    <para>
+      Web server is the software that helps to deliver web content that can be
+accessed through the Internet. (From Wikipedia)
+    </para>
+  </section>
+    <section>
+      <title>Setting up a web server with drakwizard apache2</title>
+      <para>
+	Welcome to the web server wizard.
+      </para>
+      <procedure>
+	<step>
+	  <title>Úvod</title>
+	  <mediaobject>
+	    <imageobject>
+	      <imagedata   xml:id="drakwizard_apache2-im2" revision="1" align="center" format="PNG" fileref="drakwizard-web-step1.png"/>
+	    </imageobject>
+	  </mediaobject>
+	  <para>
+	    The first page is just an introduction, click <guibutton>Next</guibutton>.
+	  </para>
+	</step>
+	<step>
+	  <title>Selecting Server Exposer: Local Net and/or World</title>
+	  <mediaobject>
+	    <imageobject>
+	      <imagedata   xml:id="drakwizard_apache2-im3" revision="1" align="center" format="PNG" fileref="drakwizard-web-step2.png"/>
+	    </imageobject>
+	  </mediaobject>
+	  <para>
+	    Exposing the web server to the Internet has it's risks. Be ready for bad
+things.
+	  </para>
+	</step>
+	<step>
+	  <title>Server User Module</title>
+	  <mediaobject>
+	    <imageobject>
+	      <imagedata   xml:id="drakwizard_apache2-im4" revision="1" align="center" format="PNG" fileref="drakwizard-web-step3.png"/>
+	    </imageobject>
+	  </mediaobject>
+	  <para>
+	    Allows users to create their own sites.
+	  </para>
+	</step>
+	<step>
+	  <title>User web directory name</title>
+	  <mediaobject>
+	    <imageobject>
+	      <imagedata   xml:id="drakwizard_apache2-im5" revision="1" align="center" format="PNG" fileref="drakwizard-web-step4.png"/>
+	    </imageobject>
+	  </mediaobject>
+	  <para>
+	    The user needs to create and populate this directory, then the server will
+display it.
+	  </para>
+	</step>
+	<step>
+	  <title>Server Document Root</title>
+	  <mediaobject>
+	    <imageobject>
+	      <imagedata   xml:id="drakwizard_apache2-im6" revision="1" align="center" format="PNG" fileref="drakwizard-web-step5.png"/>
+	    </imageobject>
+	  </mediaobject>
+	  <para>
+	    Allows you to configure the path to the web servers default documents.
+	  </para>
+	</step>
+	<step>
+	  <title>Souhrn</title>
+	  <mediaobject>
+	    <imageobject>
+	      <imagedata   xml:id="drakwizard_apache2-im7" revision="1" align="center" format="PNG" fileref="drakwizard-web-step6.png"/>
+	    </imageobject>
+	  </mediaobject>
+	  <para>
+	    Take a second to check these options, then click
+<guibutton>Next</guibutton>.
+	  </para>
+	</step>
+	<step>
+	  <title>Ukončit</title>
+	  <mediaobject>
+	    <imageobject>
+	      <imagedata   xml:id="drakwizard_apache2-im8" revision="1" align="center" format="PNG" fileref="drakwizard-web-step7.png"/>
+	    </imageobject>
+	  </mediaobject>
+	  <para>
+	    You're done! Click <guibutton>Finish</guibutton>.
+	  </para>
+	</step>
+      </procedure>
+    </section>
+</section>
diff --git a/docs/mcc-help/cs/drakwizard_bind.xml b/docs/mcc-help/cs/drakwizard_bind.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..8c0eefe3
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/mcc-help/cs/drakwizard_bind.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,20 @@
+<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xml:id="drakwizard_bind" version="5.0" xml:lang="cs">
+  <info>
+    <title xml:id="drakwizard_bind-ti1">Upravit nastavení DNS</title><subtitle>drakwizard bind</subtitle>
+  </info>
+
+  <mediaobject>
+    <imageobject>
+      <imagedata   xml:id="drakwizard_bind-im1" revision="1" align="center" format="PNG" fileref="drakwizard_bind.png"/>
+    </imageobject>
+  </mediaobject>
+
+ <para>This page hasn't been written yet for lack of resources. If you think you
+can write this help, please contact <link
+ns2:href="https://wiki.mageia.org/en/Documentation_team"> the Doc
+team.</link> Thanking you in advance.</para>   
+
+
+  <para>You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis
+role="bold">drakwizard bind</emphasis> as root.</para>
+</section>
diff --git a/docs/mcc-help/cs/drakwizard_dhcp.xml b/docs/mcc-help/cs/drakwizard_dhcp.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..fa3e02df
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/mcc-help/cs/drakwizard_dhcp.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,194 @@
+<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:lang="cs" xml:id="drakwizard_dhcp">
+  <info>
+    <title xml:id="drakwizard_dhcp-ti1">Upravit nastavení DHCP</title>
+
+    <subtitle>drakwizard dhcp</subtitle>
+  </info>
+
+  <mediaobject>
+    <imageobject>
+      <imagedata xml:id="drakwizard_dhcp-im1" fileref="drakwizard_dhcp.png" revision="1" align="center" format="PNG"/>
+    </imageobject>
+  </mediaobject>
+
+  <para><note>
+      <para>This tool is broken in Mageia 4 because of new naming scheme for the Net
+interfaces</para>
+    </note></para>
+
+  <para>This tool<footnote>
+      <para>You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis
+role="bold">drakwizard dhcp</emphasis> as root.</para>
+    </footnote> can help you to set up a
+<acronym>DHCP</acronym> server. It is a component of drakwizard which should
+be installed before you can access to it.</para>
+
+  <section>
+    <title>What is DHCP?</title>
+
+    <para>The Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (<acronym>DHCP</acronym>) is a
+standardized networking protocol used on IP networks that dynamically
+configures IP addresses and other information that is needed for Internet
+communication. (From Wikipedia)</para>
+  </section>
+
+  <section>
+    <title>Setting up a DHCP server with drakwizard dhcp</title>
+
+    <para>Welcome to the DHCP server wizard.</para>
+
+    <procedure>
+      <step>
+        <title>Úvod</title>
+
+        <mediaobject>
+          <imageobject>
+            <imagedata xml:id="drakwizard_dhcp-im2" revision="1" align="center" format="PNG" fileref="drakwizard-dhcp-step1.png"/>
+          </imageobject>
+        </mediaobject>
+
+        <para>The first page is just an introduction, click <guibutton>Next</guibutton>.</para>
+      </step>
+
+      <step>
+        <title>Selecting Adaptor</title>
+
+        <mediaobject>
+          <imageobject>
+            <imagedata xml:id="drakwizard_dhcp-im3" revision="1" align="center" format="PNG" fileref="drakwizard-dhcp-step2.png"/>
+          </imageobject>
+        </mediaobject>
+
+        <para>Choose the network interface, which is connected to the subnet, and for
+which DHCP will assign IP addresses, and then click
+<guibutton>Next</guibutton>.</para>
+      </step>
+
+      <step>
+        <title>Select IP range</title>
+
+        <mediaobject>
+          <imageobject>
+            <imagedata revision="1" align="center" fileref="drakwizard-dhcp-step3.png" format="PNG" xml:id="drakwizard_dhcp-im4"/>
+          </imageobject>
+        </mediaobject>
+
+        <para>Select the beginning and ending IP addresses of the range of IPs you want
+the server to offer, along with the IP of the gateway machine connecting to
+some place outside the local network, hopefully close to the Internet, then
+click <guibutton>Next</guibutton>.</para>
+      </step>
+
+      <step>
+        <title>Souhrn</title>
+
+        <mediaobject>
+          <imageobject>
+            <imagedata fileref="drakwizard-dhcp-step4.png" revision="1" align="center" xml:id="drakwizard_dhcp-im5" format="PNG"/>
+          </imageobject>
+        </mediaobject>
+
+        <para>Take a second to check these options, then click
+<guibutton>Next</guibutton>.</para>
+      </step>
+
+      <step>
+        <title>Hold on...</title>
+
+        <mediaobject>
+          <imageobject>
+            <imagedata fileref="drakwizard-dhcp-step5.png" revision="1" align="center" format="PNG" xml:id="drakwizard_dhcp-im6"/>
+          </imageobject>
+        </mediaobject>
+
+        <para>This can be fixed. Click <guibutton>Previous</guibutton> a few times and
+change things around.</para>
+      </step>
+
+      <step>
+        <title>Hours later...</title>
+
+        <mediaobject>
+          <imageobject>
+            <imagedata revision="1" fileref="drakwizard-dhcp-step6.png" align="center" format="PNG" xml:id="drakwizard_dhcp-im7"/>
+          </imageobject>
+        </mediaobject>
+      </step>
+    </procedure>
+  </section>
+
+  <section>
+    <title>What is done</title>
+
+    <para><itemizedlist>
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Installing the package dhcp-server if needed;</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Saving <code>/etc/dhcpd.conf</code> in <code>/etc/dhcpd.conf.orig;</code></para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Creating a new <code>dhcpd.conf</code> starting from
+<code>/usr/share/wizards/dhcp_wizard/scripts/dhcpd.conf.default</code> and
+adding the new parameters:</para>
+
+          <itemizedlist>
+            <listitem>
+              <para><code>hname</code></para>
+            </listitem>
+
+            <listitem>
+              <para><code>dns</code></para>
+            </listitem>
+
+            <listitem>
+              <para>net</para>
+            </listitem>
+
+            <listitem>
+              <para>ip</para>
+            </listitem>
+
+            <listitem>
+              <para><code>mask</code></para>
+            </listitem>
+
+            <listitem>
+              <para><code>rng1</code></para>
+            </listitem>
+
+            <listitem>
+              <para><code>rng2</code></para>
+            </listitem>
+
+            <listitem>
+              <para><code>dname</code></para>
+            </listitem>
+
+            <listitem>
+              <para><code>gateway</code></para>
+            </listitem>
+
+            <listitem>
+              <para><code>tftpserverip</code></para>
+            </listitem>
+
+            <listitem>
+              <para><code>dhcpd_interface</code></para>
+            </listitem>
+          </itemizedlist>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Also modifying Webmin configuration file
+<code>/etc/webmin/dhcpd/config</code></para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Restarting <code>dhcpd.</code></para>
+        </listitem>
+      </itemizedlist></para>
+  </section>
+</section>
+\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/docs/mcc-help/cs/drakwizard_ntp.xml b/docs/mcc-help/cs/drakwizard_ntp.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..2e724688
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/mcc-help/cs/drakwizard_ntp.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,117 @@
+<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?>
+<section version="5.0" xml:lang="cs" xml:id="drakwizard_ntp"
+         xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook"
+         xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML"
+         xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg"
+         xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml"
+         xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink"
+         xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook">
+  <info>
+    <title xml:id="drakwizard_ntp-ti1">Nastavit čas</title>
+
+    <subtitle>drakwizard ntp</subtitle>
+  </info>
+
+  
+
+  <mediaobject>
+    <!-- 2013-10-25 Lebarhon - 3 screenshots ready to be added when it is possible -->
+<imageobject>
+      <imagedata align="center" fileref="drakwizard_ntp.png" format="PNG"
+                 revision="1" xml:id="drakwizard_ntp-im1"/>
+    </imageobject>
+  </mediaobject>
+
+  <para>This tool<footnote>
+      <para>You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis
+role="bold">drakwizard ntp</emphasis> as root.</para>
+    </footnote> purpose is to set the time of
+your server synchronised with an external server. It isn't installed by
+default and you have to also install the drakwizard and drakwizard-base
+packages.</para>
+
+  <section>
+    <title>Setup a NTP server with drakwizard ntp</title>
+
+    <procedure>
+      <step>
+        <para>After a welcome screen (see above), the second one ask you to choose three
+time servers in the drop down lists and suggests to use pool.ntp.org twice
+because this server always points to available time servers.</para>
+
+        <mediaobject>
+          <imageobject>
+            <imagedata fileref="drakwizard-ntp1.png"/>
+          </imageobject>
+        </mediaobject>
+
+        <mediaobject>
+          <imageobject>
+            <imagedata fileref="drakwizard-ntp2.png">
+              <info>
+<author> <personname/> </author> <pubdate/></info>
+            </imagedata>
+          </imageobject>
+        </mediaobject>
+      </step>
+
+      <step>
+        <para>The following screens allows to choose the region and the city and then, you
+arrive on a summary. If something is wrong, you can obviously change it
+using the <guibutton>Previous</guibutton>button.  If everything is right,
+click on the <guibutton>Next</guibutton> button to proceed to the test. It
+may take a while and you finally get this screen below:</para>
+
+        <mediaobject>
+          <imageobject>
+            <imagedata fileref="drakwizard-ntp3.png"/>
+          </imageobject>
+        </mediaobject>
+      </step>
+
+      <step>
+        <para>Click on the <guibutton>Finish</guibutton> button to close the tool</para>
+      </step>
+    </procedure>
+
+    <para/>
+  </section>
+
+  <section>
+    <title>What is done</title>
+
+    <para>This tool executes the following steps:</para>
+
+    <para><itemizedlist>
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Installing the package <code>ntp</code> if needed</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Saving the files <code>/etc/sysconfig/clock</code> to
+<code>/etc/sysconfig/clock.orig</code> and
+<code>/etc/ntp/step-tickers</code> to
+<code>/etc/ntp/step-tickers.orig</code>;</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Writing a new file <code>/etc/ntp/step-tickers</code> with the list of
+servers;</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Modifying the file <code>/etc/ntp.conf</code> by inserting the first server
+name;</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Stopping and starting <code>crond</code>, <code>atd</code> and
+<code>ntpd</code> services;</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Setting the hardware clock to the current system time with UTC reference.</para>
+        </listitem>
+      </itemizedlist></para>
+  </section>
+</section>
diff --git a/docs/mcc-help/cs/drakwizard_proftpd.xml b/docs/mcc-help/cs/drakwizard_proftpd.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..35b829d9
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/mcc-help/cs/drakwizard_proftpd.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,102 @@
+<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xml:id="drakwizard_proftpd" version="5.0" xml:lang="cs">
+  <info>
+	  <title xml:id="drakwizard_proftpd-ti1">Nastavit FTP</title><subtitle>drakwizard proftpd</subtitle>
+  </info>
+
+  <mediaobject>
+    <imageobject>
+      <imagedata   xml:id="drakwizard_proftpd-im1" revision="1" align="center" format="PNG" fileref="drakwizard_proftpd.png"/>
+    </imageobject>
+  </mediaobject>
+
+  <para>This tool<footnote><para>You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis
+role="bold">drakwizard proftpd</emphasis> as root.</para></footnote> can help you to set up an
+<acronym>FTP</acronym> server.
+  </para>
+  <section>
+    <title>What is <acronym>FTP</acronym>?</title>
+    <para>
+      File Transfer Protocol (<acronym>FTP</acronym>) is a standard network
+protocol used to transfer files from one host to another host over a
+<acronym>TCP</acronym>-based network, such as the Internet. (From Wikipedia)
+    </para>
+  </section>
+    <section>
+      <title>Setting up an FTP server with drakwizard proftpd</title>
+      <para>
+	Welcome to the FTP wizard. Buckle up.
+      </para>
+      <procedure>
+	<step>
+	  <title>Úvod</title>
+	  <mediaobject>
+	    <imageobject>
+	      <imagedata   xml:id="drakwizard_proftpd-im2" revision="1" align="center" format="PNG" fileref="drakwizard-ftp-step1.png"/>
+	    </imageobject>
+	  </mediaobject>
+	  <para>
+	    The first page is just an introduction, click <guibutton>Next</guibutton>.
+	  </para>
+	</step>
+	<step>
+	  <title>Selecting Server Exposer: Local Net and/or World</title>
+	  <mediaobject>
+	    <imageobject>
+	      <imagedata   xml:id="drakwizard_proftpd-im3" revision="1" align="center" format="PNG" fileref="drakwizard-ftp-step2.png"/>
+	    </imageobject>
+	  </mediaobject>
+	  <para>
+	    Exposing the FTP server to the Internet has it's risks. Be ready for bad
+things.
+	  </para>
+	</step>
+	<step>
+	  <title>Server Information</title>
+	  <mediaobject>
+	    <imageobject>
+	      <imagedata   xml:id="drakwizard_proftpd-im4" revision="1" align="center" format="PNG" fileref="drakwizard-ftp-step3.png"/>
+	    </imageobject>
+	  </mediaobject>
+	  <para>
+	    Enter name the sever will use to introduce itself, someone to email
+complaints too and whether to allow root login access.
+	  </para>
+	</step>
+	<step>
+	  <title>Server Options</title>
+	  <mediaobject>
+	    <imageobject>
+	      <imagedata   xml:id="drakwizard_proftpd-im5" revision="1" align="center" format="PNG" fileref="drakwizard-ftp-step4.png"/>
+	    </imageobject>
+	  </mediaobject>
+	  <para>
+	    Set listening port, jailed user, allow resumes and/or <acronym>FXP</acronym>
+(File eXchange Protocol)
+	  </para>
+	</step>
+	<step>
+	  <title>Souhrn</title>
+	  <mediaobject>
+	    <imageobject>
+	      <imagedata   xml:id="drakwizard_proftpd-im6" revision="1" align="center" format="PNG" fileref="drakwizard-ftp-step5.png"/>
+	    </imageobject>
+	  </mediaobject>
+	  <para>
+	    Take a second to check these options, then click
+<guibutton>Next</guibutton>.
+	  </para>
+	</step>
+	<step>
+	  <title>Ukončit</title>
+	  <mediaobject>
+	    <imageobject>
+	      <imagedata   xml:id="drakwizard_proftpd-im7" revision="1" align="center" format="PNG" fileref="drakwizard-ftp-step6.png"/>
+	    </imageobject>
+	  </mediaobject>
+	  <para>
+	    You're done! Click <guibutton>Finish</guibutton>.
+	  </para>
+	</step>
+      </procedure>
+    </section>
+</section>
diff --git a/docs/mcc-help/cs/drakwizard_squid.xml b/docs/mcc-help/cs/drakwizard_squid.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..f72347db
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/mcc-help/cs/drakwizard_squid.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,238 @@
+<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?>
+<section version="5.0" xml:lang="cs" xml:id="drakwizard_squid"
+         xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook"
+         xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML"
+         xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg"
+         xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml"
+         xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink"
+         xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook">
+  <info>
+    <title xml:id="drakwizard_squid-ti1">Upravit nastavení proxy</title>
+
+    <subtitle>drakwizard squid</subtitle>
+  </info>
+
+  <mediaobject>
+    <imageobject>
+      <imagedata align="center" fileref="drakwizard_squid.png" format="PNG"
+                 revision="1" xml:id="drakwizard_squid-im1"/>
+    </imageobject>
+  </mediaobject>
+
+  <para>This tool<footnote>
+      <para>You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis
+role="bold">drakwizard squid</emphasis> as root.</para>
+    </footnote> can help you to set up a
+proxy server. It is a component of drakwizard which should be installed
+before you can access to it.</para>
+
+  <section>
+    <title>What is a proxy server?</title>
+
+    <para>A proxy server is a server (a computer system or an application)  that acts
+as an intermediary for requests from clients seeking resources from other
+servers. A client connects to the proxy server, requesting some service,
+such as a file, connection, web page, or other resource available from a
+different server and the proxy server evaluates the request as a way to
+simplify and control its complexity. (From Wikipedia)</para>
+  </section>
+
+  <section>
+    <title>Setting up a proxy server with drakwizard squid</title>
+
+    <para>Welcome to the proxy server wizard.</para>
+
+    <procedure>
+      <step>
+        <title>Úvod</title>
+
+        <mediaobject>
+          <imageobject>
+            <imagedata align="center" fileref="drakwizard-proxy-step1.png"
+                       format="PNG" revision="1" xml:id="drakwizard_squid-im2"/>
+          </imageobject>
+        </mediaobject>
+
+        <para>The first page is just an introduction, click <guibutton>Next</guibutton>.</para>
+      </step>
+
+      <step>
+        <title>Selecting the proxy port</title>
+
+        <mediaobject>
+          <imageobject>
+            <imagedata align="center" fileref="drakwizard-proxy-step2.png"
+                       format="PNG" revision="1" xml:id="drakwizard_squid-im3"/>
+          </imageobject>
+        </mediaobject>
+
+        <para>Select the proxy port browsers will connect through, then click
+<guibutton>Next</guibutton>.</para>
+      </step>
+
+      <step>
+        <title>Set Memory and Disk Usage</title>
+
+        <mediaobject>
+          <imageobject>
+            <imagedata align="center" fileref="drakwizard-proxy-step3.png"
+                       format="PNG" revision="1" xml:id="drakwizard_squid-im4"/>
+          </imageobject>
+        </mediaobject>
+
+        <para>Set memory and disk cache limits, then click <guibutton>Next</guibutton>.</para>
+      </step>
+
+      <step>
+        <title>Select Network Access Control</title>
+
+        <mediaobject>
+          <imageobject>
+            <imagedata align="center" fileref="drakwizard-proxy-step4.png"
+                       format="PNG" revision="1" xml:id="drakwizard_squid-im5"/>
+          </imageobject>
+        </mediaobject>
+
+        <para>Set visibility to local network or world, then click
+<guibutton>Next</guibutton>.</para>
+      </step>
+
+      <step>
+        <title>Grant Network Access</title>
+
+        <mediaobject>
+          <imageobject>
+            <imagedata align="center" fileref="drakwizard-proxy-step5.png"
+                       format="PNG" revision="1" xml:id="drakwizard_squid-im6"/>
+          </imageobject>
+        </mediaobject>
+
+        <para>Grant access to local networks, then click <guibutton>Next</guibutton>.</para>
+      </step>
+
+      <step>
+        <title>Use Upper Level Proxy Server?</title>
+
+        <mediaobject>
+          <imageobject>
+            <imagedata align="center" fileref="drakwizard-proxy-step6.png"
+                       format="PNG" revision="1" xml:id="drakwizard_squid-im7"/>
+          </imageobject>
+        </mediaobject>
+
+        <para>Cascade through another proxy server? If no, skip next step.</para>
+      </step>
+
+      <step>
+        <title>Upper Level Proxy URL and Port</title>
+
+        <mediaobject>
+          <imageobject>
+            <imagedata align="center" fileref="drakwizard-proxy-step7.png"
+                       format="PNG" revision="1" xml:id="drakwizard_squid-im8"/>
+          </imageobject>
+        </mediaobject>
+
+        <para>Provide upper level proxy hostname and port, then click
+<guibutton>Next</guibutton>.</para>
+      </step>
+
+      <step>
+        <title>Souhrn</title>
+
+        <mediaobject>
+          <imageobject>
+            <imagedata align="center" fileref="drakwizard-proxy-step8.png"
+                       format="PNG" revision="1" xml:id="drakwizard_squid-im9"/>
+          </imageobject>
+        </mediaobject>
+
+        <para>Take a second to check these options, then click
+<guibutton>Next</guibutton>.</para>
+      </step>
+
+      <step>
+        <title>Start during boot?</title>
+
+        <mediaobject>
+          <imageobject>
+            <imagedata align="center" fileref="drakwizard-proxy-step9.png"
+                       format="PNG" revision="1"
+                       xml:id="drakwizard_squid-im10"/>
+          </imageobject>
+        </mediaobject>
+
+        <para>Choose if the proxy server should be started during the boot time, then
+click <guibutton>Next</guibutton>.</para>
+      </step>
+
+      <step>
+        <title>Ukončit</title>
+
+        <mediaobject>
+          <imageobject>
+            <imagedata align="center" fileref="drakwizard-proxy-step10.png"
+                       format="PNG" revision="1"
+                       xml:id="drakwizard_squid-im11"/>
+          </imageobject>
+        </mediaobject>
+
+        <para>You're done! Click <guibutton>Finish</guibutton>.</para>
+      </step>
+    </procedure>
+  </section>
+
+  <section>
+    <title>What is done</title>
+
+    <para><itemizedlist>
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Installing the package squid if needed;</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Saving <code>/etc/squid/squid.conf</code> in
+<code>/etc/squid/squid.conf.orig;</code></para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Creating a new <code>squid.conf</code> starting from
+<code>squid.conf.default</code> and adding the new parameters:</para>
+
+          <itemizedlist>
+            <listitem>
+              <para><code>cache_dir</code></para>
+            </listitem>
+
+            <listitem>
+              <para><code>localnet</code></para>
+            </listitem>
+
+            <listitem>
+              <para>cache_mem</para>
+            </listitem>
+
+            <listitem>
+              <para>http_port</para>
+            </listitem>
+
+            <listitem>
+              <para><code>level</code> 1, 2 or 3 and <code>http_access</code> according to level</para>
+            </listitem>
+
+            <listitem>
+              <para><code>cache_peer</code></para>
+            </listitem>
+
+            <listitem>
+              <para><code>visible_hostname</code></para>
+            </listitem>
+          </itemizedlist>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Restarting <code>squid.</code></para>
+        </listitem>
+      </itemizedlist></para>
+  </section>
+</section>
diff --git a/docs/mcc-help/cs/drakwizard_sshd.xml b/docs/mcc-help/cs/drakwizard_sshd.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..0fe9b70a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/mcc-help/cs/drakwizard_sshd.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,142 @@
+<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xml:id="drakwizard_sshd" version="5.0" xml:lang="cs">
+  <info>
+    <title xml:id="drakwizard_sshd-ti1">Nastavení démonu OpenSSH</title><subtitle>drakwizard sshd</subtitle>
+  </info>
+
+  <mediaobject>
+    <imageobject>
+      <imagedata   xml:id="drakwizard_sshd-im1" revision="1" align="center" format="PNG" fileref="drakwizard_sshd.png"/>
+    </imageobject>
+  </mediaobject>
+
+ 
+  <para>This tool<footnote><para>You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis
+role="bold">drakwizard sshd</emphasis> as root.</para></footnote> can help you to set up an
+<acronym>SSH</acronym> daemon.
+  </para>
+  <section>
+    <title>What is <acronym>SSH</acronym>?</title>
+    <para>
+      Secure Shell (SSH) is a cryptographic network protocol for secure data
+communication, remote command-line login, remote command execution, and
+other secure network services between two networked computers that connects,
+via a secure channel over an insecure network, a server and a client
+(running SSH server and <acronym>SSH</acronym> client programs,
+respectively). (From Wikipedia)
+    </para>
+  </section>
+    <section>
+      <title>Setting up an <acronym>SSH</acronym> daemon with drakwizard sshd</title>
+      <para>
+	Welcome to the Open SSH wizard.
+      </para>
+      <procedure>
+	<step>
+	  <title>Select Type of Configure Options</title>
+	  <mediaobject>
+	    <imageobject>
+	      <imagedata   xml:id="drakwizard_sshd-im2" revision="1" align="center" format="PNG" fileref="drakwizard-sshd-step1.png"/>
+	    </imageobject>
+	  </mediaobject>
+	  <para>
+	    Choose <guilabel>Expert</guilabel> for all options or
+<guilabel>Newbie</guilabel> to skip steps 3-7, click
+<guibutton>Next</guibutton>.
+	  </para>
+	</step>
+	<step>
+	  <title>Obecné volby</title>
+	  <mediaobject>
+	    <imageobject>
+	      <imagedata   xml:id="drakwizard_sshd-im3" revision="1" align="center" format="PNG" fileref="drakwizard-sshd-step2.png"/>
+	    </imageobject>
+	  </mediaobject>
+	  <para>
+	    Sets visibility and root access options. Port 22 is the standard
+<acronym>SSH</acronym> port.
+	  </para>
+	</step>
+	<step>
+	  <title>Authentication Methods</title>
+	  <mediaobject>
+	    <imageobject>
+	      <imagedata   xml:id="drakwizard_sshd-im4" revision="1" align="center" format="PNG" fileref="drakwizard-sshd-step3.png"/>
+	    </imageobject>
+	  </mediaobject>
+	  <para>
+	    Allow a variety of authentication methods users can use while connecting,
+then click <guibutton>Next</guibutton>.
+	  </para>
+	</step>
+	<step>
+	  <title>Logging</title>
+	  <mediaobject>
+	    <imageobject>
+	      <imagedata   xml:id="drakwizard_sshd-im5" revision="1" align="center" format="PNG" fileref="drakwizard-sshd-step4.png"/>
+	    </imageobject>
+	  </mediaobject>
+	  <para>
+	    Choose logging facility and level of output, then click
+<guibutton>Next</guibutton>.
+	  </para>
+	</step>
+	<step>
+	  <title>Login Options</title>
+	  <mediaobject>
+	    <imageobject>
+	      <imagedata   xml:id="drakwizard_sshd-im6" revision="1" align="center" format="PNG" fileref="drakwizard-sshd-step5.png"/>
+	    </imageobject>
+	  </mediaobject>
+	  <para>
+	    Configure per-login settings, then click <guibutton>Next</guibutton>.
+	  </para>
+	</step>
+	<step>
+	  <title>User Login Options</title>
+	  <mediaobject>
+	    <imageobject>
+	      <imagedata   xml:id="drakwizard_sshd-im7" revision="1" align="center" format="PNG" fileref="drakwizard-sshd-step6.png"/>
+	    </imageobject>
+	  </mediaobject>
+	  <para>
+	    Configure the user access settings, then click <guibutton>Next</guibutton>.
+	  </para>
+	</step>
+	<step>
+	  <title>Compression and Forwarding</title>
+	  <mediaobject>
+	    <imageobject>
+	      <imagedata   xml:id="drakwizard_sshd-im8" revision="1" align="center" format="PNG" fileref="drakwizard-sshd-step7.png"/>
+	    </imageobject>
+	  </mediaobject>
+	  <para>
+	    Configure X11 forwarding and compression during transfer, then click
+<guibutton>Next</guibutton>.
+	  </para>
+	</step>
+	<step>
+	  <title>Souhrn</title>
+	  <mediaobject>
+	    <imageobject>
+	      <imagedata   xml:id="drakwizard_sshd-im9" revision="1" align="center" format="PNG" fileref="drakwizard-sshd-step8.png"/>
+	    </imageobject>
+	  </mediaobject>
+	  <para>
+	    Take a second to check these options, then click
+<guibutton>Next</guibutton>.
+	  </para>
+	</step>
+	<step>
+	  <title>Ukončit</title>
+	  <mediaobject>
+	    <imageobject>
+	      <imagedata   xml:id="drakwizard_sshd-im10" revision="1" align="center" format="PNG" fileref="drakwizard-sshd-step9.png"/>
+	    </imageobject>
+	  </mediaobject>
+	  <para>
+	    You're done! Click <guibutton>Finish</guibutton>.
+	  </para>
+	</step>
+      </procedure>
+    </section>
+</section>
diff --git a/docs/mcc-help/cs/drakxservices.xml b/docs/mcc-help/cs/drakxservices.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..40a32ef6
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/mcc-help/cs/drakxservices.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,19 @@
+<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xml:id="drakxservices" version="5.0" xml:lang="cs">
+  <info>
+    <title xml:id="drakxservices-ti1">Spouštět a zastavovat systémové služby</title><subtitle>drakxservices</subtitle>
+  </info>
+
+  <mediaobject>
+    <imageobject>
+      <imagedata width="80%" xml:id="drakxservices-im1" revision="1" align="center" format="PNG" fileref="drakxservices.png"/>
+    </imageobject>
+  </mediaobject>
+
+ <para>This page hasn't been written yet for lack of resources. If you think you
+can write this help, please contact <link
+ns2:href="https://wiki.mageia.org/en/Documentation_team"> the Doc
+team.</link> Thanking you in advance.</para>   
+
+  <para>You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis
+role="bold">drakxservices</emphasis> as root.</para>
+</section>
diff --git a/docs/mcc-help/cs/harddrake2.xml b/docs/mcc-help/cs/harddrake2.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..29b48096
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/mcc-help/cs/harddrake2.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,87 @@
+<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?>
+<section version="5.0" xml:lang="cs" xml:id="harddrake2"
+         xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook"
+         xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML"
+         xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg"
+         xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml"
+         xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink"
+         xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook">
+  <info>
+    <title xml:id="harddrake2-ti1">Hardware configuration</title>
+
+    <subtitle>harddrake2</subtitle> 
+  </info>
+
+  <mediaobject>
+    <imageobject>
+      <imagedata align="center"  fileref="harddrake2.png"
+                 format="PNG" revision="1"  xml:id="harddrake2-im1"/>
+    </imageobject>
+  </mediaobject>
+
+  <para>This tool<footnote>
+      <para>You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis
+role="bold">harddrake2</emphasis> as root.</para>
+    </footnote> gives a general view of the
+hardware of your computer. When the tool is launched, it executes a job to
+look for every element of the hardware. For that, it uses the command
+<code>ldetect </code>which refers to a list of hardware in
+<code>ldetect-lst</code> package.</para>
+
+  <section>
+    <title>The window</title>
+
+    <para>The window is divided in two columns.</para>
+
+    <para>The left column contains a list of the detected hardware. The devices are
+grouped by categories. Click on the &gt; to expand the content of a
+category. Each device can be selected in this column.</para>
+
+    <para>The right column displays information about the selected device.  The
+<guimenu>Help -&gt; Fields description</guimenu> gives some information
+about the content of the fields.</para>
+
+    <para>According to which type of device is selected, either one or two buttons are
+available at the bottom of the right column:</para>
+
+    <itemizedlist>
+      <listitem>
+        <para><guibutton>Set current driver options</guibutton>: this can be used to
+parameterize the module which is used in relation to the device. This must
+used by experts only.</para>
+      </listitem>
+
+      <listitem>
+        <para><guibutton>Run config tool</guibutton>: access to the tool which can
+configure the device. The tool can often be accessed directly from the MCC.</para>
+      </listitem>
+    </itemizedlist>
+
+    <para/>
+  </section>
+
+  <section>
+    <title>The menu</title>
+
+    <para><bridgehead>Volby</bridgehead></para>
+
+    <para>The <guimenu>options</guimenu> menu gives the opportunity to check boxes to
+enable automatic detection:</para>
+
+    <para><itemizedlist>
+        <listitem>
+          <para>modem</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Jednotka JAZ</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Paralelní jednotka ZIP</para>
+        </listitem>
+      </itemizedlist>By default these detections are not enabled, because they are slow. Check
+the appropriate box(es) if you have this hardware connected. Detection will
+be operational the next time this tool is started.</para>
+  </section>
+</section>
diff --git a/docs/mcc-help/cs/keyboarddrake.xml b/docs/mcc-help/cs/keyboarddrake.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..0c7315aa
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/mcc-help/cs/keyboarddrake.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,44 @@
+<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xml:id="keyboarddrake" version="5.0" xml:lang="cs">
+  <info>
+    <title xml:id="keyboarddrake-ti1">Set up the Keyboard Layout</title>
+
+    
+
+    <!-- 2012-09-02 marja changed the title to "Set up the Keyboard Layout", so it is the same as the title in MCC -->
+<subtitle>keyboarddrake</subtitle>
+  </info>
+
+  <mediaobject>
+    <imageobject>
+      <imagedata revision="1" align="center" fileref="keyboarddrake.png" xml:id="keyboarddrake-im1" format="PNG"/>
+    </imageobject>
+  </mediaobject>
+
+  <section>
+    <title>Úvod</title>
+
+    <para>The keyboarddrake tool<footnote>
+        <para>You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis
+role="bold">keyboarddrake</emphasis> as root.</para>
+      </footnote> helps you
+configure the basic layout for the keyboard that you wish to use on
+Mageia. It affects the keyboard layout for all users on the system. It can
+be found in the Hardware section of the Mageia Control Center (MCC) labelled
+"Configure mouse and keyboard".</para>
+  </section>
+
+  <section>
+    <title>Rozložení klávesnice</title>
+
+    <para>Here you can select which keyboard layout you wish to use. The names (listed
+in alphabetical order) describe the language, country, and/or ethnicity each
+layout should be used for.</para>
+  </section>
+
+  <section>
+    <title>Typ klávesnice</title>
+
+    <para>This menu lets you select the type of keyboard you are using. If you are
+unsure of which to choose, it is best to leave it as the default type.</para>
+  </section>
+</section>
+\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/docs/mcc-help/cs/localedrake.xml b/docs/mcc-help/cs/localedrake.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..e75f6761
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/mcc-help/cs/localedrake.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,55 @@
+<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?>
+<section version="5.0" xml:lang="cs" xml:id="localedrake"
+         xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook"
+         xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML"
+         xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg"
+         xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml"
+         xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink"
+         xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook">
+  <info>
+    <title xml:id="localedrake-ti1">Upravit nastavení lokalizace systému</title>
+
+    <subtitle>localedrake</subtitle>
+  </info>
+
+  <mediaobject>
+    <imageobject>
+      <imagedata align="center"  fileref="localedrake.png"
+                 format="PNG" revision="1" 
+                 xml:id="localedrake-im1"/>
+    </imageobject>
+  </mediaobject>
+
+  <para>This tool<footnote><para>You can also start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis
+role="bold">localedrake</emphasis> as root.
+  </para></footnote> can be found in the System
+section of the Mageia Control Center (MCC) labelled "Manage localization for
+your system". It opens with a window in which you can choose your
+language. The choice is adapted to languages selected during installation.</para>
+
+  <para>The <guibutton>Advanced</guibutton> button give access to activate
+compatibility with old encoding (non UTF8).</para>
+
+  <para>The second window shows a list of countries according to the selected
+language. The button <guibutton>Other Countries</guibutton> gives access to
+countries not listed.</para>
+
+  <para>You have to restart your session after any modifications.</para>
+  
+<section xml:id="input_method">
+      <info>
+          <title xml:id="input_method-ti1">Vstupní metoda</title>
+      </info>
+  <para>In the <guilabel>Other Countries</guilabel> screen you can also select an
+input method (from the drop-down menu at the bottom of the list). Input
+methods allow users to input multilingual characters (Chinese, Japanese,
+Korean, etc).</para>
+  <para> For Asian and African locales, IBus will be set as default input method so
+users should not need to configure it manually.</para>
+  <para>Other input methods (SCIM, GCIN, HIME, etc.) also provide similar functions
+and can, if not available from the drop-down menu, be installed in another
+part of the Mageia Control Center. See <xref linkend="rpmdrake"></xref>.</para>
+</section>
+
+</section>
+
diff --git a/docs/mcc-help/cs/logdrake.xml b/docs/mcc-help/cs/logdrake.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..297c180a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/mcc-help/cs/logdrake.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,111 @@
+<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xml:id="logdrake" version="5.0" xml:lang="cs">
+  <info>
+    <title xml:id="logdrake-ti1">Prohlížet a prohledávat systémové záznamy</title>
+
+    <subtitle>logdrake</subtitle>
+  </info>
+
+  <mediaobject>
+    <imageobject>
+      <imagedata revision="1" align="center" xml:id="logdrake-im1" format="PNG" fileref="logdrake.png"/>
+    </imageobject>
+  </mediaobject>
+
+  <para>This tool<footnote>
+      <para>You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis
+role="bold">logdrake</emphasis> as root.</para>
+    </footnote> is found in the Mageia
+Control Center System tab, labelled "<guilabel>View and search system
+logs</guilabel>".</para>
+
+  <para/>
+
+  <section>
+    <title>To do a search in the logs</title>
+
+    <para>First, enter the key string you want to look for in the <emphasis
+role="bold">Matching</emphasis> field and/or the key string you want to
+<emphasis>do not</emphasis> wish to see amongst the answers in the field
+<emphasis role="bold">but not matching</emphasis>. Then select the file(s)
+to search in the <guilabel>Choose file</guilabel> field. Optionally, it is
+possible to limit the search to only one day. Select it in the <emphasis
+role="bold">Calendar</emphasis>, using the little arrows on each side of the
+month and year, and check "<guibutton>Show only for the selected
+day</guibutton>". At last, click on the <guibutton>search</guibutton> button
+to see the results in the window called <guilabel>Content of the
+file</guilabel>. It is possible to save the results in the .txt format by
+clicking on the <emphasis role="bold">Save</emphasis> button.</para>
+
+    <note>
+      <para>The <guibutton>Mageia Tools Logs</guibutton> houses the logs from the Mageia
+configuration tools such as the Mageia Control Center tools.  These logs are
+updated each time a configuration is modified.</para>
+    </note>
+  </section>
+
+  <section>
+    <title>To configure a mail alert</title>
+
+    <para><guibutton>Mail alert</guibutton> automatically checks the system load and
+the services every hour and if necessary sends an e-mail to the configured
+address.</para>
+
+    <para>To configure this tool, click on the <emphasis role="bold">Mail
+Alert</emphasis> button and then, in the next screen, on the<guibutton>
+Configure the mail alert system</guibutton> drop down button. Here, all the
+running services are displayed and you can choose which ones you want to
+look watch. (See screenshot above).</para>
+
+    <para>The following services can be watched :</para>
+
+    <itemizedlist>
+      <listitem>
+        <para>Služba Webmin</para>
+      </listitem>
+
+      <listitem>
+        <para>Postfix Mail Server</para>
+      </listitem>
+
+      <listitem>
+        <para>FTP Server</para>
+      </listitem>
+
+      <listitem>
+        <para>Apache World Wide Web Server</para>
+      </listitem>
+
+      <listitem>
+        <para>SSH Server</para>
+      </listitem>
+
+      <listitem>
+        <para>Samba Server</para>
+      </listitem>
+
+      <listitem>
+        <para>Xinetd Service</para>
+      </listitem>
+
+      <listitem>
+        <para>BIND Domain Name Resolve</para>
+
+        <para><mediaobject>
+            <imageobject>
+              <imagedata fileref="logdrake1.png"/>
+            </imageobject>
+          </mediaobject></para>
+      </listitem>
+    </itemizedlist>
+
+    <para>In the next screen, select the <guilabel>Load</guilabel> value you consider
+unacceptable. The load represents the demand to a process, a high load slows
+the system down and a very high load may indicate that a process has gone
+out of control. The default value is 3. We recommend setting the load value
+to 3 times the number of processors.</para>
+
+    <para>In the last screen, enter the <guilabel>Email address</guilabel> of the
+person to be warned and the <guilabel>Email server</guilabel> to use (local
+or on the Internet).</para>
+  </section>
+</section>
+\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/docs/mcc-help/cs/lsnetdrake.xml b/docs/mcc-help/cs/lsnetdrake.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..311e13b1
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/mcc-help/cs/lsnetdrake.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,26 @@
+<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section
+xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook"
+xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML"
+xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg"
+xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml"
+xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink"
+xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook"
+xml:id="lsnetdrake" version="5.0" xml:lang="cs">
+  <info>
+	  <title xml:id="lsnetdrake-ti1">Display Available NFS And SMB Shares</title>
+	  <subtitle>lsnetdrake</subtitle>
+  </info>
+
+  <para>This tool <footnote>
+      <para>You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis
+role="bold">lsnetdrake</emphasis>.
+      </para>
+    </footnote> can only be started and used
+on the command line.</para>
+
+  <para>This page hasn't been written yet for lack of resources. If you think you
+can write this help, please contact <link
+ns2:href="https://wiki.mageia.org/en/Documentation_team"> the Documentation
+team.</link> Thanking you in advance.</para>
+
+</section>
diff --git a/docs/mcc-help/cs/lspcidrake.xml b/docs/mcc-help/cs/lspcidrake.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..e71f01b2
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/mcc-help/cs/lspcidrake.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,50 @@
+<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:lang="cs" xml:id="lspcidrake">
+  <info>
+    <title xml:id="lspcidrake-ti1">Display Your PCI, USB and PCMCIA Information</title>
+
+    <subtitle>lspcidrake</subtitle>
+  </info>
+
+  <para>This tool <footnote>
+      <para>You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis
+role="bold">lspcidrake</emphasis>.</para>
+    </footnote> can only be started and used
+on the command line. It will give some more information if used under root.</para>
+
+  <para>lspcidrake gives the list of all the connected devices to the computer (USB,
+PCI and PCMCIA) and the used drivers. It needs the ldetect and ldetect-lst
+packages to work.</para>
+
+  <mediaobject>
+    <imageobject>
+      <imagedata fileref="lspcidrake1.png"/>
+    </imageobject>
+  </mediaobject>
+
+  <para>With the -v option, lspcidrake adds the vendor and device identifications.</para>
+
+  <para>lspcidrake often generates very long lists, so, to find an information, it
+is often used in a pipeline with the grep command, like in these examples:</para>
+
+  <para>Information about the graphic card;</para>
+
+  <para><command>lspcidrake | grep VGA</command></para>
+
+  <para>Information about the network</para>
+
+  <para><command>lspcidrake | grep -i network</command></para>
+
+  <para>-i to ignore case distinctions.</para>
+
+  <para>In this screenshot below, you can see the action of the -v option for
+lspcidrake and the -i option for grep.</para>
+
+  <mediaobject>
+    <imageobject>
+      <imagedata fileref="lspcidrake2.png"/>
+    </imageobject>
+  </mediaobject>
+
+  <para>There is another tool that gives information about the hardware, it is
+called <emphasis role="bold">dmidecode</emphasis> (under root)</para>
+</section>
+\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/docs/mcc-help/cs/mcc-boot.xml b/docs/mcc-help/cs/mcc-boot.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..63a8fb11
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/mcc-help/cs/mcc-boot.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,41 @@
+<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?>
+
+<section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:xi="http://www.w3.org/2001/XInclude" xmlns:ns6="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:lang="cs" xml:id="mcc-boot">
+  <info>
+    <title xml:id="mcc-boot-ti1">Zavádění systému</title>
+  </info>
+
+  <mediaobject>
+    <imageobject>
+      <imagedata align="center"  fileref="mcc-boot.png"
+                 format="PNG" revision="1"  xml:id="mcc-boot-im1"/>
+    </imageobject>
+  </mediaobject>
+
+
+  <para>In this screen you can choose between several tools to configure your boot
+steps. Click on a link below to learn more.</para>
+
+
+      <orderedlist><title>Nastavit kroky zavádění systému</title>
+        <listitem>
+          <para><xref linkend="drakboot"/></para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para><xref linkend="drakboot--boot"/></para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para><xref linkend="drakedm"/></para>
+        </listitem>
+      </orderedlist>
+
+  <xi:include href="drakboot.xml"></xi:include>
+
+  <xi:include href="drakboot--boot.xml"></xi:include>
+
+    <xi:include href="drakedm.xml"></xi:include>
+
+
+</section>
diff --git a/docs/mcc-help/cs/mcc-hardware.xml b/docs/mcc-help/cs/mcc-hardware.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..7220853a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/mcc-help/cs/mcc-hardware.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,101 @@
+<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?>
+<section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:xi="http://www.w3.org/2001/XInclude" xmlns:ns6="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:lang="cs" xml:id="mcc-hardware">
+  <info>
+    <title xml:id="mcc-hardware-ti1">Hardware</title>
+  </info>
+
+  <mediaobject>
+    <imageobject>
+      <imagedata align="center"  fileref="mcc-hardware.png"
+                 format="PNG" revision="1" 
+                 xml:id="mcc-hardware-im1"/>
+    </imageobject>
+  </mediaobject>
+
+  <para>In this screen you can choose between several tools to configure your
+hardware. Click on a link below to learn more.</para>
+
+  <orderedlist>
+    <listitem>
+
+      <orderedlist><title>Spravovat hardware počítače</title>
+        <listitem>
+          <para><xref linkend="harddrake2"/><emphasis> = Browse and configure
+hardware</emphasis></para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para><xref linkend="draksound"/></para>
+        </listitem>
+      </orderedlist>
+    </listitem>
+
+    <listitem>
+
+      <orderedlist><title>Nastavit grafiku</title>
+        <listitem>
+          <para><xref linkend="drak3d"/><emphasis> = Configure 3D Desktop effects</emphasis></para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para><xref linkend="XFdrake"/></para>
+        </listitem>
+      </orderedlist>
+    </listitem>
+
+    <listitem>
+
+      <orderedlist><title>Nastavit myš a klávesnici</title>
+        <listitem>
+          <para><xref linkend="keyboarddrake"/></para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para><xref linkend="mousedrake"/></para>
+        </listitem>
+      </orderedlist>
+    </listitem>
+
+    <listitem>
+
+      <orderedlist><title>Nastavit tisk a skenování</title>
+        <listitem>
+          <para><xref linkend="system-config-printer"/><emphasis> = Set up the printer(s),
+the print job queues, ...</emphasis></para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para><xref linkend="scannerdrake"/></para>
+        </listitem>
+      </orderedlist>
+    </listitem>
+
+    <listitem>
+
+      <orderedlist><title>Ostatní</title>
+        <listitem>
+          <para><xref linkend="drakups"/></para>
+        </listitem>
+      </orderedlist>
+    </listitem>
+  </orderedlist>
+
+	<xi:include href="harddrake2.xml"></xi:include>
+
+	<xi:include href="draksound.xml"></xi:include>
+
+        <xi:include href="drak3d.xml"></xi:include>
+
+	<xi:include href="XFdrake.xml"></xi:include>
+
+	<xi:include href="keyboarddrake.xml"></xi:include>
+
+	<xi:include href="mousedrake.xml"></xi:include>
+
+	<xi:include href="system-config-printer.xml"></xi:include>
+
+	<xi:include href="scannerdrake.xml"></xi:include>
+
+	<xi:include href="drakups.xml"></xi:include>
+
+</section>
diff --git a/docs/mcc-help/cs/mcc-intro.xml b/docs/mcc-help/cs/mcc-intro.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..f61bbd6c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/mcc-help/cs/mcc-intro.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,22 @@
+<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?>
+
+<section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:lang="cs" xmlns:xlink="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xml:id="mcc-intro"><info><title xml:id="mcc-intro-ti1">O příručce pro Ovládací centrum Mageia</title></info>
+
+ 
+	<para>Ovládací centrum Mageia (MCC) má na výběr v levém sloupci osm různých
+záložek  a pokud byl nainstalován balíček drakwizard dokonce záložek
+deset. Každá z těchto záložek poskytuje odlišnou sadu nástrojů, které mohou
+být vybrány v pravé části.</para>
+
+	<para>Deset následujících kapitol je o těchto deseti záložkách a souvisejících
+nástrojích.</para>
+
+<para>Poslední kapitola je o některých dalších nástrojích Mageia, které nemohou
+být vybrány ze záložek v MCC.</para>
+
+	<para>Názvy zde se budou mnohdy shodovat s názvy obrazovek nástrojů.</para>
+
+        <para>Je zde také k dispozici vyhledávací lišta, ke které můžete přistupovat
+kliknutím na záložku "Hledat" v levém sloupci.</para>
+  
+  </section>
diff --git a/docs/mcc-help/cs/mcc-localdisks.xml b/docs/mcc-help/cs/mcc-localdisks.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..17a59096
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/mcc-help/cs/mcc-localdisks.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,31 @@
+<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?>
+
+<section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:xi="http://www.w3.org/2001/XInclude" xmlns:ns6="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xml:id="mcc-localdisks" version="5.0" xml:lang="cs">
+
+  <info>
+    <title xml:id="mcc-localdisks-ti1">Místní disky</title>
+  </info>
+
+  <mediaobject>
+    <imageobject>
+      <imagedata xml:id="mcc-localdisks-im1" revision="1" align="center" format="PNG"   fileref="mcc-localdisks.png"/>
+    </imageobject>
+  </mediaobject>
+
+  <para>In this screen you can choose between several tools to manage or share your
+local disks. Click on a link below to learn more.</para>
+
+  <orderedlist><title>Místní disky</title>
+		  <listitem><para><xref linkend="drakdisk"></xref></para></listitem>
+		  <listitem><para><xref linkend="diskdrake--removable"></xref></para></listitem>
+  		  <listitem><para><xref linkend="diskdrake--fileshare"></xref></para></listitem>
+	          </orderedlist>
+
+ <xi:include href="drakdisk.xml"></xi:include>
+
+ <xi:include href="diskdrake--removable.xml"></xi:include>
+
+ <xi:include href="diskdrake--fileshare.xml"></xi:include>
+
+
+  </section>
diff --git a/docs/mcc-help/cs/mcc-network.xml b/docs/mcc-help/cs/mcc-network.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..5baf39c9
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/mcc-help/cs/mcc-network.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,82 @@
+<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:xi="http://www.w3.org/2001/XInclude" xmlns:ns6="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xml:id="mcc-network" version="5.0" xml:lang="cs">
+  <info>
+    <title xml:id="mcc-network-ti1">Network and Internet</title>
+  </info>
+
+  <mediaobject>
+    <imageobject>
+      <imagedata  revision="1" align="center" format="PNG" fileref="mcc-network.png" xml:id="mcc-network-im1" />
+    </imageobject>
+  </mediaobject>
+
+  <para>In this screen you can choose between several network tools. Click on a link
+below to learn more.</para>
+
+  <orderedlist>
+    <listitem>
+      <orderedlist>
+        <title>Spravovat síťová zařízení</title>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para><xref linkend="draknetcenter"/></para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para><xref linkend="drakconnect"/></para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para><xref linkend="drakconnect--del"/></para>
+        </listitem>
+      </orderedlist>
+    </listitem>
+
+    <listitem>
+      <orderedlist>
+        <title>Přizpůsobit síť a nastavit její zabezpečení</title>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para><xref linkend="drakproxy"/></para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para><xref linkend="drakgw"/></para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para><xref linkend="draknetprofile"/></para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para><xref linkend="drakvpn"/></para>
+        </listitem>
+      </orderedlist>
+    </listitem>
+
+    <listitem>
+      <orderedlist>
+        <title>Ostatní</title>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para><xref linkend="drakhosts"/></para>
+        </listitem>
+      </orderedlist>
+    </listitem>
+  </orderedlist>
+
+  <xi:include href="draknetcenter.xml"/>
+
+  <xi:include href="drakconnect.xml"/>
+
+  <xi:include href="drakconnect--del.xml"/>
+
+  <xi:include href="drakproxy.xml"/>
+
+  <xi:include href="drakgw.xml"/>
+
+  <xi:include href="draknetprofile.xml"/>
+
+  <xi:include href="drakvpn.xml"/>
+
+  <xi:include href="drakhosts.xml"/>
+</section>
+\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/docs/mcc-help/cs/mcc-networkservices.xml b/docs/mcc-help/cs/mcc-networkservices.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..d49bf8c3
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/mcc-help/cs/mcc-networkservices.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,53 @@
+<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?>
+<section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:xi="http://www.w3.org/2001/XInclude" xmlns:ns6="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:lang="cs" xml:id="mcc-networkservices">
+  <info>
+    <title xml:id="mcc-networkservices-ti1">Síťové služby</title>
+  </info>
+
+  <mediaobject>
+    <imageobject>
+      <imagedata align="center"  fileref="mcc-networkservices.png"
+                 format="PNG" revision="1" 
+                 xml:id="mcc-networkservices-im1"/>
+    </imageobject>
+  </mediaobject>
+
+  <para>This screen and the one for <emphasis>Sharing</emphasis> are only visible if
+the <emphasis>drakwizard</emphasis> package is installed. You can choose
+between several tools to set up different servers. Click on a link below or
+on <xref linkend="mcc-sharing"/>to learn more.</para>
+
+      <orderedlist><title>Síťové služby</title>
+        <listitem>
+          <para><xref linkend="drakwizard_dhcp"/></para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para><xref linkend="drakwizard_bind"/></para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para><xref linkend="drakwizard_squid"/></para>
+  </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para><xref linkend="drakwizard_ntp"/></para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para><xref linkend="drakwizard_sshd"/></para>
+        </listitem>
+
+  </orderedlist>
+
+	<xi:include href="drakwizard_dhcp.xml"></xi:include>
+
+	<xi:include href="drakwizard_bind.xml"></xi:include>
+
+        <xi:include href="drakwizard_squid.xml"></xi:include>
+
+	<xi:include href="drakwizard_ntp.xml"></xi:include>
+
+	<xi:include href="drakwizard_sshd.xml"></xi:include>
+
+</section>
diff --git a/docs/mcc-help/cs/mcc-networksharing.xml b/docs/mcc-help/cs/mcc-networksharing.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..1ec28eef
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/mcc-help/cs/mcc-networksharing.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,44 @@
+<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?>
+<section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:xi="http://www.w3.org/2001/XInclude" xmlns:ns6="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xml:id="mcc-networksharing" version="5.0" xml:lang="cs">
+  <info>
+    <title xml:id="mcc-networksharing-ti1">Sdílení v síti</title>
+  </info>
+
+  <mediaobject>
+    <imageobject>
+      <imagedata xml:id="mcc-networksharing-im1" revision="1" align="center" format="PNG"   fileref="mcc-networksharing.png"/>
+    </imageobject>
+  </mediaobject>
+
+  <para>In this screen you can choose between several tools for sharing drives and
+directories. Click on a link below to learn more.</para>
+
+  <orderedlist>
+	  <listitem>
+		  <orderedlist><title>Nastavit sdílení s Windows</title>
+		  <listitem><para><xref linkend="diskdrake--smb"></xref></para></listitem>
+		  <listitem><para><xref linkend="draksambashare"></xref><emphasis> = Share drives and
+directories with Windows (SMB) systems</emphasis></para></listitem>
+	  </orderedlist></listitem>
+  	  <listitem>
+		  <orderedlist><title>Nastavit sdílení pomocí NFS</title>
+		  <listitem><para><xref linkend="diskdrake--nfs"></xref></para></listitem>
+		  <listitem><para><xref linkend="draknfs"></xref></para></listitem>
+	  </orderedlist></listitem>
+	  <listitem>
+		  <orderedlist><title>Nastavit sdílení pomocí WebDAV</title>
+		  <listitem><para><xref linkend="diskdrake--dav"></xref></para></listitem>
+	  </orderedlist></listitem>
+  </orderedlist>
+
+  <xi:include href="diskdrake--smb.xml"></xi:include>
+
+  <xi:include href="draksambashare.xml"></xi:include>
+
+  <xi:include href="diskdrake--nfs.xml"></xi:include>
+
+  <xi:include href="draknfs.xml"></xi:include>
+
+  <xi:include href="diskdrake--dav.xml"></xi:include>
+
+  </section>
diff --git a/docs/mcc-help/cs/mcc-security.xml b/docs/mcc-help/cs/mcc-security.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..78e014fc
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/mcc-help/cs/mcc-security.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,50 @@
+<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?>
+
+<section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:xi="http://www.w3.org/2001/XInclude" xmlns:ns6="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:lang="cs" xml:id="mcc-security">
+  <info>
+    <title xml:id="mcc-security-ti1">Bezpečnost</title>
+  </info>
+
+  <mediaobject>
+    <imageobject>
+      <imagedata align="center"  fileref="mcc-security.png"
+                 format="PNG" revision="1" 
+                 xml:id="mcc-security-im1"/>
+    </imageobject>
+  </mediaobject>
+
+  <para>In this screen you can choose between several security tools. Click on a
+link below to learn more.</para>
+
+      <orderedlist><title>Bezpečnost</title>
+        <listitem>
+          <para><xref linkend="msecgui"/><emphasis> = Configure system security, permissions
+and audit</emphasis></para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para><xref linkend="drakfirewall"/></para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para><xref linkend="draksec"/></para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para><xref linkend="drakinvictus"/></para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para><xref linkend="drakguard"/></para>
+        </listitem>
+      </orderedlist>
+
+  <xi:include href="msecgui.xml"></xi:include>
+
+  <xi:include href="drakfirewall.xml"></xi:include>
+  <xi:include href="draksec.xml"></xi:include>
+
+  <xi:include href="drakinvictus.xml"></xi:include> 
+  <xi:include href="drakguard.xml"></xi:include>
+
+</section>
diff --git a/docs/mcc-help/cs/mcc-sharing.xml b/docs/mcc-help/cs/mcc-sharing.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..dc21c7db
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/mcc-help/cs/mcc-sharing.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,34 @@
+<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?>
+<section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:xi="http://www.w3.org/2001/XInclude" xmlns:ns6="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:lang="cs" xml:id="mcc-sharing">
+  <info>
+    <title xml:id="mcc-sharing-ti1">Sdílení</title>
+  </info>
+
+  <mediaobject>
+    <imageobject>
+      <imagedata align="center"  fileref="mcc-sharing.png"
+                 format="PNG" revision="1" 
+                 xml:id="mcc-sharing-im1"/>
+    </imageobject>
+  </mediaobject>
+
+  <para>This screen and the one for <emphasis>Network Services</emphasis> are only
+visible if the <emphasis>drakwizard</emphasis> package is installed. You can
+choose between several tools to set up different servers. Click on a link
+below or on <xref linkend="mcc-networkservices"/>to learn more.</para>
+
+      <orderedlist><title>Sdílení</title>
+        <listitem>
+          <para><xref linkend="drakwizard_proftpd"/></para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para><xref linkend="drakwizard_apache2"/></para>
+        </listitem>
+      </orderedlist>
+
+	<xi:include href="drakwizard_proftpd.xml"></xi:include>
+
+	<xi:include href="drakwizard_apache2.xml"></xi:include>
+
+</section>
diff --git a/docs/mcc-help/cs/mcc-system.xml b/docs/mcc-help/cs/mcc-system.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..ac290398
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/mcc-help/cs/mcc-system.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,95 @@
+<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?>
+<section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:xi="http://www.w3.org/2001/XInclude" xmlns:ns6="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:lang="cs" xml:id="mcc-system">
+  <info>
+    <title xml:id="mcc-system-ti1">Systém</title>
+  </info>
+
+  <mediaobject>
+    <imageobject>
+      <imagedata fileref="mcc-system.png" xml:id="mcc-system-im1"  revision="1" align="center"  format="PNG"/>
+    </imageobject>
+  </mediaobject>
+
+  <para>In this screen you can choose between several system and administration
+tools. Click on a link below to learn more.</para>
+
+  <orderedlist>
+    <listitem>
+
+      <orderedlist><title>Spravovat systémové služby</title>
+        <listitem>
+		<para> <xref linkend="drakauth"></xref> </para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para><xref linkend="drakxservices"></xref></para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+		<para><xref linkend="drakfont"></xref></para>
+        </listitem>
+      </orderedlist>
+    </listitem>
+
+    <listitem>
+
+      <orderedlist><title>Lokalizace</title>
+      <listitem>
+        <para><xref linkend="drakclock"></xref></para>
+      </listitem>
+
+      <listitem>
+        <para><xref linkend="localedrake"></xref></para>
+      </listitem>
+    </orderedlist>
+</listitem>
+
+    <listitem>
+
+      <orderedlist><title>Nástroje pro správu</title>
+      <listitem>
+        <para><xref linkend="logdrake"></xref></para>
+      </listitem>
+
+      <listitem>
+        <para><xref linkend="drakconsole"></xref></para>
+      </listitem>
+
+      <listitem>
+	      <para><xref linkend="userdrake"></xref><emphasis> = Manage users on
+system</emphasis></para>
+      </listitem>
+
+      <listitem>
+        <para><xref linkend="transfugdrake"></xref></para>
+      </listitem>
+
+      <listitem>
+        <para><xref linkend="draksnapshot-config"></xref></para>
+      </listitem>
+    </orderedlist>
+</listitem>
+  </orderedlist>
+
+  <xi:include href="drakauth.xml"></xi:include>
+
+  <xi:include href="drakxservices.xml"></xi:include>
+
+   <xi:include href="drakfont.xml"></xi:include>
+
+   <xi:include href="drakclock.xml"></xi:include>
+
+   <xi:include href="localedrake.xml"></xi:include>
+
+
+   <xi:include href="logdrake.xml"></xi:include>
+
+   <xi:include href="drakconsole.xml"></xi:include>
+
+   <xi:include href="userdrake.xml"></xi:include> 
+
+   <xi:include href="transfugdrake.xml"></xi:include>
+
+   <xi:include href="draksnapshot-config.xml"></xi:include>
+
+</section>
diff --git a/docs/mcc-help/cs/mgaapplet-config.xml b/docs/mcc-help/cs/mgaapplet-config.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..d73cf40b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/mcc-help/cs/mgaapplet-config.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,34 @@
+<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xml:id="mgaapplet-config" version="5.0" xml:lang="cs">
+  <info>
+    <title xml:id="mgaapplet-config-ti1">Nastavit frekvenci aktualizací</title>
+
+    <subtitle>mgaapplet-config</subtitle>
+  </info>
+
+  <mediaobject>
+    <imageobject>
+      <imagedata revision="1" align="center" xml:id="mgaapplet-config-im1" format="PNG" fileref="mgaapplet-config.png"/>
+    </imageobject>
+  </mediaobject>
+
+  <para>This tool<footnote>
+      <para>You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis
+role="bold">mgaapplet-config</emphasis> as root.</para>
+    </footnote> is present in the Mageia
+Control Center under the tab <emphasis role="bold">Software
+management</emphasis>. It is also available by a <guimenu>right click /
+Updates configuration</guimenu> on the red icon <inlinemediaobject>
+      <imageobject>
+        <imagedata fileref="MageiaUpdate1.png"/>
+      </imageobject>
+    </inlinemediaobject> in the system tray.</para>
+
+  <para/>
+
+  <para>The first slider allows you to change how frequently Mageia will check for
+updates and the second the delay after booting before the first check.  The
+check box gives you the option to be warned when a new Mageia release is
+out.</para>
+
+  <para/>
+</section>
+\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/docs/mcc-help/cs/mousedrake.xml b/docs/mcc-help/cs/mousedrake.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..51e87b65
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/mcc-help/cs/mousedrake.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,26 @@
+<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xml:id="mousedrake" version="5.0" xml:lang="cs">
+  <info>
+    <title xml:id="mousedrake-ti1">Nastavit polohovací zařízení (myš, touchpad)</title>
+
+    <subtitle>mousedrake</subtitle>
+  </info>
+
+  <mediaobject>
+    <imageobject>
+      <imagedata xml:id="mousedrake-im1"  revision="1" fileref="mousedrake.png" align="center" format="PNG" />
+    </imageobject>
+  </mediaobject>
+
+  <para>This tool<footnote><para>You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis
+role="bold">mousedrake</emphasis> as root.</para></footnote> is present in the Mageia
+Control Center under the tab <emphasis role="bold">Hardware</emphasis>.</para>
+
+  <para>As you must have a mouse to install Mageia, that one is already installed by
+Drakinstall. This tool allows installation of another mouse.</para>
+
+  <para>The mice are sorted by connection type and then by model. Select your mouse
+and click on <guibutton>OK</guibutton>. Most of the time "Universal / Any
+PS/2 &amp; USB mice" is suitable for a recent mouse. The new mouse is
+immediately taken into account.</para>
+
+  </section>
+\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/docs/mcc-help/cs/msecgui.xml b/docs/mcc-help/cs/msecgui.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..877c9f82
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/mcc-help/cs/msecgui.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,358 @@
+<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:lang="cs" xml:id="msecgui">
+  <info>
+    <title xml:id="msecgui-ti1">MSEC: Zabezpečení a audit systému</title>
+
+    <subtitle>msecgui</subtitle>
+  </info>
+
+  
+
+
+  <mediaobject>
+    <!-- written by Lebarhon 2014/01/03 To be checked-->
+<imageobject>
+      <imagedata xml:id="msecgui-im1" revision="1" fileref="msecgui.png" align="center" format="PNG"/>
+    </imageobject>
+  </mediaobject>
+
+
+  <section>
+    <title>Presentation</title>
+
+    <para>msecgui<footnote><para>You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis
+role="bold">msecgui</emphasis> as root.</para>
+    </footnote> is a graphic user interface for
+msec that allows to configure your system security according to two
+approaches:</para>
+
+    <itemizedlist>
+      <listitem>
+        <para>It sets the system behaviour, msec imposes modifications to the system to
+make it more secure.</para>
+      </listitem>
+
+      <listitem>
+	 <para>It carries on periodic checks automatically on the system in order to warn
+you if something seems dangerous.</para>
+      </listitem>
+    </itemizedlist>
+
+    <para>msec uses the concept of "security levels" which are intended to configure a
+set of system permissions, which can be audited for changes or
+enforcement. Several of them are proposed by Mageia, but you can define your
+own customised security levels.</para>
+  </section>
+
+  <section>
+    <title>Overview tab</title>
+
+    <para>See the screenshot above</para>
+
+    <para>The first tab takes up the list of the different security tools with a
+button on the right side to configure them:</para>
+
+    <itemizedlist>
+      <listitem>
+        <para>Firewall, also found in the MCC / Security / Set up your personal firewall</para>
+      </listitem>
+
+      <listitem>
+        <para>Updates, also found in MCC / Software Management / Update your system</para>
+      </listitem>
+
+      <listitem>
+        <para>msec itself with some information:</para>
+
+        <itemizedlist>
+          <listitem>
+            <para>enabled or not</para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>the configured Base security level</para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>the date of the last Periodic checks and a button to see a detailed report
+and another button to execute the checks just now.</para>
+          </listitem>
+        </itemizedlist>
+      </listitem>
+    </itemizedlist>
+  </section>
+
+  <section>
+    <title>Security settings tab</title>
+
+    <para>A click on the second tab or on the Security
+<guibutton>Configure</guibutton> button leads to the same screen shown
+below.</para>
+
+    <mediaobject>
+      <imageobject>
+        <imagedata fileref="msecgui2.png"/>
+      </imageobject>
+    </mediaobject>
+
+
+    <section>
+      <title>Basic security tab</title>
+
+      <para role="underline">
+        <emphasis role="underline">Security levels:</emphasis>
+      </para>
+
+      <para>After having checked the box <guilabel>Enable MSEC tool</guilabel>, this tab
+allows you by a double click to choose the security level that appears then
+in bold. If the box is not checked, the level « none » is applied. The
+following levels are available:</para>
+
+      <orderedlist numeration="arabic">
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Level <emphasis role="bold">none</emphasis>. This level is intended if you
+do not want to use msec to control system security, and prefer tuning it on
+your own. It disables all security checks and puts no restrictions or
+constraints on system configuration and settings. Please use this level only
+if you are knowing what you are doing, as it would leave your system
+vulnerable to attack.</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+	<listitem>
+	  <para>Level <emphasis role="bold">standard</emphasis>. This is the default
+configuration when installed and is intended for casual users.  It
+constrains several system settings and executes daily security checks which
+detect changes in system files, system accounts, and vulnerable directory
+permissions. (This level is similar to levels 2 and 3 from past msec
+versions).</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Level <emphasis role="bold">secure</emphasis>. This level is intended when
+you want to ensure your system is secure, yet usable.  It further restricts
+system permissions and executes more periodic checks. Moreover, access to
+the system is more restricted. (This level is similar to levels 4 (High) and
+5 (Paranoid) from old msec versions).</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+	<listitem>
+	  <para>Besides those levels, different task-oriented security are also provided,
+such as the <emphasis role="bold">fileserver </emphasis>, <emphasis
+role="bold">webserver</emphasis> and <emphasis
+role="bold">netbook</emphasis> levels. Such levels attempt to pre-configure
+system security according to the most common use cases.</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+	<listitem>
+          <para>The last two levels called <emphasis role="bold">audit_daily </emphasis> and
+<emphasis role="bold">audit_weekly</emphasis> are not really security levels
+but rather tools for periodic checks only.</para>
+        </listitem>
+      </orderedlist>
+
+      <para>These levels are saved in
+<filename>etc/security/msec/level.&lt;levelname></filename>. You can define
+your own customised security levels, saving them into specific files called
+<filename>level.&lt;levelname></filename>, placed into the folder
+<filename>etc/security/msec/.</filename> This function is intended for power
+users which require a customised or more secure system configuration.</para>
+
+      <caution>
+	<para>Keep in mind that user-modified parameters take precedence over default
+level settings.</para>
+      </caution>
+
+      <para>
+        <emphasis role="underline">Security alerts:</emphasis>
+      </para>
+
+      <para>If you check the box <guibutton>Send security alerts by email
+to:</guibutton>, the security alerts generated by msec are going to be sent
+by local e-mail to the security administrator named in the nearby field. You
+can fill either a local user or a complete e-mail address (the local e-mail
+and the e-mail manager must be set accordingly). At last, you can receive
+the security alerts directly on your desktop.  Check the relevant box to
+enable it.</para>
+
+      <important>
+	<para>It is strongly advisable to enable the security alerts option in order to
+immediately inform the security administrator of possible security
+problems. If not, the administrator will have to regularly check the logs
+files available in <filename>/var/log/security.</filename></para></important>
+
+      <para><emphasis role="underline">Security options:</emphasis></para>
+
+      <para>Creating a customised level is not the only way to customise the computer
+security, it is also possible to use the tabs presented here after to change
+any option you want. Current configuration for msec is stored in
+<filename>/etc/security/msec/security.conf</filename>. This file contains
+the current security level name and the list of all the modifications done
+to the options.</para>
+    </section>
+
+    <section>
+      <title>System security tab</title>
+
+      <para>This tab displays all the security options on the left side column, a
+description in the centre column, and their current values on the right side
+column.</para>
+
+      <mediaobject>
+        <imageobject>
+          <imagedata fileref="msecgui3.png"/>
+        </imageobject>
+      </mediaobject>
+
+      <para>To modify an option, double click on it and a new window appears (see
+screenshot below). It displays the option name, a short description, the
+actual and default values, and a drop down list where the new value can be
+selected. Click on the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button to validate the
+choice.</para>
+
+      <mediaobject>
+        <imageobject>
+          <imagedata fileref="msecgui11.png"/>
+        </imageobject>
+      </mediaobject>
+
+      <caution>
+      <para>Do not forget when leaving msecgui to save definitively your configuration
+using the menu <guimenu>File -> Save the configuration</guimenu>. If you
+have changed the settings, msecgui allows you to preview the changes before
+saving them.</para>
+      </caution>
+
+      <mediaobject>
+        <imageobject>
+          <imagedata fileref="msecgui10.png"/>
+        </imageobject>
+      </mediaobject>
+    </section>
+
+    <section>
+      <title>Zabezpečení sítě</title>
+
+      <para>This tab displays all the network options and works like the previous tab</para>
+
+      <mediaobject>
+        <imageobject>
+          <imagedata fileref="msecgui4.png"/>
+        </imageobject>
+      </mediaobject>
+    </section>
+
+    <section>
+      <title>Periodic checks tab</title>
+
+      <para>Periodic checks aim to inform the security administrator by means of
+security alerts of all situations msec thinks potentially dangerous.</para>
+
+      <para>This tab displays all the periodic checks done by msec and their frequency
+if the box <guibutton>Enable periodic security checks</guibutton> is
+checked. Changes are done like in the previous tabs.</para>
+
+      <mediaobject>
+        <imageobject>
+          <imagedata fileref="msecgui5.png"/>
+        </imageobject>
+      </mediaobject>
+    </section>
+
+    <section>
+      <title>Exceptions tab</title>
+
+      <para>Sometimes alert messages are due to well known and wanted situations. In
+these cases they are useless and wasted time for the administrator. This tab
+allows you to create as many exceptions as you want to avoid unwanted alert
+messages. It is obviously empty at the first msec start. The screenshot
+below shows four exceptions.</para>
+
+      <mediaobject>
+        <imageobject>
+          <imagedata fileref="msecgui6.png"/>
+        </imageobject>
+      </mediaobject>
+
+      <para>To create an exception, click on the <guibutton>Add a rule</guibutton>
+button</para>
+
+      <mediaobject>
+        <imageobject>
+          <imagedata fileref="msecgui7.png"/>
+        </imageobject>
+      </mediaobject>
+
+      <para>Select the wanted periodic check in the drop down list called
+<guilabel>Check</guilabel> and then, enter the
+<guilabel>Exception</guilabel> in the text area. Adding an exception is
+obviously not definitive, you can either delete it using the
+<guibutton>Delete</guibutton> button of the <guilabel>Exceptions</guilabel>
+tab or modify it with a double clicK.</para>
+    </section>
+
+    <section>
+    <title>Oprávnění</title>
+    <para>This tab is intended for file and directory permissions checking and
+enforcement.</para>
+    <para>Like for the security, msec owns different permissions levels (standard,
+secure, ..), they are enabled accordingly with the chosen security
+level. You can create your own customised permissions levels, saving them
+into specific files called <filename>perm.&lt;levelname> </filename> placed
+into the folder <filename>etc/security/msec/</filename> . This function is
+intended for power users which require a customised configuration. It is
+also possible to use the tab presented here after to change any permission
+you want. Current configuration is stored in
+<filename>/etc/security/msec/perms.conf.</filename> This file contains the
+list of all the modifications done to the permissions.</para>
+      <mediaobject>
+        <imageobject>
+          <imagedata fileref="msecgui8.png"/>
+        </imageobject>
+	</mediaobject>
+    <para>Default permissions are visible as a list of rules (a rule per line). You
+can see on the left side, the file or folder concerned by the rule, then the
+owner, then the group and then the permissions given by the rule. If, for a
+given rule:</para>
+   <itemizedlist>
+        <listitem>
+          <para>the box <guilabel>Enforce</guilabel> is not checked, msec only checks if the
+defined permissions for this rule are respected and sends an alert message
+if not, but does not change anything.</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+	<listitem>
+	  <para>the box <guilabel>Enforce</guilabel> is checked, then msec will rule the
+permissions respect at the first periodic check and overwrite the
+permissions.</para></listitem>
+   </itemizedlist>
+   <important><para>For this to work, the option CHECK_PERMS in the <emphasis
+role="bold">Periodic check tab</emphasis> must be configured accordingly.</para></important><para>To create a new rule, click on the <guibutton> Add a rule</guibutton> button
+and fill the fields as shown in the example below. The joker * is allowed in
+the <guilabel>File</guilabel> field. “current” means no modification.</para>
+     <mediaobject>
+        <imageobject>
+          <imagedata fileref="msecgui9.png"/>
+        </imageobject>
+	</mediaobject>
+    <para>Click on the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button to validate the choice and do
+not forget when leaving to save definitively your configuration using the
+menu <guimenu>File -> Save the configuration</guimenu>. If you have changed
+the settings, msecgui allows you to preview the changes before saving them. </para>
+    <note><para>It is also possible to create or modify the rules by editing the
+configuration file <filename>/etc/security/msec/perms.conf</filename>.
+    </para></note>
+    <caution><para>Changes in the <emphasis role="bold">Permission tab</emphasis> (or directly
+in the configuration file) are taken into account at the first periodic
+check (see the option CHECK_PERMS in the <emphasis role="bold">Periodic
+checks tab</emphasis>). If you want them to be taken immediately into
+account, use the msecperms command in a console with root rights. You can
+use before, the msecperms -p command to know the permissions that will be
+changed by msecperms.</para></caution>
+    <caution><para>Do not forget that if you modify the permissions in a console or in a file
+manager, for a file where the box <guilabel>Enforce </guilabel> is checked
+in the <emphasis role="bold">Permissions tab </emphasis>, msecgui will write
+the old permissions back after a while, accordingly to the configuration of
+the options CHECK_PERMS and CHECK_PERMS_ENFORCE in the <emphasis
+role="bold">Periodic Checks tab </emphasis>.</para></caution>
+   </section>
+  </section>
+</section>
diff --git a/docs/mcc-help/cs/otherMageiaTools.xml b/docs/mcc-help/cs/otherMageiaTools.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..d6c799b8
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/mcc-help/cs/otherMageiaTools.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,42 @@
+<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?>
+<section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:xi="http://www.w3.org/2001/XInclude" xmlns:ns6="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:lang="cs" xml:id="otherMageiaTools">
+  <info>
+    <title xml:id="otherMageiaTools-ti1">Other Mageia Tools</title>
+  </info>
+
+  <para>There are more Mageia tools than those that can be started in the Mageia
+Control Center. Click on a link below to learn more, or continue reading the
+next pages.</para>
+
+      <orderedlist>
+        <listitem>
+		<para><xref linkend="drakbug"/><emphasis>drakbug</emphasis>
+		</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+	<listitem>
+		<para><xref linkend="drakbug_report"/><emphasis>drakbug_report </emphasis></para>
+	</listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+		<para><xref linkend="lsnetdrake"/><emphasis>TO BE WRITTEN </emphasis></para>
+        </listitem>
+        <listitem>
+		<para><xref linkend="lspcidrake"/></para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+        	<para>And more tools?</para>
+        </listitem>
+      </orderedlist>
+
+	<xi:include href="drakbug.xml"></xi:include>
+
+	<xi:include href="drakbug_report.xml"></xi:include>
+
+	<xi:include href="lsnetdrake.xml"></xi:include>
+
+        <xi:include href="lspcidrake.xml"></xi:include>
+
+
+</section>
diff --git a/docs/mcc-help/cs/rpmdrake.xml b/docs/mcc-help/cs/rpmdrake.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..96917d5e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/mcc-help/cs/rpmdrake.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,251 @@
+<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xml:id="rpmdrake" version="5.0" xml:lang="cs">
+  <!--2012-09-03 marja expanded xml:id's of section and title below, because they conflicted with identical xml:id's in another page of MCC help, also replaced first para in some sections with title tags, removed figure tags-->
+<info annotations="simonnzg 6jan2013">
+    <title xml:id="rpmdrake-ti1">Software Management (Install and Remove Software)</title>
+
+    <subtitle>rpmdrake</subtitle>
+  </info>
+
+  <mediaobject>
+    <imageobject>
+      <imagedata xml:id="rpmdrake-im1" revision="1" fileref="rpmdrake.png" align="center" format="PNG"/>
+    </imageobject>
+  </mediaobject>
+
+  
+
+  <section xml:id="rpmdrake-introduction">
+    <title xml:id="rpmdrake-introduction-ti1">Introduction to rpmdrake</title>
+
+    <para>This tool<footnote>
+        <para>You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis
+role="bold">rpmdrake</emphasis> as root.</para>
+      </footnote>, also known as drakrpm, is a
+program for installing, uninstalling and updating packages. It is the
+graphical user interface of URPMI. At each start up, it will check online
+package lists (called 'media') downloaded straight from Mageia's official
+servers, and will show you each time the latest applications and packages
+available for your computer. A filter system allows you to display only
+certain types of packages: you may display only installed applications (by
+default), or only available updates. You can also view only not installed
+packages. You can also search by the name of a package, or in the summaries
+of descriptions or in the full descriptions of packages or in the file names
+included in the packages.</para>
+
+    <para>To work, rpmdrake needs the repositories to be configured with <xref
+linkend="drakrpm-edit-media"/> .</para>
+
+    <important>
+      <para>During the installation, the configured repository is the medium used for
+the installation, generally the DVD or CD. If you keep this medium, rpmdrake
+will ask it each time you want to install a package, with this pop-up window
+: <mediaobject>
+          <imageobject>
+            <imagedata fileref="rpmdrake8.png"/>
+          </imageobject>
+        </mediaobject>If the above message annoys you
+and you have a good internet connection without too strict download limit,
+it is wise to remove that medium and replace it by online repositories
+thanks to <xref linkend="drakrpm-edit-media"/> .</para>
+
+      <para>Moreover, the online repositories are always up to date, contains much more
+packages, and allow to update your installed packages.</para>
+    </important>
+  </section>
+
+  <section>
+    <title>The main parts of the screen</title>
+
+    <screenshot>
+<mediaobject>
+        <imageobject>
+          <imagedata fileref="rpmdrake1.png"/>
+        </imageobject>
+      </mediaobject></screenshot>
+
+    <orderedlist>
+      <listitem>
+        <para><emphasis role="bold">Package type filter:</emphasis></para>
+
+        <para>This filter allows you to display only certain types of packages. The first
+time you start the manager, it only displays applications with a graphical
+interface. You can display either all the packages and all their
+dependencies and libraries or only package groups such as applications only,
+updates only or backported packages from newer versions of Mageia.</para>
+
+        <warning>
+          <para>The default filter setting is for new entrants to Linux or Mageia, who
+probably do not want command line or specialist tools.  Since you're reading
+this documentation, you're obviously interested in improving your knowledge
+of Mageia, so it is best to set this filter to "All".</para>
+        </warning>
+      </listitem>
+
+      <listitem>
+        <para><firstterm> <emphasis role="bold">Package state filter:</emphasis>
+</firstterm></para>
+
+        <para>This filter allows you to view only the installed packages, only the
+packages that are not installed or all of the packages, both installed and
+not installed.</para>
+      </listitem>
+
+      <listitem>
+        <para><emphasis role="bold">Search mode:</emphasis></para>
+
+        <para>Click on this icon to search through the package names, through their
+summaries, through their complete description or through the files included
+in the packages.</para>
+      </listitem>
+
+      <listitem>
+        <para><emphasis role="bold">"Find" box:</emphasis></para>
+
+        <para>Enter here one or more key words. If you want to use more than one keyword
+for searching use '|' between keywords, e.g. To search for "mplayer" and
+"xine" at the same time type 'mplayer | xine'.</para>
+      </listitem>
+
+      <listitem>
+        <para><emphasis role="bold">Erase all:</emphasis></para>
+
+        <para>This icon can erase in one click all the key words entered in the "Find" box
+.</para>
+      </listitem>
+
+      <listitem>
+        <para><emphasis role="bold">Categories list:</emphasis></para>
+
+        <para>This side bar groups all applications and packages into clear categories and
+sub categories.</para>
+      </listitem>
+
+      <listitem>
+        <para><emphasis role="bold">Description panel:</emphasis></para>
+
+        <para>This panel displays the package's name, its summary and complete
+description. It displays many useful elements about the selected package. It
+can also show precise details about the package, the files included in the
+package as well as a list of the last changes made by the maintainer.</para>
+      </listitem>
+    </orderedlist>
+  </section>
+
+  <section>
+    <title>The status column</title>
+
+    <para>Once you correctly set the filters, you can find your software either by
+category (in area 6 above) or by name/summary/description using area 4. A
+list of packages fulfilling your query and, don't forget, the chosen medium
+is shown with different status markers according to whether each package is
+installed/not installed/an update... To change this status, just check or
+uncheck the box before the package name and click on
+<guibutton>Apply</guibutton>.</para>
+
+    <para><table>
+        <title/>
+
+        <tgroup cols="2" align="left">
+          <colspec align="center"/>
+
+          <thead>
+            <row>
+              <entry align="center">Ikona</entry>
+
+              <entry valign="middle" align="center">Legend</entry>
+            </row>
+          </thead>
+
+          <tbody>
+            <row>
+              <entry><mediaobject>
+                  <imageobject>
+                    <imagedata fileref="rpmdrake2.png"/>
+                  </imageobject>
+                </mediaobject></entry>
+
+              <entry valign="middle">This package is already installed</entry>
+            </row>
+
+            <row>
+              <entry><mediaobject>
+                  <imageobject>
+                    <imagedata fileref="rpmdrake3.png"/>
+                  </imageobject>
+                </mediaobject></entry>
+
+              <entry valign="middle">This package will be installed</entry>
+            </row>
+
+            <row>
+              <entry><mediaobject>
+                  <imageobject>
+                    <imagedata fileref="rpmdrake4.png"/>
+                  </imageobject>
+                </mediaobject></entry>
+
+              <entry valign="middle">This package cannot be modified</entry>
+            </row>
+
+            <row>
+              <entry><mediaobject>
+                  <imageobject>
+                    <imagedata fileref="rpmdrake5.png"/>
+                  </imageobject>
+                </mediaobject></entry>
+
+              <entry valign="middle">This package is an update</entry>
+            </row>
+
+            <row>
+              <entry><mediaobject>
+                  <imageobject>
+                    <imagedata fileref="rpmdrake6.png"/>
+                  </imageobject>
+                </mediaobject></entry>
+
+              <entry valign="middle">This package will be uninstalled</entry>
+            </row>
+          </tbody>
+        </tgroup>
+      </table></para>
+
+    <para>Examples in the screenshot above:</para>
+
+    <itemizedlist>
+      <listitem>
+        <para>If I uncheck digikam (the green arrow tell us it is installed), the status
+icon will go red with an up arrow and it will be uninstalled when clicking
+on <guibutton>Apply</guibutton>.</para>
+      </listitem>
+    </itemizedlist>
+
+    <itemizedlist>
+      <listitem>
+        <para>If I check qdigidoc (which is not installed, see the status), the orange
+with a down arrow status icon will appear and and it will be installed when
+clicking on <guibutton>Apply</guibutton>.</para>
+      </listitem>
+    </itemizedlist>
+  </section>
+
+  <section>
+    <title>The dependencies</title>
+
+    <screenshot>
+<mediaobject>
+        <imageobject>
+          <imagedata fileref="rpmdrake7.png"/>
+        </imageobject>
+      </mediaobject></screenshot>
+
+    <para>Some packages need other packages called dependencies in order to work. They
+are for example libraries or tools. In this case, Rpmdrake displays an
+information window allowing you to choose whether to accept the selected
+dependencies, cancel the operation or get more information (see above). It
+may also happen that various packages are able to provide the needed
+library, in which case rpmdrake displays the list of alternatives with a
+button to get more information and another button to choose which package to
+install.</para>
+  </section>
+</section>
+\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/docs/mcc-help/cs/scannerdrake.xml b/docs/mcc-help/cs/scannerdrake.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..14163aa2
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/mcc-help/cs/scannerdrake.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,259 @@
+<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?>
+<section version="5.0" xml:lang="cs" xml:id="scannerdrake"
+         xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook"
+         xmlns:xlink="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink"
+         xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML"
+         xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg"
+         xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml"
+         xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook">
+  <info>
+    <title xml:id="scannerdrake-ti1">Nastavit skener</title>
+    <subtitle>scannerdrake</subtitle>
+  </info>
+
+
+
+  <section xml:id="scannerinstallation">
+    <info>
+      <title xml:id="scannerinstallation-ti1">Instalace</title>
+    </info>
+
+    <para>This tool <footnote>
+        <para>You can start this tool from the command line, by typing
+<emphasis>scannerdrake</emphasis> as root.</para>
+      </footnote> allows you to configure a
+single scanner device or a multifunction device which includes scanning. It
+also allows you to share local devices connected to this computer with a
+remote computer or to access remote scanners.</para>
+
+    <para>When you start this tool for the first time, you may get the following
+message:</para>
+
+    <para><emphasis>"SANE packages need to be installed to use scanners</emphasis></para>
+
+    <para><emphasis>Do you want to install the SANE packages?"</emphasis></para>
+
+    <para>Choose <emphasis>Yes</emphasis> to continue. It will install
+<code>scanner-gui</code> and <code>task-scanning</code> if they are not yet
+installed.</para>
+
+    <mediaobject>
+      <imageobject>
+        <imagedata align="center"  fileref="scannerdrake.png"
+                   format="PNG" revision="1" 
+                   xml:id="scannerdrake-im1"/>
+      </imageobject>
+    </mediaobject>
+
+    <para>If your scanner is identified correctly, so if in the above screen you see
+the name of your scanner, the scanner is ready for use with, for instance,
+<emphasis>XSane</emphasis> or <emphasis>Simple Scan</emphasis>.</para>
+
+    <para>In that case, you might now want to want to configure the <emphasis>Scanner
+sharing</emphasis> option. You can read about it in the <xref
+linkend="scannersharing"/>.</para>
+
+    
+    <para>However, if your scanner hasn't been correctly identified, and checking its
+cable(s) and power switch and then pressing <emphasis>Search for new
+scanners</emphasis> doesn't help, you'll need to press <emphasis>Add a
+scanner manually</emphasis>.</para>
+
+    <para>Choose the brand of your scanner in the list you see, then its type from the
+list for that brand and click <emphasis>Ok</emphasis></para>
+
+    <mediaobject>
+      <imageobject>
+        <imagedata align="center"  fileref="scannerdrake2.png"
+                   format="PNG" revision="1" 
+                   xml:id="scannerdrake-im2"/>
+      </imageobject>
+    </mediaobject>
+
+    <note>
+      <para>If you can't find your scanner in the list, then click
+<emphasis>Cancel</emphasis></para>
+
+      <para>Please check whether your scanner is supported on the <link
+xlink:href="http://www.sane-project.org/lists/sane-mfgs-cvs.html">SANE:
+Supported Devices</link> page and ask for help in the <link
+xlink:href="http://forums.mageia.org/en/">forums</link>.</para>
+    </note>
+
+<figure  xml:id="choosescannerport">
+<info>
+      <title xml:id="choosescannerport-ti1">Choose port</title>
+    </info> <mediaobject>
+      <imageobject>
+        <imagedata align="center"  fileref="scannerdrake3.png"
+                   format="PNG" revision="1" 
+                   xml:id="scannerdrake-im3"/>
+      </imageobject>
+    </mediaobject></figure>
+
+    <para>You can leave this setting to <emphasis>Auto-detect available
+ports</emphasis> unless your scanner's interface is a parallel port. In that
+case, select <emphasis>/dev/parport0</emphasis> if you have only one.</para>
+
+    <para>After clicking <emphasis>Ok</emphasis>, in most cases you will see a screen
+similar to the one below.</para>
+<para>If you don't get that screen, then please read the <xref
+linkend="scannerextrasteps"/>.</para>
+
+    <mediaobject>
+      <imageobject>
+        <imagedata align="center"  fileref="scannerdrake4.png"
+                   format="PNG" revision="1" 
+                   xml:id="scannerdrake-im4"/>
+      </imageobject>
+    </mediaobject>
+  </section>
+
+  <section xml:id="scannersharing">
+    <info>
+      <title xml:id="scannersharing-ti2">Scannersharing</title>
+    </info>
+
+    <mediaobject>
+      <imageobject>
+        <imagedata align="center"  fileref="scannerdrake5.png"
+                   format="PNG" revision="1" 
+                   xml:id="scannerdrake-im5"/>
+      </imageobject>
+    </mediaobject>
+
+    <para>Here you can choose whether the scanners connected to this machine should be
+accessible by remote machines and by which remote machines. You can also
+decide here whether scanners on remote machines should be made available on
+this machine.</para>
+
+    <para>Scanner sharing to hosts : name or IP address of hosts can be added or
+deleted from the list of hosts allowed to access the local device(s), on
+this computer.</para>
+
+    <para>Usage of remote scanners : name or IP address of hosts can added or deleted
+from the list of hosts which give access to a remote scanner.</para>
+
+    <mediaobject>
+      <imageobject>
+        <imagedata align="center"  fileref="scannerdrake6.png"
+                   format="PNG" revision="1" 
+                   xml:id="scannerdrake-im6"/>
+      </imageobject>
+    </mediaobject>
+
+    <para>Scanner sharing to hosts: you can add host.</para>
+
+    <mediaobject>
+      <imageobject>
+        <imagedata align="center"  fileref="scannerdrake7.png"
+                   format="PNG" revision="1" 
+                   xml:id="scannerdrake-im7"/>
+      </imageobject>
+    </mediaobject>
+
+    <para>Scanner sharing to hosts: specify which host(s) to add, or allow all remote
+machines.</para>
+
+    <mediaobject>
+      <imageobject>
+        <imagedata align="center"  fileref="scannerdrake8.png"
+                   format="PNG" revision="1" 
+                   xml:id="scannerdrake-im8"/>
+      </imageobject>
+    </mediaobject>
+
+    <para>"All remote machines" are allowed to access the local scanner.</para>
+
+    <mediaobject>
+      <imageobject>
+        <imagedata align="center"  fileref="scannerdrake9.png"
+                   format="PNG" revision="1" 
+                   xml:id="scannerdrake-im9"/>
+      </imageobject>
+    </mediaobject>
+
+    <para>If the package <emphasis>saned</emphasis> is not yet installed, the tool
+offers to do it.</para>
+
+    <para>At the end, the tool will alter these files:</para>
+
+    <para><emphasis>/etc/sane.d/saned.conf</emphasis></para>
+
+    <para><emphasis>/etc/sane.d/net.conf</emphasis></para>
+
+    <para><emphasis>/etc/sane.d/dll.conf </emphasis>to add or comment the directive
+"net"</para>
+
+    <para>It will also configure <emphasis>saned</emphasis> and
+<emphasis>xinetd</emphasis> to be started on boot.</para>
+  </section>
+
+<section xml:id="scannerspecifics">
+    <info>
+      <title xml:id="scannerspecifics-ti2">Specifics</title>
+    </info>  
+
+
+    <itemizedlist>
+      <listitem>
+        <para>Hewlett-Packard</para>
+
+        <para>Most HP scanners are managed from <emphasis>HP Device Manager</emphasis>
+(hplip) which also manages printers. In this case, this tool does not allow
+you to configure it and invites you to use <emphasis>HP Device
+Manager</emphasis>.</para>
+      </listitem>
+
+      <listitem>
+        <para>Epson</para>
+
+        <para>Drivers are available from <link
+xlink:href="http://download.ebz.epson.net/dsc/search/01/search/?OSC=LX">this
+page</link>. When indicated, you must install the
+<emphasis>iscan-data</emphasis> package first, then
+<emphasis>iscan</emphasis> (in this order). It is possible that the
+<emphasis>iscan</emphasis> package will generate a warning about a conflict
+with <emphasis>sane</emphasis>. Users have reported that this warning can be
+ignored.</para>
+      </listitem>
+    </itemizedlist>
+
+</section>
+
+<section xml:id="scannerextrasteps">
+    <info>
+      <title xml:id="scannerextrasteps-ti1">Extra installation steps</title>
+    </info>  
+
+    <para>It is possible that after selecting a port for your scanner in the <xref
+linkend="choosescannerport"/> screen, you need to take one or more extra
+steps to correctly configure your scanner.</para>
+
+<itemizedlist>
+
+      <listitem>
+<para>In some cases, you're told the scanner needs its firmware to be uploaded
+each time it is started. This tool allows you to load it into the device,
+after you installed it on your system. In this screen you can install the
+firmware from a CD or a Windows installation, or install the one you
+downloaded from an Internet site of the vendor.</para><para>
+    When your device's firmware needs to be loaded, it can take a long time at
+each first usage, possibly more than one minute. So be patient.</para>
+</listitem>
+
+      <listitem>
+<para>Also, you may get a screen telling you to adjust the
+<emphasis>/etc/sane.d/"name_of_your_SANE_backend".conf file.</emphasis> </para>
+      </listitem>
+
+<listitem>
+<para>Read those or other instructions you get carefully and if you don't know
+what to do, feel free to ask for help in the <link
+xlink:href="http://forums.mageia.org/en/">forums</link>.</para>
+</listitem>
+
+</itemizedlist>
+      
+ </section>
+</section>
diff --git a/docs/mcc-help/cs/software-management.xml b/docs/mcc-help/cs/software-management.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..5d32a5c1
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/mcc-help/cs/software-management.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,39 @@
+<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?>
+<section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:xi="http://www.w3.org/2001/XInclude" xmlns:ns6="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:lang="cs"
+xml:id="software-management">
+  <info>
+    <title xml:id="software-management-ti1">Správa softwaru</title>
+  </info>
+
+  <mediaobject>
+    <imageobject>
+      <imagedata  xml:id="software-management-im1" revision="1" align="center" format="PNG"  fileref="software-management.png"/>
+    </imageobject>
+  </mediaobject>
+
+  <para>Na této obrazovce si můžete vybrat mezi několika nástroji pro správu
+softwaru. Pokud se chcete dozvědět více klikněte na některý z odkazů níže.</para>
+  <orderedlist><title>Správa softwaru</title>
+	  <listitem>
+  <para><xref linkend="rpmdrake"></xref></para>
+  </listitem>
+	  <listitem>
+  <para><xref linkend="MageiaUpdate"></xref><emphasis> = Aktualizovat váš
+systém</emphasis></para>
+  </listitem>
+	  <listitem>
+    <para><xref linkend="mgaapplet-config"></xref></para>
+    </listitem>
+	    <listitem>
+    <para><xref linkend="drakrpm-edit-media"></xref><emphasis> = Nastavení zdrojů
+software pro instalaci a aktualizaci</emphasis></para>
+    </listitem>
+    </orderedlist>
+
+    <xi:include href="rpmdrake.xml"></xi:include>
+    <xi:include href="MageiaUpdate.xml"></xi:include>
+     <xi:include href="mgaapplet-config.xml"></xi:include>
+     <xi:include href="drakrpm-edit-media.xml"></xi:include>
+
+
+</section>
diff --git a/docs/mcc-help/cs/system-config-printer.xml b/docs/mcc-help/cs/system-config-printer.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..fbae578d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/mcc-help/cs/system-config-printer.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,341 @@
+<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:lang="cs" xml:id="system-config-printer">
+  
+
+  
+
+  <info>
+    <!--  Language proof JohnR 2012/08/28 -->
+<!-- 2012-09-03 marja: made the link to Complete the installation process work (I hope) 
+ Lebarhon : added All in one devices in the chapter "Hewlett-Packard printers" 12/13-->
+<title xml:id="system-config-printer-ti1">Install and configure a printer</title>
+
+    <subtitle>system-config-printer</subtitle>
+  </info>
+
+  <mediaobject>
+    <imageobject>
+      <imagedata revision="1" align="center" xml:id="system-config-printer-im1" format="PNG" fileref="system-config-printer.png"/>
+    </imageobject>
+  </mediaobject>
+
+  <section xml:id="introduction">
+    <title xml:id="introduction-ti1">Úvod</title>
+
+    <para>Printing is managed on Mageia by a server named CUPS. It has its own <link
+ns2:title="CUPS" ns2:href="http://localhost:631">configuration
+interface</link> which is accessible via an Internet browser, but Mageia
+offers its own tool for installing printers called system-config-printer
+which is shared with other distributions such as Fedora, Mandriva, Ubuntu
+and openSUSE.</para>
+
+    <para>You should enable the non-free repository before proceeding with the
+installation, because some drivers may only be available in this way.</para>
+
+    <para>Printer installation is carried out in the <guilabel>Hardware</guilabel>
+section of the Mageia Control Centre. Select the <guilabel>Configure
+printing and scanning</guilabel> tool<footnote>
+        <para>You can start this tool from the command line, by typing
+<emphasis>system-config-printer</emphasis>. The root password will be asked
+for.</para>
+      </footnote>.</para>
+
+    <para>MCC will ask for the installation two packages:</para>
+
+    <blockquote>
+      <para>task-printing-server</para>
+
+      <para>task-printing-hp</para>
+    </blockquote>
+
+    <para>It is necessary to accept this installation to continue. Up to 230MB of
+dependencies are needed.</para>
+
+    <para>To add a printer, choose the "Add" printer button. The system will try to
+detect any printers and the ports available. The screenshot displays a
+printer connected to a parallel port. If a printer is detected, such as a
+printer on a USB port, it will be displayed on the first line.  The window
+will also attempt to configure a network printer.</para>
+  </section>
+
+  <section xml:id="automatic">
+    <title>Automatically detected printer</title>
+
+    <para>This usually refers to USB printers. The utility automatically finds the
+name of the printer and displays it. Select the printer and then click
+"Next". If there is a known driver associated for the printer, it will be
+automatically installed. If there is more than one driver or no known
+drivers, a window will ask you to select or furnish one, as explained in the
+next paragraph. Continue with <xref linkend="terminate"/></para>
+  </section>
+
+  <section xml:id="non_automatic">
+    <title>No automatically detected printer</title>
+
+    <mediaobject>
+      <imageobject>
+        <imagedata fileref="printer3.png"/>
+      </imageobject>
+    </mediaobject>
+
+    <para>When you select a port, the system loads a driver list and displays a window
+to select a driver. The choice can be made through one of the following
+options.</para>
+
+    <itemizedlist>
+      <listitem>
+        <para>Select printer from database</para>
+      </listitem>
+    </itemizedlist>
+
+    <itemizedlist>
+      <listitem>
+        <para>provide PPD file</para>
+      </listitem>
+    </itemizedlist>
+
+    <itemizedlist>
+      <listitem>
+        <para>search for a driver to download</para>
+      </listitem>
+    </itemizedlist>
+
+    <para>By selecting from the database, the window suggests a printer manufacturer
+first, and then a device and a driver associated with it. If more than one
+driver is suggested, select one which is recommended, unless you have
+encountered some problems with that one before, in this case select the one
+which know to work.</para>
+  </section>
+
+  <section xml:id="terminate">
+    <title>Complete the installation process</title>
+
+    <para>After the driver selection, a window requests some information which will
+allow the system to designate and discover the printer. The first line is
+the name under which the device will appear in applications in the list of
+available printers. The installer then suggests printing a test page. After
+this step, the printer is added and appears in the list of available
+printers.</para>
+  </section>
+
+  <section xml:id="network_printer">
+    <title>Network printer</title>
+
+    <para>Network printers are printers that are attached directly to a wired or
+wireless network, that are attached to a printserver or that are attached to
+another workstation that serves as printserver.</para>
+
+    <note>
+      <para>Often, it is better to configure the DHCP server to always associate a fixed
+IP address with the printer's MAC-address. Of course that should be the same
+as the IP address the printer of printserver is set to, if it has a fixed
+one.</para>
+    </note>
+
+    <para>The printer's Mac-address is a serial number given to the printer or
+printserver or computer it is attached to, that can be obtained from a
+configuration page printed by the printer or which may be written on a label
+on the printer or printserver. If your shared printer is attached to a
+Mageia system, you can run <emphasis><code>ifconfig</code></emphasis> on it
+as root to find the MAC-address. It is the sequence of numbers and letters
+after "HWaddr".</para>
+
+    <para>You can add your network printer by choosing the protocol it uses to talk to
+your computer over the network. If you don't know which protocol to choose,
+you can try the <guilabel>Network Printer</guilabel> - <guilabel>Find
+Network Printer</guilabel> option in the <guilabel>Devices</guilabel> menu
+and give the IP address of the printer in the box on the right, where it
+says "host".</para>
+
+    <para>If the tool recognises your printer or printserver, it will propose a
+protocol and a queue, but you can choose a more appropriate one from the
+list below it or give the correct queue name if it isn't in the list.</para>
+
+    <para>Look in the documentation that came with your printer or printserver to find
+which protocol(s) it supports and for possible specific queue names.</para>
+  </section>
+
+  <section xml:id="network_printing_protocols">
+    <title>Network printing protocols</title>
+
+    <para>One current technique is one developed by Hewlett-Packard and known as
+JetDirect. It allows access to a printer directly connected to the network
+via an Ethernet port. You must know the IP-address at which the printer is
+known on the network. This technique is also used inside some ADSL-routers
+which contain an USB port to connect the printer. In this case, the
+IP-address is that of the router. Note that the tool "Hp Device manager" can
+manage dynamically configured IP-adress, setting an URI like
+<emphasis>hp:/net/&lt;name-of-the-printer></emphasis> . In this case, fixed
+IP-adress is not required.</para>
+
+    <para>Choose the option <guilabel>AppSocket/HP JetDirect</guilabel> as the
+protocol and set the address in <guilabel>Host:</guilabel>, do not change
+the <guilabel>Port Number</guilabel>, unless you know that it needs to be
+changed. After the selection of the protocol, the selection of the driver is
+the same as above.</para>
+
+    <mediaobject>
+      <imageobject>
+        <imagedata fileref="printer5.png"/>
+      </imageobject>
+    </mediaobject>
+
+    <para>The other protocols are:</para>
+
+    <itemizedlist>
+      <listitem>
+        <para><emphasis>Internet Printing Protocol (ipp)</emphasis>: a printer which can
+be accessed on a TCP/IP network via the IPP protocol, for example a printer
+connected to a station using CUPS. This protocol may also be used also by
+some ADSL-routers.</para>
+      </listitem>
+    </itemizedlist>
+
+    <itemizedlist>
+      <listitem>
+        <para><emphasis>Internet Printing Protocol (https): </emphasis>the same as ipp,
+but using http transport and with TLS secured protocol.  The port has to be
+defined. By default, the port 631 is used.</para>
+      </listitem>
+    </itemizedlist>
+
+    <itemizedlist>
+      <listitem>
+        <para><emphasis>Internet Printing Protocol (ipps): </emphasis>the same as ipp, but
+with TLS secured protocol.</para>
+      </listitem>
+    </itemizedlist>
+
+    <itemizedlist>
+      <listitem>
+        <para><emphasis>LPD/LPR host or Printer</emphasis>: a printer which can be
+accessed on a TCP/IP network via the LPD protocol, for example a printer
+connected to a station using LPD.</para>
+      </listitem>
+    </itemizedlist>
+
+    <itemizedlist>
+      <listitem>
+        <para><emphasis>Windows printer via SAMBA</emphasis>: a printer connected to a
+station running Windows or a SMB server and shared.</para>
+      </listitem>
+    </itemizedlist>
+
+    <para>The URI can also be added directly. Here are some examples on how to form
+the URI:</para>
+
+    <itemizedlist>
+      <listitem>
+        <para>Appsocket</para>
+
+        <para><uri>socket://ip-address-or-hostname:port </uri></para>
+      </listitem>
+
+      <listitem>
+        <para>Internet Printing Protocol (IPP)</para>
+
+        <para><uri>ipp://ip-address-or-hostname:port-number/resource</uri></para>
+
+        <para><uri>http://ip-address-or-hostname:port-number/resource</uri></para>
+      </listitem>
+
+      <listitem>
+        <para>Line Printer Daemon (LPD) Protocol</para>
+
+        <para><uri>lpd://username@ip-address-or-hostname/queue</uri></para>
+      </listitem>
+    </itemizedlist>
+
+    <para>Additional information can be found in the <link
+ns2:href="http://www.cups.org/documentation.php/doc-1.5/network.html">CUPS
+documentation.</link></para>
+  </section>
+
+  <section xml:id="properties">
+    <title>Device Properties</title>
+
+    <para>You can access the properties of the device. The menu allows access to
+parameters for the CUPS server. By default a CUPS server is launched on your
+system, but you can specify a different one with the
+<guimenu>Server</guimenu> | <guimenuitem>Connect...</guimenuitem> menu,
+another window which gives access to the tuning of other specific parameters
+of the server, following <guimenu>Server</guimenu> |
+<guimenuitem>Settings.</guimenuitem></para>
+  </section>
+
+  <section>
+    <title xml:id="troubleshoot">Troubleshoot</title>
+
+    <para>You can find some information on occurring errors during printing by
+inspecting <filename>/var/log/cups/error_log</filename></para>
+
+    <para>You can also access to a tool to diagnose problems using the
+<guimenu>Help</guimenu> | <guilabel>Troubleshoot</guilabel> menu.</para>
+  </section>
+
+  <section xml:id="specificities">
+    <title>Specifics</title>
+
+    <para>It is possible that some drivers for specific printers are not available in
+Mageia or are not functional. In this case, have a look at the <link
+ns2:href="http://openprinting.org/printers/">openprinting</link> site to
+check if a driver for your device is available. If yes, check if the package
+is already present in Mageia and in this case install it manually. Then,
+redo the installation process to configure the printer. In all cases, report
+the problem in bugzilla or on the forum if you are comfortable with this
+tool and furnish the model and driver information and whether the printer
+works or not after installation. Here are some sources to find other
+up-to-date drivers or for more recent devices.</para>
+
+    <para><emphasis role="bold">Brother printers</emphasis></para>
+
+    <para><link
+ns2:href="http://welcome.solutions.brother.com/bsc/public_s/id/linux/en/download_prn.html">This
+page</link> give a list of drivers provided by Brother. Search the driver
+for your device, download the rpm(s) and install.</para>
+
+    <para>You should install Brother drivers before running the configuration utility.</para>
+
+    <para><emphasis role="bold">Hewlett-Packard printers and All in one
+devices</emphasis></para>
+
+    <para>These devices use the hplip tool. It is installed automatically after the
+detection or the selection of the printer. You can find other information
+<link
+ns2:href="http://hplipopensource.com/hplip-web/index.html">here</link>.  The
+tool "HP Device Manager" is available in the <guilabel>System</guilabel>
+menu. Also view <link
+ns2:href="http://hplipopensource.com/hplip-web/install/manual/hp_setup.html">configuration</link>
+for the management of the printer.</para>
+
+    <para>A HP All in one device must be installed as a printer and the scanner
+features will be added. Note that sometimes, the Xsane interface doesn't
+allow to scan films or slides (the lighting slid can't operate).  In this
+case, it is possible to scan, using the standalone mode, and save the
+picture on a memory card or USB stick inserted in the device.  Afterwards,
+open your favourite imaging software and load your picture from the memory
+card which is appeared in the /media folder.</para>
+
+    <para><emphasis role="bold">Samsung colour printer</emphasis></para>
+
+    <para>For specific Samsung and Xerox colour printers, <link
+ns2:href="http://foo2qpdl.rkkda.com/">this site provides drivers</link> for
+the QPDL protocol.</para>
+
+    <para><emphasis role="bold">Epson printers and scanners</emphasis></para>
+
+    <para>Drivers for Epson printers are available from <link
+ns2:href="http://download.ebz.epson.net/dsc/search/01/search/?OSC=LX">this
+search page</link>. For the scanner part, you must install the "iscan-data"
+package first, then "iscan" (in this order). A iscan-plugin package can also
+be available and is to install. Choose the <emphasis>rpm</emphasis> packages
+according to your architecture. </para>
+
+    <para> It is possible that the iscan package will generate a warning about a
+conflict with sane. Users have reported that this warning can be ignored.</para>
+
+    <para><emphasis role="bold">Canon printers</emphasis></para>
+
+    <para>For Canon printers, it may be advisable to install a tool named turboprint
+<link ns2:href="http://www.turboprint.info/">available here </link>.</para>
+  </section>
+</section>
+\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/docs/mcc-help/cs/transfugdrake.xml b/docs/mcc-help/cs/transfugdrake.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..a0db64e9
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/mcc-help/cs/transfugdrake.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,138 @@
+<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xml:id="transfugdrake" version="5.0" xml:lang="cs">
+  
+
+  
+
+  
+
+  <info>
+    <!-- Written by yurchor 2013-07-03 -->
+<!-- Tproof  -->
+<!-- -->
+<title xml:id="transfugdrake-ti1">Importovat dokumenty a nastavení z MS Windows</title>
+
+    <subtitle>transfugdrake</subtitle>
+  </info>
+
+  <mediaobject>
+    <imageobject>
+      <imagedata xml:id="transfugdrake-im1" revision="1" fileref="transfugdrake.png" align="center" format="PNG"/>
+    </imageobject>
+  </mediaobject>
+
+  <para>This tool<footnote>
+      <para>You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis
+role="bold">transfugdrake</emphasis> as root.</para>
+    </footnote> is found under the <emphasis
+role="bold">System</emphasis> tab in the Mageia Control Center labelled
+<guilabel>Import Windows(TM) documents and settings</guilabel></para>
+
+  <para>The tool allows an administrator to import the user documents and settings
+from a <trademark class="registered">Windows</trademark> 2000, <trademark
+class="registered">Windows</trademark> XP or <trademark
+class="registered">Windows</trademark> <trademark>Vista</trademark>
+installation on the same computer as the Mageia installation.</para>
+
+  <warning>
+    <para>Please note that all the changes will be applied by transfugdrake
+immediately after pressing <guibutton>Next</guibutton>.</para>
+  </warning>
+
+  <para>After starting transfugdrake you will see the first wizard page with some
+explanation about the tool and import options.</para>
+
+  <para>As soon as you read and understand the instructions, press the
+<guibutton>Next</guibutton> button. This should run a detection of
+<trademark class="registered">Windows</trademark> installation.</para>
+
+  <para>When the detection step is complete you will see a page which allows you to
+choose accounts in <trademark class="registered">Windows</trademark> and
+Mageia for the import procedure. It is possible to choose other user account
+than yours own.</para>
+
+  <mediaobject>
+    <imageobject>
+      <imagedata fileref="transfugdrake1.png"/>
+    </imageobject>
+  </mediaobject>
+
+  <note>
+    <para>Please take into account that due to migrate-assistant (the backend of
+transfugdrake) limitations <trademark class="registered">Windows</trademark>
+user account names with special symbols can be displayed incorrectly.</para>
+  </note>
+
+  <note>
+    <para>Migration may take some time depending on the size of the document folders.</para>
+  </note>
+
+  <warning>
+    <para>Some <trademark class="registered">Windows</trademark> applications
+(especially drivers) may create user accounts for different purposes. For
+example, NVidia drivers in <trademark
+class="registered">Windows</trademark>are updated using
+<emphasis>UpdatusUser</emphasis>. Please do not use such accounts for the
+import purposes.</para>
+  </warning>
+
+  <para>When you finished with the accounts selection press
+<guibutton>Next</guibutton> button. The next page is used to select a method
+to import documents:</para>
+
+  <mediaobject>
+    <imageobject>
+      <imagedata fileref="transfugdrake2.png"/>
+    </imageobject>
+  </mediaobject>
+
+  <para>Transfugdrake is designed to import <trademark
+class="registered">Windows</trademark> data from <emphasis>My
+Documents</emphasis>, <emphasis>My Music</emphasis> and <emphasis>My
+Pictures</emphasis> folders. It is possible to skip import by selecting the
+appropriate item in this window.</para>
+
+  <para>When you finished with the document import method choosing press
+<guibutton>Next</guibutton> button. The next page is used to select a method
+to import bookmarks:</para>
+
+  <mediaobject>
+    <imageobject>
+      <imagedata fileref="transfugdrake3.png"/>
+    </imageobject>
+  </mediaobject>
+
+  <para>Transfugdrake can import <emphasis>Internet Explorer</emphasis> and
+<emphasis>Mozilla Firefox</emphasis> bookmarks into the bookmarks of Mageia
+<emphasis>Mozilla Firefox</emphasis> instance.</para>
+
+  <para>Choose the preferred import option and press the <guibutton>Next</guibutton>
+button.</para>
+
+  
+
+  <!-- Does not work as expected, might be due to incompatible version of OE
+   <para>
+With transfugdrake, it is possible to import <emphasis>Outlook Express</emphasis> settings and mail archives into <emphasis>Evolution</emphasis>.</para>
+
+   <para>When you finished with the mail import method choosing press <guibutton>Next</guibutton> button. The next page is used to select a method to import mail:</para>
+-->
+<para>The next page allows you to import desktop background:</para>
+
+  <mediaobject>
+    <imageobject>
+      <imagedata fileref="transfugdrake4.png"/>
+    </imageobject>
+  </mediaobject>
+
+  <para>Choose the preferred option and press the <guibutton>Next</guibutton>
+button.</para>
+
+  <para>The last page of wizard shows some congratulation message. Just press the
+<guibutton>Finish</guibutton> button.</para>
+
+  <mediaobject>
+    <imageobject>
+      <imagedata fileref="transfugdrake5.png"/>
+    </imageobject>
+  </mediaobject>
+</section>
+\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/docs/mcc-help/cs/userdrake.xml b/docs/mcc-help/cs/userdrake.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..c9d4b2af
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/mcc-help/cs/userdrake.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,154 @@
+<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:lang="cs" xml:id="userdrake">
+  
+
+  
+
+  
+
+  
+
+  <info>
+    <!-- Written AM desmottes (lebarhon) 2012-08-27 -->
+<!-- Tproof  -->
+<!-- Preliminary lproof JohnR 2012-08-30  -->
+<!-- -->
+<title xml:id="userdrake-ti1">Uživatelé a skupiny</title>
+
+    <subtitle>userdrake</subtitle>
+  </info>
+
+  <mediaobject>
+    <imageobject>
+      <imagedata xml:id="userdrake-im1" revision="1" fileref="userdrake.png" align="center" format="PNG"/>
+    </imageobject>
+  </mediaobject>
+
+  <para>This tool<footnote>
+      <para>You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis
+role="bold">userdrake</emphasis> as root.</para>
+    </footnote> is found under the <emphasis
+role="bold">System</emphasis> tab in the Mageia Control Center labelled
+"Manage users on system"</para>
+
+  <para>The tool allows an administrator to manage the users and the groups, this
+means to add or delete a user or group and to modify user and group settings
+(ID, shell, ...)</para>
+
+  <para>When userdrake is opened, all the users existing on the system are listed in
+the <guibutton>Users</guibutton> tab, and all the groups in the
+<guibutton>Groups</guibutton> tab. Both tabs operate the same way.</para>
+
+  <para><guibutton>1 Add User</guibutton></para>
+
+  <para>This button opens a new window with all fields shown empty:</para>
+
+  <mediaobject>
+    <imageobject>
+      <imagedata fileref="userdrake1.png"/>
+    </imageobject>
+  </mediaobject>
+
+  <para>The field <emphasis role="bold">Full Name</emphasis> is intended for the
+entry of a family name and first name, but it is possible to write anything
+or nothing as well!</para>
+
+  <para><emphasis role="bold">Login</emphasis> is the only required field.</para>
+
+  <para>Setting a <emphasis role="bold">Password</emphasis> is highly
+recommended. There is a little shield on the right, if it is red, the
+password is weak, too short or is too similar to the login name. You should
+use figures, lower and upper case characters, punctuation marks, etc. The
+shield will turn orange and then green as the password strength improves.</para>
+
+  <para><emphasis role="bold">Confirm Password</emphasis> field is there to ensure
+you entered what you intended to.</para>
+
+  <para><emphasis role="bold">Login Shell </emphasis>is a drop down list that allows
+you to change the shell used by the user you are adding, the options are
+Bash, Dash and Sh.</para>
+
+  <para><emphasis role="bold">Create a private group for the user</emphasis>, if
+checked will automatically create a group with the same name and the new
+user as the only member (this may be edited).</para>
+
+  <para>The other options should be obvious. The new user is created immediately
+after you click on <guibutton>OK</guibutton>.</para>
+
+  <para><emphasis role="bold">2 Add Group</emphasis></para>
+
+  <para>You only need to enter the new group name, and if required, the specific
+group ID.</para>
+
+  <para><emphasis role="bold">3 Edit</emphasis> (a selected user)</para>
+
+  <para><guibutton>User Data</guibutton>: Allows you to modify all the data given
+for the user at creation (the ID can't be changed).</para>
+
+  <para><emphasis role="bold">Account Info</emphasis>:</para>
+
+  <mediaobject>
+    <imageobject>
+      <imagedata fileref="userdrake2.png"/>
+    </imageobject>
+  </mediaobject>
+
+  <para>The first option is for setting an expiration date for the account.
+Connection is impossible after this date. This is useful for temporary
+accounts.</para>
+
+  <para>The second option is to lock the account, connection is impossible as long
+as the account is locked.</para>
+
+  <para>It is also possible to change the icon.</para>
+
+  <para><emphasis role="bold">Password Info</emphasis>: Allows you to set an
+expiration date for the password, this forces the user to change his
+password periodically.</para>
+
+  <mediaobject>
+    <imageobject>
+      <imagedata fileref="userdrake3.png"/>
+    </imageobject>
+  </mediaobject>
+
+  <para><emphasis role="bold">Group</emphasis>: Here you can select the groups that
+the user is a member of.</para>
+
+  <note>
+    <para>If you are modifying a connected user account, modifications will not be
+effective until his/her next login.</para>
+  </note>
+
+  <para><emphasis role="bold">4 Edit</emphasis> (with a group selected)</para>
+
+  <para><emphasis role="bold">Group Data</emphasis>: Allows you to modify the group
+name.</para>
+
+  <para><emphasis role="bold">Group Users</emphasis>: Here you can select the users
+who are members of the group</para>
+
+  <para><emphasis role="bold">5 Delete</emphasis></para>
+
+  <para>Select a user or a group and click on <emphasis
+role="bold">Delete</emphasis> to remove it. For a user, a window appears to
+ask if home directory and mailbox must also be deleted. If a private group
+has been created for the user, it will be deleted as well.</para>
+
+  <warning>
+    <para>It is possible to delete a group which is not empty.</para>
+  </warning>
+
+  <para><emphasis role="bold">6 Refresh</emphasis></para>
+
+  <para>The User database can be changed outside of Userdrake. Click on this icon to
+refresh the display.</para>
+
+  <para><emphasis role="bold">7 Guest Account</emphasis></para>
+
+  <para><emphasis role="bold">guest</emphasis> is a special account. It is intended
+to give somebody temporary access to the system with total security. Login
+is xguest, there is no password, and it is impossible to make modifications
+to the system from this account. The personal directories are deleted at the
+end of the session. This account is enabled by default, to disable it, click
+in the menu on<guimenu> Actions -> Uninstall guest account</guimenu>.</para>
+</section>
+\ No newline at end of file
author	Yuri Chornoivan <yurchor@ukr.net>	2015-02-08 13:40:34 +0200
committer	Yuri Chornoivan <yurchor@ukr.net>	2015-02-08 13:40:34 +0200
commit	a85470f894217d2a0ef0db0a614929668967519f (patch)
tree	31b6fc06e3bd1d2e0c5a549402385901abf4c8b6 /docs
parent	1f84f711a4cd47bd378f824770477825975f5fbc (diff)
download	tools-a85470f894217d2a0ef0db0a614929668967519f.tar tools-a85470f894217d2a0ef0db0a614929668967519f.tar.gz tools-a85470f894217d2a0ef0db0a614929668967519f.tar.bz2 tools-a85470f894217d2a0ef0db0a614929668967519f.tar.xz tools-a85470f894217d2a0ef0db0a614929668967519f.zip